JP2019017821A5 - - Google Patents

Description

Amusement machine

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

On a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, set a favorable gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on winning the winning (for example, a probable variation state where the probability of winning the winning is high), and the advantageous gaming state continues There is something that suggests to the player whether or not the game ends, depending on the result of the effect (for example, battle effect). In this conventional type gaming machine, since the period during which the advantageous gaming state continues can be suggested by the effect, it is possible to make the player interested in the effect to be executed. Through this, the interest was improved.

JP, 2011-143197, A

However, there is a demand for further interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a player in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is capable of executing a first discrimination when a predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied, and a first discrimination means by the first discrimination means. When the result is a predetermined first determination result, there is a high probability that the privilege game execution means capable of executing a bonus game and the result of the first determination by the first determination means are likely to be the predetermined first determination result. Probability setting means that can set a state and a low probability state in which the result of the first determination by the first determining means is less likely to be the predetermined first determination result than the high probability state, and the predetermined determination A game state setting means capable of setting a first game state in which a condition is easily established and a second game state in which the predetermined determination condition is less likely to be established than the first game state, and the game state setting means for setting the first state. 1 which has an effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect for informing that one gaming state is set, and which is capable of executing the second determination when a predetermined second determination condition is satisfied The probability setting means can set the low-probability state when the result of the second determination by the second determination means is a predetermined second determination result, and the gaming machine has a determination means. When the result of the first determination is the specific first determination result which is a part of the predetermined first determination result, the bonus game is more advantageous than when the result is the other predetermined first determination result. After the end, the first determination is likely to be executed in the high probability state, and the length of the high probability state set after the end of the privilege game executed in the case of the specific first determination result. It is possible to make the difference based on the discrimination result of the second discriminating means, and the game state setting means has the first condition and the first condition in the state where the first game state is set. A second condition different from and can be set when the second game state is set, and the first condition can be set when the low probability state is set, and the second condition is , In the state where the first game state is set, it can be established based on the execution of the first determination, the effect execution means, in the state where the first condition is established, The notification effect can be executed in an effect mode corresponding to the remaining information until the second condition is satisfied, and at least the length of the period from the satisfaction of the first condition to the satisfaction of the second condition is at least It can be determined according to the timing of satisfaction of the first condition .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the first determination means capable of executing the first determination when the predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and the result of the first determination by the first determination means is a predetermined first determination means. In the case of one determination result, a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game, a high probability state in which the result of the first determination by the first determining means tends to be the predetermined first determination result, and its high A probability setting unit that can set a low probability state in which the result of the first determination by the first determination unit is less likely to be the predetermined first determination result than a probability state, and the predetermined determination condition is easily established A game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state in which the predetermined determination condition is less likely to be established than the first game state, and the first game state is set by the game state setting means. And a second execution unit capable of executing a second determination when a predetermined second determination condition is satisfied. The probability setting means can set the low probability state when the result of the second discrimination by the second discriminating means is a predetermined second discrimination result, and the gaming machine can perform the first discrimination. If the result is a specific first determination result that is a part of the predetermined first determination result, it is higher than the case where it is the other predetermined first determination result after the end of the privilege game. The first determination is facilitated to be executed in the probability state, and the length of the high probability state set after the end of the privilege game executed in the case of the specific first determination result is the second It is possible to make a difference based on the determination result of the determination means, and the game state setting means, in the state in which the first game state is set, the first condition and the second condition different from the first condition. When the condition and the condition are satisfied, the second game state can be set, the first condition can be satisfied when the low probability state is set, and the second condition is the first game. In the state where the state is set, it is possible to be satisfied based on the execution of the first determination, and the effect execution means, in the state where the first condition is satisfied, the second condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute the notification effect in an effect mode corresponding to the remaining information until, and at least the length of the period from the satisfaction of the first condition to the satisfaction of the second condition is at least that of the first condition. It can be determined according to the establishment timing .

Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a rear view of a displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a left displacement member and a right displacement member. It is a rear perspective view of a left displacement member and a right displacement member. It is a front perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st mode. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st mode. FIG. 22 is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. 21. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st mode. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 2nd mode. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 3rd mode. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of a projection unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a projection unit. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of a projection unit. It is a front view of a back base. It is a rear view of a front base and an irradiation unit. It is a rear view of a front base. FIG. 35 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of a front base and an irradiation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVI in FIG. 34. It is a front view of a projection board member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. FIG. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of the projection plate member, the gear member, and the groove forming member taken along the line XXXVIII-XXXVIII in FIG. 37. 39A is a rear view of the projection unit, and FIG. 39B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the projection unit taken along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39A. (A)-(c) is a partial expanded sectional view of a projection unit. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection board member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection board member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection board member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. 44A is a top view of the irradiation unit, and FIG. 44B is a front view of the irradiation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XLIVb in FIG. 44A is a rear view of the irradiation unit as seen from the direction of arrow XLVa in FIG. 44A, and FIG. 44B is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit taken along line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. 44B. (A) is a front view of a 1st block, (b) is a sectional view of the 1st block in line XLVIb-XLVIb of FIG. 46(a), (c) is a front view of a 2nd block. 46D is a cross-sectional view of the second block along line XLVId-XLVId in FIG. 46C. It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in a 1st position. It is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in an intermediate position. It is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in a 2nd position. It is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit in a 1st position. It is a rear view of the up-and-down displacement unit in an intermediate position. It is a rear view of the up-and-down displacement unit in a 2nd position. (A) is a rear view of a transmission gear and a connecting member in a 1st position, (b) is a rear view of a transmission gear and a connecting member in an intermediate position, (c) is a transmission in a 2nd position It is a rear view of a gear and a connecting member. (A) to (c) are rear views of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the first drive range. 54A is a schematic sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 54, FIG. 54B is a schematic sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 55, and FIG. FIG. 57 is a schematic sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line LIXc-LIXc in FIG. 56. FIG. 60A is a front view of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member in the second embodiment, and FIG. 60B is the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove taken along line LXb-LXb of FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a formation member. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection board member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection board member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection board member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. 64A is a front view of the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove forming member in the third embodiment, and FIG. 64B is the projection plate member, the gear member and the groove along the line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a formation member. 64A is a side view of the projection plate member, the gear member, and the groove forming member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 64A, and FIG. 64B is a projection plate taken along the line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. 65A. It is sectional drawing of a member, a gear member, and a groove|channel formation member, (c) is a sectional view of the projection board member in LXVc-LXVc line of FIG. 65 (a), a gear member, and a groove|channel formation member. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection board member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. (A) is a top view of the irradiation unit in 4th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of an irradiation unit. (A) is a partially enlarged schematic view of the projection unit in the vicinity of the first block, and (b) is a partially enlarged schematic view of the projection unit in the vicinity of the second block. It is a front view of the projection unit in a 5th embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of a front base. It is a rear view of a projection unit. (A) is a front view of the projection unit in a 1st state, (b) is a front view of the projection unit in a 2nd state. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit in a first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in a second state. (A) is a front view of the projection unit in a 1st state, (b) is a front view of the projection unit in a 3rd state. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit in a first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in a second state. It is a front view of the projection unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of the front base in the state where the front base and the irradiation unit were assembled. (A) to (c) are rear views of the projection unit. (A) is the figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example, and (b) is the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example. (A) And (b) is a timing chart which showed the game state and the contents of effect in the 1st control example. (A) is a timing chart showing the effect contents of the big hit medium effect 1 in the first control example, and (b) is a timing chart showing the big hit medium effect 2 in the first control example. (A) is a timing chart showing the effect contents of the big hit medium effect 3 in the first control example, and (b) is a timing chart showing another example of the effect contents of the big hit medium effect 1 in the first control example. Is. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time when the effect for addition displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example is started, and (b) is the 1st in the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the big hit continuation effect among the effects for addition displayed on the 3 symbol display device. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when the number of rounds is added among the effects for addition displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the big hit continuation effect among the addition effects displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in 1 control example. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the ending screen of the jackpot among the addition effects displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example, and (b) is the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode when the jackpot is over among the addition effects displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode during special symbol high speed change after the end of a big hit among the effects for addition displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b). It is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a big hit continuation effect among the additional effects displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the example of the 1st control. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode during special symbol high speed change after the end of a big hit among the effects for normal winning displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, (b) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a big hit is won among the normal winning effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. , It is a timing chart showing the flow of the battle mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the battle mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of pre-battle effect in the battle mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of battle reach among battle modes displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of battle reach among the battle modes displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example, and (b) is the 3rd symbol display in the 1st control example. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode when winning a battle reach among battle modes displayed on a device. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of pulling to battle reach among the battle modes displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example, and (b) is in the 1st control example It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of being defeated in the battle reach among the battle modes displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the revival effect of battle reach among the battle modes displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example. (A)-(d) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the HP display area displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example. (A) Of the suggested effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, it is a diagram showing an example of a display mode during the indication effect, and (b) is a third symbol in the first control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of countdown production among the suggestion production displayed on a display device. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the specific production displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a timing chart which showed the flow of the suggestive effect performed within 1 change among the suggestive effects displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the suggestive effect executed by a plurality of changes among the suggestive effects displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of an expectation suggestion effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of an expectation suggestion effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the flow of the expectation suggestion production which is displayed with the 3rd design indicator in the 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the main control device in the first control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the 1st random number table set to ROM of the main control unit in the 1st control example, (b) is the main control unit in the 1st control example FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a second random number table set in the ROM of FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the 1st hit classification selection table set to ROM of the main control unit in the 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the specified contents of the jackpot variation pattern table. It is the figure which was shown, (c) is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table, and (d) is the regulation content of the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the special fluctuation pattern table among the fluctuation pattern selection tables set to ROM of the main controller in the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically the definition content of the jackpot transfer setting table set to ROM of the main control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the state transition table set to ROM of the main controller in a 1st control example, (b) is a schematic representation of the regulation content of the state transition 1 table. FIG. 6C is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the state transition 2 table, and FIG. 7D is a diagram schematically showing prescribed contents of the state transition 3 table. , (E) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the state transition 4 table, and (f) is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the state transition 5 table. (A) is a figure which showed typically the regulation content of the state transition 6 table among the state transition tables set to ROM of the main controller in a 1st control example, (b) is state transition 7 It is the figure which showed the regulation contents of the table typically, (c) it is the figure which shows the regulation contents of state transition 8 table typically, (d) shows the regulation contents of state transition 9 table typically. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in the 1st control example. ((A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a voice lamp controller in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the voice lamp controller in the first control example. is there. (A) is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the special symbol reservation ball number counter in the 1st control example, (b) is the regulation content of the reservation rank selection table in the 1st control example typically It is the figure which was shown, (c), it is the figure which shows the definition contents of the big hit mid effect production selection table typically. (A) is a figure which showed typically the regulation contents of the number-of-addition selection table in the 1st control example, and (b) is a figure showing typically the regulation contents of the continuous production mode selection table. (A) is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the continuation value main selection table in the 1st control example, (b) is the figure which showed the regulation content of the 1st continuation value subselection table typically. And (c) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the second continuous value sub-selection table. (A) is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the final aspect selection table in the 1st control example, and (b) is the figure explaining the content of the production set as the final aspect. (A) is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the expectation degree selection table in the 1st control example, and (b) is the figure which showed the regulation content of the expectation degree production selection table typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation in a 1st control example. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display data table in the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the drawing list in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation number subtraction process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first control example. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning processing which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. 7 is a flowchart showing a through gate passage process executed by an MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a startup process executed by an MPU in the main control unit in the first control example. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting-up process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the example of the 1st control. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart which shows hit related command processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows the big hit medium production setting processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the process during addition production performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the addition display process performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot after-effects setting processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 1st control example. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the extension management process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart which shows continuation effect setting processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the continuing value setting process performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows the expectation production setting processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 1st control example. It is a flowchart showing a countdown effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flowchart which shows the multiple variation effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example. It is a flow chart which shows the production renewal processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 1st example of control. 6 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows V interruption processing. 6 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example, (b) is performed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows stop type command processing. It is a flow chart which shows hit related command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in the example of the 1st control. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a round executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the several command processing. 6 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flow chart showing the back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 9 is a flowchart showing error command processing according to the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the continuing value related command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows expectation production relation command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in the example of the 1st control. It is a flow chart which shows countdown production related command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in the 1st control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 8 is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process. 6 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 6 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the accessory production displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the example of production addition of the 1st control example. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the accessory production displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the example of addition of production of the 1st control example, and (b) is the production addition of the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode which resets the title displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in an example. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a sound lamp control device in a production addition example of the first control example, and (b) is a RAM of a sound lamp control device in a production addition example of the first control example. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of FIG. (A) is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the transformation pattern table in the example of production addition of the 1st control example, and (b) is the regulation of the title system selection table in the example of production addition of the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed the content typically, and (c) is the figure which showed the regulation content of the title selection table in the production addition example of the 1st control example typically. (A) is the figure which showed typically the definition content of the accessory action level selection table in the example of addition of production of the 1st control example, and (b) is the production setting group in the example of addition of production of the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically the definition content. It is a flow chart which shows change display setting processing 2 performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in the example of production addition of the 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows frame button input monitoring and production processing 2 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in a production addition example of the 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows change processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in an example of production addition of the 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows title setting processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the example of production addition of the 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a main control device in the second control example, and (b) is a prescribed content of a falling lottery table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second control example. FIG. 6( c) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated contents of the falling state transition table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second control example, and FIG. FIG. 9 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of the falling state transition 1 table in the falling state transition table set in the ROM of the main control unit in the second control example, and (e) shows the second control It is the figure which showed typically the fall state transition 2 table regulation content of the fall state transition table set to ROM of the main controller in an example. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a voice lamp control device in a second control example, and (b) shows a configuration of a RAM of the voice lamp control device in an additional effect example of the second control example. FIG. (A) is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the continuous production mode selection 3 table in a 2nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing the regulation content of the final mode selection 3 table in a 2nd control example typically. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the state discrimination|determination process performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in a ROM of a main control device in another example of the second control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the variation pattern table after falling. FIG. It is the flowchart which shows the countdown production setting processing 3 which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in the other production example. It is a flow chart which shows frame button input monitoring and production processing 3 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in other production examples. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a ROM of a main control device in the third control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the main control device in the third control example. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the 1st hit classification selection table set to ROM of the main control unit in the 3rd control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the variation pattern selection table set to ROM of the main controller in a 3rd control example, (b) is the variation pattern selection table in a 3rd control example FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of a jackpot (probability variation) variation pattern table, and (c) is a first out-of-range (probability variation) variation pattern of the variation pattern selection table in the third control example. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the table, and (d) showed typically the regulation content of the 2nd deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table among the variation pattern selection tables in the 3rd control example. It is a figure and (e) is a figure showing typically the regulation contents of the special (probability change) change pattern table among the change pattern selection tables in the 3rd control example. (A) is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the change scenario setting table set to ROM of the main controller in a 3rd control example, (b)-(d) is a 3rd control example. It is the figure which each showed the regulation contents of variation scenarios 1-3 prescribed in the variation scenario table, respectively. (A)-(d) is the figure which showed typically each regulation content of the variation scenarios 4-7 prescribed in the variation scenario table in a 3rd control example. (A)-(d) is the figure which showed typically each regulation content of the variation scenarios 8-11 prescribed in the variation scenario table in a 3rd control example. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example, and (b) is a block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the 1st continuation value main selection table set to ROM of the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is the figure which showed typically the definition content of the 2nd continuation value main selection table set to ROM of the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the 3rd continuation value main selection table set to ROM of the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the continuous production mode selection 4 table set to ROM of the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is the block diagram which showed typically the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 3rd control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation number subtraction process 4 executed by an MPU in the main control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the winning information command process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third control example. It is a flow chart which shows continuation effect setting processing 4 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous value setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the 3rd control example. 11 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 4 executed by an MPU in the display control device in the third control example. It is a flowchart which shows the continuing value related command process 4 performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in the 3rd control example. It is a flow chart which shows the final mode command processing performed by MPU in the display control device in the 3rd control example. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in another control example of a 3rd control example, (b) is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in another control example of a 3rd control example. Is. (A) is a figure which showed typically the regulation content of the 1st random number table set to ROM of the main control unit in another control example of the 3rd control example, and (b) is the 3rd control example. FIG. 6 is a diagram schematically showing the prescribed contents of a small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in another example of control. (A) is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the variation scenario A1 prescribed|regulated in the variation scenario setting table set to ROM of the main controller in another control example of a 3rd control example, (b) 10] FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the definition content of the post-small hit variation scenario defined in the variation scenario setting table set in the ROM of the main controller in another control example of the third control example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production in another example of the suggestive production explained in the 1st control example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production in another example of the suggestive production explained in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the countdown production|generation setting process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in another example of the suggestion production described in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and effect process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in another example of the suggestion effect demonstrated in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the 2nd precursor effect setting processing which is executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in another example of the suggestion effect which is explained in the 1st control example. 9 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process 6 in the additional description of the first control example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production in another example of the expectation suggestion production which was explained in the 1st control example. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed typically the display screen in another example of the expectation suggestion production which was demonstrated in the 1st control example. (A) And (b) is the figure which showed typically the display screen in another example of the expectation suggestion production which was demonstrated in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the countdown production|generation setting process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in another example of the expectation suggestion production demonstrated in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / production process 7 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in another example of the expectation suggestion production explained in the first control example.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 59, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 1 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 1 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 has an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 2 having substantially the same outer shape as that of the outer frame 2. And an inner frame 4 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 4, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 18 serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 4 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

On the inner frame 4, a game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (gaming ball) flows down on the front surface of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In addition, in the inner frame 4, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower plate unit 15, front and rear doors are provided with metal hinges 19 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 serves as an opening/closing axis. 5 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front door 5 is assembled with a decorative resin part, an electric part, or the like, and a window portion 5c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 8 is arranged on the back surface side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16.

On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and its upper surface opened, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door 5 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 5c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 1, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when a jackpot or a reach production is performed, each illumination portion 29 to 33 is turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front door 5 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right-side illumination portion 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized, and a pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. The certificate or the like attached to (2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, in the pachinko machine 1, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

A ball rental operating unit 40 is disposed below the window 5c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in the state where bills, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on the information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not needed in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central part of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided.

Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is built in. When the player turns the operation handle 51 clockwise, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the turning operation amount. The ball is fired with the strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with the jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box”) placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball, a windmill, rails 76, 77, and a general prize. The mouth 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side of. The base plate 60 is made of wood made by laminating thin plate materials, and is formed so that the player cannot visually see various structures arranged from the front side to the back side of the base plate 60. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided on the game board 13. It is fixed by tapping screws from the front side.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 77 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 77, a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rails 76 formed in 1 are planted. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and divided by the two rails 76 and 77 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (the winning opening and the like are arranged and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 76 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center.

The first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs, which are light emitting means, and a 7-segment display is disposed on the lower left side in the front view (lower left side in FIG. 2) of the game area. The first symbol display device 37A, 37B is a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, if the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while if the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by the LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 1 is in positive change, shortening time, or in normal operation by a lighting state, or by indicating whether it is changing or not in a lighting state. , The stop symbol indicates whether it is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the ordinary jackpot or a symbol that is out of sync with the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the 7-segment display device gives a big hit round. Display numbers and errors. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors may suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when a prize is received in either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also makes a determination of the big hit type. As the types of jackpots determined here, 15R certainty variation jackpots, 4R certainty variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after the 15 rounds jackpot, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum round number of 4 rounds. It is a probability change jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low-probability state after the jackpot with a maximum round number of 15 rounds and becomes a shortened state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

Also, the "high probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability increases after the jackpot as an added value, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, a game that easily transitions to a special game state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of hitting a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and the ball easily wins the second winning opening 140. The "low probability state" refers to a state when the probability of big jackpot is not in progress, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that during the probability variation. In addition, the time saving state (time saving time) in the “low probability state” is a state where the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains the same, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to the second winning opening 140. It is a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 is in the normal state, which is a state of the game which is neither probable change nor short time (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol is improved).

During the probability change or shortening of time, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, but also the time for which the first electric auditors product 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is opened is changed, which is longer than in the normal state. Time is set. When the first electric auditors product 140a is in the opened state (opened state), as compared with the case where the first electric auditors product 140a is in the closed state (closed state), to the second winning hole 140 The ball is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, during the probability change or shortening of time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or shortening of time, the opening time of the first electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit Therefore, the number of times the first electric accessory 140a is opened may be changed to be larger than that during normal operation. Further, during the probability change or shortening of time, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the first electric auditors product 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is opened and the first electric auditors product per hit. At least one of the number of times 140a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or during shortening of time, the time period during which the first electric auditors product 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is opened, or the first electric auditors product 140a and the second electric auditors product 82 are opened per hit. Instead of the number of times to do, only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be higher than in the normal state.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by the winning (starting winning) of either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140, while being synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display of symbols, and an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by passage of a ball of the first through gate 66. And a second symbol display device (not shown) configured with.

Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, upper, middle and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like this. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first A decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device, every time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66, the symbol "○" and the symbol "X" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternated for a predetermined time. The variable display to be turned on is performed. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. Moreover, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped with a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"), the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is It is configured to be in an operating state (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than usual. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the first electric auditors product 140a of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the shortened working hours.

In addition, during the probability change or the time saving, the second winning a prize hole may be provided during the probability change or the time saving by other methods such as increasing the winning probability and increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the first electric auditors product 140a per hit. When it is in a state where the ball is easy to win to 140 and the third winning opening, the time required for variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than the normal during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the first electric accessory 140a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The first through gate 66 is attached to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured so that a part of the balls flowing down the game board can pass through, out of the balls emitted to the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 66 is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and a second symbol holding lamp (not shown). ) Is also illuminated. Four second design holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are symmetrically arranged below the third design display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 66 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). .. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the mounting positions of the through gates are not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 through which a ball can win is arranged. When a ball wins the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. (Refer to FIG. 4) A big hit lottery is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 140 through which a ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 140, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 (because of the turning on of the second winning opening switch). Big hit lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won in the second winning opening 140 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the first prize hole 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is prized in the second prize hole 140, for example, a ball to the first prize hole 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out in the case of winning the prize may be set to 3, and the number of prize balls to be paid out in the case of winning the ball to the second winning port 140 may be set to 5.

A first electric accessory 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. The first electric auditors product 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the first electric auditors product 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that it is difficult for a ball to enter the second winning opening 140. There is. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol, which is performed by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 66, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device, the first electric auditors product 140a is It becomes an open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win the second winning opening 140.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal state during the probability change and the shortening of the time period, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so that in the variable display of the second symbol, “○” is displayed. Is easily displayed, and the number of times the first electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for which the first electric accessory 140a is opened is also longer than that during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change or shortening of time, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning port 140, as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins the second winning opening 140. However, when the jackpot is a big jackpot, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as a jackpot type is higher when the ball is won at the second winning port 140 than when the ball is won at the first winning port 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the first electric accessory 140a as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball is always ready for winning.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric winning object associated with the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left hitting"), and a lot of chances of the big hit lottery are obtained by winning the prize in the first winning a prize port 64, which is a big hit. It is advantageous for the player to aim for that.

On the other hand, during a sudden change or shortening of time, by passing a ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric auditors product 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning port 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is fired toward the second winning port 140 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right hit”), and the first through gate 66 is passed. It is advantageous for the player to open the first electric auditors product 140a and aim for a 15R certainty variation jackpot by winning the second winning hole 140.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment shoots a ball at the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether it is in probability change, in time saving, or in normal operation). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can be changed in how to hit the ball, and the game can be enjoyed.

A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally elongated rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of one of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is a big hit, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed. While turning on the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B so as to be a symbol, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening/closing on the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. It has and. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower side of the front surface to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normally closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, During the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times in a special game state. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64, for example, It may be on the left side of the variable display unit 80.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. The balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. It The first outlet 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

In the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclines toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer when the power is cut off (including the occurrence of a power failure; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power-on by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening/closing driving forward and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input/output port 205. To send.

The input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including the slide position detecting sensor S and the rotational position detecting sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. .. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 in which a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data are stored, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225. The other device 228 includes each drive motor 481, 491, 661, 880.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) is used to notify the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the contents of the effect at that time. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image according to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, such as a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply unit 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 V supplied from the outside, and a voltage of 12 V for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 59. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200.

Note that in FIG. 7, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R and the protruding member 485 of the displacement unit 400 and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are displaced to the retracted position, respectively, but in FIG. The left displacing member 420L, the right displacing member 420R, the protruding member 485, and the displacing member 850 of the vertical displacing unit 800 of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 300 formed in a box shape, and the displacement unit 400, the projection unit 600, and the vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively provided in the internal space of the rear case 300. Accommodated in order.

The rear case 300 includes a bottom wall portion 301 that is substantially rectangular in a front view, and an outer wall portion 302 that is erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion 301 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. A rectangular opening 301a in a front view is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 301, and the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back surface of the bottom wall portion 301 is visually recognized through the opening 301a. Made possible.

The displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 having a frame shape in a front view, which is disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, a left displacement member 420L, a right displacement member 420R, which are displaceably disposed on the base member 410. With the protrusion member 485, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protrusion member 485 are retracted to the rear side of the projection unit 600, and the opening 301a of the rear case 300 (that is, the third symbol display device). 81) and the projecting position projecting to the front side can be displaced (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the displacement unit 400 is provided with two drive means (first drive motor 481 and second drive motor 491) for driving the displacement members (left displacement member 420L, right displacement member 420R and protruding member 485). By selecting the driving means to be driven, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be made different (a plurality of types of displacement modes are formed). Details of this structure will be described later.

The projection unit 600 includes a base member 610 arranged in front of the displacement unit 400 and having an annular shape in a front view, a disc-shaped projection plate member 620 arranged on the inner peripheral side of the base member 610, A plurality of LEDs 651 that allow light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620 are provided. The projection plate member 620 is made of a light transmissive material, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is visible to the player, and when the light is incident from the LED 651, the incident light is changed into a pattern or a pattern. The projection plate member 620 is made to emit light from the front in the form of a pattern. That is, a pattern or a pattern can be made to stand out (display) on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81.

In this case, the projection unit 600 employs a structure that enhances the efficiency of incidence of the light emitted from the LED 651 on the projection plate member 620, and strengthens the light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 (patterns or patterns). Can be clearly seen). Further, a structure is adopted that enhances workability when assembling the plurality of LEDs 651 (irradiation unit 650) to the base member 610. Details of these structures will be described later.

The up-and-down displacement unit 800 includes a front base 820 and a back base 830 arranged in an upper portion of the base member 610 of the projection unit 600, and a displacement member 850 whose one end is rotatably supported by both base members 820 and 830. It is possible to displace the other end side of the displacement member 850 between the retracted position above the opening 301a (that is, the third symbol display device 81) of the rear case 300 and the bulged position protruding to the front side. Yes (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

In this case, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes the biasing spring SP that biases the displacement member 850, and the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elasticity of the biasing spring SP are provided at a predetermined position between the retracted position and the extended position. By balancing the recovery force, the displacement member 850 is caused to perform reciprocal displacement (approximate single vibration) about the balance position (predetermined position) by the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP. The structure is adopted. Details of this structure will be described later.

Next, the displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 28. 9 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400.

The displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the rear case 300, and displacement members (a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member) that are displaceably disposed on the base member 410. The member 420R) and a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) driving means (lower driving mechanism 480 and upper driving mechanism 490) for applying a driving force to the displacement member are mainly provided, and as described above, the lower driving mechanism is provided. When displacing the displacement member by driving the mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481), when displacing the displacement member by driving the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), or by the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive mechanism). When the displacement member is displaced by driving both the motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), the displacement member can be displaced in different modes. Hereinafter, the details of the structure will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 18.

First, the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, and FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the displacement unit 400 includes a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420R that are formed as displacement members that produce effects by displacement, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R include The left driven member 430L and the right driven member 430R, the carriage member 440, and the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R are connected.

The left displacement member 420L is a long member arranged in a vertical posture, and has a connecting shaft 421 protruding from the back surface, a connecting hole 422 formed at the upper end, and a slide member formed at the lower end. And a moving groove 423. The connecting shaft 421 is a shaft having a circular cross section, and the connecting hole 431 of the left driven member 430L is rotatably supported. That is, the upper end of the left driven member 430L is rotatably connected to the back side of the left displacement member 420L.

The connecting shaft 421 is set to have such a length that a tip thereof projects from the rear surface of the left driven member 430L, and the protruding tip of the connecting shaft 421 has a driving groove 494c (in the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490). 17 and FIG. 18) so as to be slidably inserted. That is, when the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven (rotated), the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c acts on the connecting shaft 421 and the left displacement member 420L is displaced.

The connection hole 422 is a hole having a circular cross section, and one of the two connection shafts 441 of the carriage member 440 described later is rotatably inserted therein. That is, the left displacement member 420L is connected in a state in which a relative posture change (rotation about the axis of the connection hole 422 as a rotation center) with respect to the carriage member 440L is allowed.

The sliding groove 423 is a groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the left displacement member 420L, and a drive pin 488b (see FIG. 15) of a lower left rack 488L described later is rotatably and slidably inserted therein. .. Therefore, when only the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven with the lower left rack 488L stopped, or vice versa, the posture of the left displacement member 420L with respect to the base member 410 is changed (rotated). Can be formed.

The left driven member 430L is a member driven by the displacement of the left displacement member 420L by being installed between the base member 410 and the left displacement member 420L, and a connection hole 431 formed at one end (upper end) thereof. And a sliding pin 432 protruding from the back surface.

The connecting hole 431 is a hole having a circular cross section, and as described above, the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is rotatably inserted. The sliding pin 432 is a pin (rod-shaped body) having a circular cross section, and is rotatably and slidably inserted into a sliding groove 410 a formed on the side of the base member 410. Therefore, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the left driven member 430L can be driven while changing the relative posture with respect to the left displacement member 420L.

The trolley member 440 rolls on a rolling surface that extends along the left-right direction (width direction) in the upper portion (the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18) of the base member 410. It is a member that includes two connecting shafts 441 arranged in parallel, and four rolling wheels 442 that are rotatably supported at both ends of each connecting shaft 441. Therefore, the upper end of the left displacement member 420L is displaced along the left-right direction (width direction) via the trolley member 440 as each rolling wheel 442 of the trolley member 440 rolls on the rolling surface. ..

The rolling surface of the base member 410 is formed as a substantially horizontal flat surface facing the upper side in the vertical direction, and the rolling wheels 442 of the bogie member 440 are mounted on the rolling surface. That is, the left displacement member 420 is hung from the rolling surface of the base member 410 via the carriage member 440 and supported in a state of being suspended.

The upper left rack 450L slides on a guide portion extending in the left-right direction (width direction) on the upper side portion of the base member 410 (the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front surface portion 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18). This is a long plate-shaped member, and two connecting holes 451 through which the two connecting shafts 441 of the carriage member 440 are rotatably inserted, respectively, and are carved along the longitudinal direction on the back surface of the upper left rack 450L. And a rack gear 452.

Here, the right displacing member 420R and the left displacing member 420L, the right driven member 430R and the left driven member 430L, and the upper right rack 450R are formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the upper left rack 450L. Since they have substantially the same configuration, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

However, a rack gear 452 is formed on the front surface of the upper right rack 450R. Further, in the upper right rack 450R, a portion where the connecting hole 451 is formed is offset to the front side, and the upper left rack 450L is disposed at a position different from the front-rear direction. Therefore, the rack gear 452 of the upper left rack 450L and the rack gear 452 of the upper right rack 450R are arranged to face each other with a predetermined gap. In this case, a pinion gear 459 rotatably supported by the base member 410 is meshed with both rack gears 452.

Therefore, with the displacement of the left displacement member 420L, the upper left rack 450L is displaced (slipped) in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 19) along the guide portion (not shown) of the base member 410. The displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

In the present embodiment, since the number of pinion gears 459 provided between the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R is an odd number (that is, one), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are disposed. The displacement directions can be opposite directions (directions close to each other or away from each other). However, the number of pinion gears 459 provided may be an even number, and the displacement directions of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R may be the same direction.

Next, the lower drive mechanism 480 of the plurality of drive means (the lower drive mechanism 480 and the upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 16.

13 and 15 are front perspective views of the displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 14 and 16 are rear perspective views of the displacement unit 400. Note that FIGS. 13 and 14 show a state in which the back cover 412 is attached, and FIGS. 15 and 16 show a state in which the back cover 412 is removed. Further, in FIGS. 13 to 16, the illustration of the raised cover 413 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, the lower drive mechanism 480 includes a first drive motor 481, a pinion gear 482 attached to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481, and a drive in which the pinion gear 482 is meshed. A gear 483, a drive arm 484 forming a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 483, a projecting member 485 driven by the drive arm 484, a rack gear 486 arranged on the back surface of the projecting member 485, and a rack gear 486 thereof. Mainly includes a gear train (gears 487a to 487e) with which the leading gear 487a is meshed, and a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488R that are meshed with the trailing gear 487e of the gear train.

The first drive motor 481 is attached to the front surface of the left front cover 411L, and the pinion gear 482 is attached (fixed) to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481 protruding from the rear surface of the left front cover 411L. It The drive gear 483 is rotatably supported on the back surface of the left front cover 411L, and the drive arm 484 is rotatably supported on the front surface of the base member 410.

The drive gear 483 is provided with an eccentric pin 483a which is positioned eccentrically from the center of rotation thereof and which is provided so as to project from the rear surface. The drive arm 484 includes a shaft support hole 484a into which the support shaft of the base member 410 is rotatably inserted, a linear slide groove 484b into which the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483 is slidably inserted, and those shafts. The driving pin 484c is provided so as to project from the front surface at the end opposite to the side where the support hole 484a and the sliding groove 484b are formed.

Therefore, when the drive force of the first drive motor 481 causes the drive gear 483 to rotate in the forward direction or the reverse direction via the pinion gear 482, the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483 moves to the sliding groove 484b of the drive arm 484. When one or the other inner wall surface is actuated, the drive arm 484 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction about the shaft support hole 484a, and the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is moved up or down.

The protruding member 485 includes a linear slide groove 485a into which the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is slidably inserted, and is disposed in front of the base member 410 via the slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is a telescopic linear guide mechanism, and is arranged in a vertical posture with its telescopic direction along the vertical direction. The slide rail SL is a base end rail provided on the front surface of the base member 410, a tip rail provided on the back surface of the protruding member 485, and a base rail provided between the base rail and the tip rail. The end rail and the tip rail are provided with an intermediate rail that allows relative displacement in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, when the drive arm 484 is rotated and the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the protrusion member 485 is pushed up or pushed down by the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484, the slide rail SL is expanded and contracted, and the protrusion member 485 becomes the base. It is vertically moved up and down with respect to the member 410.

The rack gear 486 is engraved along the ascending/descending direction of the protruding member 485, and the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) has the front gear 487a meshed with the rack gear 486 and the front and right front surfaces of the base member 410. It is rotatably supported between the rear surface of the cover 411R and the rear surface. Therefore, as the protruding member 485 is moved up and down, the linear motion of the rack gear 486 can be used to rotate the gear train (gears 487a to 487e).

The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are long plate-shaped members, and a rack gear 488a formed on the side surface along the longitudinal direction thereof, and a drive pin 488b projecting from the front at the end in the longitudinal direction. And respectively. The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are vertically different in position, and in the state where the rack gears 488a are opposed to each other, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are arranged in the left-right direction (width direction , The horizontal direction of FIG. 19) so as to be slidable.

The gear 487e at the end of the gear train is coaxially fixed to the adjacent gear 487d and protrudes to the back side through an opening 410b formed in the base member 410, thereby lower left rack 488L and lower right rack 488L. The rack gears 488a of the rack 488R are engaged with each other. Therefore, as described above, when the gear train (the gears 487a to 487e) is rotated as the protrusion member 485 is moved up and down, the rotation of the tail gear 487a causes the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R to move to each other. It is possible to perform linear movement in the opposite directions (directions in which they are close to each other or directions in which they are separated from each other).

The drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are protruded to the front side through the linear insertion grooves 410c formed in the base member 410, and as described above, the left displacement member 420L. And the slide groove 423 of the right displacement member 420R is rotatably and slidably inserted. Therefore, by linearly moving the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R, the lower end sides (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

The extending direction of the insertion groove 410c is formed substantially parallel to the rolling surface on which the rolling wheels 442 of the carriage member 440 roll. That is, the linear movement directions of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are substantially parallel to the linear movement directions of the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R described later.

Next, the upper drive mechanism 490 of the plurality of drive means (the lower drive mechanism 480 and the upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18.

17 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 18 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit 400. 17 and 18, the pinion gear 459 and the upper right rack 450R are illustrated between the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g so as to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the upper drive mechanism 490 drives the second drive motor 491, the pinion gear 492 attached to the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491, and the pinion gear 492 in mesh with each other. A gear 493 and a drive arm 494 that forms a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 493 are mainly provided.

The base member 410 has an upper portion (upper side portion formed in a substantially frame shape when viewed from the front) formed as a divided structure in which an upper back surface portion 410e, an upper middle portion 410f, and a front surface portion 410g are sequentially stacked on the front surface side. To be done.

The second drive motor 491 is attached to the front surface of the upper protruding portion of the upper intermediate portion 410f, and the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491 protruding from the rear surface of the protruding portion has a pinion gear. 492 is attached (fixed). The drive gear 493 and the drive arm 494 are rotatably supported on the back surface of the upper middle portion 410f.

The drive gear 493 is provided with an eccentric pin 493a that is located eccentrically from the center of rotation thereof and that is provided so as to project from the back surface. The drive arm 494 has a shaft support hole 494a through which the support shaft of the upper middle portion 410f is rotatably inserted, and a linear slide groove 494b through which the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493 is slidably inserted. A linear drive groove 494c is provided at an end opposite to the side where the shaft support hole 494a and the sliding groove 494b are formed.

Therefore, when the drive force of the second drive motor 491 causes the drive gear 493 to rotate in the forward direction or the reverse direction via the pinion gear 492, the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493 causes the sliding groove 494b of the drive arm 494 to move. When one or the other inner wall surface is actuated, the drive arm 494 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction about the shaft support hole 494a as the center of rotation, and the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is laterally displaced.

As described above, the tip of the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is slidably inserted into the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494. Therefore, the drive arm 494 is driven (rotated about the shaft support hole 494a), and the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c which is displaced left and right is caused to act on the connecting shaft 421, so that the carriage member 440 (rolling wheel 442) is covered. By rolling along the rolling surface, the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L can be laterally displaced.

In this case, when the left displacement member 420L is laterally displaced and the carriage member 440 (rolling wheel 442) rolls on the rolling surface, the upper left rack 450L serves as the guide portion of the base member 410 as described above. 19 is displaced (sliding) in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 19) along the same, and the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the right displacement member is moved. The 420R can be displaced. The rolling surfaces on which the rolling wheels 442 of the carriage member 440 roll are formed in the upper middle portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g.

Next, the operation of the displacement unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 28.

First, both the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are driven to move the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485). The first mode of displacement will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 24.

19, 21 and 23 are front views of the displacement unit 400 in the first mode, and FIGS. 20, 22 and 24 are the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIGS. 19, 21 and 23. It is a rear view.

19 and 20 correspond to a state in which the left displacing member 420L, the right displacing member 420R, and the protruding member 485 are arranged in the retracted position, and FIGS. 23 and 24 show the left displacing member 420L and the right displacing member 420R. And the projecting member 485 corresponds to the state in which the projecting member 485 is arranged at the projecting position in the first aspect.

As shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, in the state where the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the retracted position, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the outermost positions (positions most apart from each other in the left-right direction), and The protruding member 485 is arranged at the bottom.

When the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are respectively driven from this state, the states shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 are passed, and then the states shown in FIGS. 23 and 24 are shown. The left displacing member 420L and the right displacing member 420R are displaced in the left-right direction (width direction) in a direction in which they are close to each other, and the protruding member 485 is raised up to the state (extended position in the first mode). In the projecting position in the first mode, the left displacing member 420L, the right displacing member 420R, and the protruding member 485 are formed in a united state (a state in which the three side surfaces are in close contact with each other).

More specifically, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from the state of FIG. 19, the drive arm 484 is rotated, and the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is slid into the sliding groove 485a of the protruding member 485. By pushing up the inner wall surface of the, the protruding member 485 is raised (see FIGS. 13 and 14).

When the protruding member 485 is raised, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are displaced (linear motion) via the rack gear 486, the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) and the rack gear 488a (FIG. 15 and FIG. 16), and the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R act on the inner wall surfaces of the sliding grooves 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, so that the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420L are displaced. The lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the member 420R is displaced (linearly moved) along the insertion groove 410c of the base member 410 in the direction in which they approach each other.

On the other hand, when the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state of FIG. 19, the drive arm 494 is rotated, and the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 has the connecting shaft of the left displacement member 420L. 421. As a result, the carriage member 440 rolls on the rolling surface, and the upper end side (the carriage member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linear motion) in the direction approaching the right displacement member 420R (FIG. 17 and FIG. 17). 18).

Further, when the upper end side (the truck member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the right displacement member 420R moves. The upper end side (carriage member 440) is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the left displacement member 420L (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

In the present embodiment, the displacement amount of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 20) is set such that the displacement amount on the lower end side is smaller than the displacement amount on the upper end side ( That is, the movable range of the drive pin 488b (extended length of the insertion groove 410c) is made shorter than the movable range of the carriage member 440 (extended length of the rolling surface).

In this case, the lower end side and the upper end side of the left displacing member 420L and the right displacing member 420R start displacing from the retracted position (see FIG. 19 and FIG. 20) substantially at the same time, and the bulging position in the first aspect ( The lower drive mechanism 480 and the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven so as to arrive at substantially the same time (see FIGS. 23 and 24). That is, the displacement speed in the left-right direction on the upper end side (carriage member 440) is made faster than on the lower end side (drive pin 488b).

As a result, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced in the left-right direction while rotating in that posture, instead of being displaced in parallel in the left-right direction without rotating while maintaining the vertical posture. That is, such displacement while rotating the posture is not possible with the configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove by the driving force of the one drive unit, and as in the present embodiment, It was possible for the first time to utilize the driving means of.

Further, when the displacement speed in the left-right direction on the upper end side (the truck member 440) is different from that on the lower end side (the drive pin 488b), the distance between the drive pin 488b and the truck member 440 is changed. Since the moving groove 423 has an elongated hole shape extending vertically with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b, it is possible to absorb a change in the distance between the two. That is, since it is sufficient to form the sliding groove 423 and the drive pin 488b so as to be rotatable and slidable without providing a complicated mechanism, it is possible to reduce the product cost and to improve the reliability and durability of the operation. be able to.

21 and 22 when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven in the opposite directions from the states shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, respectively. After passing through the state shown, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the left-right direction (width direction) away from each other and the protruding member 485 until the state (retracted position) shown in FIGS. 19 and 20. Is lowered.

Then, only the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is driven (that is, the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is kept in the non-driving state), and the displacement member (left displacement member 420L, A second mode of displacing the right displacement member 420R and the protrusion member 485) will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. Note that, in the description of the second mode, FIGS. 19 and 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

25 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 according to the second aspect, and FIG. 26 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIG. 25. 25 and 26 correspond to the state where the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485 are arranged at the projecting position in the second aspect.

Here, in the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (the state in which the upper drive mechanism 490 is disposed in the retracted position), the left displacement member 420L of the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 rotates on its upper end side (the axial center of the coupling hole 422). It is placed in a posture that allows it to rotate about its center. That is, the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is allowed to slide along the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494.

Therefore, when only the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from this state (the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20), the drive pin of the drive arm 484 shown in FIGS. By pushing up the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the protrusion member 485 by the 484c, the protrusion member 485 is raised, and the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are moved to the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member. By acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of 420R, the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacing member 420L and the right displacing member 420R is displaced (linear motion) in a direction in which they are close to each other. That is, in the second aspect, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated with the upper end side (the axis of the connecting hole 422) as the center of rotation.

Then, only the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is driven (that is, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is kept in the non-driving state), and the displacement member (left displacement member 420L and A third mode of displacing the right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. Note that, in the description of the third aspect, FIGS. 19 and 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 27 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the third aspect, and FIG. 28 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIG. 27. 27 and 28 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the extended position in the third aspect.

Here, the sliding grooves 423 of the left displacing member 420L and the right displacing member 420R are in the shape of an elongated hole extending vertically with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b. It is allowed that the member 420R is lifted upward.

Therefore, when only the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (the state in which the drive arm is arranged in the retracted position), as shown in FIGS. The inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of 494 is acted on the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L, and the upper end side (the trolley member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linear motion) in the direction approaching the right displacement member 420R. In addition, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the upper end side (the trolley member 440) of the right displacing member 420R is displaced toward the left displacing member 420L. (Linear movement).

That is, in the third aspect, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated with the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) as the center of rotation. Further, in the third aspect, it is possible to displace only the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, and maintain the protruding member 485 in a stopped state.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the guide member (for example, a guide groove) is extended in the base member 410, and the displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable (guided) along the guide member, so that the displacement The displacement mode of the member (the locus when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one type. Therefore, the effect produced by the displacement of the displacing member becomes one pattern, and it is difficult to perform the effect that the player's surprise. Even if the driving force (driving speed) of the driving means (for example, the driving motor) is changed to be strong or weak, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases or decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) remains constant. Therefore, it is difficult to perform an effect that makes the player's surprise.

On the other hand, according to the displacement unit 400 of the present embodiment, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are provided, and the drive state thereof is selected (changed). As a result, the displacement member (the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485) can be displaced in three types of modes (first mode, second mode, and third mode). That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member is limited to one, the effect is not in one pattern, and the displacement member can be displaced in at least three types of displacement modes, so that the displacement mode is switched. By doing so, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player.

In particular, in the first mode (see FIGS. 19 to 24), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be caused to undergo displacement dominated by parallel movement (linear motion), while the second mode is changed. In the third mode (see FIGS. 19 and 25 to 28), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced only by rotation (rotational motion), and if the displacement motion forms are different. Can be made. As a result, the change of the displacement mode of the displacement member can be increased, and the player's surprise can be facilitated.

In this case, in the conventional product, there is a conventional product that changes the displacement mode by changing only the rotation direction while keeping the rotation center constant, but the second mode and the third mode in the present embodiment are different from each other. The same rotation center does not mean that only the rotation direction is different, but the rotation directions are different and the rotation centers are also different (in the second mode, the upper end side is the rotation center, and the third mode is the same). Then, the lower end side is used as the center of rotation) and the displacement modes of the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) can be greatly changed, and the player's surprise can be facilitated.

Further, in the first aspect, when the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) are displaced in a combination of rotation and parallel movement (linear movement), the rotation direction is the third aspect. Is the same as the direction of rotation in. Therefore, in the initial stage of the first aspect and the third aspect (see, for example, FIG. 21 and FIG. 27), it is possible for the player to visually recognize that the displacement members are displaced in the direction in which they approach each other, and the distinction between them can be made. Can be difficult to attach. On the other hand, in the first mode, the protrusion member 485 is lifted with the displacement of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R in the approaching direction, whereas in the third mode, the protrusion member 485 is stopped. Can be maintained in a state. That is, when the protrusion member 485 is raised at the initial stage when the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced toward each other, the displacement members are displaced to the extended position in the first aspect. The player can be expected to do so.

In the displacement unit 400, the carriage member 440, the lower left rack 488L, and the lower right rack 488R are arranged (held) on the base member 410 so as to be linearly displaceable, and the carriage member 440 has a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420R. Of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R the drive pin 488b to the lower end side (sliding groove 423) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. It is rotatably and slidably inserted.

Thereby, as described above, the structure for causing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R to perform the linear movement (first aspect) including the rotational component and the rotational movement (second and third aspects). Can be simplified. For example, it is conceivable that a curved guide groove is provided and the displacement member is displaced along the guide groove, but in the case of sliding displacement along such a curved locus, a complicated structure is required ( That is, if it is a curved locus, not only a mechanism for guiding the members corresponding to the carriage member 440, the members corresponding to the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R, respectively, but also these members 440, It is necessary to provide a mechanism for continuously applying a driving force to 488L and 488R).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the carriage member 440, the lower left rack 488L, and the lower right rack 488R may be guided in the linear direction, and thus the carriage member 440 may be guided by the rolling surface as a flat surface. Since the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R can use the rack and pinion mechanism, their structure can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the durability and operation reliability.

Further, according to the displacement unit 400, the mechanism that guides the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is common in all of the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third aspect, and specifically, , One end side (upper end side) of each displacement member 420L, 420R is guided by the carriage member 440 rolling on the rolling surface, and the other end side (lower end side) is lower left rack 488L and lower right rack. The 488R is guided by sliding (linear movement) between the base member 410 and the back cover 412. That is, it is not necessary to provide different guide mechanisms according to each mode, and therefore it is not necessary to adopt a structure for switching between different guide mechanisms. As a result, the structure can be simplified, the operation reliability and durability can be improved, and the product cost can be reduced.

Next, the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 46.

First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32. FIG. 29 is a front view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 30 is a rear view of the projection unit 600. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projection unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 29 to 32, the projection unit 600 includes a base member 610 having an annular shape in a front view, a disk-shaped projection plate member 620 rotatably disposed on the base member 610, and the projection thereof. A plurality of irradiation units 650 arranged to surround the outer peripheral side of the plate member 620, a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 620, and a transmission force of the drive motor 661 to the projection plate member 620. And a gear train (gears 662 to 664) are mainly provided.

The base member 610 includes a ring-shaped back base 611 and a ring-shaped front base 612 disposed in front of the back base 611, and is formed between the opposing surfaces of the back base 611 and the front base 612. The projection plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) are housed in the internal space.

In a region inside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612 in the front view (hereinafter, referred to as “display region”), the projection plate member 620 is visible to the player, and in a region outside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612. In the area (that is, the area shielded by the front base 612) (hereinafter, referred to as “outside the display area”), the projection plate member 620 is invisible to the player.

The projection plate member 620 is made of a light transmissive material, and transmits the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side to make it visible to the player and is irradiated by the irradiation unit 650. When the incident light is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern or a pattern to be visually recognized by the player. That is, a pattern or a pattern can be made to stand out (display) on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81.

A gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 are disposed on the outer peripheral edge of the projection plate member 620 on the back side and the front side, respectively. The gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and are arranged concentrically with the projection plate member 620.

A plurality of teeth are formed on the gear member 630 along the outer peripheral surface, and the gear 664 at the end of the gear train meshes with the gear member 630. The groove forming member 640 is a member for forming a guide groove 641 having a U-shaped cross-section continuous in the circumferential direction between the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620, and a plurality of collars rotatably supported by the base member 610. The projection plate member 620 is rotatably held by the base member 610 as C is guided by the guide groove 641. The detailed configurations of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 will be described later.

The irradiation unit 650 is a unit including a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 651) for causing light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and each LED 651 faces the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 (opposes the outer peripheral surface). A plurality (five in this embodiment) are arranged in the posture. In detail, in the present embodiment, the extension line of each LED 651 in the irradiation direction is in a posture in which it extends substantially through the center of the projection plate member 620. The details of the structure for attaching the irradiation unit 650 to the base member 610 will be described later.

The drive motor 661 is disposed on the back side of the back base 611, and the head gear 662 of the gear train is connected (fixed) to the drive shaft of the drive motor 661. A gear member 630 arranged on the projection plate member 620 is meshed with the gear 664 at the end of the gear train. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 661 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (gear 662 to gear 664) and the projection plate member 620 is rotated.

Next, the holding structure of the projection plate member 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 38. FIG. 33 is a front view of the back base 611. 34 is a rear view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 35 is a rear view of the front base 612.

As shown in FIG. 33, the back surface base 611 includes an inner standing portion 611a standing on the inner edge portion of the annular plate member and an outer standing portion standing on the outer edge portion of the annular plate member. The installation part 611c, the intermediate standing part 611b standing upright between the inner standing part 611a and the outer standing part 611c, and the inner concave groove in the region surrounded by the inner standing part 611b and the inner standing part 611a. 611d, an outer recess 611e in a region surrounded by the inner upright portion 611b and the outer upright portion 611c, and a restriction protrusion 611f protruding from an annular plate member at a predetermined interval. It is formed.

The inner erected portion 611a is erected from the inner edge of the annular plate member to the front side (front side in FIG. 33) and has a constant radial thickness.

The outer standing portion 611c is erected from the outer edge portion of the annular plate member to the front side (front side in FIG. 33) and has a constant radial thickness.

The intermediate standing portion 611b is erected at an intermediate position between the inner standing portion 611a and the outer standing portion 611b. Further, the intermediate standing portion 611b is formed by dividing the intermediate standing portion 611b into seven parts, and each divided end portion is connected to the outer standing portion 611c.

The inner groove 611d is a region for arranging an outer edge portion of a projection plate member 620 described later inside, and surrounds the annular plate member, the inner standing portion 611a, and the intermediate standing portion 611b in three directions. Formed.

The outer concave groove 611e is a region for arranging an irradiation unit 650, which will be described later, inside, and is formed so as to surround the annular plate member, the outer standing portion 611c, and the intermediate standing portion 611b in three directions. It

The restriction protrusion 611f is a protrusion that prevents the collar C axially supported by the front base 612 from rattling to the back side, and is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter larger than the inner diameter of a hole opened in the axial center of the collar C. At the same time, it is formed so as to project to the front side. In addition, in the present embodiment, the restriction protrusions 611f are formed at six positions with a predetermined interval.

As shown in FIG. 34 and FIG. 35, on the back surface of the front base 612, the inner standing portions 611a, the middle standing portions 611b, the outer standing portions 611c, and the restricting protrusions 611f of the back base 611 correspond to the inner standing portions. The installation part 612a, the intermediate standing part 612b, the outer standing part 612c, and the shaft part 612f are installed upright. That is, when the base member 610 is assembled, the standing tip surfaces of the standing portions 612a to 612c of the front base 612 overlap with the standing tip surfaces of the standing portions 611a to 611c of the back base 611, respectively. At the same time, the tip of the shaft portion 612f is inserted into the restriction protrusion 611f.

A plurality of holding pins 612g are erected on the back surface of the front base 612 and in a region between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c. The holding pin 612g is an axial state having a circular cross section for positioning and holding the irradiation unit 650, and is arranged at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction.

As described above, the irradiation unit 650 is a unit that includes the plurality of LEDs 651 and causes the light emitted from each of the LEDs 651 to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and along the circumference of the projection plate member 620. It is arranged. That is, the projection plate member 620 is surrounded on the outer peripheral side by the plurality of irradiation units 650.

The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 612 and in a region between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c, and the front surface of the back base 611 is superposed on the back surface of the front base 612. Thus, the bases 611 and 612 are housed between the facing surfaces (internal space) of the bases 611 and 612.

36 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXVI in FIG. 34.

As shown in FIG. 36, the intermediate standing portion 612b of the front base 612 is provided with a notch 612b1 having a substantially semicircular shape on the leading end side thereof. Similarly, a substantially semicircular cutout portion 611b1 is cut out at a position in the same phase as the cutout portion 612b1 on the standing tip side of the intermediate standing portion 611b of the back surface base 611 (FIG. 33). reference).

That is, in a state in which the standing tip surfaces of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b are overlapped with each other (that is, the assembled state of the base member 610), the cutout portions 611b1 and 612b2 form a substantially circular opening in a front view. It These circular openings are formed at positions (positions in the same phase) facing the LEDs 651 of the irradiation unit 650, respectively.

Therefore, the light emitted from each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 passes through the circular openings formed by the cutout portions 611b1 and 612b1 of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b and is incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. To be done. The circular opening is set to have a diameter larger than the diameter of the light emitting portion of the LED 651.

Next, the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

FIG. 37 is a front view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 taken along the line XXXVIII-XXXVIII in FIG. 37. Note that in FIG. 38, the boundary between the above-described display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the projection plate member 620 is formed into a circular plate-shaped body in a front view. The projection plate member 620 includes a cutout portion 621 at a part of the outer edge thereof and a reflection portion 622 that diffusely reflects light.

The cutout portion 621 is a portion for facilitating disposition of the collar C on the restriction protrusion 611f of the back surface base 611, and is formed by cutting out a part of the outer edge of the projection plate member 620 in a linear shape in a direction orthogonal to the radial direction. To be done.

The reflection portion 622 is a portion where the inside of the projection plate member 620 is roughened by laser processing or the like, and is processed into a shape such as a pattern or a pattern in the entire area of the projection plate member 620 in a front view. Accordingly, when the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 620 is applied to the reflecting portion 622, it is diffusely reflected by the rough surface of the reflecting portion 622 and is emitted from the front surface side of the game board.

As a result, the player can easily see the diffusely reflected light, and can see the shape of the reflecting portion 622. That is, when light is incident on the projection plate member 620, the shape of the reflection portion 622 can be displayed on the front side of the projection plate member 620.

The gear member 630 is made of a light transmissive material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 620, is formed of a plate-shaped body having an annular shape in a front view, and has an outer diameter dimension larger than that of the projection plate member 620. It is set to a large size and arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612). Further, the gear member 630 is arranged on the back surface side (the back side in the drawing of FIG. 37) of the projection plate member 620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

The gear member 630 includes a tooth portion 631 formed along the outer peripheral surface, a rear surface portion 632 on the rear surface side, and an inclination from the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) end portion of the rear surface portion 632 to the front surface side. The inclined surface portion 633 is provided.

The tooth portion 631 is a tooth surface with which the gear 664 is meshed as described above, and is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the gear member 630 over the entire circumference.

The inclined surface portion 633 is a surface that is continuously provided from the end portion 634 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the back surface portion 632 and is inclined toward the front surface side. Further, the inclination angle of the inclined surface portion 633 toward the front side is such that the intersection angle θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 634 and the rear surface portion 632 is the virtual angle obtained by extending the rear surface portion 632 to the inner peripheral side. It is set to be substantially the same as the intersection angle θ2 of the line C and the inclined surface portion 633 (θ1=θ2).

The groove forming member 640 is made of a light transmissive material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 620, is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a shape in which the cross section is bent into a substantially L shape, and the bent inside is It is arranged on the projection plate member 620 side. The groove forming member 640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612). Further, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the front side (upper side in FIG. 38) of the projection plate member 620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

The groove forming member 640 includes a side surface portion 641a on one surface of an inner portion bent to have a substantially L-shaped section, an abutting surface 641b on the other surface of the inner portion bent to have a substantially L-shaped section, and a side surface on the front side. A front surface portion 642 and an inclined surface portion 643 inclined from the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) end portion of the front surface portion 642 to the rear surface side are provided.

The side surface portion 641a is a surface that sandwiches the collar C between the side surfaces on the front side (upper side in FIG. 38) of the projection plate member 620, and has a constant facing distance around the axis with respect to the front surface of the projection plate member 620. Are formed separately.

The contact surface 641b is a surface that contacts the collar C arranged between the side surface portion 641a and the projection plate member 620 facing each other and rotatably holds the projection plate member 620, and has a cross section orthogonal to the side surface portion 641a. In addition, it is formed in a circular shape around the axis.

Therefore, the side surface portion 641a and the contact surface 641b can be formed in the projection plate member 620 to form the guide groove 641 for guiding the collar C. That is, the guide groove 641 is formed between the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 by assembling the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640.

The inclined surface portion 643 is a surface that is continuous from the end portion 644 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the front surface portion 642 and that is inclined toward the rear surface side. In addition, the inclination angle of the inclined surface portion 643 toward the back side is a virtual angle obtained by extending the front surface portion 642 to the inner peripheral side by the intersection angle θ3 between the virtual line D connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 644 and the front surface portion 642. It is set to be substantially the same as the intersection angle θ4 of the line E and the inclined surface portion 643 (θ3=θ4).

Next, the projection plate member 620 and the color C will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39A is a rear view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 39B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the projection unit 600 taken along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39A. 40A to 40C are partially enlarged sectional views of the projection unit 600. 40(a) to 40(c) show transition states when the collar C is attached to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612. Further, FIGS. 39 and 40 show a state in which the back base 611 is removed from the projection unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 39(a) and 39(b), when the collar C is arranged on the shaft portion 612f, the protruding portion C1 protruding outward in the radial direction thereof is the front side of the projection plate member 620 (see FIG. It is arranged between the side surface of 39 (b) lower side and the side surface portion 641a of the groove forming member 640 (guide groove 641).

Further, the distance dimension L1 between the tip surface of the protrusion C1 of the collar C and the side surface portion 641a of the groove forming member 640 is smaller than the distance dimension L2 between the shaft portion of the collar C and the outer peripheral surface of the groove forming member 640. Is also set smaller (L1<L2).

Therefore, when the groove forming member 640 and the collar C are arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed in order to make the projection plate member 620 rotatable, the projection plate member 620 is moved in the vertical and horizontal directions by the amount of the gap. Even if it shifts to, the contact surface 641b of the groove forming member 640 can be brought into contact with the tip of the protrusion C1 of the collar C. As a result, the projection plate member 620 can be rotatably held by the tip of the protrusion C1 of the collar C, and the projection plate member 620 can be smoothly rotated.

Next, the attachment of the collar C to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40(a) to 40(c).

As shown in FIGS. 39A and 40A, when the collar C is arranged on the shaft portion 612f, the projection plate member 620 is arranged on the front base 612.

Here, the projection plate member 620 is arranged on the front base 612 by disposing the groove forming member 640 inside the inner concave groove 612d of the front base 612. That is, the radial distance dimension of the inner concave groove 612d is formed larger than the radial distance dimension of the groove forming member 640. By arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner concave groove 612d, the projection plate is formed. The member 620 can be positioned and placed.

Next, the projection plate member 620 is rotated to displace the cutout portion 621 of the projection plate member 620 toward the shaft portion 612f side where the collar C is arranged. That is, by matching the position of the cutout portion 621 with the shaft portion 612f, the color C can be arranged on the front base 612 in the state where the projection plate member 620 is arranged.

Next, the disposition of the collar C on the shaft portion 612f is performed by setting the shaft of the collar C relative to the shaft of the shaft portion 612f on the back side (upper side of FIG. 40(a)) toward the inner peripheral side (left side of FIG. 40(a)). It is performed in a state of being tilted. In this state, the shaft of the collar C is inserted into the tip of the shaft portion 612f, and the protrusion C1 located inside the projection plate member 620 is inserted into the cutout portion 621 and the guide groove 641.

From this state, as shown in FIG. 40(b), the opposite side is rotated to the front side (lower side in FIG. 40(b)) about the tip of the protrusion C1 located inside the projection plate member 620 as an axis. Thereby, the shaft of the collar C can be arranged concentrically with the shaft of the shaft portion 612f.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40(c), the collar C is displaced to the front side (lower side in FIG. 40(c)) so that the tip end surface of the protrusion C1 of the collar C and the groove forming member 640 come into contact with each other. It is arranged at a position facing the surface. After that, by rotating the projection plate member 620, the collar C can be arranged inside the guide groove 641.

Here, if a groove is formed on the outer edge of the circular rotary member and a plurality of collars are arranged inside the groove, the rotary member is lifted (operated) in order to arrange the collar. Since it is necessary to arrange the collar and both hands are used for the assembling, there is a problem that the assembling efficiency is poor.

On the other hand, in the projection unit 600, since the notch portion 621 is formed in the projection plate member 620, it is necessary to lift (operate) the projection plate member 620 when disposing the color C as described above. Absent. Therefore, the efficiency of assembling the projection unit 600 can be improved.

The projection unit 600 can be assembled by covering the back base 611 from the back side of the projection unit 600 assembled in this way.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43.

41A to 43B are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. 41(b), 42(b), and 43(b), the cross-sectional lines are not shown for easy understanding.

41(b), 42(b) and 43(b), the refraction angle when the light from the light source A enters the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is Considering that the invention is not affected, the light incident from the light source A to the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 is shown in a straight manner. Further, in FIG. 41 to FIG. 43, the boundary between the above-mentioned display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

As shown in FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light having the irradiation angle α that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 620 is incident on the outer edge of the projection plate member 620. It is incident from the side of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front side surface and the back side surface of the projection plate member 620. Accordingly, the light incident on the projection plate member 620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 620 toward the central portion. Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is diffusely reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine (upper side of FIG. 41B).

In this case, when the light traveling inside the projection plate member 620 is applied to the front surface or the back surface of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other, It is conceivable that the amount of light that enters the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 from the front surface or the back side surface of the projection plate member 620 and proceeds inside the projection plate member 620 decreases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 are formed of a light transmissive material having a refractive index lower than that of the light transmissive material amount of the projection plate member 620. Even when the light traveling through the member 620 is applied to the front surface or the back surface of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other, the front surface of the projection plate member 620 or The back side can be totally reflected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of light incident from the edge of the projection plate member 620 from decreasing.

That is, the light passing through the medium having a high refractive index is totally reflected without being incident on the medium having a low refractive index when the incident angle is increased when traveling to the medium having a low refractive index. In the projection unit 600, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a plate-like body, and light is incident from the end surface (edge portion) thereof, so that the incident angle of light is sufficiently large. Therefore, light does not enter from the projection plate member 620 to the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 having a low bending rate, and the light can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620.

Similarly, the relationship between the projection plate member 620 and air is that the refractive index of air is a value (refractive index 1) that is sufficiently smaller than the amount of the transmissive material, so that it travels inside the projection plate member 620. The light does not enter the air (in the air) from the projection plate member 620 and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 42A and 42B, among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light having the irradiation angle β for irradiating the groove forming member 640 is incident on the groove forming member 640. To be done.

The light incident on the groove forming member 640 can be reflected inside the groove forming member 640 and can proceed to the axial center side of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at the position where the side surface of the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent (facing), the light reflected inside the groove forming member 640 can be incident on the projection plate member 620 side. ..

That is, at a position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the groove forming member 640 is adjacent to the air (atmosphere), so that the light emitted to the side surface can be reflected. On the other hand, at a position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the groove is formed by a light transmissive material having a refractive index lower than that of the light transmissive material amount of the projection plate member 620. Light can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the groove forming member 640 can be totally reflected by the inner side surface of the projection plate member 620 and travel in the same manner as the light of the irradiation angle α. The reason for this is the same as in the case of the irradiation angle α, so detailed description will be omitted.

Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle β can also pass through the projection plate member 620, be irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and be emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to change the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increase the intensity (light amount) of the light emitted from the projection plate member 620 without increasing the intensity (light amount) of the light emitted from the LED 651. it can.

That is, not only the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light emitted to the groove forming member 640 is incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly. Therefore, of the light emitted from the light source A, the light reaching the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 620 can be increased, so that the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 620. The amount of can be increased to clearly show (display) the pattern or pattern. Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, it is possible to reduce the heat generation amount and suppress the thermal influence on other members and devices.

Further, since the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it, and the appearance is correspondingly increased. It is possible to suppress the deterioration.

Here, the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is higher than the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A by the groove forming member 640 in the front direction with respect to the light source A (FIG. 42A). Direction), the incident angle of light when irradiated to the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640 becomes smaller. This makes it difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the groove forming member 640 on its inner side surface, but at least part of the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is reflected, The above-described state (a state in which light is reflected by the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640) can be formed.

Further, since the groove forming member 640 includes the inclined surface portion 643, it is possible to increase the amount of light that is irradiated at the irradiation angle β and is reflected to the projection plate member 620 side. That is, as described above, the intersecting angle θ4 of the inclined surface portion 643 is formed to be the same as the intersecting angle θ3 of the phantom line D connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 644 and the front surface portion 642 (FIG. 38). Therefore, after reflecting the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) toward the end portion 644, the light can be allowed to travel along the inclined surface portion 643, and the light having the irradiation angle β can be projected. The area reflected on the 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected to the projection plate member 620 side can be increased.

Further, since the outer diameter of the groove forming member 640 is formed larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be correspondingly increased. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be easily reflected by the outer edge portion of the groove forming member 640 and incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly.

As shown in FIGS. 43A and 43B, of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light of the irradiation angle γ that irradiates the gear member 630 is incident on the gear member 630.

The light incident on the gear member 630 is reflected inside the gear member 630 and is advanced to the axial center side of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at the position where the side surface of the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent (facing), the light reflected inside the gear member 630 can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

That is, at a position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is adjacent to air (in contact with the atmosphere), so that the light irradiated to the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reflected. be able to. On the other hand, at a position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is formed of a light transmissive material having a refractive index lower than that of the light transmissive material of the projection plate member 620. The generated light can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the gear member 630 is totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620 as in the case of the light of the irradiation angle α, and is advanced to the axial center side of the projection plate member 620. The reason for this is the same as in the case of the irradiation angle α, so detailed description will be omitted.

Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle γ passes through the projection plate member 620, is diffusely reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to increase the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 620 without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the amount of light (light amount) of the LED 651 to be irradiated.

That is, not only the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light emitted to the gear member 630 can be incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. To that extent, it is possible to enhance the efficiency of condensing the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, of the light emitted from the light source A, the amount of light reaching the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 620 can be increased, and thus the amount of light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member. Can be increased to clearly show (display) a pattern or pattern. Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, it is possible to reduce the heat generation amount and suppress the thermal influence on other members and devices.

Further, since the gear member 630 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612), it is difficult for the player to see the gear member 630 and the appearance is deteriorated accordingly. Can be suppressed.

Further, the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is lower than the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A by the gear member 630 with respect to the light source A (downward in FIG. 43A). The angle of incidence at the time of irradiating the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reduced because the position is shifted to the position. This makes it difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the gear member 630 on its side surface, but at least a part of the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is reflected and the above-described state is caused. (A state in which light is reflected by the inner side surface of the gear member 630) can be formed.

Since the gear member 630 includes the inclined surface portion 633, it is possible to increase the amount of light that is irradiated at the irradiation angle γ and reflected on the projection plate member 620 side. That is, as described above, the intersecting angle θ2 of the inclined surface portion 633 is formed to be the same as the intersecting angle θ1 of the virtual line B connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the end portion 634 and the rear surface portion 632. Therefore, after reflecting the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) toward the end portion 634, the light can be made to travel along the inclined surface portion 633, and the light emitted at the irradiation angle γ can be changed. The area reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected to the projection plate member 620 side can be increased.

Further, since the outer diameter of the gear member 630 is formed larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be correspondingly increased. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be easily reflected by the outer edge portion of the gear member 630 and incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly.

Next, a detailed configuration of the irradiation unit 650 and a mounting structure for the base member 610 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46.

44(a) is a top view of the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 44(b) is a front view of the irradiation unit 650 when viewed in the direction of arrow XLIVb in FIG. 44(a). Further, FIG. 45(a) is a rear view of the irradiation unit 650 as viewed in the direction of arrow XLVa in FIG. 44(a), and FIG. 45(b) is an irradiation unit 650 taken along the line XLVb-XLVb in FIG. 44(b). FIG. 44 and 45 show a state before being attached to the base member 610 (front base 612) (that is, a state in which the substrate member 652 is not elastically deformed).

As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the irradiation unit 650 includes a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651, a board member 652 on which the plurality of LEDs 651 are mounted on the front surface, and a back surface of the board member 652. A plurality of (two in this embodiment) first blocks 653 and second blocks 654 are provided.

The board member 652 is formed of a material that is elastically deformable into a strip shape that is horizontally long in a front view. As described above, the LED 651 is a light emitting unit that irradiates light to be incident from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and a plurality of LEDs 651 are arranged in a longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 with the irradiation surface facing the front surface of the substrate member 652. They are arranged at equal intervals along (left and right direction in FIG. 44(b)).

The first block 653 and the second block 654 are members interposed between the substrate member 652 and the base member 610, and two first blocks 653 are arranged on the center side in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652. In addition, the second blocks 654 are arranged on both sides of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction with the first blocks 653 interposed therebetween.

The first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed of a resin material in a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and have higher rigidity (characteristic that is less likely to elastically deform) than the substrate member 652. Therefore, in the state of being attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), only the portion of the substrate member 652 located between the adjacent blocks 653 and 654 can be elastically deformed. Here, the first block 653 and the second block 654 will be described with reference to FIG. 46.

46A is a front view of the first block 653, and FIG. 46B is a cross-sectional view of the first block 653 taken along the line XLVIb-XLVIb in FIG. 46A. Also, FIG. 46C is a front view of the second block 654, and FIG. 46D is a cross-sectional view of the second block 654 taken along the line XLVId-XLVId of FIG. 46C.

The first block 653 includes a bottom wall portion 653a having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and a side wall portion 653b erected from the four sides of the bottom wall portion 653a toward the front side. The front side) is formed in an open box shape.

One of the four side wall portions 653b, which is opposed to the side wall portion 653b (standing from the short side of the bottom wall portion 653a), has a fastening hole h formed in the end face on the front side, and the screw S1 can be fastened. It is said that In addition, the side wall portion 653b different from the side wall portion 653b in which the fastening hole h is recessed is connected by a connecting wall 653c, and a projection 653c1 projects from the end surface on the front side of the connecting wall 653c.

The second block 654 includes a bottom wall portion 654a having a rectangular shape in a front view, and side wall portions 654b erected from the four sides of the bottom wall portion 654a toward the front side. Side) is formed into an open box shape. An opening 654a1 having a rectangular shape in a front view is formed in the bottom wall portion 654a so that an electrical connection line can be inserted therethrough.

Among the four side wall portions 654b, the side wall portion 654b which is erected from the short side of the bottom wall portion 654a has a fastening hole h formed in the front end surface thereof so that the screw S1 can be fastened. Further, the side wall portions 653b erected from the long sides of the bottom wall portion 654a are connected to each other by a connecting wall 654c, and the connecting wall 654c is provided with a fastening hole h at an end face on the front side thereof, and the screw S1. Can be concluded.

Insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 are formed in the first block 653 and the second block 654 at two locations on each of the side wall portions 653b and 654b that are erected from the long sides of the bottom wall portions 653a and 654a (FIG. 45). (A) and FIG.46(b)). The holding pin 612g of the front base 612 is inserted through the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1. Accordingly, it is possible to position the blocks 653 and 654 with respect to the front base 612 and to hold the blocks at the positions.

The first block 653 is symmetrical with respect to a first virtual plane (that is, a virtual plane including the axial centers of the two fastening holes h) passing through the center in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 46A). And, it is formed in a shape that is symmetrical with respect to a second virtual plane that passes through the center in the longitudinal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 46A) and is perpendicular to the first virtual plane.

Therefore, since the first block 653 can be shared in the irradiation unit 650 in which the second first block 653 is arranged for the single substrate member 620, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. You can Further, when the first block 653 is assembled to the board member 620, the first block 653 does not have the vertical and longitudinal directionality with respect to the board member 620, so that the workability during the assembly work is improved. Can be planned.

Similarly, the second block 654 is with respect to a first virtual plane that passes through the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 46C) (that is, a virtual plane that includes the axial centers of the two fastening holes h). It is formed in a symmetrical shape.

Therefore, since the second block 654 can be shared in the irradiation unit 650 in which the second second block 654 is arranged for one substrate member 620, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. You can Further, when the second block 654 is assembled to the board member 620, the second block 654 does not have the vertical directionality with respect to the board member 620, so that the workability during the assembling work is improved. You can

It returns to FIG. 44 and FIG. 45, and demonstrates. The first block 653 and the second block 654 have their longitudinal directions along the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652, and are arranged on the back surface side of the substrate member 652 with a predetermined gap between them. It

Specifically, the first block 653 and the second block 654 have their front surfaces superposed on the back surface of the substrate member 652, and the screws S1 inserted through the insertion holes formed in the substrate member 652 are screwed into the fastening holes h. By doing so, it is fastened and fixed to the back surface side of the substrate member 652. In this case, the protrusion 653c1 of the first block 653 is projected to the front side from the insertion hole formed in the substrate member 652.

Only the LEDs 651 are arranged (mounted) on the front surface of the board member 652, and other electronic components and connectors are arranged (mounted) on the back surface of the board member 652. In this case, as described above, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in a box shape having an open front surface, and the open sides thereof are arranged so as to overlap the back surface of the substrate member 652. That is, since both blocks 653 and 654 are provided with a concave portion on the surface on the side where they are superposed (arranged) on the substrate member 652, an electronic component or a connector mounted on the substrate member 652 is provided in the concave portion (internal space). Can be accommodated. Therefore, since the electronic components and the connector can be covered and protected by both the blocks 653 and 654, it is possible to prevent damage to the electronic components and the connector due to contact with a member (for example, the projection plate member 620) that is displaced around. it can.

The circuit (pattern) formed on the substrate member 652 is formed on the back surface thereof. Therefore, since this circuit can be also covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, it is possible to prevent the circuit from being damaged (broken) due to a contact of a member (for example, the projection plate member 620) that is displaced around the circuit. it can. Further, a portion of the substrate member 652 where neither of the blocks 653 and 654 is provided is elastically deformed (bent) into a curved shape that is convex toward the back side (see FIG. 34), and therefore the circuit is projected accordingly. It can be separated from the plate member 620. As a result, it is possible to prevent the circuit from being broken (broken) even in a portion where neither of the blocks 653 and 654 is provided.

An arrangement method (assembly method) of the irradiation unit 650 thus configured to the base member 610 will be described. First, the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the back surface of the front base 612 in the region between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c. In this case, while holding the substrate member 652 elastically deformed (bent), the holding pins 612g standing upright from the back surface of the front base 612 are inserted into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654, respectively. ..

As a result, both blocks 653 and 654 (that is, the irradiation unit 650) are held on the back surface of the front base 612, and the arrangement position of the irradiation unit 650 (that is, the irradiation direction of the LED 651) can be positioned at a predetermined position (FIG. 34). reference). After that, the front surface of the back base 611 is overlapped with the back surface of the front base 612, so that the irradiation unit 650 is housed between the facing surfaces (internal space) of the two bases 611 and 612. That is, the irradiation unit 650 is arranged (assembled) on the base member 610.

In the present embodiment, when the irradiation unit 650 is arranged on the base member 610, the LEDs 651 are arranged on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction as described above. That is, not only the circumferential distance between the LEDs 651 in one irradiation unit 650 but also the circumferential distance between the LEDs 651 in the one irradiation unit 650 and the irradiation unit 650 adjacent to the one irradiation unit 650 are the same as those in the other. To be done.

Here, the projection unit 600 causes the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 651 to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, it is necessary to arrange the plurality of LEDs 651 along the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. The LEDs 651 are arranged (attached) in a large number, and the LEDs 651 are arranged by adjusting the irradiation surface (irradiation direction) of each LED 651 toward the center of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the installation work is troublesome.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since a plurality of (eight in the present embodiment) LEDs 651 are mounted on the substrate member 652 that is elastically deformable, one substrate member 652 (irradiation unit 650). By disposing (attaching) on the front base 612 (base member 610), it is possible to complete the disposing work of a plurality (eight in this embodiment) of the LEDs 651 at once (see FIG. 34). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the labor of the work of disposing the LED 651 accordingly.

Further, by inserting the holding pin 612g of the back base 612 into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654, the substrate member 652 can be held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture, and the LED 651 can be held. The direction of the irradiation surface can be defined (see FIG. 34). That is, it is not necessary to assemble a plurality of LEDs 651 to the back surface base 612 while individually adjusting their irradiation surfaces, and to insert the holding pins 612g into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of both blocks 653 and 654. Since the posture (irradiation direction) can be set (adjusted), the labor of arranging (attaching) the LED 651 can be suppressed also from this point.

In this case, the irradiation unit 650 includes a first block 653 and a second block 654 which are formed to have higher rigidity than the substrate member 652, and both blocks 653 and 654 are held by the back surface base 612, so that vibration or the like is prevented. By suppressing the warp or flexure of the board member 652 due to the input of an external force, or by correcting the warp or flexure of the board member 652 itself, the attitude of the board member 652 can be easily defined to a desired attitude. As a result, the posture of each LED 651 can be suppressed from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member 652, and the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be oriented in an appropriate direction and the orientation can be easily maintained.

In particular, each LED 651 is arranged in a region of the substrate member 652 where the first block 653 or the second block 654 is arranged (that is, inside the region surrounded by the four side wall portions 653b and 654b in a front view). Is set up. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of external force such as vibration, or it is possible to easily correct the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 itself, so that the substrate member 652 can be set to a desired posture. It can be easily specified. As a result, the attitude of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member 652, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be oriented in an appropriate direction, and the orientation thereof can be further maintained. It can be made easier.

Further, each LED 651 is mounted on the front surface of the board member 652, while the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back surface of the board member 652. It is possible to bring the LED 651 closer to the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture.

Here, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals along the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 (the horizontal direction in FIGS. 44 and 45). That is, when the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), the LEDs 651 can be arranged on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 34). The uniformity of the light incident from the outer peripheral surface can be ensured.

In this case, in the present embodiment, in the second block 654, one of the fastening holes h formed in two places is formed in the connecting wall 654c, and therefore, the lengthwise dimension of the second block 654 is correspondingly increased. Can be shortened. Further, the second block 654 is disposed on the substrate member 652 in a posture in which the side wall portion 653b in which the fastening hole h is formed is on the first block 653 side. That is, the side wall portions 653b, in which the fastening holes h are not formed, are located at both ends of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction.

As a result, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652, and the uniformity of the light incident on the projection plate member 620 is ensured, while the longitudinal direction of the irradiation unit 650 (the horizontal direction in FIGS. 44 and 45). It is possible to shorten the total length of (1) to provide a space (provide a space) between the adjacent irradiation units 650. In this case, the shaft portion 612f can be arranged by utilizing this space, and as a result, the distance between the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be easily reduced.

On the other hand, in the first block 653, since both of the fastening holes h formed at two places are formed in the connecting wall 654c, the distance between the fastening hole h and the LED 651 can be shortened. That is, the position where the board member 652 is fastened and fixed to the first block 653 by the screw S1 can be brought close to the LED 651. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the LED 651 to be affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of an external force such as vibration, and it is possible to particularly easily correct the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 itself near the LED 651. Therefore, the attitude of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being influenced by the warp or bending of the substrate member 652, so that the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be oriented in an appropriate direction and the direction thereof can be further maintained. It can be made easier.

In this case, in the first block 653, the distance between the fastening holes h formed at two locations becomes large, so that the restraint of the substrate member 652 between the fastening holes h at the two locations may be weakened. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the connecting wall 653c is provided between the side wall portions 653b in which the fastening holes h are formed, and the projection 653c1 protruding from the connecting wall 653c is inserted into the board member 652. Insert it through the hole. Therefore, by the engagement of the protrusion 653c1 and the insertion hole, it is possible to easily suppress the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 due to the input of external force such as vibration, or it is possible to easily correct the warp or bending of the substrate member 652 itself. The posture of the substrate member 652 can be easily regulated to a desired posture. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of parts without providing the screw S1 separately, so that it is possible to orient the irradiation surface of each LED 651 in an appropriate direction while reducing the product cost accordingly. It is easier to maintain.

Both ends of the substrate member 652 in the longitudinal direction (outermost in the longitudinal direction, the left end and the right end in FIG. 45B) are free ends (that is, not bound by the second block 654). The attitude of the LEDs 651 located at both ends may become unstable. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are disposed on the back side of the substrate member 652, and the substrate member 652 is elastically deformed (bent) in the direction in which the arc center is located on the front side thereof. ) (See FIG. 34), the elastic recovery force of the substrate member 652 can be made to act as a force in the direction of pressing the back surfaces of the substrate member 652 at both longitudinal ends to the front surface of the second block 654. As a result, the attitude of the LEDs 651 located at both ends of the board member 652 in the longitudinal direction can be stabilized.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50.

FIG. 47 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 48 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800. 49 is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 50 is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800.

As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes a rear base 830 having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a front base 820 superimposed on the front side of the rear base 830, and a rear side of the rear base 830. A drive motor 880 arranged, a displacement member 850 rotated by the drive force of the drive motor 880 with respect to the rear base 830 and the front base 820, and a transmission mechanism for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 880 to the displacement member 850. 860, a connecting member 870 that connects the transmission mechanism 860 and the displacement member 850, and a cover member 840 that is disposed in front of the axial hole 851 of the displacement member 850 and is attached to the front base 820. ..

The rear surface base 830 projects into an axis 831 of each of the transmission gears 862 and 863 of the transmission mechanism 860, and an opening 831 formed to have a size into which the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860 connected to the drive motor 880 can be inserted. Mainly provided are shaft portions 832 and 833 that are formed, and a rear surface side regulation portion 834 that is provided so as to project from the front surface and extend in a curved shape.

The shaft portion of the drive motor 880 attached to the back side of the back base 830 is inserted into the opening 831. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be transmitted to the transmission mechanism 860 arranged on the front side of the back base 830.

Further, the opening 831 is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860. As a result, when the transmission gear 861 is damaged, the drive gear 880 can be removed from the rear base 830 to remove the transmission gear 861 from the vertical displacement unit 800. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of work steps for component replacement when the transmission gear 861 is damaged.

The shaft portions 832 and 833 are shafts for rotatably holding the transmission gears 862 and 863 of the transmission mechanism 860, which will be described later, respectively, and are formed in a cylindrical shape protruding from the rear base 830 to the front side.

The back surface side restricting portion 834 is a protrusion that restricts displacement of the connecting member 870 described later in the back direction (the depth direction of the paper surface of FIG. 47), is provided on the front side of the back base 830, and protrudes from the connecting member 870 described later. The curved shape is extended along the displacement.

The front base 820 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view having a slightly larger outer shape than the back base 830. The front base 820 has a shaft support portion 821 recessed from the front side toward the back side (from the front side in FIG. 47 to the back side in FIG. 47), a side wall 822 erected on an edge portion on the back side, and a rear side protruding. Mainly includes a protrusion 823, a front side restricting portion 824 protruding on the back side and extending in a curved shape, and a bulging portion 825 protruding on the back side.

The shaft support portion 821 is a shaft hole into which one end of a pin member 890, which will be described later, is inserted, and the shaft support portion 821 is recessed on the lower right side of the front base 820 when viewed from the front.

The side wall 822 is a wall portion for forming a gap between the rear base 830 and the front base 820 for disposing a transmission mechanism 860 and a connecting member 870, which will be described later, and the thickness of the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction. The size is larger than the size, and is erected on the upper and left and right (other than the lower end) edges of the front base 820. Accordingly, when the front base 820 and the back base 830 are fastened, the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be arranged in a displaceable state therebetween.

The projection 823 is a projection with which one end side (upper side in FIG. 48) of a biasing spring SP described later is engaged, and is formed in a columnar shape and is formed so as to project on the back side of the front base 820.

The front side restricting portion 824 is a protrusion that restricts the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction (front side of FIG. 47), is provided on the back side of the front base 820, and follows the displacement of the connecting member 870. The curved shape is extended.

The bulging portion 825 is a projecting wall that is laterally adjacent to a biasing spring SP described later with a predetermined space therebetween, and is formed so as to project from the lower end of the front base 820 to the back side.

The transmission mechanism 860 is a gear train composed of the transmission gears 861 to 863, and the driving force applied from the drive motor 880 is transmitted to the transmission gear 863 via the transmission gears 861 and 862 by meshing with each other in series. Transmitted up to.

The transmission gear 863 includes a tooth portion 863a that meshes with the transmission gear 862, a shaft portion 863b that is connected to the connecting member 870, a protruding portion 863c that is protruded in an arc shape around the shaft, and a rotation position thereof. And a plate-shaped sensor detection plate 863d for detecting

The tooth portion 863a is an interlocking surface formed on about two-thirds of the circular side surface of the transmission gear 863, whereby the driving force can be transmitted from the transmission gear 862 to the transmission gear 863.

The shaft portion 863b is a shaft that is connected to the connecting member 870, projects in a cylindrical shape on the back side, and is arranged at a position (eccentric position) different from the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 863.

The protruding portion 863c is a protrusion for suppressing the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction, is formed to protrude on the outer edge portion on the back surface side of the transmission gear 863, and is centered on the axis of the transmission gear 863. It is formed to be curved in a circular shape.

The sensor detection plate 863d is a plate that blocks the detection area of a position detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the front base to detect the rotational position of the transmission gear 863, and the tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863 is formed. A side surface that is not formed is formed to project radially outward.

The coupling member 870 is a member that transmits the rotational driving force of the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, and is formed to be curved in a substantially C shape in a front view, and is formed at one end (upper end in FIG. 48) of the curved shape in the front-rear direction. A gear-side connecting hole 871 that is formed therethrough, a displacement-side connecting hole 872 that is formed through the other end (lower end in FIG. 48) of the curved shape in the front-rear direction, and an abutment that is formed to project upward from the outside of the curved portion. And a portion 873.

The gear side connection hole 871 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 863b. Thereby, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the transmission gear 863 can be transmitted to the connecting member 870.

The displacement side connection hole 872 is a through hole into which a shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 described later is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 853. Thereby, the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 can be connected, and the driving force of the connecting member 870 can be transmitted to the displacement member 850.

The contact part 873 is a protrusion for restricting the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the front-rear direction, and the tip thereof is arranged between the rear surface side restricting portion 834 of the rear surface base 830 and the front surface restricting portion 824 of the front base 820 facing each other. To be done.

Further, the width of the abutting portion 873 in the front-rear direction is slightly smaller than the distance between the rear side restricting portion 834 of the rear base 830 and the front side restricting portion 824 of the front base 820. It is formed. Therefore, when the connecting member 870 is displaced, the contact portion 873 is displaced in the gap between the rear surface side regulation portion 834 and the front surface side regulation portion 824, so that the resistance when the coupling member 870 is displaced is large. Can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the coupling member 870 is displaced in the front-rear direction, the displacement of the coupling member 870 can be stabilized by contacting the front base 820 or the back base 830.

The cover member 840 is a member that holds one end side (the right end portion in FIG. 47) of the displacement member 850, is formed in a vertically long rectangle in a front view, and is fastened to the front base 820 with a pin member 890 interposed therebetween. .. In addition, the cover member 840 is provided with a shaft support portion 841 that is formed in a circular recess from the back side to the front side.

The shaft support portion 841 is a groove that holds (supports) the pin member 890 in a rotatable state by inserting the front end portion of the pin member 890, and is a position facing the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820. Is formed. Accordingly, the pin member 890 is arranged between the shaft supporting portion 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft supporting portion 841 of the cover member 840 so as to be prevented from falling off the vertical displacement unit 800.

The displacement member 850 is a member whose front side is decorated, and one end side (right side in FIG. 47) is formed into a horizontally long rectangle in front view, and the other end side (left side in FIG. 47) is formed into a circle in front view. The displacement member 850 includes a shaft hole 851 into which the pin member 890 is inserted, a protrusion 852 to which the biasing spring SP is connected, and a shaft portion 853 that transmits the driving force of the connecting member 870.

As described above, the shaft hole 851 is a through hole into which the pin member 890 is inserted. The shaft hole 851 is formed through the one end of the displacement member in the front-rear direction and has an inner diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the pin member 890. Is also formed large. Therefore, in the displacement member 850, the pin member 890 is disposed between the shaft supporting portion 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft supporting portion 841 of the cover member 840 while the pin member 890 is inserted into the shaft hole 851. The displacement member 850 can be arranged in front of the front base 820 while being rotatable about the axis of the shaft hole 851.

The projection 852 is a projection with which the other end (lower end in FIG. 50) of the biasing spring SP is engaged, and is formed so as to project from the rear surface side of the displacement member 850. Further, when the displacement member 850 is arranged on the front base 820, the protrusion 852 is formed at a position projecting from the lower side of the protrusion 823 of the front base 820 to the back side, and the protrusion distance thereof is the front side of the back base. Is formed up to a position that substantially coincides with the side surface of. Therefore, the longitudinal direction of the biasing spring SP can be made parallel to the gravity direction. As a result, the displacement member 850 is always biased upward in the direction of gravity with respect to the front base 820.

As described above, the shaft portion 853 is a shaft that is inserted into the displacement side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870, and is lower than the front base 820 when the displacement member 850 is disposed on the front base 820 (see FIG. It is formed so as to project at a lower position). Therefore, the displacement member 850 and the coupling member 870 can be coupled, and the driving force of the displacement member 850 can be transmitted to the coupling member 870.

As described above, the pin member 890 is a shaft that is inserted into the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850, and is formed of a metal rod-shaped body having a hardness higher than that of the displacement member 850. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the rotary shaft from being damaged when a force is applied to the rotary shaft when the displacement member 850 is displaced.

Further, the resistance of the shaft portion when the displacement member 850 rotates, the resistance when the pin member 890 rotates with respect to the respective shaft support portions 821 and 841, and the resistance when the displacement member 850 rotates with respect to the pin member 890. Since it can be divided into two parts, the resistance and the resistance can be prevented from being damaged by increasing the resistance at one location.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 800 configured as above will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 56. 51 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the first position, FIG. 52 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the intermediate position, and FIG. 53 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the second position. Is.

54 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the first position, FIG. 55 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the intermediate position, and FIG. 56 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 in the second position. Is. 54 to 56, the rear base 830 is removed for easy understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, in the state where the other end side (left side in FIG. 52) of the displacement member 850 is disposed in the ascending position (first position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is disposed above, A connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is arranged above. As a result, the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 is arranged above, and thus the displacement member 850 is in a posture of being lifted up.

In the first position, the straight line connecting the shaft center of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft center of the shaft portion 863b is connected to the shaft center of the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870. The straight line and the straight line are arranged on the same straight line.

Therefore, in the first position, the displacement member 850 can form a state (that is, a dead center) in which the force component in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863 is not generated. As a result, after the displacement member 850 is arranged at the first position, rattling of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed and durability can be improved.

From the state shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 54, when electric power is supplied to the drive motor 880 to drive the drive motor 880 to rotate and each transmission gear 861, 862, 863 (transmission mechanism 860) is rotated, the transmission gear 863 The shaft portion 863b is displaced downward. Therefore, the gear side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is pushed downward as the shaft portion 863b is rotationally driven. As a result, the displacement side connection hole 872 formed on the other end side (lower side of FIGS. 54 and 55) of the connection member 870 pushes down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850, and the displacement member 850 can be rotated.

In this case, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated, the straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the shaft portion 863b, the axis of the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863, and the displacement of the connecting member 870 are displaced. The straight line connecting the side connection holes 872 is in a state of tolerance. Therefore, the displacement member 850 can release the state (that is, the dead center) in which the force component in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863 is not generated. As a result, when the transmission gear 863 starts to rotate in the rotation direction for displacing the displacement member 850 (right rotation in FIG. 54), the force of pulling the gear side connection hole 871 of the connection member 780 by the gravity of the displacement member 850 is applied. , Can be applied in the direction in which the transmission gear 863 rotates. As a result, it is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor 880 when the drive motor 880 is displaced from the first position.

Next, referring to FIGS. 52 and 55, after the displacement member 850 is displaced from the state shown in FIGS. 51 and 54 (that is, the state of being located at the dead center), supply of electric power to the drive motor 880. A description will be given when the switch is turned off.

As shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, in the state where the power supply to the drive motor 880 is turned off after the displacement from the first position, the shaft center (rotation center) of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft of the transmission gear 863 are At a position where a direction connecting the portion 863b and a direction connecting the gear side connecting hole 871 and the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870 are substantially orthogonal to each other, gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and elastic recovery of the biasing spring SP. It is in a state of being balanced with the force (intermediate position).

Therefore, when displacing the displacement member 850 from the first position to the second position described later, by turning off the supply of electric power to the drive motor 880, the displacement member 850 is moved around the intermediate position (balance position). It is possible to cause the displacement member 850 to perform reciprocal displacement due to the acting weight and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP. That is, the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the direction of gravity can be an orthographic motion of a uniform velocity circular motion, and the displacement speed can be changed, so that the displacement member can be made to have an interesting displacement.

On the other hand, if electric power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and a driving force is applied from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 via the connecting member 870, the above-described displacement (orthogonal motion of uniform circular motion) is different. In the aspect, the displacement member 850 can be displaced between the first position and the second position, and the variation of the displacement can be increased accordingly. That is, it is possible to increase the variation of displacement by simply turning on or off the power supply to the drive motor 880 and switching whether or not to apply the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850. Since there is no need to complicate, it is possible to reduce product cost and improve reliability.

Further, as described above, since the displacement member 850 is rotationally displaced about the shaft hole 851, the application of the driving force of the displacement member 850 from the transmission mechanism 860 is released, and the action of gravity of the displacement member 850 is exerted. When the displacement member 850 is to be reciprocally displaced by the elastic recovery force of the urging spring SP, the displacement of the other end side (left side in FIG. 52) of the displacement member 850 is not limited to the vertical linear motion. It is possible to make a displacement that also combines a rotary motion with the shaft hole 851 as the center of rotation. As a result, it is possible to cause the displacement member 850 to perform an interesting displacement.

In this case, the coupling member 870 coupled to the displacement member 850 is pushed/pulled (displaced in the vertical direction) with the displacement of the displacement member 850 to rotate the transmission gear 863. Since the posture of 863 is changed, the magnitude of the force component in the push/pull direction in the direction of rotating the rotating member can be changed. That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocally displaced, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member 850 receives from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed. As a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 can be changed, and the displacement member can be made to have an interesting displacement.

Furthermore, as described above, in the state where the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP are in balance (intermediate position), the shaft center of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 are in contact with each other. Since the straight line connecting the shaft centers and the straight line connecting the shaft centers of the gear side connecting hole 871 and the displacement side connecting hole 872 of the connecting member 870 are substantially orthogonal to each other, the force in the pushing/pulling direction is reduced. The magnitude of the force component in the direction in which the transmission gear 863 is rotated is maximized at the balance position (intermediate position), and the force component can be reduced in any of the push and pull directions from the balance position. .. That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocally displaced, the resistance received by the displacement member 850 from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed substantially symmetrically with respect to the balance position. Can be continued easily.

When electric power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and the transmission gears 861, 862, 863 (transmission mechanism 860) are further rotated from the state shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is further lowered. Is displaced to. Therefore, the gear side connecting hole 871 of the connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is further pushed down as the shaft portion 863b is driven to rotate. As a result, the displacement side connection hole 872 formed on the other end side of the connection member 870 can push down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 to rotate the displacement member 850.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, in the state where the other end side (left side in FIG. 53) of the displacement member 850 is arranged in the lowered position (second position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is arranged below. The connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is disposed below. As a result, the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 is arranged below, so that the displacement member 850 can be in a posture of being pushed down.

In the second position, the straight line connecting the axis of the transmission gear 863 and the axis of the protrusion 863c of the transmission gear 863, the axis of the protrusion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side connection of the connecting member 870. The straight line connecting the axes of the holes 872 is arranged in the same straight line length.

Therefore, in the second position, the displacement member 850 can form a state (that is, a dead center) in which the force component in the direction of pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 to rotate the transmission gear 863 is not generated. As a result, after the displacement member 850 is arranged at the second position, rattling of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed and durability can be improved.

Next, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 will be described with reference to FIG. 57(a) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the first position, and FIG. 57(b) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the intermediate position, and FIG. (C) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the second position. 57(a) to 57(c), a part of the transmission gear 863 (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 located in front of the connecting member 870) is shown by a broken line.

As shown in FIG. 57A, at the first position, the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is arranged at a position facing the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 arranged between the rear base 830 and the transmission gear 863 can be reduced, so that the connecting member 870 can be easily brought into contact with the rear base 830 or the transmission gear 863.

Therefore, at the first position, the resistance when driving the displacement member 850 can be increased. As a result, at the first position, the displacing member 850 is arranged at the upper side, and the displacing member 850 is preferably stopped in order to form the retracted state in which the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player. However, it is possible to increase the resistance for driving the displacement member 850 and easily maintain the stopped state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 57B and 57C, a state in which electric power is applied to the drive motor 880 and the transmission gear 863 is rotated by a certain amount or more (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is the second portion). In the driving range θ6), the connecting member 870 and the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 do not face each other in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated by a certain amount or more, the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 disposed between the transmission gear 863 and the back surface base 830 can be increased, so that the resistance when the connecting member 870 is displaced can be increased. Can be made smaller.

Therefore, when displacing the displacement member 850 from the first position to the second position, it is preferable to displace the displacement member 850 in front of the third symbol display device 81 in a short time. The displacement member 850 can be displaced from the first position to the second position in a short time.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57C, in the second position, the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 can be brought into contact with the tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863.

Here, when the vertically displaced displacement member is displaced downward and stopped, the gravitational force of the displacement member adds to the inertial force at the time of the suspension, so that the displacement member cannot be stopped quickly. was there.

On the other hand, in the vertical displacement unit 800, when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 can be brought into contact with the transmission gear 863, so that the displacement member 850 is displaced. The force at the time of stopping the transmission is divided into a force stopped by the contact of the coupling member 870 with the transmission gear 863 and a force stopped by stopping the rotation of the transmission gear 863 (drive of the drive motor 880). Can be dispersed in one. As a result, the displacement member 850 displaced from the first position of the displacement member 850 to the second position can be quickly stopped at the second position.

Next, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 when being displaced from the first position will be described with reference to FIGS. 58(a) to 58(c). 58(a) to 58(c) are rear views of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the first drive range θ5. 58(a) to 58(c) show transition states from the first position. In addition, in FIGS. 58A to 58C, a part of the transmission gear 863 (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 located in front of the connecting member 870) is illustrated by a broken line.

As shown in FIGS. 58A to 58C, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is displaced in the first drive range θ5, the second position is changed from the first position to the second position. As it is displaced to the position, it is possible to reduce the portion where the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 face each other.

Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated from the first position, the resistance that displaces the displacement member 850 can be reduced with the displacement, and thus the displacement member 850 can be displaced smoothly.

Further, when displacing the displacement member 850 from the second position to the first position, it is possible to increase the sliding resistance of the displacement member 850 while displacing the displacement member 850 to the first position of the retracted position. The displacement member 850 can be quickly brought to a stopped state when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the position and stopped.

That is, when the displacement member 850 is displaced and stopped, it is difficult to quickly form the stopped state due to the inertial force that stops the operation. However, since the resistance of the displacement member 850 at the time of stopping can be increased, the stopped state can be quickly formed. can do.

On the other hand, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is displaced in the second drive range θ6, the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 are not arranged at positions facing each other in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the resistance for displacing the displacement member 850 can be reduced. As a result, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 drives the second drive range θ6, the displacement member 850 can be quickly displaced, and the effect of the protruding operation of the displacement member 850 can be enhanced.

Further, in the second drive range θ6, when the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 is released and the reciprocating displacement with the displacement member 850 as the center of the intermediate position (balanced position) is performed, the protrusion is provided. It is possible to avoid the generation of resistance by the portion 863c and smoothly perform the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850.

Next, the contact portion 873, the front base 820, and the back base 830 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59(a) to 59(c). 59A is a schematic sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 taken along the line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 54, and FIG. 59B is a schematic sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 55. FIG. 59C is a schematic sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 taken along the line LIXc-LIXc in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 59(a) and 59(b), the tip of the abutting portion 873 of the connecting member 870 is between the front side restricting portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back side restricting portion 834 of the back base 830. Is located in.

That is, the front-side restricting portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back-side restricting portion 834 of the rear base 830 are formed in a curved shape according to the displacement of the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. As a result, the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction is restricted.

Here, since the connecting member 870 and the displacing member 850 are in a state in which the shaft portion 853 is inserted into the displacing side connecting hole 872, the displacement member 850 is tilted in the front-rear direction by the amount of the gap between the shaft and the hole. Therefore, there is a problem that the displacement side connecting hole 872 or the shaft portion 853 is deformed.

On the other hand, in the vertical displacement unit 800, tilting in the front-back direction is suppressed by the contact portion 873, so that the displacement member 850 can be smoothly displaced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59C, when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the rear side restricting portion 834 of the rear base 830 faces the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. It can be in a state where it is not placed in.

Thereby, the gap between the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 and the front base 820 and the back base 830 at the second position can be increased. As a result, the resistance when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the second position to the first position can be reduced, and the displacement member 850 can be easily displaced from the second position.

Further, in the vertical displacement unit 800, the contact portion 873 is on a substantially straight line connecting the shaft center of the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 and the shaft center of the gear side connection hole of the connection member 870, and the transmission gear 863 and The displacement member 850 is arranged on the opposite side of the shaft center of the shaft hole 851 with the shaft center of the gear side connection hole of the connection member 870 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 54).

Therefore, when the connecting member 870 rattles with respect to the front base 820 and the rear base 830, the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 is brought into contact with the front base 820 and the rear base 830, so that the shaft of the transmission gear 863 is prevented. The inclination of the gear side connection hole 871 of the portion 863b and the connection member 870 can be easily suppressed. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member 850 via the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. In the first embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is set to be smaller than that of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640, but in the second embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is set. The outer diameters of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are set to be the same.

First, the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 60A is a front view of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 60B is a projection along line LXb-LXb of FIG. 60A. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640.

As shown in FIGS. 60A and 60B, a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 2640 are provided on the outer peripheral edge of the projection plate member 2620 on the back side and the front side, respectively. The projection plate member 2620 is formed in a plate-like body having a circular shape in front view, and its outer diameter is formed to be the same as the outer diameters of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 2640. Further, the projection plate member 2620 is provided with a cutout portion 621 at a part of the outer edge thereof and a reflecting portion 622 that diffusely reflects light.

The groove forming member 2640 is made of a light transmissive material having a lower refractive index than the projection plate member 2620, is formed in an annular shape in a front view, and has a U-shaped cross section in which a cross section is concave from the outer edge side to the inner edge side. The guide groove 2641 is provided. The groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the front side (upper side in FIG. 60B) of the projection plate member 2620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 2620. Further, the groove forming member 2640 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612).

The guide groove 2641 is a groove that guides the collar C inward, and has a recessed width larger than the axial dimension of the protrusion C1 of the collar C. Therefore, the plurality of collars C rotatably supported by the base member 610 are guided by the guide grooves 2641, so that the projection plate member 2620 is rotatably held by the base member 610.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63.

61 to 63 are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640. 61(b), 62(b) and 63(b), the cross-sectional lines are not shown for easy understanding.

In addition, in FIGS. 61B, 62B, and 63B, light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 as in the first embodiment. The refraction angle at that time is considered to have no effect on the present invention, and the light incident from the light source A to the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 is shown in a state of going straight. Further, in FIGS. 61 to 63, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M, as in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 61A and 61B, of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light of the irradiation angle α2 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 2620 is emitted to the outer edge of the projection plate member 620. It is incident from the side of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 2620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front side surface and the back side surface of the projection plate member 2620. Thus, the light incident on the projection plate member 2620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 2620 toward the central portion (axial center). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is diffusely reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine.

In this case, the projection plate member 2620 is formed to have a larger outer dimension than the projection plate member 620 in the first embodiment. Accordingly, the edge of the projection plate member 2620 can be arranged near the LED 651 (light source A). Therefore, since the irradiation angle α2 of the second embodiment can be made larger than the irradiation angle α1 of the first embodiment, the amount of light projected on the projection plate member 2620 (light amount) can be increased accordingly. it can. As a result, it is possible to increase the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the amount of light emitted from the LED 651.

As shown in FIGS. 62(a) and 62(b), irradiation of irradiating the groove forming member 640 on the front side (upper side of FIG. 62(a)) from the guide groove 641 among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651. The light of the angle β2 is incident on the front edge of the groove forming member 2640.

The light that is irradiated into the range of the irradiation angle β2 and is incident on the groove forming member 2640 is reflected inside the groove forming member 2640 and travels toward the axial center side of the projection plate member 2620. In this case, similarly to the first embodiment, at the position where the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 are adjacent (face), the projection plate member 2620 is irradiated with the light emitted to the inner side surface of the groove forming member 2640. Can be incident on.

As shown in FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b), among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the groove forming member 2640 on the back side (lower side in FIG. 62(a)) of the guide groove 641 is emitted. The light of the irradiation angle Δ2 enters from the edge portion on the back surface side of the groove forming member 2640.

The light that has been irradiated in the range of the irradiation angle Δ2 and is incident on the groove forming member 2640 is irradiated and reflected on the side surface of the guide groove 2641 of the groove forming member 2640. The reflected light can be incident on the projection plate member 2620 by irradiating the side surface at a position where the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 are adjacent (facing).

That is, by forming the guide groove 2641 on the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, the light incident on the groove forming member 2640 from between the guide groove 2641 and the projection plate member 2620 is guided by the side surface of the guide groove 2641. It can be reflected and made incident on the projection plate member 2620.

Therefore, by forming the guide groove 2641 on the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, the role of holding the collar C and the role of collecting light on the projection plate member 2620 can be combined. ..

Further, as compared with the first embodiment, the amount of light (light amount) incident from the groove forming member 2640 to the projection plate member 2620 can be increased by the addition of the irradiation angle Δ. Therefore, it is possible to increase the intensity (light amount) of the light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the light intensity (light amount) of the illuminating LED 651. ..

Further, since the groove forming member 2640 is arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, arranged on the back side of the front base 612), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it, and the appearance is correspondingly increased. It is possible to suppress the deterioration.

Note that, of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651, the light emitted to the gear member 630 is the same as that in the first embodiment, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. In the first embodiment, the state in which the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are grounded over the entire outer periphery of the projection plate member 620 has been described, but the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the third embodiment are A floating surface is formed with respect to the projection plate member 3620.

First, the shapes of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

64A is a front view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 64B is a projection along line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. 64A. 7 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a plate member 3620, a gear member 3630 and a groove forming member 640. FIG.

FIG. 65(a) is a side view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa of FIG. 64(a), and FIG. 65(b) is of FIG. 65(a). FIG. 65C is a cross-sectional view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 taken along line LXVb-LXVb, and FIG. 65C shows the projection plate member 3620 taken along line LXVc-LXVc and the gear member 3630 in FIG. 65A. 9 is a cross-sectional view of a groove forming member 640. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the projection plate member 3620 according to the third embodiment is formed into a plate-shaped body having a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640 are provided on the outer peripheral edge of the projection plate member 3620 on the back side and the front side. It is arranged on each side. Further, the projection plate member 3620 is formed such that its outer diameter is larger than that of the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, and protrusions 3623 projecting toward the front side and the back side are formed at the outer edge portions thereof.

The projecting portion 3623 is formed in a substantially triangular cross section that projects toward the front side (upper side in FIG. 64(b)) or the rear side (lower side in FIG. 64(b)) toward the outer edge. Further, the projection 3623 projecting to the front side has its tip set on the line of an imaginary line F that connects the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge of the groove 3645 formed in the groove forming member 3640 described later. To be done. On the other hand, the protruding portion 3623 projecting to the back side is set such that the tip portion thereof is on the line of the imaginary line G that connects the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge end portion of the groove 3635 formed in the gear member 3630 described later. R.

The gear member 3630 is formed in a circular plate-like body in a front view, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. Further, the gear member 3630 is provided with a groove 3635 formed in the side surface on the front side (upper side in FIG. 64B) at a predetermined interval, and a screwed member penetratingly formed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. And a stop hole 636 for.

The recessed grooves 3635 are recesses provided in the radial direction, and are formed on both circumferential sides of the respective stop holes 636. Accordingly, when the gear member 3630 is arranged on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 (see FIG. 64(b)).

The groove forming member 3640 is formed in a plate-like body having an annular shape in a front view, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. Further, the groove forming member 3640 is formed so as to penetrate the rear surface side (lower side in FIG. 64B) of the groove 3645 which is recessed at a predetermined interval and at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. And an opening 646 for screwing.

The recessed groove 3645 is a groove recessed in the radial direction, and is formed at a position facing the recessed groove 3636 formed in the gear member 3630. Accordingly, when the groove forming member 3640 is arranged on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630.

In this case, the surface where the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 are in contact with each other is, as shown in FIG. 65, an opening 646 into which the bolt T for fastening the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is inserted. It is a surface that overlaps in the radial direction. Accordingly, when a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640, it is possible to prevent the holding force thereof from decreasing. That is, when forming a gap between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 may be grounded by the diameter of the opening 646. Therefore, the holding surface for sandwiching the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 can be secured.

Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIG. 66.

66A and 66B are schematic sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. In FIG. 66(b), the cross-sectional lines are not shown for easy understanding.

Further, in FIG. 66B, as in the first embodiment, the refraction angle when the light from the light source A enters the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 has no effect on the present invention. The light incident from the light source A to the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 is shown in a state of going straight. Further, in FIG. 66, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is shown by a virtual line M, as in the first embodiment.

Of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 as shown in FIGS. 66(a) and 66(b), the light of the irradiation angle α3 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 3620 is at the outer edge of the projection plate member 3620. It is incident from the side.

The light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is totally reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front side surface and the back side surface of the projection plate member 3620. Thereby, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 can travel from the edge portion of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center side (axial center side). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α3 passes through the projection plate member 3620, is diffusely reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine.

In this case, in the third embodiment, since a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630, the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 is reflected by the reflecting portion 622. Can be easily reached. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 can easily reach the reflection portion 622, so that the light reflected by the reflection portion 622 and emitted from the front surface side of the projection plate member 3620 is strengthened, and the pattern And the pattern can be clearly seen.

On the other hand, light emitted at an irradiation angle other than the irradiation angle α3 enters the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630. In this case, since the groove forming member 3640, the gear member 3630, and the projection plate member are arranged with a gap as described above, the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630 is the first embodiment. It does not enter the projection plate member 620 side unlike the shape.

Therefore, the light of the light source other than the light source A of the LED 651 is incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 when the light projected from the light source A other than the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 3620. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display provided on the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 3620 from rising (displaying) by light other than the LED 651.

In addition, as described above, the grounding surface of the fastening portion of the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is a surface that overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65(c)). The place where no light is incident can be the ground plane.

That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when light is incident from the outer side in the radial direction of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T and the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the light that has entered the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 from entering the projection plate member 3620 side.

Further, in this case, the grounding surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 can be formed over the entire area that overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction, so that the grounding surface can be secured and the projection It is possible to prevent the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from being displaced with respect to the plate member 3620.

Here, when a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, the light of the LED 651 is inserted through the gap to the axial center side of the projection plate member 3620, There is a risk that light may leak from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 to the central portion.

On the other hand, since the projection 3623 is formed at the edge of the projection plate member 3620 of the third embodiment, the light from the light source A of the LED 651 causes the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 to move. The gap is not illuminated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the edge portion of the projection plate member 3620 to the central portion.

Furthermore, since the projection 3623 can increase the dimension of the side surface of the edge portion of the projection plate member 3620 in the front-back direction (vertical direction in FIG. 66A), the irradiation angle α3 can be increased. Therefore, the intensity (light amount) of light emitted from the projection plate member 3620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 3620 or increasing the light intensity (light amount) of the illuminating LED 651. ..

Next, the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

67A is a top view of the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 67B is a sectional view of the irradiation unit 4650. 68A is a partially enlarged schematic view of the projection unit 4600 near the first block 653, and FIG. 68B is a partially enlarged schematic view of the projection unit 4600 near the second block 654. Note that FIG. 67(b) corresponds to FIG. 44(b). Further, in FIG. 68, a state in which the irradiation unit 4650 is arranged on the base member 610 is schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 67, in the irradiation unit 4650 according to the fourth embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are fastened and fixed to the substrate member 620 with the screw S2. In this case, the screw S2 is set such that the height dimension of the head (vertical dimension in FIG. 67) is larger than the height dimension of the LED 651. That is, the protruding amount of the screw S2 from the front surface of the substrate member 620 is made larger than the protruding amount of the LED 651.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, the height dimension of the head of the screw S2 is such that the head of the one screw S2 and the screw S2 adjacent to the one screw S2 has the projection plate member 620 at the head. When the outer peripheral surface abuts (circumscribes), the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 is set to a size that cannot abut the LED 651 arranged between the two screws S2.

Accordingly, the LED 651 can be protected by the head of the screw S2. That is, when the projection plate member 620 is rotated, for example, when the projection plate member 620 is brought close to the irradiation unit 2650 due to radial rattling based on dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances, the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 is screwed. By contacting the head of S2, contact with the LED 651 can be avoided, and as a result, damage to the LED 651 can be suppressed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the projection plate member 620 is made of a resin material, whereas the screw S2 is made of a metal material, so that the LED 651 is protected when the projection plate member 620 is rattled in the radial direction. The effect of doing can be enhanced. Further, when the projection plate member 620 is continuously rotated while being in contact with the screw S2, the projection plate member 620 is worn, so that the projection plate member 620 rattles in the radial direction. Also, it is possible to avoid contact with the LED 651.

Since the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2 as described above, the formation of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b can be omitted. Therefore, in this case, since the complicated shape can be omitted, the shapes of the back base 611 and the front base 612 can be simplified, and the moldability of the resin molding can be improved. As a result, the yield can be improved.

In addition, since the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2, the allowable amount of radial rattling due to the dimensional tolerance and the assembly tolerance of the component can be moderated, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. That is, the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be brought closer to each other, and as a result, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be efficiently incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620.

Next, the projection unit 5600 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 76. In the first embodiment, the case where the projection plate member 620 is formed in a disk shape in a front view and is rotated about the center of the circle has been described, but in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 is a vertically long rectangular shape in a front view. The case of being formed in the same direction and slidingly displaced in one direction will be described.

First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 69 is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 5600. FIG. 71 is a rear view of the front base 5612. FIG. 72 is a rear view of the projection unit 5600. Note that FIG. 72 illustrates a state in which the back base 5611 is removed.

As shown in FIGS. 69 to 72, the projection unit 5600 is arranged in a slidable manner in a base member 5610 which is formed in a circular shape in a front view and whose central portion is opened, and an opening portion of the base member 5610. Projection plate member 5620, an irradiation unit 650 that causes light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 5620, a drive motor 661 for slidingly displacing the projection plate member 5620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661. A gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668) for transmitting to 5620 is mainly provided and formed.

The base member 5610 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a rear base 5611 whose central portion is opened in a horizontally long rectangular shape is disposed in front of the rear base 5611 and has substantially the same outer shape as the rear base 5611. The front plate 5612 is formed, and the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to the inner space formed between the facing surfaces of the back base 5611 and the front base 5612). 5668) is stored.

As described above, the front base 5612 is a plate member formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and has an outer erected portion 612c that is erected on the outer edge on the back side, and has a horizontally elongated rectangular opening in the front in the center. Central opening 5612h, an inner standing portion 612a standing on the back side edge of the central opening 5612h, and a pair of left and right holding portions 5612i projectingly formed on both upper ends of the central opening 5612h, It is mainly provided with two shaft portions 5612k projecting rearward from between the pair of holding portions 5612i, and a sliding protrusion 5612m projecting rearward from below the central opening 5612h. It

The central opening 5612h is opened in a horizontally long rectangular shape at the center of the front base 5612 when viewed from the front. The player can visually recognize the pattern and the pattern of the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side of the projection unit 5600 through the central opening 5612h.

The holding portion 5612i is a protruding portion for holding a rod member 5625, which will be described later, and is formed at the upper ends of the central opening 5612h so as to protrude toward the back side of the front base 5612 (the front side in FIG. 71). Further, the holding portion 5612i is formed with a recessed groove 5612i1 which is recessed so as to be recessed toward the front side (the back side of the paper in FIG. 71) on the protruding surface thereof.

The recessed groove 5612i1 is recessed in a circular arc shape in section from the center of the front base 5612 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 71) toward the end side, and the inner diameter of the recessed groove 5612i1 is the outer diameter of the rod member 5625 described later. Formed larger than. Further, the pair of concave grooves 5612i1 are formed at the same height in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 71), and the distance dimension between the ends in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 71) is the axis of the rod member 5625. It is set larger than the direction dimension. Therefore, after disposing the rod member 5625 on the inner peripheral surface of the recessed groove 5612i1, a groove having a radius larger than the outer diameter of the rod member 5625 is located at a position facing the recessed groove 5612i1 from the back surface side (front side in FIG. 71). By disposing the holding portion covers 5628 provided with the both ends, the bar member 5625 can be disposed on the front base 5612 (see FIG. 72 ).

The shaft portion 5612k is a protrusion that serves as a rotation axis of a rotating member 5670 described later, and is arranged above the central opening 5612h at a position symmetrical with respect to a perpendicular line passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612.

The sliding protrusion 5612m is a protrusion that guides the displacement of a rack 5627, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape from the lower side of the central opening 5612h to the back side. Further, the pair of sliding protrusions 5612m are arranged at positions symmetrical with respect to a perpendicular line passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612.

The projection plate member 5620 is made of a light-transmissive material, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is visible to the player, and when the light of the LED 651 is incident, the incident light is changed into a pattern or a pattern. The light is emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620 in the form of a pattern. That is, a pattern or a pattern can be made to stand out (display) on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81.

The projection plate member 5620 includes a rack 5627 that extends in the left-right direction at an end portion on the lower side, and a reflection portion 622 formed inside the projection plate member 5620. The rack 5627 is arranged below the central opening of the base member 610 (the central opening 5612h of the front base 5612), and is arranged in a position invisible from the front side of the projection unit 5600 in the assembled state. Further, the rack 5627 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle in a front view, and its longitudinal dimension is set to be longer than the lateral dimension (horizontal direction in FIG. 72) of the projection plate member 5620. Accordingly, the movable range of the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 can be made larger than the lateral dimension of the projection plate member 5620.

In the rack 5627, a rack gear 5627a that meshes with the gear 5668 is engraved on the lower surface, and a sliding groove 5627b that penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed in the center portion.

The rack gear 5627a is a gear tooth surface that displaces the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) in the left-right direction when the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted through the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668). Yes, it is formed over the entire lower surface of the rack 5627.

The sliding groove 5627b is a groove for restraining the rack 5627 from tilting when the rack 5627 is displaced in the left-right direction by the drive of the drive motor 661, is opened in the left-right direction, and has a front surface inside. A pair of sliding protrusions 5612m of the base 5612 are inserted. As a result, when the rack 5627 is displaced with respect to the back base 5611, the displacement direction is regulated and the rack 5627 is slid and displaced. The detailed operation of the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) will be described later.

Above the rear side of the projection plate member 5620, a cylindrical rod member 5625 extending in the left-right direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 72), and a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view at a position facing the projection plate member 5620 with the rod member 5625 being sandwiched therebetween. And a front cover 5626 having a shape.

The bar member 5625 is formed to be longer in the left-right direction than the length dimension of the projection plate member 5620 in the left-right direction, and is formed to be shorter than the outer diameter of the back base 5611 so that the front cover 5626 and the projection plate member 5620 are separated from each other. The projection plate member 5620 is sandwiched between and is disposed.

The front cover 5626 is a plate member guided by the rod member 5625, and the length dimension in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72) is set to be substantially the same as the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620. The rod member 5625 is sandwiched between the member 5620 and the member 5620, and is disposed on the projection plate member 5620.

The front cover 5626 is provided with a groove portion 5626a that is recessed in the front surface side (the back side of the paper in FIG. 72) and is recessed in the left-right direction on the side surface facing the projection plate member 5620. The groove portion 5626a is a groove in which the rod member 5625 is arranged, is recessed in a substantially U-shaped cross section, and the recessed dimension in the vertical direction and the front side is set to be larger than the outer diameter dimension of the rod member 5625. To be done.

Accordingly, the rod member 5625 can be arranged inside the groove portion 5626a. Thereby, the projection plate member 5620 can be slidably displaced in the axial direction of the rod member 5625 with respect to the rod member 5625.

In addition, the rod member 5625 is arranged on the back side rather than the side surface on the front side of the front cover 5626. That is, since the rod member 5625 does not project from the front surface of the front cover 5626, the front cover 5626 can be disposed on the projection plate member 5620 without forming a recessed portion on the projection plate member 5620.

Here, when the rod member 5625 projects from the front surface of the front cover 5626, it is necessary to form a groove for inserting the rod member 5625 on the back surface side of the projection plate member 5620. However, the projection plate member 5620 is a member that allows the light incident therein to be emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620 in the form of a pattern or a pattern. If the thickness dimension is partially reduced, it is difficult for the light incident inside the projection plate member 5620 to travel due to the reduction in the thickness dimension, and the amount of light emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620 decreases. There was a problem.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 can be arranged without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 5620 and the front cover 5626 in which the rod member 5625 is arranged inside. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light entering the inside of the projection plate member 5620 from being difficult to travel, and to suppress a decrease in the amount of light emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620.

Further, since both ends of the rod member 5625 are arranged so as not to fall off on the front base 5612 as described above, the projection plate member 5620 can slide in the axial direction of the rod member 5625 with respect to the front base 5612. Retained. That is, the projection plate member 5620 is suspended from the rod member 5625 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72).

Therefore, when a driving force is applied to the driving motor 661, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 5627 via the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668), and the rack 5627 is slid and displaced in the left-right direction. .. When the rack 5627 is slid in the horizontal direction, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 can be displaced in the sliding direction.

In the irradiation unit 650, the first block 653 is arranged substantially linearly along the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the LED 651 arranged in front of the first block is connected to the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. It is arranged at a position facing each other. Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 can be made incident from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the pattern or the pattern of the reflection portion 622 of the projection plate member 5620 can be made to stand out.

Further, the side surface of the front base 5612 on which the first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is disposed has a bulging portion 5612n that bulges in a substantially rectangular shape in a rear view on the back side (front side in FIG. 71). The bulging portion 5612n is a portion for raising the first block 653 to the back side, and the raising dimension is set to be larger than the plate thickness of the rotating member 5670 described later. Accordingly, a rotating member 5670 described later can be arranged in the gap between the second block 654 and the front base 6512.

A protrusion 612g is formed on the bulging portion 5612n. The first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is disposed in the irradiation unit 5600 by inserting the projection 612g into the insertion hole 653b1 and sandwiching the projection 612g between the front base 5612 and the back base 5611.

Rotation members 5670 are attached to the front sides of the second blocks 654 arranged at both ends of the irradiation unit 650.

The rotating member 5670 is a plate member that is bent and formed in an L-shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the front base 5612 with the bent portion positioned on the center side in the left-right direction, and the irradiation unit is provided on one side on the longitudinal side. The second block 654 of 650 is attached. Further, a through hole 5671 is formed in the bent portion of the rotating member 5670 so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 5671 is an opening into which the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 5612k. Therefore, when the rotating member 5670 is disposed on the front base 5612, the rotating member 5670 can rotate about the shaft portion 5612k with respect to the front base 5612.

Here, since the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the rotating member 5670, when the rotating member 5670 is rotated with respect to the front base 5612, the irradiation unit 650 can be displaced. That is, by displacing the rotating member 5670, the base member 652 of the irradiation unit 650 can be bent and the second block 654 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653.

The rotating member 5670 is biased by a biasing spring (not shown) interposed between the rotating member 5670 and the front base 5612 in the direction in which the tip portion on one side is displaced downward with respect to the shaft portion 5612k. 5612. Further, below the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 on which the rotating member 5670 is disposed, a displacement regulating protrusion 5612j that projects to the rear side is formed.

The displacement restricting protrusion 5612j is a member that restricts downward displacement of one end side of the rotating member 5670, and the protruding tip thereof is located rearward of the rotating member 5670 arranged on the front base 5612 (on the rear base 5611 side). The irradiation unit 650 attached to the rotating member 5670 is formed on the front side (on the front base 5612 side) of the LED 651. As a result, the downward displacement of one end of the rotating member 5670 is regulated by the displacement restricting protrusion 5612j of the rotating member 5670, and the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 to the projection plate member 5620 is displaced by the displacement restricting protrusion. It is possible to suppress blocking by 5612j.

Next, the operation of the projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 76. 73(a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 73(b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. FIG. 74(a) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 74(b) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state.

FIG. 75(a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 75(b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the third state. FIG. 76(a) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 76(b) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. 74 and 76 show a state in which the back base 5611 is removed. Further, the displacement operation from the first state to the third state is the same as the displacement operation from the first state to the second state, but the displacement direction is only left-right reversed, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 73(a) and 74(a), in the first state in which the projection plate member 5620 is disposed in the substantially central portion on the left and right sides of the central opening 5612h, rotations disposed on both sides in the left-right direction are performed. The member 5670 is biased by a biasing spring (not shown) so that one end side is displaced downward. As a result, the second block 654 of the irradiation unit 650 arranged on the rotating member 5670 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653, and the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 can be changed. The projection plate member 5620 can be tilted. As a result, the light of the LED 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 can be made incident from the left and right side surfaces (left and right side in FIG. 74(a)) of the projection plate member 5620, and the projection plate member 5620 is correspondingly incident. It is possible to increase the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620, and it is possible to clearly display the pattern or pattern of the projection plate member 5620.

A drive force is applied to the drive motor 661 from the state shown in FIGS. 73(a) and 74(a), and the drive force is applied to the rack 5627 via the gear train (gears 662-664, 5665-5668). When it is slid in the right direction when viewed from the front (right in FIG. 73), the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is similarly slid in the right direction (see FIGS. 73(b) and 74(b)). ). As a result, a second state in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged on the right side in front view with respect to the central opening 5612h is formed.

In this case, the front cover 5626 arranged on the front surface side of the upper end portion of the projection plate member 5620 is brought into contact with the side surface of the rotating member 5670 arranged in the sliding direction on the other end side of the L shape in a front view. Accordingly, a rotational moment in the direction of pushing one end side upward can be applied to the rotating member 5670 around the axis of the shaft portion 5612k that serves as the rotating shaft. Therefore, since one end side of the rotating member 5670 is pushed upward, the second block 654 disposed on the rotating member 5670 is also displaced with respect to the first block 653, and the longitudinal direction of the first block 653 (FIG. 74). (B) The horizontal direction) and the longitudinal direction of the second block 654 are displaced to a position on substantially the same straight line.

Accordingly, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be displaced in accordance with the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, and the amount of light incident from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased. it can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the pattern or design of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

Further, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be displaced in accordance with the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the amount of light emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620 can be reduced. Can be changed. That is, it is possible to change the mode of the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620. As a result, the player can easily be entertained.

Here, when the projection plate member is displaced, the LED disposed at another position is turned on in accordance with the displacement so that the light amount of the projection plate member is kept constant. Along with this, it is necessary to control the turning on or off of the LED, and the more complicated the displacement of the projection plate member, the more complicated the control of the LED, and the reliability of the product deteriorates. Further, there is a problem that the product cost increases because the LED is arranged at another position.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be displaced along with the displacement of the projection plate member 5620. Therefore, the position of the projection plate member 5620 is detected and the projection plate member 5620 is disposed at another position. Since it is not necessary to control the LED to be turned on or off, the control of the LED 651 can be simplified, the reliability of the product can be improved, and the increase of the product cost can be suppressed.

Further, in order to irradiate the displaced irradiation target (projection plate member) with light, if a plurality of fixed irradiation targets (LEDs) are arranged around the irradiation target, the irradiation range of each irradiation target There is a problem in that a portion with a weak light amount is formed between them, and when the object to be irradiated is displaced, light and dark are formed, which reduces the interest of the player. Here, it is possible to solve the above-mentioned problem by narrowing the arrangement interval of the irradiators, but in this case, the number of arranging the irradiators increases, resulting in an increase in product cost. There was a point.

However, in the fifth embodiment, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be made to follow the displacement operation of the projection plate member 5620. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 can always be projected stably regardless of its displacement position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the light and dark of the light due to the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, and to prevent the interest of the player from being spoiled. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to increase the number of LEDs 651 arranged, it is possible to suppress an increase in product cost.

Further, as described above, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 can be changed by the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, so the driving force of the drive motor 661 of the projection plate member 5620 can be changed. The drive for sliding displacement and the drive for rotating the second block 654 can be used in common, and it is not necessary to newly provide a drive unit for displacing the second block 654. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cost of the product from increasing.

Further, since the irradiation unit 650 is formed by the base member 652 and the blocks 653, 654 which are formed of an elastically deformable material, it is not necessary to form the displacing second block 654 by another member. Therefore, since the irradiation unit 650 assembled as a unit is arranged on the front base 5612 and then the wiring is connected to the irradiation unit 650, the irradiation unit 650 can be arranged on the front base, so that the process of assembling can be simplified.

On the other hand, when the second state is displaced to the first state, the drive of the drive motor 661 is reversed to displace the rack 5627 to the center position in the left-right direction of the central opening 5612h. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is also slid and displaced to form the first state.

In this case, the rotation member 5670 whose one end is pushed up by the displacement to the second state (the left side in FIG. 74(b)) is rotated by the biasing spring (not shown) interposed between the rotation member 5670 and the front base 5612. As the member 5620 slides to the center position in the left-right direction, one end of the L-shaped rotary member 5670 in a front view is pushed downward and rotated about the shaft portion 5612k. Further, as described above, the rotating member 5670 that is displaced downward is in contact with the displacement restricting protrusion 5612j to restrict the rotation range thereof.

As described above, the displacement from the first state to the third state shown in FIGS. 7 and 8 is simply the left-right reversal of the displacement operation from the first state to the second state. The description is omitted. The third state is a state in which the projection plate member 5620 is arranged on the left side in front view with respect to the central opening 5612h (see FIGS. 75(b) and 76(b)).

Next, the projection unit 6600 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. In the first embodiment, the case where the entire central portion of the projection plate member 620 is always visible to the player has been described, but in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is partially visible to the player. It is arranged as possible.

First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. The same parts as those in each of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 77 is a front view of the projection unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a front exploded perspective view of the projection unit 6600. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the front base 6612 with the front base 6612 and the irradiation unit 650 assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the projection unit 6600 includes a base member 6610 formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and a projection plate member arranged so as to be partially visible from an opening formed in the base member 6610. 6620, an irradiation unit 650 that allows light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 6620, a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 6620, and the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted to the projection plate member 6620. And a gear train (gears 662 to 664) for.

The base member 6610 includes a ring-shaped back base 611 and a ring-shaped front base 6612 disposed in front of the back base 611. The base member 6610 is formed on the facing surface between the back base 611 and the front base 6612. The projection plate member 6620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (662 to 664) are housed in the internal space.

In the front base 6612, a shield member 6612r having a ring shape in a front view is formed on an inner edge portion of the ring-shaped front base 612 of the first embodiment, and a part of the shield member 6612r has a fan-shaped opening in the front-rear direction. The portion 6612p is formed.

The opening 6612p is an opening for making the projection plate member 6620 arranged on the back surface visible through the opening 6612p, and is formed in a fan shape around the axis of the front base 6612 formed in an annular shape in front view, The shielding member 6612r is formed to have a length of about 1/6 of the entire circumference and is formed on the right side in front view.

The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 6612, in the region between the intermediate standing portion 612b and the outer standing portion 612c at the outer edge of the opening 6612p, and the back base 611 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 612. When the front surfaces of the bases 611 and 612 are overlapped with each other, they are housed between the opposing surfaces of the bases 611 and 612 (internal space).

The projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape in a front view, and its inner diameter is formed larger than the inner diameter of the annular front base 6612. The projection plate member 6620 is arranged coaxially with the axis of the front base 6612. Therefore, in the state where the projection unit 6600 is assembled, the inner edge portion of the projection plate member 6620 is arranged so that it cannot be visually recognized by the player.

Further, the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 arranged on the projection plate member 6620 are arranged on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, on the back side of the front base 612 (shielding member 612r)). Since it is provided), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it, and it is possible to suppress deterioration of the appearance accordingly.

The projection plate member 6620 is made of a light transmissive material, transmits the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side, and is visible to the player through the opening 6612p of the front base 6612. In addition, when the light emitted from the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern or a pattern, and the front base 6612 is used. The player visually recognizes it through the opening 6612p. That is, a pattern or pattern can be made to stand out (display) in the internal space of the opening 6612p of the front base 6612.

In addition, the projection plate member 6620 includes a reflection portion 6622 that internally diffuses light. The inside of the reflection portion 6622 is roughened by laser processing or the like, and a pattern, a pattern, or the like is formed by dividing the projection plate member 6620 into a plurality of parts in the circumferential direction of the projection plate member 6620 in a front view. It In the present embodiment, the shape of the pattern or pattern of the reflecting portion 6622 is divided into six in the circumferential direction, and the reflection areas 6622a to 6622f of the pattern or pattern of six modes are formed (see FIG. 80). ..

Further, the projection plate member 6620 is provided with a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 on the outer peripheral edge portion on the back side and the front side, respectively. Accordingly, similarly to the first embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (662 to 664), so that the projection plate member 6620 can be rotated.

Next, the operation of the projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIG. 80A to 80C are rear views of the projection unit 6600. 80(a) to 80(c) show transition states of the projection plate member 6620. Further, FIG. 80 shows a state in which the back base 611 is removed. Further, the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 and the reflection portion 6622 (reflection areas 6622a to 6622f) of the projection plate member 6620 are shown by chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 80A, when the projection plate member 6620 is placed at the initial position, the projection plate member 6620 is placed inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 when viewed from the front (when viewed from the back of the paper). A reflection area 6622a is arranged. Therefore, when the light of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is made incident from the outer edge portion of the projection plate member 6620, the pattern or pattern of the reflection area 6622a can be displayed inside the opening portion 6612p. That is, the player can visually recognize a pattern or a pattern floating inside the opening 6612p.

In this case, the light of the LED 651 is also applied to the reflection areas 6622b and 6622f adjacent to the reflection area 6622a, but since the front base 6612 is arranged in front of the reflection areas 6622b and 6622f, the player can The display of the areas 6622b and 6622f cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, by displaying the pattern or the pattern of the projection plate member 6620 through the opening 6612p, the player does not see the display other than the display surface, and the other area can be seen, which spoils the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 80(b) and 80(c), when a driving force is applied to the driving motor 661, the driving force is projected through the gear train (gears 662 to 664) as described above. The projection plate member 6620 is rotated by being transmitted to the plate member. By rotating the projection plate member 6620, the patterns and patterns of the reflection regions 6622a to 6622f arranged inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 in a front view are switched. Thereby, a plurality of different patterns and patterns can be displayed inside the opening 6612p.

Here, if a pattern or a pattern is printed on the front surface of the irradiation target (projection plate member 6620), and the display surface is switched by displacing the irradiation target, the visible area (opening part) of the irradiation target 6612p), the pattern or pattern of the irradiated object can be seen, and the player can know which display will be displayed before switching the pattern or pattern, so that the player can change the pattern of the irradiated object. There was a problem that the displacement could not be enjoyed to the end.

Even if the power of the light source (LED 651) that irradiates the object to be illuminated is turned off to darken the display surface of the object to be illuminated, the object to be illuminated may be affected by the light of other devices or fluorescent lamps in the store. By being irradiated, the pattern and design of the irradiated object could be visually recognized by the player.

In the present application, the projection plate member 6620 is formed of a light transmissive material, and by turning off the light of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the pattern and the pattern of the projection plate member 6620, and the projection plate member 6620 is in a transparent state. be able to. Therefore, when the projection plate member 6620 is rotated, by turning off the irradiation of the LED 651, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the switching of the pattern and the pattern of the projection plate member 6620. The displacement of the 6620 can be enjoyed to the end.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front and is rotated about the center thereof as a rotation axis, so that the projection plate member 6620 is slidably displaced as compared to the front base. It is possible to suppress the space required for arranging the projection plate member 6620 while ensuring the number of patterns and designs that are visible to the player through the opening 6612p of 6612.

That is, in the case where the projection plate member 6620 is slidably displaced, since the space for disposing the projection plate member 6620 in the left-right direction or the vertical direction is limited, it is difficult to secure the pattern of the projection plate member 6620 and the number on the drawing side. By forming the above, it is possible to suppress the space required for disposing the projection plate member 6620 while ensuring the number of patterns and patterns.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of one embodiment may be replaced with or combined with part or all of the other one or more embodiments to configure a gaming machine.

In the above-described first and second embodiments, the case where a total of four first blocks 653 and second blocks 654 are arranged on the substrate member 652 in the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 has been described, but this is not always the case. However, the total number of the first blocks 653 and the second blocks 654 may be 3 or less, or 5 or more. In this case, the ratio of the first block 653 and the second block 654 is arbitrary and may be only the first block 653 or only the second block 654.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the LED 651 is arranged on the front surface of the substrate member 652 and the first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the rear surface has been described, but the invention is not limited thereto. Instead, the LED 651, the first block 653, and the second block 654 may be arranged in front of the substrate member 652. In this case, the LED 651 is housed inside the first block 653 and the second block 654, and the light emitted from the LED 651 is projected from the openings formed in front of the first block 653 and the second block 654. It is incident on the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620.

In the above-described first and second embodiments, the case where the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 of the projection unit 600 are formed of the light transmissive material has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 may be formed of two layers of a light transmissive material and a non-transmissive material.

For example, the back surface 632 side of the gear member 630 and the front surface 642 side of the groove forming members 640, 2640 are formed of a layer of an impermeable material, and the projection plate members 620, 2620 side of the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640 are It may be formed of a layer of transparent material. In this case, the layer of the non-transmissive material can prevent light emitted by other devices in the game area from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620. That is, light emitted by devices other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by the layer of non-transmissive material.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when light is not incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and a pattern or a pattern is not displayed on the front surface of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), the other units It is possible to prevent light from being incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and displaying patterns or patterns on the front surfaces of the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

Further, in this case, the layer formed of the non-transmissive material is formed of a metal material or a flexible material having high reflectance, or between the non-transmissive material layer and the transmissive material layer. It is preferable to interpose a metallic material or a flexible material having high reflectance. Thereby, the light incident from the LED 651 on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 can be more easily reflected on the projection plate members 620 and 2620. As a result, the light reflected from the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 can be strengthened, and a pattern or a pattern can be clearly highlighted.

In the first and second embodiments, the case where the back surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 of the projection unit 600 and the front surface portion 642 of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are in contact with the air (atmosphere) has been described. However, for example, a seal of a member (for example, silver foil or aluminum) having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is attached to the rear view 632 and the front portion 642, or a color having a high reflectance is attached. Printing (for example, white) may be performed.

In this case, by sticking or printing, it is possible to prevent light emitted from other devices in the game area from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a sticker or printing.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when light is not incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and a pattern or a pattern is not displayed on the front surface of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), the other units It is possible to prevent light from being incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and displaying patterns or patterns on the front surfaces of the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

Further, by sticking or printing, the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 from the LED 651 can be more easily reflected on the projection plate members 620 and 2620. As a result, the light reflected from the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 can be strengthened, and a pattern or a pattern can be clearly highlighted.

When the seal is attached, the seal may be attached so as to protrude from the rear surface 632 of the gear member 630 and the front surface 642 of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 to the outer edge side. In this case, since the light emitted from the LED 651 and spreading in a fan shape can be reflected by the protruding seal portion, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be easily collected on the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

In the third embodiment, the case where the air layer is formed between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620 has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620, a plate member of a non-transmissive material having a higher reflectance than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is provided. You may intervene.

In this case, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is surely totally reflected by the plate member of the non-transmissive material having a high reflectance, and can be made to travel from the edge portion of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center side. it can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the intensity (light amount) of the light emitted at the irradiation angle α3, and to strengthen the light reflected from the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620, It is possible to clearly show patterns and patterns.

Further, the plate member made of a non-transmissive material having a high reflectance can prevent light emitted from other devices in the game area from entering the projection plate member 3620. That is, the light emitted by a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by the plate member of the non-transmissive material having a high reflectance.

As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (when the light is not incident on the projection plate member 3620 and the pattern or the pattern is not displayed on the front surface of the projection plate member 3620), the light from another device is projected. It is possible to prevent a pattern or a pattern from being incident on the member 3620 and being displayed on the front surface of the projection plate member 3620.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the means for urging the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is the coil spring has been described, but the means is not necessarily limited to this, and a rubber-like elastic body, a torsion spring, It may be a leaf spring. The mounting method is exemplified by a state in which the protrusion 852 and the protrusion 823 are connected and attached, or a state in which the protrusion 852 and the protrusion 823 are attached between the rotation shaft of the displacement member 850 and the shaft support portion 821 of the base member 820.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is rotationally moved about the shaft hole 851 formed at one end has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. 850 may slide and displace the guide groove formed in the front base 820. In this case, if both ends of the guide groove of the front base 820 are formed at different positions in the vertical direction (gravitational direction), the displacement member 850 is displaced in the gravity direction as in the first embodiment. Since it is possible to make an orthographic movement of a uniform velocity circular motion and change the displacement speed, it is possible to cause the displacement member 850 to perform an interesting displacement.

In the first to third and sixth embodiments, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged at the position facing the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, for example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be arranged at a position facing the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640.

Also in this case, similarly to the above-described first to third, fifth and sixth embodiments, the light of the LED 651 is made incident from the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640, and the projection plate. A pattern or design can be displayed on the surfaces of the members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620.

Further, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 does not face the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 (that is, the light irradiation of the LED 651 is performed. The surface of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630, and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 are different from each other in the front-rear direction). The portions may be arranged so as to be incident on the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640.

In this case, while irradiating the other non-irradiation member different from the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 with the light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651, the irradiation is performed obliquely from the irradiation surface of the LED 651. A part of the light can be incident on the side end faces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640. That is, it is possible to make the LED 651 serve both as the light for displaying the pattern or the pattern on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 and the light for irradiating the other irradiated body.

In the first to third, fifth, and sixth embodiments, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 and the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 are arranged in parallel has been described. For example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be tilted with respect to the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620.

Specifically, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged so as to face the rear surface side, and the light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620. , 6620 may be irradiated to the side end surface. In this case, when a pattern or a pattern is displayed on the surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the light of the LED 651 leaks out from the inner edge of the front bases 612, 6612 formed in an annular shape in front view. Can be suppressed.

Further, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged to face the front side, and the light irradiated in a direction orthogonal to the irradiation position of the LED 651 of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 is arranged. It may be a position where the side end face is irradiated.

Further, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged so as to be tilted with respect to the side surface of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 with the light irradiation surface facing the back side or the front side, and the arrangement position of the LED 651 is set to the LED 651. It may be a position where the light emitted in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of (3) is applied to the side end faces of the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 or the side end faces of the gear members 630, 3630.

In addition, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is arranged so as to be tilted with respect to the side surface of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 toward the rear surface side or the front surface side, and the arrangement position of the LED 651 is changed. The position where the light emitted in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is applied to the front surface portion 632 of the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 or the rear surface portion 632 of the gear members 630, 3630 may be used.

In the fifth embodiment, the light emitted from the LEDs 651 arranged on the front surface of the second block 654 is made incident on the projection plate member 5620 from the left and right side surfaces of the projection plate member 5620, so that the projection plate member 5620 can be viewed from the front surface. Although the case where the amount of emitted light is increased has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 by the light incident from the left and right of the projection plate member 5620 may be changed. It may be different from the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 by the light incident from the upper end surface of 5620.

That is, by forming an air layer or a non-light-transmitting material inside the projection plate member 5620 and dividing the area of the reflecting portion 622 (for example, dividing into three areas), the upper end of the projection plate member 5620. The light incident from the first portion is emitted from the front side by the reflection portion 622 in the first region, and the light incident from the left side surface is emitted from the front side by the reflection portion 622 in the second region and is emitted from the right side surface. The incident light can be configured to be emitted from the front side by the reflecting portion 622 in the third region. Accordingly, it is possible to form a plurality of patterns and patterns displayed on the projection plate member 5620, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being spoiled.

In this case, a plurality of light sources (LEDs 651) for irradiating the first to third areas are provided around the irradiation target (projection plate member 5620) to irradiate the first to third areas (for example, on the upper part). The arranged light source emits light from the upper end to irradiate the first region, the light source arranged on the left side irradiates from the left end face to irradiate the second region, and the light source arranged on the right side irradiates the right end. Although it is possible to irradiate the third region by irradiating it from the surface, it is necessary to dispose a plurality of light sources, and there is a problem that the product cost increases.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 is rotated with respect to the first block 653 by the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, so that the second block of the second block 654 is rotated. Since the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 arranged in the front can be changed, it is possible to irradiate two areas, that is, the case of irradiating the second or third area and the case of irradiating the first area. Therefore, the number of LEDs 651 arranged can be reduced correspondingly, and the increase in product cost can be suppressed.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654 is changed according to the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 has been described, but the invention is not limited to this. Instead, the rotating member 5670 may be connected to the shaft portion of a newly arranged drive motor for rotation.

In this case, since the rotating member 5670 can be rotated regardless of the slide position of the projection plate member 5620 to change the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 arranged in front of the second block 654, the projection plate member 5620 can be changed. It is possible to partially increase or decrease the amount of light emitted from the front of the. That is, the direction of the light incident on the projection plate member 5620 can be displaced to change the shade of the display of the pattern or the pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620.

In the first embodiment, the projection plate member 620, the plurality of irradiation units 650 that irradiate the projection plate member 620, and the gear that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 661 are provided between the facing surfaces of the front base 612 and the back base 611. Although the case where the rows (gears 662 to 664) are arranged as one unit has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the above-described unit (projection) is provided between the facing surfaces of the front base 612 and the rear base 611. The plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) may be arranged in a state of stacking two or more in the front-rear direction.

In this case, by displaying a pattern or a pattern on each projection plate member 620, the player can visually recognize the combination of the display of the pattern or the pattern on each projection plate member 620. As a result, by changing the rotational position of each projection plate member 620, it is possible to form a display pattern of a plurality of patterns and patterns, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the player from being spoiled.

In the first embodiment, the case where the projection plate member 620 is rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the projection plate member 620 may be fixed and the irradiation unit 650 may be displaced. ..

In the third embodiment, the case where the light from the LED 651 is not incident on the center side from the side end portion of the projection plate member 3620 at the position where the bolt T is arranged has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the bolt T may be formed of a metal material (for example, iron or stainless steel) and the light projected on the side surface thereof may be reflected toward the center of the projection plate member 3620. In this case, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be easily focused on the central portion of the projection plate member 3620.

Further, a plurality of bolts T are arranged at regular intervals, and a portion where a pattern or a pattern is not displayed (the light of the LED 651 does not enter) is partially formed on the surface of the projection plate member 3620, and the projection plate member 3620 is provided. The display may be divided.

In addition, as described above, the grounding surface of the fastening portion of the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is a surface that overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65(c)). The place where no light is incident can be the ground plane.

That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when light is incident from the outer side in the radial direction of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T and the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the light that has entered the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 from entering the projection plate member 3620 side.

In this case, by displacing the irradiation unit 650 while irradiating the light of the LED 651 arranged on the irradiation unit 650, the player can visually recognize the projection plate member 620 as if the projection plate member 620 is displaced (rotated). ..

The displacement of the irradiation unit 650 in this case may be slide displacement or rotational displacement, and the irradiation directions of the LEDs 651 arranged in the first block 653 and the second block 654 are displaced in different directions. It may be one.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above-described embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 123. In the present first control example, an effect (variable effect) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol executed in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 and an effect for showing that the jackpot game is being executed ( The jackpot effect) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

In this control example, as the effect during the big hit game, when the big hit game is executed a plurality of times within a predetermined period, the big hit effect (continuous big hit effect) is executed across the plurality of big hit games. Is configured as follows. Specifically, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140, the entrance information can be stored, and when the jackpot game is executed, the stored entrance is stored. If it is determined that there is entry information that is won for the jackpot in the ball information, and if it is determined that there is entry information that is won for the jackpot, it will be possible to straddle multiple jackpot games. The continuous jackpot production is executed.

With this configuration, the contents of the jackpot production executed during the jackpot game can be used to give the player a hint as to the game result after the jackpot game currently being executed has ended. You can get interested in jackpot production.

Further, in the present control example, it is possible to change the contents of the jackpot performance based on not only the ball entry information stored at the timing when the jackpot game is executed but also the ball entry information newly stored during the jackpot game. It is configured to be possible. With such a configuration, it is possible to refer to more entry information, it is possible to easily execute the continuous jackpot effect, and it is possible to make the player interested in the jackpot effect.

In addition, in the present control example, as the big hit continuous effect, the contents of the big hit effect can be changed based on the number of stored (retention storage number) of the ball entry information at the time when the big hit game is executed. ing.

In addition, in this control example, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability, without electric support), the gaming state (probability change state (high probability, with electric support), time saving state (low probability, with electric support) )), an effect (battle effect) for indicating that the game state is continuing is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the game state advantageous to the player continues.

Further, the above-mentioned battle effect is composed of an effect (battle reach) that suggests whether or not the game state advantageous to the player ends, and an effect (pre-battle effect) for determining the effect mode of the battle reach. I am configuring. With such a configuration, when the gaming state that is advantageous to the player actually ends, for example, the battle effect continues in a period other than when the regular jackpot is won in which the gaming state shifts to the normal state after the jackpot is over. Since it can be executed by, it is possible to continue the player's feeling of expectation that the gaming state that is advantageous to the player continues, and the anxiety that makes the player think that the gaming state that is advantageous to the player has ended. You can play games while holding them.

Further, in this control example, as effects for suggesting that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, a plurality of effects having different jackpot expectations are executed. As a result, the player can have different expectations for the jackpot depending on which effect is executed. Further, it is configured such that a plurality of expectation suggestion modes capable of suggesting the jackpot expectation in stages can be displayed in one change effect, and the expectation suggestion modes can be changed during one change effect. ..

In addition, in the present control example, it is configured such that the expected degree variable suggestion effect that is suggested to the player is executed by adding together the amounts by which a plurality of expected degree suggestion modes are changed stepwise during one variation effect. ing. With such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player, who has grasped the effect contents of the expectation degree variable suggestion effect, to play the game while predicting which expectation degree suggestion mode is changed to what extent. Can be increased.

Furthermore, in the present control example, the specific effect (PUSH display effect) is used as a suggestive effect that suggests the timing at which the specific effect (for example, PUSH display effect that operates the frame button 22) executed during one variation effect is executed. ) Is specifically configured to execute a countdown effect that specifically notifies the timing of execution, and a precursor effect that notifies that the countdown effect is to be executed. Then, during one variation production, the start timing of the aforesaid production, the execution timing of the specific production, and the period of the countdown production can be determined from a plurality of times, and the aforesaid production of the aforesaid production can be performed based on the respective determined contents. The effect mode and the effect mode of the countdown effect are configured to be set.

With this configuration, the degree of freedom in setting the suggestive effect can be increased and the effect of the effect can be enhanced, as compared with the configuration in which the suggestive effect is executed for a predetermined fixed period.

First, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. 81. The third symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is composed of 10 types of main symbols imitating the numbers "0" to "9". .. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, when the lottery result by the main control device 110, which will be described later, is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, “777”), and a variable display is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display ends. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery by the main controller 110.

Specifically, in the main display area Dm, three symbol columns Z1, Z2, Z3 are displayed for each of left, middle and right. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and the variable symbols are scrolled from the top to the bottom to perform variable display.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line L1. If the third symbol is stopped in line with the combination of the jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the first control example) on the activated line, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the jackpot.

In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary, and the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, and each symbol The number of symbols in the row can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to the above, and, for example, a symbol in which an image such as a figure or a character and a number are combined may be configured as the third symbol. Furthermore, the area in which the third symbol is variably displayed may be varied, and for example, when a specific effect is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol is displayed. By reducing or moving the variable display area to a position where the player cannot easily see it (for example, a corner of the display screen), it becomes difficult for the player to understand whether or not the third symbol is changing. You may do so. Further, during the period when the special symbol is changing, the change of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporary stop) and then changed again.

A small display area Dn1 is formed at the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. In this small display area Dn1, a guide display mode for guiding the player in the direction of shooting the ball (game direction) is displayed (see FIG. 85(a)). That is, in this control example, the small display area Dn1 is used as the guide display area Dn1. With such a configuration, the player can easily recognize which area of the game board the ball should be shot by only visually recognizing the guide display mode displayed in the guide display area Dn1. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy for the player to understand.

A small display area Dn2 is formed at the upper right of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dn2 is configured to be able to simply display the variable display of the third symbol. Here, when performing variable display in the small display area Dn2, for example, in the main display area Dm, a display effect such as an effect in which a predetermined character performs an action or an effect that prompts the frame button 22 to be pressed is executed. That is the case. While the display effect is being executed, it is possible to provide a more easily understandable effect by displaying the effect in the larger main display area Dm. In addition, by easily displaying the variable display of the third symbol in the small display area Dn2 during execution of the display effect, it is easy for the player that the variable display of the third symbol is continuing. Can be understood.

As shown in FIG. 81A, a sub display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. In this sub-display area Ds, as shown in FIG. 81(b), a black circular reserved symbol is displayed. As described above, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entered balls is reserved up to 4 times. The number of held symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds is the same as the number of held balls. In the first control example, since the maximum value of the number of reserved balls is set to four, a maximum of four reserved symbols are displayed in the sub display area Ds.

In the present control example, the number of reserved symbols is made variable in correspondence with the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of reserved balls may be displayed as a number.

Furthermore, in the present control example, in addition, a game result suggesting mode for suggesting a game result (a lottery result of each symbol) to the player, and contents of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a presentation explanation mode for explaining, a frame button related display mode for indicating the timing and the result of the operation of the frame button 22, and a hit related information display mode in which information about a big hit game is displayed. The main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds are set to have different display area ratios depending on the contents displayed in the sub display area Ds.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the disengagement and there is a holding ball, after the stop display for 1 second, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, in the state where there is no reserved ball, if the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not executed is displayed. It is rare for a player to shoot a ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), but there is no ball in either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140. In many cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), because the player quits the game, and the pachinko machine 10 is not playing the game at all. caused by.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the new entrance is made. The variable display of the corresponding third symbol is executed.

The sub display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and the sphere which has not been changed among the spheres entered into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 140 ( This is an area for displaying the number of holding balls, which is the number of holding balls. As will be described later in detail, the sub display area Ds is divided into a first display area Ds1 and a second display area Ds2 for displaying game contents and effect contents to the player (FIG. 102 ( See a)). The pending symbol displayed in this sub-display area Ds, when the variable display being executed is finished and the next variation is started, the pending symbol corresponding to the next variation (the front view of FIG. 81(b)). The reserved symbol displayed on the leftmost in) is erased, and the remaining reserved symbols are displayed by shifting to the left.

Here, the symbol corresponding to the variable display being executed (the reserved symbol displayed on the leftmost side during the previous fluctuation) is the symbol display area being executed (the area in which the expectation display mode Dk1 of FIG. 102 is displayed). ) Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of which pending symbol the variable display being executed corresponds to.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 81(b), a total of nine main symbols and sub symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, at the right end and the left end (outside the effective line) of the main display area Dm, three main symbols and a part of the sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed, three each.

On the other hand, if the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, the number of entrances Are respectively held up to four times, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and is also displayed in the sub display area Ds. In the present control example, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the ball entering the second ball entrance 140 are each configured to be held up to four times at maximum, but the upper limit value of the number of hold balls is The number of times is not limited to four, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls for the ball entering the second ball entrance 140 are not limited to the same. The upper limit value of the number of reserved balls for entering the first entrance 64 may be larger than the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the second entrance 140, or conversely may be smaller. Good. Further, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the sub-display area Ds, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, it may be displayed in a color or a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Next, the flow of each effect executed in the first control example will be roughly described with reference to FIGS. 82(a) and 82(b). 82(a) and 82(b) are timing charts schematically showing the relationship between the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 and the effect contents executed by the third symbol display device 81.

As shown in FIG. 82(a), in the present control example, different effects are executed depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, when the gaming state is "normal", that is, when the gaming state is a big hit, or when the gaming state is a normal state that is not in the probability variation state or the time saving state, the normal effect is executed and the gaming state is the "big hit". If the game state is "probable change or time saving", that is, if the game state is the probability change state or time saving state, during the probability change (during the probability changing state or time saving state) Middle) Performance is executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily understand the currently set game state simply by looking at the effect being executed, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine. In this control example, each effect is configured to be executed in association with the game state, but, for example, a common effect that can be executed when a plurality of game states are set may be provided. .. This allows the player to predict the currently set game state by visually checking the effect being executed, and expects that the game state advantageous to the player is set. Can be played by a person.

Further, in FIG. 82, it is explained that the effect contents (display contents) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 differ depending on the game state, but the aspect included in the effect contents is the third symbol. The present invention is not limited to the display mode displayed on the display device 81, and naturally includes, for example, a sound output mode output by the audio output device 226 and a lamp light emission mode executed by the lamp display device 227. is there.

First, the effect executed during the jackpot game will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. First, in the present control example, the number of special symbol holding balls and the contents of the entrance information stored on hold at the time when the jackpot game is executed (for example, whether or not there is entrance information that has been won per hit) Based on the result), the content of the effect executed during the jackpot game is set.

Specifically, when a plurality of jackpot games are continuously executed, an effect that partially informs the contents of the previous jackpot game (first jackpot game) (for example, 15 round jackpot games are executed. In the case of, the jackpot medium performance 1 that is performed by continuously executing the effect of notifying the number of rounds for 5 rounds over a plurality of jackpots, so that a plurality of jackpot games are continuously executed. , Execute the effect corresponding to each jackpot game, between the plurality of jackpot games (during the special symbol variation period that is performed in the period until the previous jackpot game is finished, the next jackpot game is executed) By continuously displaying the ending effect of the big hit game, a big hit medium effect 2 that produces as if a plurality of big hit games are continuously executed, and at the time when the previous big hit game is executed, The big hit medium performance 3 that notifies that the big hit game is executed and executes the continuous effect for a plurality of big hit games is configured to be settable.

Here, with reference to FIG. 83(a), the content of the above-described big hit mid-sized effect 1 will be described. FIG. 83( a) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the big hit mid-stage effect 1. As shown in FIG. 83(a), during the jackpot game 1, when the jackpot game (jackpot 1) is executed, the number of holding balls is "3" (a state where a new holding ball can be obtained during the jackpot game). In addition, it is a big hit mid-stage effect that can be set when the already-acquired holding balls include the information on the winning ball that has been won.

When the big hit medium production 1 is set, when the previous big hit game (big hit 1 ((15 rounds (R))) is executed, first, a part of the number of rounds of the big hit 1 (5 rounds (R )) showing a big hit game effect (5R effect).After that, until the next big hit game (big hit 2 (10 rounds (R))) is finished, the 5R effect is continuously executed and the total. Is set so that the jackpot game effect for 25R is executed.

In other words, instead of setting the effect contents (effect scenario) executed during one jackpot game as a series of effect contents (effect scenario), it is set in units of a predetermined period (for example, 5 rounds). The new effect contents (scenario) are set based on the incoming ball information that is held and stored at that time.

Explaining in detail with reference to FIG. 83(a), when the jackpot 1 (15R) is started, the 5R effect 1 (see FIG. 85(a)) is executed. When this 5R effect is started, an effect (notification of the number of confirmed rounds) for informing the player that the jackpot game will continue for at least 5 rounds is executed. Then, when the jackpot game progresses to the 4th R, a suggestive effect (see FIG. 85(b)) that indicates whether or not the next 5R effect will be executed is executed, and in the 5th R, the 5R effect is executed next. A notification effect (see FIG. 86(a)) for notifying the result of whether or not to perform is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 83A, the 15R big hit is set as the first big hit, and thus the 5R effect is executed three times. Here, the 5R effect executed for the third time (5R effect 3) is a period until the second big hit to be executed next is started, that is, the ending period of the first big hit and the first big hit. It is set to be executed even during the fluctuation period of the special symbol fluctuation executed after the end (see FIG. 87(a) and FIG. 88(a)). Then, together with the start of the second big hit (the start of the second big hit opening period), the 5R effect 4 is executed.

Due to this, a new pending storage occurs during the jackpot game, and if the pending storage contains entry information corresponding to the jackpot of the special symbol, based on the entry information (for example, the number of rounds). It is possible to set a new effect (additional round number display). Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the contents of the jackpot production executed during the jackpot are set as a series of rendering scenarios, it is possible to easily change the presentation (the number of rounds to be added) executed during the jackpot. ..

In addition, in FIG. 83(a), an example in which a period of five rounds is set as one effect unit during a big hit game is shown, but the effect contents may be set for each round. Further, it may be configured such that a discrimination management process for discriminating the content of the ball entry information is performed for each round and the effect content is set for each predetermined round (for example, every five rounds). Also, when new ball entry information is generated, the content of the ball entry information is determined, and the information (whether or not to hit the jackpot, the number of rounds) used when setting the effect content during the jackpot is stored in the storage area. It may be configured to.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing load from temporarily increasing at the timing (every five rounds in FIG. 83(a)) at which the effect contents during the big hit game are set.

Here, the display content of the big hit medium effect 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 88. FIG. 85(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed immediately after the big hit medium effect 1 is executed, and FIG. 85(b) is executed in the big hit medium effect 1. FIG. 86(a) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of an effect display for indicating whether or not the 5R effect continues. FIG. 86(a) is an effect display for indicating that a new 5R effect is executed. 86(b) is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen in a round one before the jackpot 1 ends, and FIG. 87(a) is a schematic view showing one example of the display screen. Fig. 87(b) is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen showing that the jackpot will continue during the ending period of one jackpot, and Fig. 87(b) is a display showing that the jackpot ends during the ending period of one jackpot. FIG. 88A is a schematic diagram showing an example of a screen, and FIG. 88A is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen during the change of the special symbol after the jackpot 1 ends.

As shown in FIG. 85(a), when the big hit medium effect 1 is executed, the characters of "big hit" indicating that the big hit and "777" indicating that the big hit has been won by the lottery of the special symbol are shown. The third symbol stopped and displayed in is displayed in the main display area Dm. Then, in the small display area (guidance display area) Dn1 of the main display area Dm, the character "right hit" is displayed to guide the ball to be shot in the right hit area, and the main display area Dm is viewed from the front. On the upper right side, in a round number display area Dm2 for notifying the player of the number of rounds of the big hit game, a running round number display mode Dm3 indicating the number of rounds currently being executed, and it is confirmed that the rounds are to be executed. A confirmed round number display mode Dm4 indicating the number of confirmed rounds is displayed.

In the present control example, as the big hit medium effect 1, a 5 round (R) effect that notifies the player in advance that at least 5 rounds of the big hit game will be executed is executed, and therefore, it is shown in FIG. 85(a). Thus, "5" is displayed as the confirmed round number display mode Dm4.

Then, when the number of rounds of the jackpot game (the number-of-execution rounds display mode Dm3) becomes "4", as shown in FIG. 85(b), an additional effect to be executed in the next round (fifth round) (Fig. A production (see jackpot continuation production) that suggests the content of 86(a) is executed. In this control example, selected images Dm5 to Dm7 simulating "treasure box" are displayed as a display mode selectable by the player, and selected image Dm8 simulating "arrow" is selected image Dm5. It is displayed so as to correspond to each of Dm7. The player selects one of the three “treasure boxes” displayed by selecting one of the selected images Dm8 displayed corresponding to the selected images Dm5 to Dm7. Select "Treasure Box".

Although a detailed description is omitted, in this control example, one of the three “arrows” that is the selected image Dm8 is displayed so that the display mode of one “arrow” is regularly changed. The selected images Dm5 to Dm7 corresponding to the changed display mode (variable display mode Dm9) are the selected images selected by the player, and the player has changed the arbitrary arrow to the variable display mode Dm9. In this case, the frame button 22 is operated to select an arbitrary selected image.

It should be noted that the method for the player to select an arbitrary selected image is not limited to the contents described above, and other configurations may be used. For example, it may be configured to be selectable by touching a display area of an arbitrary selected image among the selected images Dm5 to Dm7 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the player may select a frame. The selection image Dm8 having the variable display mode Dm9 may be selected by operating the button 22.

Furthermore, in this control example, the same display mode is displayed as the display modes of the selected images Dm5 to Dm7, but different display modes may be displayed for each selected image. In this case, when the selected image having a display mode different from the normal one is displayed, it may be configured to facilitate execution of the next 5R effect. As a result, the expectation that the jackpot game will continue at the stage when the selected image is displayed can be increased, and the player can be eager to participate in the game.

When the number of rounds of the big hit game enters the fifth round in the state where the selected image Dm5 is selected, the screen shown in FIG. 86(a) is displayed. In FIG. 86(a), only the "treasure box" (selected image Dm5) selected in the jackpot continuation effect executed in the fourth round of the jackpot game is displayed, and the number of confirmed rounds is displayed from the "treasure box". “+5” is displayed as the additional round number display mode Dm10 to be added to the mode Dm4, and the additional effect in which the value of the fixed round number display mode Dm4 is variably displayed from “5” to “10” is displayed.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the jackpot game will continue for at least the next five rounds. In addition, in FIG. 86(a), the display screen when “+5” is displayed as the additional round number display mode Dm10 is shown, but in the jackpot continuous effect (see FIG. 85(b)), the selected image selected The contents of the additional round number display mode Dm10 are set to be different according to the above. As a result, the player can be actively involved in the jackpot continuous production.

Further, in the present control example, the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 is displayed with a numerical value corresponding to the number of rounds, but among the remaining number of rounds of the jackpot game set internally, the number of rounds to be displayed on the display screen. It suffices as long as it is a display mode that can be changed corresponding to, and a display mode that uses an abstract expression such as the motion of the character and the color and size may be used. In this way, by using the abstract display mode as the confirmed round number display mode Dm4, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of allowing the player to predict the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot game.

In addition, since the player who has been playing the game for a long time can grasp the regularity of the display mode using the abstract expression, it becomes easier to grasp the contents of the jackpot game than other players, Satisfaction can be increased. In this case, as the contents of the big hit game, the number of rounds of each big hit game is displayed in the big hit medium performance in which the effect that the first big hit and the second big hit are continuously executed is executed. It may be possible to be grasped by the regularity of the mode.

With such a configuration, it is possible to predict whether or not a game state advantageous to the player is set after the second big hit game, in particular, by the number of rounds of the second big hit game. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player who is playing the game for a long time with more advantageous game information than the other players, and it is possible to increase the motivation to play the game for a long time.

In FIG. 86(a), "+5" is displayed as the additional round number display mode Dm10 that is added to the fixed round number display mode Dm4 while the fifth round game is being executed, and the fixed round number is displayed. Although the example in which the value of the display mode Dm4 is variably displayed from "5" to "10" is shown, the timing at which the additional round number display mode Dm10 is displayed is a timing other than during the round game, that is, 5 rounds. The effect contents may be set such that the inter-round interval period is a period until the sixth round game is started after the sixth round game is completed.

Further, a means for determining the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 in the jackpot continuation effect shown in FIG. 85(b) is provided, and the operation timing is a predetermined period (for example, after the operation of the frame button 22 becomes effective. If it is within 3 seconds), the additional round number display mode Dm10 is displayed during the round game of the fifth round, and the operation timing is a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds after the operation of the frame button 22 becomes effective). When the number of rounds is exceeded or when no operation is performed, the number-of-rounds display mode Dm10 may be displayed in the inter-round interval period after the end of the fifth round.

In this way, by varying the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 and the timing at which the additional round number display mode Dm10 is displayed based on the presence/absence of the operation, the player voluntarily participates in the production. It is possible to enhance the effect of production. It should be noted that the player may be configured to change the timing of displaying the additional round number display mode Dm10 based on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22 and the presence/absence of the operation, and for example, predetermined timing (round game of the fourth round). It is also possible to provide a discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the player has operated the frame button 22 for a specific one second), and to change the timing of displaying the additional round number display mode Dm10 based on the discrimination result. .. Further, only when the operation content for the frame button 22 satisfies a predetermined operation condition (for example, the frame button 22 is operated during a specific second during the fourth round of the game), the additional round number display mode Dm10 The values displayed in may be different.

Next, the effect contents for showing a plurality of (two) jackpot games to be continuously executed, that is, a special from the end of the first jackpot game to the start of the second jackpot game The effect contents during the symbol variation period will be described with reference to FIGS. 86(b) and 87(a).

First, as shown in FIG. 86(b), the jackpot continuation effect is executed based on the start of the round immediately preceding the final round of the first jackpot game (the 14th round). In FIG. 86(b), an effect mode different from the jackpot continuous effect shown in FIG. 85(b) is shown, and the number and the display mode of the selected images displayed on the display screen are different. Specifically, the number of selected images is changed from three to two, and a more luxurious display mode than usual is set as the display mode of the selected image Dm5. In this way, by changing the effect mode of the jackpot continuous effect, it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will continue depending on the effect mode of the jackpot continuous effect that is executed. Therefore, the player pays attention to the effect contents, and the effect effect can be enhanced.

In FIG. 86(b), in order to explain the variation of the jackpot continuous production, a production mode different from that of FIG. 85(b) is shown, but the jackpot continuous production corresponding to the final round of the first jackpot game (14 As the jackpot continuation effect executed in the round), naturally the same effect mode as in FIG. 85(b) is also set. In this way, by using the same effect mode for the big hit continuous effect executed during the first big hit game and the big hit continuous effect executed at the end of the first big hit game, the first time at any timing It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not the jackpot game has been finished (how many rounds the jackpot of the first time was).

In addition to the jackpot continuous effect setting method described above, for example, in accordance with the selected image (“treasure box”) selected in the jackpot continuous effect, this jackpot continuous effect is executed in the final round of the jackpot game. It may be configured to suggest to the player that it is a jackpot continuous production.

When the final round (15th round) is performed in a state where the selected image Dm5 is selected in the jackpot continuation effect shown in FIG. 86(b), the same display as the additional effect shown in FIG. 86(a) is executed. As shown in FIG. 87A, the display is continuously displayed during the ending period after the end of the final round. Then, when the ending period of the jackpot is over (the jackpot is over) and the variation of the special symbol is started, the display screen shown in FIG. 88(a) is displayed.

This FIG. 88 (a) is an example of a display screen during the period when the first big hit game is over and the special symbol is changing. As shown in FIG. 88(a), even after the first big hit game is finished (after the variation of the special symbol is started), the display of the added effect is continuously executed. In the small display area Dn2, the variation of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is displayed. Then, when the variation of the special symbol which is a big hit is stopped, a combination of symbols (for example, "777") for indicating that the big hit is won is stopped and displayed in the small display area Dn2, and an additional effect display is executed. The next jackpot game is started while maintaining the state.

In the present control example, when the bonus effect is set as the effect in the big hit, the number of rounds set in the big hit being executed and the next big hit which becomes the in-hold consort (the big hit that is stored on hold) ) And the number of rounds set in ), the display mode of the added effect can be set. Therefore, before the next jackpot to be the in-hold holidays is started, that is, 1 It is possible to display the additional round number display mode Dm10 including the number of rounds set for the next big hit during the first big hit.

In the above example, the period from the final round of jackpot until the next jackpot is won (until the next jackpot is won and the opening game period of the jackpot elapses until the first round game is executed. During the period), the example of the effect in which the additional effect is continuously displayed is shown, but other effects may be used, for example, the additional effect is completed in the final round (15th round), and during the ending period (Fig. 87(a)), and during the special symbol variation period (see FIG. 88(a)), a blessing effect may be executed to celebrate that the number of rounds has been added, or the final round (15) Round)), and during the ending period (see FIG. 87 (a)) to complete the addition effect, during the special symbol variation period (see FIG. 88 (a)), to celebrate the addition of the number of rounds May be executed, and in the final round (15th round), the jackpot continuation effect executed in the 14th round (see FIG. 86(b)) is continuously displayed and during the ending period (FIG. 87). (See (a)), and during the special symbol variation period (see FIG. 88 (a)), the additional effect may be executed.

In the case of executing the above-mentioned blessing effect, the round next to the round in which the additional effect (for example, the additional effect executed in the fifth round (see FIG. 86(a))) is executed during one big hit ( For example, the same blessing effect may be executed in the sixth round). As a result, it is difficult for the player to grasp how many big hits have been won while the additional effect is being executed, that is, a mode of additional effect that is executed during one big hit and 2 It is possible to make the effect mode of the additional effect that is executed between the two jackpots the same (the same except for an error that is difficult for the player to identify).

On the other hand, when there is no round number to be added by the addition effect, "+0" is displayed as the addition round number display mode Dm10 and the value of the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 is "15" as shown in FIG. 87(b). Is not changed, and the comment “Sorry jackpot end” is displayed in the main display area Dm and the jackpot ends.

In addition, this control example is configured so that a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) is set as an interval period between round games (interval period between rounds) executed during a jackpot game, but other than that. The configuration may be used, for example, the number of big hit rounds may be the same or the interval between rounds may be different depending on the type of big hit. In this case, as the inter-round interval set during one big hit, the inter-round interval before the end of a round of a multiple of 5 (for example, the inter-round interval set between 5 rounds and 6 rounds) is set to 5 Seconds, the jackpot type that sets the interval between rounds to 2 seconds, and the interval between two rounds before the round that is a multiple of 5 starts (for example, the round that is set between 3 and 4 rounds). It is advisable to provide a jackpot type in which the inter-round interval is set to 5 seconds and the other inter-round intervals are set to 2 seconds.

Further, as described above, when using the jackpot type in which the interval between rounds is different, it is preferable to switch the effect during the jackpot at the timing when the interval between rounds for a long period is set. Further, when performing a big hit mid-hit with a predetermined period (for 5 rounds) as one unit as in this control example, from the start of the big hit (start of the opening period of the big hit, or start of the first round) Since the interval until the long-term inter-round interval is initially set (for example, the end of the third round) is less than one unit of the performance during the big hit, the performance other than the additional performance is configured to be executed. Good to do.

Further, in the present control example, a certain period (for example, 1 second) is set as the jackpot ending period regardless of the jackpot type, but the jackpot set for this ending period is also set. It may be configured to be different for each type, or may be configured to be different for the set jackpot type even for the opening period of the jackpot.

In this way, the contents of the big hit game (the number of rounds of the big hit game) are the same, but the opening period, the interval interval between rounds, and the ending period set for the big hit should be made different according to the set big hit type. By configuring the big hit medium performance so as to straddle a plurality of big hit games, how many times the jackpot is won while the single big hit medium performance is being executed for the player. Can be difficult to grasp.

In addition, if the period from the end of the previous jackpot to win the next jackpot is different, that is, if the next jackpot is won by the special symbol fluctuation of the first rotation after the end of the jackpot. And, in the case of winning the next jackpot in the special symbol fluctuation of the third rotation, even if the special symbol fluctuation period executed during the jackpot is different, the opening period set for the jackpot, the inter-round interval period, By configuring the ending period to be different according to the set jackpot type, it is possible to execute the jackpot midfield effect without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

Next, returning to FIG. 83(b), the content of the above-described big hit medium effect 2 will be described. FIG. 83B is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the big hit mid-stage effect 2. As shown in FIG. 83(b), during the jackpot game 2, the number of holding balls is "2" when the jackpot game (jackpot 1) is executed (a new holding ball can be obtained during the jackpot game). In addition, it is a big hit medium performance that can be set when the already-acquired reserved balls do not include the winning ball information on winning.

When the big hit medium effect 2 is set, when the previous big hit game (big hit 1 ((15 rounds (R))) is executed, the big hit game effect (15R The effect is executed, and the ending effect displayed during the ending period set at the end of the jackpot game, after the jackpot 1 is over, the next jackpot (jackpot 2 (10 rounds (R))) When the jackpot 2 is executed, the effect content is switched from the ending effect to the 10R effect.

This big hit mid-stage production 2 is such that a plurality of consecutive big hit games are continuously executed when the hitting information corresponding to the hit ball newly acquired during the big hit game is included. To produce. In other words, the jackpot game effect corresponding to the jackpot 1 is a normal jackpot game effect (15R effect), and it is continuous only by changing the content of the ending effect based on the incoming information of the reserved ball newly acquired during the jackpot game. It is possible to produce a plurality of jackpot games to be continuously executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to set an effect (continuous jackpot effect) in which a plurality of jackpot gaming machines are continuously executed, based on the holding ball obtained during the jackpot game, so that a jackpot effect is continuously played. It can be executed easily and the effect of production can be enhanced. Further, even if the normal jackpot game effect is executed, the player can play the jackpot game while expecting to shift to the continuous jackpot effect.

Here, the effect contents displayed between the two big hits in the big hit medium effect 2 (see FIG. 83(b)) will be described with reference to FIGS. 88(b) to 89(b). FIG. 88(b) is a diagram schematically showing the ending display displayed during the ending period of the first big hit, and FIG. 89(a) shows that the first big hit ends and the variation of the special symbol starts. It is the figure which shows the display screen in the state where it is done, the figure 89 (b) it is the figure which shows the display screen in the state where the big hit of the special design is elected typically.

As shown in FIG. 88(b), in the ending display displayed during the ending period of the first big hit, information for indicating the number of rounds of this big hit and the number of balls acquired during the big hit in the main display area Dm. (Acquired points) is displayed. Then, when the jackpot game ends and the variation of the special symbol is started, the ending display is continuously displayed and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is suggested to the player as shown in FIG. 89(a). In the number-of-rounds display area Dm2 for execution, the number-of-execution-rounds display mode Dm3 indicating the number of currently-executed rounds and the determined-number-of-rounds display mode Dm4 indicating the number of confirmed rounds to be executed are a big hit. It is continuously displayed in the same manner as. In addition, a small display area Dn2 for displaying the variation of the third symbol, a hold execution area Dn3, and a hold symbol display area Dn4 are displayed. In FIG. 89(a), in the reserved symbol display area Dn4, the second reserved symbol from the left (a reserved symbol in which 3 is attached to a circle that is variably displayed one after another) wins the jackpot. It shows the state.

Then, when the special jackpot jackpot is won (when the variable display of the reserved symbols with a circle 3 is stopped), the jackpot continues in the main display area Dm as shown in FIG. 89(b) ( A comment "The big jackpot is still going on" is displayed to notify that a new jackpot will be started), and the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 is displayed so as to show the round number "10" of the second big jackpot. The value is variably displayed from "15" to "25". Further, in the small display area Dn2, the combination “777” of the third symbols showing that the big hit is won is stopped and displayed.

The content of the effect executed in the big hit medium effect 2 has been described above, but a similar effect may be used for the big hit medium effect 1. In other words, in the above-mentioned big hit medium effect 1, since the effect using a plurality of rounds is executed as the big hit continuous effect, for example, during the final round of the first big hit or during the ending period after the end of the final big hit, When a new holding ball including the incoming ball information to be won is acquired, it is difficult to execute the big hit mid-stage production so as to stride over a plurality of big hits. In such a case, by performing the same effect as the above-described big hit medium effect 2, it is possible to smoothly execute the big hit medium effect so as to straddle a plurality of big hits.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84(a), the contents of the above-described big hit mid-sized effect 3 will be described. FIG. 84(a) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the big hit medium effect 3. As shown in FIG. 84(a), during the big hit game (big hit 1), the number of holding balls is "4" (a state where a new holding ball cannot be obtained during the big hit game). ), and it is a big hit medium performance that can be set when the winning ball information of the winning is included in the reserved balls already acquired.

When the big hit medium performance 3 is set, when the previous big hit game (big hit 1 ((15 rounds (R))) is executed, the next big hit game (big hit 2 (10 rounds (R))) The jackpot game effect (25R effect) in which the game content of is also integrated is executed.

This big jackpot production 3 is a state in which it is not possible to newly acquire a reserved ball during a big jackpot game, that is, a state in which it is possible to determine whether or not to continuously win the jackpot at the timing when the jackpot 1 is executed. Is a performance executed in. When the big hit medium performance 3 is executed, it is possible to notify the player of the success of the big hits in succession, to give the player a sense of security, and to newly hold it during the big hit game. It is possible to prevent the player from excessively expecting to win the jackpot in succession because the above-described big jackpot performance 2 is executed in a state where the ball cannot be obtained.

As described above, in the present control example, in the case where the jackpot is continuously won within the predetermined period (reserved storage), a jackpot for making it appear that a plurality of jackpot games are continuously executed. Prepared a plurality of medium performances, configured to set the big bonus medium performance to be executed based on the determination result of the special symbol holding ball at the time when the previous jackpot game is executed and the stored entry information doing.

Further, the plurality of jackpot mid-stage effects have different timings for successively notifying the player that the jackpot has been won. As a result, you can enjoy the jackpot game to the end while expecting to win the jackpot in succession.

This control example, when the jackpot game is executed in the state where there is a vacancy in the number of reserved storage of special symbols (a state in which newly held storage is possible during the jackpot game), corresponds to the jackpot of the special symbol during the jackpot game Even if the pending symbols are stored on hold, it is possible to execute a big hit mid-game to make it appear that a plurality of jackpot games will be continuously executed. Therefore, the jackpot is stored on hold when the jackpot game is executed. Compared to the case of determining the big hit mid-sized effect based on the information, the big hit mid-sized effect for making it appear that a plurality of big hitting games are continuously executed can be easily executed, and the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, as one of a plurality of big hit medium-sized productions, since it is possible to partially inform the player by dividing the number of rounds to be executed in the previous big hitting game into a plurality of rounds, this big-winning medium-sized production is performed once. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether it is an effect executed in the jackpot game or an effect executed over a plurality of jackpot games. Therefore, it is possible to let the player play the game while expecting that the jackpot game will continue for a long time.

In this control example, during the special symbol fluctuation period after the end of the jackpot game, as in the normal special symbol fluctuation period, a small display area Dn2 for displaying the fluctuation of the third symbol, a holding execution area Dn3, or the like. Although the configuration for displaying the reserved symbol display area Dn4 on the third symbol display device 81 is used, a configuration other than that may be used, for example, a condition that the jackpot continuous production is executed during the special symbol variation period is established. Provided with a means for determining whether or not, if it is determined that the condition that the jackpot continuation effect is executed is satisfied by the means, even during the special symbol variation period, the variable display of the third symbol and the above-mentioned reserved symbol It is advisable to execute processing that does not display related information, or execute processing that makes it difficult for the player to grasp the contents (for example, reduced display or movement of the display area).

With this configuration, the player grasps the end timing of the first big hit game and the start timing of the second big hit game based on the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It can be hard to be done.

Also, during an interval between rounds in the first jackpot game, a pseudo ending display, a pseudo variable display that changes a pseudo symbol that imitates the third symbol, and a pseudo that stops the changing pseudo symbol with a combination corresponding to the jackpot. After the stop display and the pseudo stop display, a pseudo game execution means for executing the pseudo jackpot start display is provided, and while one jackpot game is being executed, a pseudo jackpot is executed a plurality of times. You may comprise so that performance may be performed. With this configuration, the special symbol (this symbol) displayed on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b at the time of winning the first jackpot is the special symbol (this symbol) corresponding to how many rounds of jackpot game. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect in the big hit performed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84(b), another example of the big hit medium effect 1 will be described. FIG. 84(b) is a timing chart showing the content of another example of the big hit medium effect 1. In this another example, with respect to the content shown in FIG. 83(a), the content of the addition effect is changed from the 5R effect to the 10R effect, and the winning prize at the start of the jackpot (in the winning information storage area 223a). The difference is that the presence/absence of winning information indicating the winning) is different.

Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 84(b), the jackpot 1 (15R) is started in a state where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2) is "1" and there is no winning. The 10R effect 1 is executed as the first additional effect. Then, while the 10R effect 1 is being executed, a new reserved ball that includes winning entry information that is won is acquired (the number of reserved balls becomes “2”). In the jackpot continuation effect, an effect indicating that the 10R effect 2 is executed is executed by using the number of rounds obtained by adding the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot 2.

By executing such an effect, one additional effect is executed so as to stride over a plurality of jackpots (one additional effect is executed in a period from 11R for a large jackpot to 5R for a large jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of rounds set for one jackpot. Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 84(b), 10R effect 1 is executed as the additional effect to be executed across a plurality of jackpots, and thus 10R effect 1 and 10R effect 2 are executed. After that, the same 5R effect 5 as in FIG. 83(a) described above can be executed, and the data used for the additional effect can be made common.

It should be noted that FIG. 83(a) or FIG. 84(b) shows an example of the additional effects, and the additional effects other than the contents exemplified above are also executed. Specifically, in addition to 5R effect using a period of 5 rounds, 10R effect using a period of 10 rounds, 7R effect using a period of 7 rounds or 8 rounds 8R effect and the like using a period is configured to be executable.

In this way, by using a plurality of effects corresponding to different numbers of rounds as an effect for addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of rounds to be executed during one jackpot, and to the player. While predicting how long (up to how many rounds) this jackpot will continue, it is possible to let the player play the game with the expectation that it will continue for a long time.

In addition, a gaming state set at the time when the big hit medium performance 1 executed corresponding to a single or a plurality of big hits is finished, that is, the big hit type of the last big jackpot corresponding to the big hit medium performance 1 (probable variation big hit). , Normal jackpot), it may be configured to change the effect to be added to be executed, for example, when it is determined that the game state set at the time when the jackpot medium effect 1 is finished is a probability change state. In addition, it is easy to set an addition effect (for example, 10R effect) corresponding to a long number of rounds as an addition effect executed in the early stage of the big hit medium effect 1, or at the time when the big hit medium effect 1 ends. You may comprise so that the additional production (for example, 7R production) performed only when the set game state is a probability change state may be performed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to cause the player to predict both the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot and the game state set after the jackpot, by the added-on effect to be performed. Can be increased.

Returning to FIG. 82, the description will be continued. In the present control example, when the game state becomes a game state that is advantageous to the player (probably changing state or time saving state), a specific effect (probability changing effect or time saving medium effect (hereinafter referred to as high accuracy medium effect). )) is executed. The period during which the high-precision medium production is executed is a period in which a predetermined production (battle production) is repeatedly executed, and whether or not the game state advantageous to the player is finished based on the result of the battle production. The effect of notifying the player is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 90 to FIG. 97, the content of the high-probability medium effect (continuous effect) will be described in detail. FIG. 90 is a high-precision medium performance that is continuously executed until the jackpot is won in the flow of the high-precision medium performance (continuous performance) that is executed when the game state is in the advantageous state (probability change state or time saving state). It is a timing chart showing an effect (continuous effect). As shown in FIG. 90, the battle effect is repeatedly executed during the high-accuracy medium effect (continuous effect). The battle effect is a battle reach (refer to FIGS. 93 to 96) in which an effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous state (probability change state or time saving state) is finished is executed in a period of one rotation of the special figure variation (see FIGS. 93 to 96 ). The effect for varying the display mode when the battle reach is executed is composed of a pre-battle effect (see FIGS. 91 and 92) executed in a period corresponding to a plurality of special figure fluctuation rotations.

Although detailed effect contents will be described later, in battle reach, an effect (attack effect) for reducing the HP value (continuous value) of the own character and the opponent character is executed a plurality of times (three times), and the own character HP value (continuation value) of "0" (in the case of battle reach of defeat pattern), the end condition of the advantageous state (winning the jackpot to end the advantageous state, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is saved When the HP value (continuation value) of the opponent's character becomes “0” (in the case of battle reach of winning pattern), it indicates that the jackpot has been won in the advantageous state. When the mutual HP values (continuous values) do not become "0" (in the case of the battle reach of the draw pattern), it indicates that the high-probability medium effect continues.

In the pre-battle effect, an effect of increasing or decreasing the HP value (continuation value) of the opponent character at the time when the battle reach is started is executed. This pre-battle effect is configured such that the effect mode is set based on the look-ahead result of the reserved symbols and the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly set, and based on the effect mode, a plurality of special symbol variations are set. The used HP management is executed.

FIG. 91(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 when the battle effect is started as a high-precision medium effect (continuous effect). When the battle effect is started, first, the pre-battle effect, which is the first half part of the battle effect, is executed. This pre-battle effect is executed to increase or decrease the continuous value (HP value) of the opponent in the battle reach, which is the second half of the battle effect.

As shown in FIG. 91(a), when the pre-battle effect is executed, a boy character Dm11 is displayed on the left side of the center of the main display area Dm and an opponent for selecting an opponent candidate for battle reach. The selection mode is displayed. In this opponent selection mode, selection units Dm13 to Dm16 corresponding to four types of characters A to D are displayed as opponent candidates to be opponents of battle reach, and one of the selection units is selected. Note that FIG. 91A shows a state in which the selection unit Dm13 corresponding to the character A is selected.

Further, on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, an HP display area Dm17 showing continuous values (HP values) corresponding to the four types of characters A to D is displayed. The HP display area Dm17 is formed of a display unit that indicates the HP value with a horizontally long gauge and a display unit (Dm18) that indicates the HP value. The value (display mode) displayed in the HP display area Dm17 is variably displayed so as to be changed (decreased) according to the attack on the opponent during the pre-battle performance.

In the pre-battle effect, when the opponent is selected, the screen shown in FIG. 92(a) is displayed next, the effect of decreasing the HP value of the opponent is executed, and is selected and displayed in the HP display area Dm17. A display for identifying the HP display corresponding to the opponent character (a circle for the character A) is made. This allows the player to easily understand the HP value of the currently selected opponent character.

Further, during the pre-battle effect, only the effect of decreasing the HP value of the opponent character is executed, and the HP value of itself (the character Dm11) does not decrease. As a result, until the Battle Reach is executed, the HP value of the opponent will not decrease as a result of the effect of attacking the opponent, so it is expected that many effects of attacking the opponent will be executed. You can play while playing. In addition, since the HP value of the player (character Dm11) is not displayed on the screen during the pre-battle performance, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling anxious that the HP value of the player will decrease as a result of the performance performed. can do.

In addition, the presentation mode of the pre-battle effect is not limited to the above-described content, and the effect of displaying the HP value of the player and decreasing the HP value of the player may be executed, or the HP value of the player or the opponent. You may perform the effect which increases the HP value of. In addition, in the pre-battle production that is the first part of the battle production, the HP value of the opponent is decreased to "0", and the jackpot (probably a change after the jackpot is completed, or without performing the battle reach that is the second part of the battle production. , A jackpot to which a time saving state is given) may be executed.

In FIG. 92A, an attack (main attack effect) that reduces HP by “200” is performed on the character ADm13, so that the display portion Dm18a corresponding to the character A in the HP display area Dm17 is displayed in the main display area Dm. It is variably displayed as "800" according to the effect contents.

On the other hand, in the display example shown in FIG. 92B, in addition to the effect (main attack effect) in which the character (character Dm11) makes an attack (main attack effect), the cat character Dm20 appears and performs an additional attack (sub-attack effect). Is also executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 92B, an attack is performed on the character ADm13 to reduce HP by “230”, and the display portion Dm18c corresponding to the character C in the HP display area Dm17 is displayed in the main display area Dm. It is variably displayed as "770" corresponding to the effect contents.

As shown in FIG. 92(b), during the pre-battle performance, the opponent may be changed on the way, and when the opponent is changed, the current opponent can be identified. The HP display area Dm18 is displayed (circle mark on the character A).

Here, a method of setting the HP value that decreases due to the attack effect will be briefly described. In this control example, based on the special symbol lottery result and the preliminary determination result (pre-reading result) of the entering information that is held and stored, the result of the battle effect and the rough effect contents (HP value The reduction value (100's place) and the main attack effect) are determined. Then, for the purpose of diversifying the effect type with respect to the effect contents (the decrease value of the HP value and the main attack effect) determined by the continuation value management means, the effect setting means determines the lottery result or the prefetch result. It is configured such that detailed effect contents (a decrease value of HP value (10's place) and sub attack effect) are determined without being affected.

Then, the continuous value (HP value) determined by the continuous value management means is stored, and the continuous value (HP value) is increased or decreased by using the continuous value management means with respect to the stored continuous value (HP value). I am configuring.

Specifically, in FIG. 92(a) described above, the effect (main attack effect) that reduces the continuous value (HP value) by 200 is set by the continuous value management means, and the continuous value (HP value) is set by the effect setting means. The example of a display when the content which does not increase or decrease a value is shown, and the main attack effect (attack effect of character Dm11) which reduces the continuous value (HP value) of the opponent character ADm13 by 200 is performed as a pre-battle effect. There is.

On the other hand, in FIG. 92(b) described above, the effect (main attack effect) that reduces the continuous value (HP value) by 200 is set by the continuous value management unit, and the continuous value (HP value) is set by 20 by the effect setting unit. The example of a display when the production (sub-attack production) to decrease is shown is shown, and in addition to the main attack production (attack production of character Dm11) which reduces the continuation value (HP value) of opponent character ADm13 by 200, the opponent character The secondary attack effect (attack effect of the cat character Dm20) that reduces the continuous value (HP value) of ADm13 by 30 is executed, and the continuous value (HP value) of the opponent character ADm13 is decreased by 230 as a total pre-battle effect. Is running.

With such a configuration, the number of effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be increased with respect to the number of effects set by the continuous value management means. In other words, with respect to the number of effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to reduce the management number of effects for continuously increasing or decreasing the continuous value (HP value), and to play the game. The control load can be reduced.

In addition, when the opponent during the one-time pre-battle performance is changed, the HP value of the opponent character before the change is continuously displayed. Therefore, when the opponent is changed and the same opponent character is selected again, the effect can be continuously executed from the previous HP value. As described above, during the pre-battle performance, by gradually reducing the HP of the opponent character who can be the opponent of the battle reach and then executing the battle reach, the battle reach is frequently performed in the high-precision medium production. A series of effects can be executed even if they are not generated.

In addition, during the pre-battle performance, if the HPs of a plurality of opponent candidates are unevenly reduced, the performance is closely watched with the expectation that the battle reach will be executed with the opponent having the least HP value. be able to.

When the pre-battle production, which is the first half part of the battle production, is completed, next, a battle reach for performing a battle with a specific opponent is executed. If you win this battle reach (set your opponent's HP to "0"), it means that you have won a jackpot that sets a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and you are defeated (your HP is "0". In the case of (2), it indicates that the player has won the game when the game state (normal state) that is disadvantageous to the player is set. In addition, when the battle reach is executed at a timing when the special symbol lottery result is not a win, a draw (neither HP nor "0") occurs and the high-probability medium effect is continued.

In this battle reach, if you win a big hit in high accuracy (probably changing, shortening time), or if a predetermined condition is satisfied during high accuracy (for example, if the number of special map fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, If the result of the battle reach is a draw, the process shifts to the pre-battle production again. In this case, the HP values of the opponent characters are all set to initial values. That is, in the pre-battle effect, the effect of reducing the HP value of the opponent character is executed. Therefore, for example, if the period for which the special symbol is not won continues for a long time during the probability change state, the pre-battle effect is under effect. In order to prevent the HP of the opponent character from becoming “0”, it is necessary to make it difficult to execute the effect (attack effect) that reduces the HP of the opponent character, which may reduce the effect of the pre-battle effect. there were.

In this control example, a battle reach is generated other than when the special symbol is won, and a "tie" is provided as a result of the battle reach. When "battle" is reached in the battle reach, the opponent character is Since the HP value of is returned to the initial value and the pre-battle effect is restarted, one pre-battle effect is executed for a long time, and the effect of the pre-battle effect is reduced. Can be solved. Further, by providing "draw" in the result of the battle reach, the possibility of "draw" can be left even when an effect with low expectation is executed during the battle reach.

Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 displayed during battle reach will be described with reference to FIGS. 93(a) to 96(b). First, FIG. 93(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen immediately after the battle reach is started. Here, the contents of the production of battle reach will be described. In the battle reach of this control example, the attack of the player or the opponent is executed three times in total, and the effect of displaying the result according to the final HP value is executed. There are three types of attacks, “strong attack”, “medium attack”, and “weak attack”, and the HP value to be reduced is set to be different.

When the battle reach is started, the letters "battle start" and the letters "first time" indicating the number of battles in this battle battle are displayed above the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. To be done. Below that, an HP gauge Dm21 indicating the HP value of the user and an HP gauge Dm22 indicating the HP value of the opponent are displayed. The upper limit value "1000" is displayed on the HP gauge Dm21, and the value "500" reduced by the pre-battle effect is displayed on the HP gauge Dm22.

An accumulation gauge Dm23 is displayed below the HP gauge Dm21. A value is accumulated in the accumulated gauge Dm23 based on being attacked by the opponent, and when the accumulated value reaches "MAX", the reverse effect is executed and the effect of winning the battle reach is executed. By making this reversal effect executable, even during the battle reach where three battles are unfolded, even if the opponent's effect is predominantly executed, it is possible to expect the jackpot until the end.

Then, below the main display area Dm, a progress display area Dm24 for indicating the progress of the battle reach is formed, and a history of attack effects during the battle reach is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93(b), the display content when the first attack during the battle reach is itself will be described. As shown in FIG. 93(b), an effect in which the own character (boy character) Dm11 attacks (lightly attacks) the opponent character Dm15 in the main display area Dm is executed, and the value of the HP gauge Dm22 is " It decreases from "500" to "300". Then, in the progress display area Dm24, a "circle mark" indicating that the first battle was an attack of itself is displayed.

When the second battle effect is executed subsequent to the first battle effect shown in FIG. 93(b), the second battle effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 94(a). Here, in FIG. 94(a), an effect in which the opponent character Dm15 makes an attack is executed as the second effect of the battle, and the value of the HP gauge Dm21 indicating the continuous value (HP value) of the character Dm11 of itself is "1000." Is displayed from "" to "700", and an effect in which the value of the accumulated gauge Dm23 is accumulated by half (50) is displayed. Then, in the progress display area Dm24, a "cross mark" indicating that the second battle was an attack of the opponent is displayed.

Next, when the effect for the third battle (last battle) is executed, the effect for the third battle is displayed as shown in FIG. 94(b). Here, in FIG. 94(b), as the third effect of the battle, an effect in which the own character (boy character) Dm11 attacks (middle attack) the opponent character Dm15 in the main display area Dm is executed, and the HP gauge is displayed. The value of Dm22 decreases from "300" to "0", and it is informed that the battle reach this time was a battle reach indicating that the jackpot was set to a jackpot in which a game state advantageous to the player is set. Then, in the small display area Dn2, “777” is displayed as a combined display of the third symbols for indicating that the special symbol lottery this time is a big hit.

In the battle reach in this control example, a draw pattern and a defeat pattern are provided as described above in addition to the battle reach (winning pattern) shown in FIG. 94(b), and the battle reach of the draw pattern is set. In this case, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 95(a) is displayed instead of the effect for the third battle shown in FIG. 94(b). In the display example shown in FIG. 95(a), an effect in which the opponent character Dm15 attacks is executed as the third effect in the battle. In the case of the battle reach of the draw pattern, the value of the HP gauge Dm21 of the character Dm11 of his own does not decrease to 0 (decrease to 500), and the battle reach ends without the continuation value (HP value) of 0 for both himself and the opponent. To do. In this case, a new battle effect is executed, and the pre-battle effect (see FIG. 91) is executed again.

As shown in FIG. 95(a), even if the final attack (third attack) of the battle reach is the opponent's attack, a draw pattern is provided in which the own continuous value (HP value) does not decrease to 0. So, until the end of Battle Reach, players can have expectations. Note that in FIG. 95(a), the opponent makes a third attack as a draw reach battle reach, that is, at the time of the third attack, the player is either defeated or a draw for this battle reach. Although an example of an effect that seems to be a pattern is illustrated, in addition to this, a pattern in which the third attack is performed by itself as the battle reach of the draw pattern, that is, at the time of the third attack, this battle reach wins the player or An effect that is thought to be one of the draw patterns is also executed. In this case, it is possible to reassure the player, because the player will not be defeated in this battle reach at the time when the third attack is performed.

Further, when the battle reach of the defeat pattern is set, for example, instead of the effect of the third battle shown in FIG. 94(b), the effect shown in FIG. 95(b) is displayed. In the display example shown in FIG. 95(b), an effect in which the opponent character Dm15 attacks is executed as the third effect of the battle, the value of the HP gauge Dm21 of the own character Dm11 decreases to 0, and the accumulated gauge Dm23. The battle reach ends without the value of is accumulated up to the upper limit (MAX).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 96(a), even if the value of the HP gauge Dm21 of the character Dm11 of the player's character Dm21 decreases to 0, if the value of the accumulated gauge Dm23 reaches the upper limit (MAX), The character "Resurrection" is displayed in the center of the upper part of the display area Dm, the character Dm11 of his own stands up, and as shown in FIG. 96(b), a resurrection effect is performed in which the opponent character Dm15 is defeated.

As described above, in the battle reach effect in the present control example, the effect result is changed by the value of the accumulated gauge Dm23 in addition to the reduction degree of the HP gauge Dm21 of the own character Dm11 and the HP gauge Dm22 of the opponent character Dm15. Because it is configured, you can expect big hits until the end of battle reach.

In addition, in the first control example, the content of the pre-battle effect (effect mode) is based on the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly executed and the special symbol pending storage information (ball entry information) at the time of the battle effect setting. It is configured to be variable. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 97, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 is variable.

Here, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 will be described with reference to FIG. 97(a) to (d) show the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly executed, and the HP display area Dm17 that is variably set based on the reserved storage information (ball entry information) of the special symbol when the battle effect is set. It is the figure which showed the display mode.

FIG. 97(a) is a schematic view showing an example of the display mode of the HP display area Dm17, and is a schematic view showing the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 in a pattern in which the opponent character is not replaced during the battle effect. Is. As shown in FIG. 97(a), in the HP display area Dm17, only the same opponent character (character ADm13) has different continuation values (HP values) (four levels from "700" to "1000"). It is displayed. When such an HP display area Dm17 is displayed, the character ADm13 is always set as the opponent of the pre-battle effect, and the attack of himself/herself performed in the pre-battle effect (see FIG. 92(a)). Thus, the effect of reducing all the HP values displayed in the HP display area Dm17 is executed.

By using such a display mode, a plurality of HP values are reduced at one time, so that the effect to be executed can be made flashy. Further, even for the same character ADm13, since the initial value of the continuous value (HP value) is different, it is expected that the character ADm13 having a low continuous value (HP value) will be selected during the development of the battle reach. You can play while playing. Further, by changing the initial value of the continuation value (HP value) for the same character ADm13, it is possible to set a plurality of expectations for the big hit for the same character ADm13. The type of image data for displaying the character can be reduced as compared with the case where a different opponent character is set every time.

Next, the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 97(b) shows a display mode in which the display order of the characters A to D is different from that in the normal HP display area Dm17 (see FIG. 91). It is the schematic diagram shown. When such a display mode is used, for example, in the case where the degree of selection as the opponent character is configured to be different depending on the position displayed in the HP display area Dm17 during the battle effect, the opponent easily selected during the battle effect. The character can be changed. Further, the display order of the characters A to D displayed in the HP display area Dm17 may be changed while the battle effect is being executed.

FIG. 97(c) is a schematic diagram showing a display mode in which the opponent character different from the display mode of the normal HP display area Dm17 (see FIG. 91) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 97(c), in the present display mode in which the partner characters E and F are displayed, the partner character is a special partner character having a lower initial value of the continuation value (HP value) than the normal partner characters A and B. E and F are displayed so that they can be selected. With this configuration, the player can be expected to win the battle reach in this battle production.

Further, FIG. 97D is a schematic diagram showing a display mode in which the number of selectable opponent characters is reduced in comparison with the normal HP display area Dm17 display mode (see FIG. 91). By using such a display mode, the choices of the opponent character selected in the pre-battle effect are reduced, so that the continuous value (HP value) of the opponent character at the time of developing the battle reach is decreased in advance (during the pre-battle effect). It can be made easier.

As described above, in this control example, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 is based on the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly executed and the reserved storage information (ball entry information) of the special symbol when the battle effect is set. By variably setting, the variation of the battle effect is increased and the effect is enhanced. For example, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 indicates the future game result to the player. It may be configured to do so.

For example, when the special opponent character E described above in FIG. 97(c) is selected as the opponent of battle reach, it is preferable that the battle reach of the defeat pattern is not executed. As a result, in addition to the effect of decreasing the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent character in the pre-battle effect, the player can be interested in the opponent character selected in the battle reach. Further, when the opponent character E is set instead of the opponent character A in the display mode shown in FIG. 97(a), the battle reach of the defeat pattern during the current battle effect period is performed at the timing when the battle effect is executed. Since it is not executed, the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, when the reserved storage information (ball entry information) of the special symbol when the battle effect is set includes the ball entry information for executing the battle reach of the winning pattern, the battle reach of the winning pattern is selected by selecting. You may make it display the display mode in which the specific opponent character in which is performed is included.

Further, the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 may be variably set based on the operation result of the frame button 22 that can be operated by the player. In this case, the display mode of the normal HP display area Dm17 shown in FIG. 91 is displayed until the operation of the frame button 22 is received, and the operation effect of operating the frame button 22 is executed during the pre-battle effect, and the operation effect is performed. The display mode of the HP display area Dm17 may be changed to the display mode described above with reference to FIGS. 97(a) to (d), for example, based on the operation result for.

In the example described above with reference to FIGS. 97(a) to (d), the length of the HP gauge is set to a constant length even when different continuation values (HP values) are set. Therefore, for example, when the continuous value (HP value) is decreased by "100", the HP value gauge is variably displayed so that the decrease rate differs depending on the set continuous value (HP value). Not limited to such a display mode, the HP gauge may be displayed with a length corresponding to the set continuation value (HP value). Further, in order to easily grasp the remaining continuation value (HP value) by the length of the HP gauge, the display mode (for example, color) of the HP value gauge is changed according to the length of the HP gauge. You may do it.

By configuring as described above, even when the battle effect is repeatedly executed for the player, the effect mode can be changed, and the player gets tired of the effect content early. It can be suppressed. In this control example, the production mode of the pre-battle production is based on the number of times the battle production is repeatedly executed and the pending storage information (ball entry information) of the special symbol when the battle production is set (when the pre-battle production is set). Is configured to be variably set, the production mode may be variably set using other conditions, for example, as a game state in which a battle production can be executed, a first game state (for example, a probability change state). ) And a second game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state (for example, a time saving state) are configured to be distinguishable, and the game state during the battle effect setting (before the battle effect setting) is the first. The presentation mode may be set based on the result of determining whether the game state is the 1 game state or the 2nd game state, and the ball entry information stored on hold during the battle effect setting (before the battle effect setting). May be determined, and as a result of the determination, the effect mode may be set based on the determination result of whether or not there is ball entry information indicating that the game state shifts from the first game state to the second game state. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 98 to FIG. 101, a description will be given of a suggestion effect that is an effect executed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is set to the normal state. This suggestive effect is that the specific effect for indicating the high jackpot expectation degree is executed in the variable effect executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the change of the special symbol. It is an effect for suggesting to a person in advance, and is an effect including a precursor effect of the first half part and a countdown effect of the second half part.

First, with reference to FIG. 98 and FIG. 99, the contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the suggestive effect will be described. FIG. 98(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen at the time when the aura effect, which is the first half part of the suggested effect, is started, and FIG. 98(b) is the end part of the aura effect that is the first half part. FIG. 99 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen at the time when the countdown effect which is the latter half part is started. FIG. 99 shows the display screen at the time when the specific effect is started after the suggestion effect (countdown effect) is finished. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example.

As shown in FIG. 98(a), when the suggestive effect is started, the precursor effect is executed in the sub display area Ds. In the example illustrated in FIG. 98(a), the character Dc1 imitating a “car” is subjected to a dynamic effect of proceeding from left to right, and the character Dc1 displays the character “goal” at the arrival point Dc3. By arriving at, the effect is executed so as to switch to the countdown effect.

Then, as the movement route when the character Dc1 moves to the arrival point Dc3, one of the first route Dc2a indicating a straight route and the second route Dc2b indicating a meandering route is set. In the example shown in FIG. 98(a), the second route Dc2b is selected, and the dynamic effect in which the character Dc1 moves along the meandering route is executed.

Here, a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 100, but in the first control example, the start timing of the precursor effect which is the first half part of the suggested effect is configured to be selectable from a plurality of points, Since the period in which the precursor effect is executed is indefinite, the route of the character Dc1 is selected according to the length of the period in which the precursor effect is executed. Accordingly, when the precursor effect is executed, it is possible to visually grasp the timing when the countdown effect is started.

Note that, in FIG. 98(a), an effect that suggests the timing at which the countdown effect is started is used as the predictive effect, but other effects may be used as the predictive effect, for example, the countdown effect is executed. An effect that suggests to the player, an effect that suggests the period of the countdown effect, or an effect that suggests the type of the specific effect that is the target of the countdown effect may be used. In other words, it may be any effect as long as it is an effect that informs in advance information about an effect that will be executed in the future.

When the precursor effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 98(b), a comment "start countdown" is displayed above the main display area Dm, and in the sub display area Ds, the character Dc1 arrives at the arrival point Dc3, and the countdown starts. The character "3" indicating that the period is 3 seconds is displayed in the countdown display area Dc4. As a result, it is possible to specifically inform the player of the fact that the countdown effect this time is an effect starting from "3" and the timing at which the specific effect is executed.

It should be noted that the example shown in FIG. 98(b) shows the countdown effect in which the countdown period is 3 seconds, but in the first control example, the other countdown period (for example, 7 seconds) is set. It also has a countdown effect, and the longer the countdown period, the higher the jackpot expectation. By configuring in this way, during the precursor effect which is the first half part of the suggested effect, the countdown effect with the long countdown period is executed while predicting the timing when the countdown effect is started and the current variation pattern. Can be expected.

When the countdown effect shown in FIG. 98(b) ends, as shown in FIG. 99, the character "0" indicating that the countdown period has ended is displayed in the countdown display area Dc4 of the sub display area Ds, and the main display In the area Dm, an operation effect in which an image simulating the frame button 22 is displayed as the specific effect is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100 and FIG. 101, a flow of setting a precursor effect and a countdown effect executed as a suggested effect in the first control example will be described. In the first control example, the suggestion effect is executed to notify the player of the timing at which the particular effect is executed, and in the countdown effect executed in the latter half part of the suggestion effect, the execution timing of the target specific effect. An effect (see FIG. 98(b)) for accurately (specifically) notifying that the effect is a direct effect that indirectly or indirectly indicates that the specific effect is executed in the precursor effect executed in the first half part. (See FIG. 98(a)) is executed.

Here, in the variation effect that is conventionally executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a suggestion effect for instructing (notifying) the player that the specific effect is executed at a predetermined timing is predetermined. In addition, a configuration for executing for a predetermined period has been used. If the period in which the suggestive effect is executed is predetermined in this way, the execution period overlaps with other effects that are executed in the variable effect (for example, an effect that suggests a higher degree of expectation than the suggested effect). In some cases, the prohibition process may be applied to prevent the suggestive effect from being executed. In addition, there is a problem that the suggestive effect cannot be executed for the specific effect that is executed at a timing when the period in which the suggestive effect is executed cannot be secured.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, if a plurality of suggestive effect data with different predetermined time periods are prepared, the storage capacity increases, and further, the processing when setting the variable effect becomes complicated. A new problem arises.

Therefore, in this control example, the execution timing and the end timing of the suggestive effect are set separately, and the period in which the suggestive effect is executed can be adjusted. Specifically, the end timing of the suggestive effect (the end timing of the countdown effect that is the latter half part) is set based on the execution timing of the specific effect that is the target of the suggestive effect, and the start timing of the suggestive effect (the precursor part that is the first half part). The production start timing) can be set from multiple points.

With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect without presetting the period to be executed. Further, since the start timing of the suggestive effect can be set from a plurality of points, for example, the period during which the suggestive effect is executed is variable based on the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, in the case of winning the jackpot). It is possible to set the period during which the suggestive effect is executed to be long) or to change the start timing of the suggestive effect according to the execution timing of another effect. Therefore, the degree of freedom in setting the suggestive effect can be increased.

FIG. 100(a) is a timing chart showing the flow of executing the suggestive effect in the variable effect in which the variable time of 60 seconds is set. In the example shown in FIG. 100(a), the timing at which the suggestive effect can be started 10 seconds or 20 seconds after the start of the change is set, and the special effect “PUSH effect” is executed 33 seconds after the start of the change. Is set. Then, the countdown period (30 to 33 seconds from the start of fluctuation) is set such that the countdown effect (3 seconds from the start of fluctuation) ends at the timing when the specific effect is executed (33 seconds after the start of fluctuation). And, since the variation this time is when the jackpot is won, the timing at which the suggestive effect period can be set longer than the plurality of start timings (the timing 10 seconds after the start of the variation) is the start timing of the suggestive effect. Set as.

As a result, in the example shown in FIG. 100(a), after the precursor effect (effect period 20 seconds) is executed 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation (after 30 seconds from the change start), countdown effect (effect period 3 seconds) is performed. ) Is executed. Then, the specific effect (“PUSH effect”) is executed at the end timing of the effect period of the countdown effect. In addition, when the variation of this time is not a big hit, the timing (timing 20 seconds after the variation start) of the suggestive effect period is set as the start timing of the suggestive effect (start timing of the precursor effect). ..

In this way, in the case of performing the suggested effect for the specific effect executed at the specific timing of the predetermined variable effect, by using the configuration for setting the start timing of the suggested effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol, It is possible to change the length of the suggestion production period based on the lottery result of the special symbol, and the player can be made aware of the length of the production period. Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced.

Even when the length of the suggestive effect period is changed, the countdown effect period that is the second half part of the suggestive effect, that is, the period for performing the effect that specifically (accurately) notifies the execution timing of the specific effect Since it is configured to be set based on the execution timing of the specific effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the effect of the suggested effect.

That is, when changing the length of the suggestive effect period, only the period in which the precursor effect which is the first half part of the suggestive effect is executed is variable. This precursor effect directly or indirectly suggests that the specific effect is executed as described above, and is executed in the latter half part of the suggested effect even if the length of the effect period is changed. It is possible to reliably inform the player of the timing at which the specific effect is executed by the countdown effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 100( b ), the flow of the suggestive effect executed in the variable effect B different from the variable effect A described above with reference to FIG. 100( a) will be described. FIG. 100( b) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the effect executed in the variable effect B.

The variation effect B shown in FIG. 100(b) is a variation effect in which a plurality of specific effects that can be the target of the suggestion effect are set, unlike the above-described variation effect A. The method of setting the variation effect executed in the variation effect B will be described focusing on the points different from the variation effect A described above. In the variable effect B, the timing at which the suggestive effect can be started 10 seconds or 20 seconds after the start of the change is set, and the timing at which the specific effect can be executed 26 seconds or 30 seconds after the start of the change is set.

In the variation effect B, a "cut-in effect" (not shown) in which the boy character is displayed in a large size so as to cover the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as a specific effect that can be executed 26 seconds after the start of the variation , "PUSH effect" (see FIG. 99) can be set as a specific effect that can be executed 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation. The jackpot expectation is set to be the same for these two specific effects, and the specific effect corresponding to the set suggestive effect is executed.

In the variable effect shown in FIG. 100(b), similarly to FIG. 100(a) described above, the period in which the suggested effect is executed is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. When the lottery result is a big hit, it is easy to set the timing 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation as the start timing of the suggested effect and the "PUSH effect" that is executed 40 seconds after the start of fluctuation as the specific effect. doing.

More specifically, the above-mentioned suggestion effect is the pattern with the highest jackpot expectation degree in the descending order of jackpot expectations, and then the timing 17 seconds after the start of fluctuation is set as the suggestion effect start timing. A pattern for setting "PUSH production" as a specific production, a timing 10 seconds after the start of variation is set as a start timing of the suggestive production, and a pattern for setting "cut-in production" as a specific production, a timing 17 seconds after the start of variation Is set as the start timing of the suggestive effect, and the suggestive effect is set corresponding to the jackpot expectation in the order of the pattern in which “cut-in effect” is set as the specific effect.

Further, in the variable effect B shown in FIG. 100(b), the start timing of the countdown effect (the length of the countdown period) is also variable according to the set length of the suggested effect period. When the effect pattern with a high jackpot expectation is set, the start timing of the countdown effect is set to 7 seconds before the specific effect is executed, and immediately after the countdown effect is started, the subordinate of the third symbol display device 81 is set. The countdown effect of displaying the character "7" in the countdown display area Dc4 (see FIG. 98(b)) of the display area Ds is executed.

Further, in the first control example, the suggestive effect across a plurality of variable effects is configured to be executable. The flow of the suggestive effect executed across the plurality of variable effects will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of effects when the suggestive effect is set across the variable effects corresponding to two consecutive special symbol changes.

As shown in FIG. 101, in the present control example, when a new pending storage is acquired during execution of the variable effect, the information (whether the judgment result, fluctuation pattern, etc.) included in the newly acquired pending storage is determined in advance. (Pre-reading), and based on the determination result, it is possible to set the effect mode of the variable effect executed before the variable effect corresponding to the corresponding pending storage.

Specifically, the fluctuation of the fluctuation effect C (change time of 30 seconds) is started without holding storage, and at the timing when 15 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation (the remaining period of the fluctuation effect C is 15 seconds), When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 and acquires a new reserved memory (a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable effect), based on the information included in the new reserved memory. , It is determined whether or not the suggestive effect is executed.

Here, when it is determined that the next fluctuating effect is a fluctuating effect for executing the suggesting effect, it is determined whether the remaining period of the current fluctuating effect is a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) or more. In the example shown in FIG. 101, the timing at which the new pending storage is acquired is the timing when the remaining period of the fluctuating effect C is 15 seconds, so it is determined that the remaining period of the current fluctuating effect is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, and The start timing of the suggestive effect is set at a predetermined timing (timing when 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation) of the fluctuation effect of No., and in the next fluctuation effect (fluctuation effect D), a specific effect (specification executed 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation A countdown effect (effect period 3 seconds) is set for effect C).

As described above, by setting the start timing of the suggestive effect and the end timing of the suggestive effect (the start timing of the specific effect) across the continuously executed variable effects (variable effects C and D), the variable effect C When 20 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation, the precursor effect, which is the first half part of the suggested effect, is executed for a period (10 seconds) until the fluctuation effect C ends. Then, the precursor effect is continuously executed for a period (2 seconds) from the fluctuation start timing of the fluctuation effect D to the execution of the countdown effect, and thereafter (2 seconds after the fluctuation start of the fluctuation effect D), the countdown effect is changed. After the execution for 3 seconds, the special effect C is executed.

According to the example shown in FIG. 101, since the suggestive effect can be executed in the variable effect executed before the variable effect in which the specific effect is executed, the early stage of the variable effect (for example, 5 seconds after the start of the variable effect). ), the suggestive effect can be executed also for the specific effect executed in (1). Therefore, it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom of suggestive production.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 101, when the timing at which the new reserved memory is acquired is such that the remaining period of the variable effect C is less than the predetermined period (less than 10 seconds) (for example, in the timing of the additional winning prize B shown in FIG. 101). In the case), since it is not possible to secure a period in which the suggestive effect is executed for the specific effect C of the variable effect D, the suggestive effect for the specific effect C is not set.

In the above-described example, it is determined whether or not the suggestive effect is executed for the specific effect to be executed in the subsequent variable effect, based on the timing of the additional winning (the timing of acquiring the new reserved memory). Although the configuration is used, other configurations may be used, for example, based on the timing of additional winning (timing of acquiring new reserved memory), the timing of executing the specific production in the next and subsequent variation productions. It may be configured to be variable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily set the suggestive effect executed across a plurality of variable effects, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

In addition, in FIG. 101, the flow of the suggestive effect when the start condition of the next variable effect is satisfied during the execution of the variable effect has been described as an example of the suggestive effect executed across a plurality of variable effects. It is also possible to execute the suggestive effect across a plurality of variable effects under other conditions.

For example, when the start condition of the next variable effect is satisfied in the state where the start condition of the next variable effect is satisfied, which timing in the variable effect of the next time is set as the execution timing of the specific effect, and The timing for executing the suggestive effect may be set at any timing of the remaining period of the variable effect being executed or the period during which the next variable effect is executed.

In this case, the effect executed in the currently-executed variable effect, and the content of the effect executed in the next variable effect are determined, and the result of the determination and the special symbol lottery corresponding to the next-time variable effect are drawn. It is preferable that the start timing of the suggestive effect is set based on the result. With such a configuration, for example, in the case where a continuous production having a series of productions of the variation production currently being changed and the next variation production is set, a suggestive production is provided for the next variation production. If the special effect is set to be executed at the end timing of the fluctuating effect that is currently fluctuating, that is, at the start timing of the next fluctuating effect without execution, the suggestion effect is generated within the next fluctuating effect period. If there is no factor that prohibits the setting of the suggestive effect in the variable effect that is currently changing and the next variable effect, the remaining time of the variable effect that is currently changing, or the next variable effect is set. The start timing of the suggested effect can be set in any of the effect periods.

Also, when the next (one after another) variation effect start condition is satisfied, it is determined whether the variation effect is a variation effect corresponding to the jackpot win, and the suggestion effect start timing is being executed based on the determination result. It may be set to either the remaining period of the variable effect or the execution period of the next (next time) variable effect. As a result, it is possible to easily set a suggestive effect period that is longer than one variation effect period.

In the first control example, the suggestive effect is executed for one specific effect, but the suggestive effect may be executed for a plurality of specific effects. In this case, it may be configured to set a precursory period in which a common precursory effect is executed and a countdown period in which a countdown effect is executed corresponding to each of a plurality of specific effects. With such a configuration, it is possible to play the game while predicting how many specific effects the suggestive effect has been executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, a pseudo countdown effect that does not target the specific effect (pseudo countdown effect) may be executed while the precursor effect is being executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know at what timing the suggestive effect has been executed for the specific effect to be executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102 to FIG. 104, an expectation suggestion effect which is an effect executed when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is set to the normal state will be described. This expectation suggestion effect is an expectation degree display effect that displays a plurality of expectation degree display modes capable of stepwise notifying the winning expectation degree of the jackpot and the display mode of the expectation degree display mode (the expectation degree of the jackpot is expected Is an effect for increasing the degree of expectation).

First, with reference to FIG. 102(a), an expectation degree display mode used in the expectation suggestion effect of the first control example will be described. FIG. 102(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an expectation degree display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. 102(a), in this control example, a plurality of expectation degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are displayed.

The expectation degree display mode Dk1 indicates the jackpot expectation degree by using the in-execution display indicating the information corresponding to the variation effect being executed, and in FIG. 102(a), “LV2 which indicates the jackpot expectation degree. Is displayed. Although details will be described later, this expectation display mode Dk1 is displayed 10 seconds after the variation effect is started, and is displayed on the display screen earliest among the plurality of expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3. It

The expectation degree display mode Dk2 indicates the jackpot expectation degree by using the characters appearing in the variation effect, and in FIG. 102(a), “LV1” indicating the jackpot expectation degree is displayed. Although details will be described later, the expectation degree display mode Dk2 is displayed 24 seconds after the variation effect is started.

The expectation degree display mode Dk3 indicates the jackpot expectation degree by using a dialogue display showing the content of the change effect and progress information. In FIG. 102(a), “LV2” indicating the jackpot expectation degree is displayed. Has been done. Although details will be described later, the expectation degree display mode Dk3 is displayed 36 seconds after the variation effect is started.

In addition, in FIG. 102(a), although each expectation degree display mode is shown by LV display which shows in stages, it is sufficient if it is a mode in which the jackpot expectation degree can be notified stepwise, for example, it corresponds to the jackpot expectation degree. It is also possible to use a configuration in which the color of each display mode, the speed of the dynamic effect, and the volume of the output volume and the amount of light are changed stepwise. Further, a configuration may be used in which the effect mode showing the growth process or the transformation process is changed stepwise toward the final mode.

Further, regarding the display during execution displayed in the expectation degree display mode Dk1, for example, the display mode of the reserved symbol display displayed in the first display area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds is configured to be continuously displayed. Good. As a result, when an effect (holding symbol notice effect) for changing the display mode of the reserved symbol is executed during the reserved symbol display, the changed display mode of the reserved symbol can be continuously used as an in-execution display. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily understand the relationship between the variable display being executed and the pending symbol display.

When the degree-of-expectation suggestion effect is executed, the display modes of the degree-of-expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are changed (increase) in addition to the degree-of-exposure display effect shown in FIG. ), the expected degree increase (addition) effect is performed (see FIG. 102B).

As shown in FIG. 102(b), when the expected degree increase (addition) effect is executed, first, as the expectation setting effect, a display having selection areas Dk4a to Dk4c in which different increase (addition) values are displayed is displayed. The mode (roulette) Dk4 is rotatably displayed, and when the roulette Dk4 is stopped, the rise (addition) value displayed in the selection area designated by the arrow Dk5 is set.

This increase (addition) value indicates a variable amount for changing the display mode of each expectation display mode displayed during the anticipation suggestion effect, and when "1UP" is set as the increase (addition) value. Means that for any one of the expectation display modes, an effect in which the jackpot expectation is gradually changed to a display mode that is one step higher than the currently displayed display mode is performed. Showing.

With such a configuration, it is possible to notify only the variable amount of each expectation degree display mode displayed during the expectation suggestion presentation this time by executing the expectation rise (addition) presentation. .. Therefore, the player enjoys the expectation increase (addition) effect while expecting that the expectation of the expectation display mode in which the display mode corresponding to the high jackpot expectation is already displayed is further changed (increased). You can

In this control example, as the increase (add-on) value set in the expectation increase (add-on) effect, each expectation degree that is variable (increased) while the current expectation increase (add-on) effect is being executed It is configured such that a value obtained by adding up the variable amounts of the display mode is set. Thereby, for example, when "3UP" is set as the increase (addition) value, the display mode of one expectation degree display mode is changed by three steps, or each of the three expectation degree display modes is changed by one step. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to know what to do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the effect result of the expectation suggesting effect at an early stage and enhance the effect of the effect.

next. The effect contents when “3UP” is set as the increase (addition) value will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103A is a schematic diagram showing an example of a case where the display mode of each expectation degree display mode is changed (raised) using the set increase (addition) value.

According to the example shown in FIG. 103(a), “3UP” is set as an increase (addition), and each of the expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is set. It is variably displayed step by step. Specifically, the display mode of the expectation display mode Dk1 is changed from "LV2" to "LV3", the display mode of the expectation display mode Dk2 is changed from "LV1" to "LV2", and the expectation display mode Dk3 is changed. The display mode of is changed from "LV2" to "LV3".

In addition, in FIG. 103(a) described above, the pattern in which the display modes of all the expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are simultaneously changed is illustrated, but the display modes of each of the expectation level display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are performed at different timings. It may be configured to be variable. In this case, of the increase (addition) value set in the expectation increase (addition) effect, the increase (addition) obtained by subtracting the value corresponding to the variable amount for changing the display mode of any of the expectation display modes ) The value is displayed on the display screen as a residual increase (addition). With this configuration, it is possible to concretely predict the effect result based on the remaining increase (addition) value displayed on the display screen and the expectation display mode in which the display mode is not changed. The effect can be enhanced. Further, the same degree of expectation display mode may be configured such that the degree of expectation increase (addition) effect is executed so as to change the display mode a plurality of times with different timings. By doing so, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect for the player.

Further, in the present control example, each of the plurality of expectation degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 displayed at different timings in one variation effect is continuously displayed, so that the display as shown in FIG. Although it is configured to be displayed on the screen at the same time, it is not necessary to provide a period in which each of the expected degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 is simultaneously displayed, and among the display timings of the plurality of expected degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3. At least some display timings may be set at the same time.

Further, in the expectation increase (addition) effect, the player may be informed of the expectation display mode for which the increase (addition) value is set (see FIG. 103(b)). In this case, as shown in FIG. 103( b ), a comment “I will raise the boy's level” indicating the target degree of expectation display mode is displayed above the main display area Dm. By displaying this comment, the player can understand what the expectation display mode that is the target of this expectation suggestion production is, and enjoy the game while predicting future production progress. It can be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 104, a flow of the expectation degree display effect executed in this control example will be described. FIG. 104 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of the expectation display effect. As shown in FIG. 104, in one variation pattern (super reach 60 seconds), expectation degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 that indicate the expectation degree of the jackpot win in stages are displayed at different timings. Specifically, the expected degree display mode Dk1 (expected degree 1 display) is displayed 12 seconds after the fluctuation starts, the expected degree display mode Dk2 (expected degree 2 display) is displayed 24 seconds after the fluctuation start, and the expected degree display Aspect Dk3 (expectation level 3 display) is displayed 36 seconds after the start of fluctuation.

Then, the expected degree increase effect (expected degree addition display) that raises (adds) the display degree of each expectation degree display manners Dk1 to Dk3 is displayed at any timing of 5 seconds, 17 seconds, and 29 seconds from the start of fluctuation. .. Here, the expectation degree increase effect (expectation degree addition display) is configured such that the expectation degree display mode that is a target for increasing the expectation degree is different depending on the displayed (executed) timing. The degree of expectation display mode displayed after the degree increase effect (expected degree addition display) is executed is configured to be the target.

Specifically, when the expectation increase effect (expectation degree addition display) is displayed 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation, all the expectations display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are targeted, and the expectations increase 17 seconds after the start of fluctuation. When the production (expectation degree addition display) is displayed, the expectation display mode Dk2, Dk3 is targeted, and when the expectation increase production (expectation degree addition display) is displayed 29 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the expectation degree is displayed. The effect targeting only the display mode Dk3 is executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to change the effect contents of the expectation increase effect that is the same effect mode, only by changing the display timing (execution timing). In addition, since the expectation increase effect is executed for a plurality of expectation degree display modes, the player can determine how much the expectation degree of which expectation degree display mode is raised by the expectation degree notified in the expectation degree increase effect. It is possible to let the player perform the game while expecting.

In the present control example, as described above, the target of the expected degree increase effect (expected degree addition display) is the expected degree display mode in which the display timing is set later, but other configurations may be used. For example, the expectation display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the expectation increase effect (expectation degree addition display) is executed may be the target, or the above-described expectation display mode. A combination of may be targeted. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict which display mode of the expected degree display mode is variable (expected degree is increased) by the expected degree increase effect (expected degree increase display). , The production effect can be enhanced.

Further, in order to enhance the effect of the expected degree increase effect (expected degree increase display), the player can select at least one of the plurality of expected degree display modes, and the expectation selected by the selecting means. Degree display mode is an object for which it is determined whether or not the display mode is changed by the expected degree increase effect (expected degree increase display), and the expected degree display mode selected by the selection means is the expected degree increase effect ( Variable control means for changing the display mode by the expectation increase effect (expectation level additional display) when the target determination means determines that the display mode is changed by the expectation level additional display). Is also good. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a player participation type production, and to enthusiastically participate in the game.

In this case, for example, in the period prior to the period in which the player selects the expectation degree display mode by the selection means, the suggestion notification suggesting the expectation degree display mode to be the target of the expectation level increase effect (expected degree increase display) is given. It is advisable to provide a suggestion notification means to execute. As a result, it is possible to limit the target range to be selected by the selection means for the player, and it is possible to increase the probability that the expected degree increase effect (expected degree addition display) is executed.

Further, when the target discriminating unit determines that the expectation display mode selected by the selecting unit is not the target whose display form is changed by the expectation increasing effect (expectation degree addition display), It is preferable to provide an effect switching unit that executes different effects using the increase (addition) value set in the expectation increase effect (expectation degree addition display). As a result, the rise (addition) value already displayed on the display screen can be digested, which gives the player a feeling of strangeness.

As the different effects described above, for example, effects for informing the player of the contents of the winning information stored in advance or values stored by the player in order to obtain a privilege (for example, a game level or experience). It may be an effect that is advantageous to the player, such as an effect for increasing the value), or a disadvantage that the effect mode is changed so that the degree of expectation of the expected degree display mode is lowered (expected degree decrease effect). Directing is also acceptable.

In addition, a means is provided for changing the display mode of the effect switched by the effect switching means in correspondence with the increase (addition) value set in the expectation increase effect (expectation degree addition display). Is also good. Further, when the player does not select the expected degree increase mode by the selection means, the expected degree display mode which is not the target may be automatically selected, or the expected degree display mode which is the target. May be automatically selected. In the case where the target degree of expectation display mode is automatically selected, it is configured so that the player is more advantageous when the target degree of expectation degree display mode is selected by the selection means. Good to do. As a result, the player can be made to actively select the expectation level display mode by the selection means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in First Control Example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 125. First, details of the main control device 110 provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

In the main control device 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 113) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, first, with reference to FIG. 113, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, in order to perform jackpot lottery, setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, etc., the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Used in.

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type (jackpot symbol) used for the selection The hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type out of the special symbol, the change type counter CS1 used to select the change pattern, and the initial value setting of the first random number counter C1. And a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for. The second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second random number counter C4.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 136). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores each counter value for the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in which each counter value for the prize for the first entrance 64 is stored and the prize for the second entrance 140. The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is provided. As described above, in this control example, up to four reserve balls are provided for each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 140. For this reason, when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable display, or when the special symbol is not jackpot game and the special symbol can be selected by lottery, when the ball wins the first entrance 64, each counter value is special. It is stored in the symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, and when the sphere is won in any of the second ball entrances 140, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. After that, among the respective counter values stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the temporally oldest counter value is moved to the execution area, and the special symbol 1 or Various settings and control processing for performing variable display (dynamic display) of the special symbol 2 are executed.

On the other hand, during the period during which the special symbol 1 cannot be drawn by lot, such as during the variable display of the special symbol or during the big hit game, the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140, and the winning entry If the number of reserved balls corresponding to the ball opening is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example), each counter value is acquired, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball It is stored in the storage area 203b. Further, when the corresponding number of reserved pieces is equal to or more than the upper limit value (4 in this control example), each counter value or the like is not acquired, and only prize balls (3 prize balls in this embodiment) are acquired. Is treated as an invalid ball that is paid out to the player.

In the present control example, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is set to four for each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 140, but is not limited to this, and is less than four (for example, 3) or more than 4 (for example, 8). Further, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls may be different between the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 140, or the upper limit may not be provided. Further, a reserved ball storage area may be provided only for either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 so that only one of them can store the reserved ball.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 113. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 238) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 238 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 238). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 238, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 238. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 136).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once in each timer interruption process in this control example), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140. Then, it is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is defined in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 106(a)) provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. When the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the value of the random number that is a big jackpot defined in the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined as a jackpot of the special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. The first random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in each gaming state is set in the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 106(a), when the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state, the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 Is determined to be "7", and if "7", it is determined to be a big hit. Further, when the game state is a high-probability game state, in the lottery of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is within the range of "5 to 9". If it is within the range of “5 to 9”, it is determined to be a big hit.

Here, if the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is special. It will be a big hit of the design. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 238. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value “7” is the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. In this way, while the total number of random number values is 239, the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 1, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is “1/239”. On the other hand, in the high-probability state of the special symbol, there are five values for the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit for the special symbol, and the random number value “5 to 9” is the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. In this way, while the total number of random number values is 239, the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 10, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/47.8".

Returning to FIG. 113, the description will be continued. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 199. Then, when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, one of the big hits AK based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 107). The jackpot type will be selected.

Here, the details of the first hit type selection table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 107, in the first hit type selection table 202c, the jackpot type to be selected is defined in association with each value range of the first hit type counter C2. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 107, the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 1 (special symbol 1), and the value of the first type counter C2 is "0 to 19" in the range " The jackpot A” is associated and defined. This "big hit A" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 15, and the gaming state after the big hit is set to the probability variation state of the special symbol regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit. Since the number of rounds is large and the gaming state after the big jackpot is set to a probability variation state that is advantageous to the player, "big jackpot A" is a jackpot type most advantageous to the player. Among the 200 possible counter values (random number values) of the first hit type counter C2, since there are 20 random number values for which "major jackpot A" is selected, when the jackpot is a big jackpot in the special symbol lottery, "big jackpot A “” is selected at a rate of 10%.

Further, the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 1 (special symbol 1), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "20 to 79", and "major jackpot B" is defined in association therewith. .. This "big hit B" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 10, and the game state after the big hit is set to the probability change state of the special symbol regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit. The number of rounds executed during the jackpot is smaller than that of the “jackpot A”, but the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a probability variation state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, the “jackpot B” is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player. Is. Of the 200 possible counter values (random number values) of the first hit type counter C2, the "big hit B" is 60 random numbers, so if the special symbol lottery hits the "big hit B" “” is selected at a rate of 30%.

The corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 1 (special diagram 1), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "80 to 114" as "major jackpot C". This "big hit C" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 10, and the time saving state is set 100 times as the game state after the big hit is ended, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit. Of the 200 possible counter values (random number values) of the first hit type counter C2, 35 "random numbers" are selected for "big jackpot C", so if the jackpot is a big prize in the special symbol lottery, "big jackpot C" “” is selected at a rate of 17.5%.

Further, the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 1 (special symbol 1), and the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "115 to 164", the "big hit D" is defined in association therewith. .. This "big hit D" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 5, and the gaming state after the big hit is set to the probability variation state of the special symbol regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit. Of the 200 possible counter values (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2, 50 are the random numbers for which "big hit D" is selected, so if the special symbol lottery results in a big hit, "big hit D" 25% is selected.

Then, the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 1 (special symbol 1), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "165 to 199", and "major jackpot E" is defined in association therewith. .. This "big hit E" is a normal state as a game state after the big hit when the number of rounds is 5 and the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is a low probability state and is not a time saving state (a normal state). Is set, and when the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is other than the normal state (high probability state or time saving state), the time saving state is set as the jackpot type 100 times as the gaming state after the jackpot is over. Of the 200 possible counter values (random number values) of the first hit type counter C2, since there are 35 random number values for which "major jackpot E" is selected, if the jackpot is a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, "big jackpot E “” is selected at a rate of 17.5%.

Next, even when the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 2 (special symbol 2), as in the case of the special symbol 2 described above, based on the contents defined in the first hit type selection table 202c, "big hit F "To" jackpot K" is selected. Although detailed description is omitted, the jackpot type (first hit type) selected when the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 2 is the jackpot type selected when the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 1. It is set (the selection ratio is 80%) so that the ratio of selecting the jackpot of 15 rounds (“big hit F”) is higher than that of the (first hit type). As a result, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the jackpot in which the player can obtain a large number of balls in one jackpot is higher when the jackpot is won in the tokusatsu 2 than in the tokusatsu 1. The advantage degree of the player can be made different between the lottery of special map 1 and the lottery of special map 2.

On the other hand, when the corresponding symbol type is special figure 2, the jackpot type (first hit type) which is more disadvantageous than the jackpot type (first hit type) selected when the corresponding symbol type is special figure 1. May be selected. Specifically, when “big hit I” to “big hit K” are selected, two rounds less than five, which is the smallest number of rounds among the big hit types selected in the case of Toku-zu 1, are selected. Is set.

In addition, as a gaming state after the jackpot, when the jackpot type "bonus H", "bonus J", "bonus K" that is given a time saving state is selected, the corresponding symbol type is a special figure. In the jackpot type (first hit type) selected in the case of 1, the number of times smaller than the number of times (time saving number) (100 times) set when the time saving state is given as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot (100 times) 50 times or 25 times) is set.

In this way, depending on whether the special drawing 1 lottery results in a big hit or when the special drawing 2 lottery results in a big hit, the contents (number of rounds) of the jackpot game to be executed and the jackpot game are set after the jackpot game is over. By making the game states different from each other, it is possible to complicate the game, and it is possible to prevent the player from being always given an excessive privilege.

Furthermore, based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the game state that is set after the jackpot is different, so in the game aiming for the jackpot of the special symbol, be aware of the set game state While playing the game. Specifically, even in the gaming state where the jackpot lottery is performed with the same probability (for example, a low probability state), the gaming state set after the jackpot is over in the case of the time saving state and the case of the normal state. Differently, a gaming state is set that is more advantageous to the player in the time saving state. As a result, the game can be played while strongly expecting to win the special symbol jackpot during the specific period (time saving).

In this control example, the proportion of the high-probability state in which the jackpot probability improves after the jackpot is the same in the case where the jackpot is won in the Toku-zu 1 and the jackpot is won in the Toku-zu 2. Although the first hit type selection table 202c is defined as described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ratio of setting the high probability state may be different. In addition, by selecting a jackpot type (first hit type) based on the first hit type selection table 202c and passing a ball to a specific area during the big hit, a probability variation state (high probability state) is given after the big hit ends. In the gaming machine, the jackpot game that is executed when the jackpot is won in the special map 1 and the jackpot game that is executed when the jackpot is won in the special map 2 are passed by the ball to the above-described specific region. It may be configured to have different ease of operation. Thereby, the privilege given to the player can be made different depending on the special symbol that is won in the big hit.

Furthermore, as a method of varying the privilege given to the player depending on the special symbol that is won for the jackpot, for example, a plurality of variable winning devices 65 (see FIG. 2) that allow balls to be won during the jackpot game are provided and executed. Depending on the big hit, the variable winning device 65 that allows the ball to win during the big hit game may be different. In this case, the easiness of winning the balls to the plurality of variable winning devices 65, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls are won, and the ending condition for ending one opening operation (the number of winning balls and the time limit) Should be different. Thereby, the privilege given to the player can be made different depending on the special symbol that is won in the big hit.

Returning to FIG. 113, the description will be continued. The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. Stop before and after "reach out of front and rear" (eg 98,99), and after the same reach occurs, "reach other than out of front and rear" (for example in the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol, Three stop (effect) patterns of "complete disengagement" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once in each timer interrupt process in this control example), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140. Then, it is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

From the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value), the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is used for the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability time and a special symbol for low probability time, and a range of random number values set for each out-of-stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the special symbol, or the like.

For example, in the high-probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not unnecessarily selected, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 89, which is a wide table for high probability. Is selected, and it becomes easy to select “completely off”. In this table, the "front and rear outreach" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "reach other than front and rear outreach" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, and it is difficult to select "rear and front outreach" or "reach other than front and rear outreach". In the low probability state, when the probability of the ball entering the first entrance 64 is secured, the range of the random number value corresponding to the "completely out" stop type is as narrow as 0 to 79. Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely missed".

In this stop type selection table, the range of the random number values corresponding to the stop types of "reach other than out-of-front/back" is as wide as 80 to 97, and "reach other than out-of-front-rear" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, since many reach displays having a long effect time can be performed, it is possible to secure a ball entry time into the first entrance 64, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of "out-of-front/rear reach" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines one variation pattern from the set variation pattern table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 136) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 108 and 109) that stores a random number value that determines one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided inside.

The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d defines a plurality of data tables for selecting fluctuation patterns (see FIGS. 108 and 109). In this variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of variation pattern tables according to the gaming state are set, and for each of them, a variation pattern table is set for each win/no decision result. Details of each fluctuation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). In addition, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present control example, the value of the second random number counter C4 is periodically updated, for example, for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and the ball is either a left or right normal ball entrance (through gate) 66, 67. (Hereinafter, referred to as a normal ball entrance (through gate) 67) is acquired when it is detected, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is defined in the second per random number table 202b (see FIG. 106(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second per random number counter C4 is When it matches the value of the random number defined as the second winning random number table 202b, it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol (second symbol). Details of the second random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 106(b).

FIG. 106(b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202b. In this second symbol per random number table 202b, at the time of low probability of the normal symbol (during the normal state of the normal symbol), there are two random number values for the normal symbol, and the range is "5-6". There is. Since the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240, the total number of random number values to be won is 2, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is “1/120”.

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through a normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 In, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), the symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 140a associated with the second entrance 140 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time".

On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol (during a time saving state of a normal symbol), there are 200 random number values that hit the normal symbol, and the range is "5-204". The total number of random number values that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240, and since the total number of random number values to be won is 200, the probability of winning a normal symbol is "1/1.2". ..

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 In, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), the symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 140a attached to the second entrance 140 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display is very short, “30 seconds→3 seconds”, as compared with the time of the low probability of the regular symbol, and the opening period of the electric accessory 140a is further shortened. Since it becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second entrance 140. In the present control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 140a is opened for "1 second x 2 times", The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds×3 times” may be opened.

In addition, the details will be described later with reference to a normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132) described later, but in this control example, the state of the normal symbol (low probability or high probability) at the time of lottery of the normal symbol (at the time of hit determination) ), the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is determined, and depending on the state of the normal symbol at the timing when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped (low probability or high probability), the normal symbol is awarded if the winning symbol is won. The contents of the privilege to be given, that is, the contents of the opening operation of the electric accessory 140a are determined.

In other words, when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started during the high probability of the normal symbol (during time saving state), the short fluctuation time (for example, 3 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and it is normal during the short fluctuation. When the state of the symbol has transitioned to the low probability state (when transitioning from the time saving state to the normal state), the electric symbol 140a is the ordinary symbol even if the normal symbol indicating the hit is displayed after the short fluctuation ends. The opening operation (for example, “0.2 seconds×1 time”) is executed during the low probability (during normal state) of.

With this configuration, the variation of the special symbol and the variation of the normal symbol are the pachinko machines that are independently executed, and based on the gaming state that can be varied depending on the lottery result and the number of lottery of the special symbol. If the variation time of the normal symbol and the privilege content at the time of winning is determined, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is determined based on the gaming state at the time of drawing the ordinary symbol, and the privilege content at the time of winning the ordinary symbol Since it can be determined based on the game state when the variation of the normal symbol is stopped (when the electric accessory 140a is opened), the operation content of the normal symbol and the set game state may differ. It is possible to suppress the occurrence.

The variation control of the normal symbol is not limited to the content of this control example described above, it is naturally possible to use other control, for example, based on the game state at the time of lottery of the regular symbol, the variation time and The privilege content (contents of the opening operation of the electric accessory 140a) may be set. In addition, only when the normal symbol is in a high probability state (time saving state) both when the regular symbol is drawn and when the variation of the regular symbol is stopped (when the electric accessory 140a is opened), the bonus at the time of winning the ordinary symbol is obtained. The (contents of the opening operation of the electric accessory 140a) may be set to a privilege that is advantageous to the player (for example, "1 second x 2 times"), or when the ordinary symbol is drawn and when the variation of the ordinary symbol is stopped. Only when both (the opening operation of the electric accessory 140a) is a low probability state (normal state) of the ordinary symbol, the bonus at the time of winning the ordinary symbol is disadvantageous to the player (for example, "0.2 seconds"). ××”) may be set.

In addition, it may be configured to switch and execute a plurality of setting methods described above, for example, during a probability change state that is a high probability state of a normal symbol, a combination that is most advantageous to the player (at the time of a regular symbol lottery And when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped (when the electric accessory 140a is opened), the combination is such that all the advantageous benefits are given to the player except when the normal symbol is in the low probability state (normal state). In the time saving state, which is a high probability state of a normal symbol, a combination that is more disadvantageous to the player than in the probability changing state (when the variation of the normal symbol is stopped (when the electric accessory 140a is opened) is a high probability state of the normal symbol. In this case, it is possible to set a combination in which a privilege advantageous to the player is given). With such a configuration, it is possible to further set an advantage or disadvantage in the high probability state of the normal symbol, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 136).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the value of the counter or the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 105(a), in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data, the first per random number table 202a, the second per random number table 202b, and the per first type selection table 202c. At least a variation pattern selection table 202d, a jackpot transition setting table 202e, and a state transition table 202f are stored.

As described above, the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 106(a)) is a data table that stores the jackpot determination value of the first winning random number counter C1. The second random number table 202b (see FIG. 106(b)) is a data table that stores the hit determination value of the second random number counter C4 as described above. The first hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 107) is a data table in which the judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and as described above, the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is set for each jackpot. It is defined in association with the type. Since each of these tables has already been described in detail together with the description of various counters, the description thereof will be omitted here.

The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display mode. Details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109.

FIG. 108A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 108(a), the variation pattern selection table 202d in the first control example is a jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 used to select a variation pattern when the jackpot is won regardless of the gaming state. , Game state is a normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, and the normal state of the normal symbol), the deviation pattern (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 used to select the fluctuation pattern when winning the deviation And, in the gaming state other than the normal state (probability change state or time saving state), the deviation pattern (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 for deviation used to select the fluctuation pattern when a win is won, and lottery for special symbols And a special fluctuation pattern table 202d4 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern when the special condition is satisfied regardless of the result.

First, the details of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 108(b), the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 defines the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern in association with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108B, various normal reach types having a variation time of 30 seconds are defined in association with the range of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 50", and "50 to 179". The various types of super reach each having a variation time of 60 seconds are associated with each other, and the various types of special reach having a variation time of 90 seconds are associated with each other in the range of the variation type counter CS1 of "180 to 198". ing. In this way, when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, a variation pattern of variation time of 30 seconds, 60 seconds, or 90 seconds is set as the variation pattern, and a command indicating this variation pattern is issued. By transmitting to the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect corresponding to the variation time is executed on the third symbol display device 81.

As shown in FIG. 108(b), the variation patterns (variation time) selected in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 are 60 seconds (selection rate is about 55%) and 30 seconds (selection rate is about 25%). , 90 seconds (selection ratio is about 20%). This is related to the regulation content of the variation pattern table that is referred to when the special symbol lottery result, which will be described later, is off, and the variation time (variation pattern) selected when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit. The percentage and the proportion of the fluctuation time (variation pattern) selected when the special symbol lottery result is out of proportion can suggest the jackpot expectation when a particular fluctuation time (variation pattern) is selected. Is configured as follows. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not the jackpot is won according to the selected variation time (variation pattern).

In addition, in the present control example, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is used regardless of the jackpot type that is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is a jackpot type showing a probability variation jackpot and a normal jackpot. The variation pattern table may be different from the case of the jackpot type. In this case, for example, the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type that normally indicates a big jackpot is selected is shorter than the fluctuation pattern table that is used when the jackpot type indicating a probability variation jackpot is selected. It is better to configure so as to be easily handled. As a result, the longer the variation time set in the variation pattern to be executed, the more the player can expect a game result that is more advantageous to the player, so that the player is interested in the variation time of the special symbol. be able to.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type that normally indicates a big jackpot is selected more easily than the fluctuation pattern table that is used when the jackpot type indicating a probability variation big jackpot is selected. It is possible to provide a surprising game result to the player when the jackpot is won in a short variation time, and even when a short variation time is selected. , You can have expectations until the end.

Next, the details of the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 108(c), the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 includes a range of values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and a fluctuation pattern when the stop type is “complete deviation” or “reach common”. Are specified in association with each other.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 108(c), if the stop type is "completely disengaged" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 98", the fluctuation time is 7 seconds and the deviation is short. It is defined in association with each other, and a variation of 10 seconds is associated with the range of "99 to 198". When "complete disengagement" is selected as the stop type, the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed without reaching.

In addition, when the stop type is “reach common” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 149”, various normal reach types having a variation time of 30 seconds are associated and defined, and the range of “149 to 197” is defined. The various types of super reach with the variation time of 60 seconds are associated with each other, and the various types of the special reach with the variation time of 90 seconds are associated with the range of "198".

Next, with reference to FIG. 108(d), the details of the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 will be described. This deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is referred to when the special symbol lottery result is out and the game state is the probability change state (time saving state). Similar to the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 described above, the deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 indicates the value of the fluctuation classification counter CS1 when the stop classification is “complete deviation” or “reach common”. The range and the variation pattern are defined in association with each other.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 108(d), the stop type is "completely disengaged", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 190". Is defined in association with each other, and a deviation of 5 seconds is associated with the range of "191 to 198".

In addition, when the stop type is “reach common” and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 190”, various normal reach types having a variation time of 30 seconds are associated and defined, and the range of “191 to 198” is defined. Is defined in association with various types of super reach with a variation time of 60 seconds. That is, in the case where the gaming state is the probability changing state (time saving state), it is stipulated that the variation time of 90 seconds will not be selected if the lottery result of the special symbol is missed. Therefore, when the gaming state is a certain variation state (time saving state), when the variation time of 90 seconds (variation pattern) is selected, it is only when the special symbol jackpot is won. In addition, in this case, a bonus effect for celebrating the big hit is executed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction of the special symbol that is notified after the special pattern is discontinued after the long-term fluctuation pattern has been executed during the probability change state (time saving state), which is a game state advantageous to the player. You can

As described above, when the probability variation state (time saving state) is set as the game state and the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 is used, the normal state is set as the game state and the deviation (normal) ) Since the variation time of the special symbol is set to be shorter than when the variation pattern table 202d2 is used, the special symbol lottery in the probability variation state (time saving state), which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is performed. It can be done efficiently. Although detailed description is omitted, if the probability variation state (time saving state) is set as the game state, the stop type is reach when the special symbol comes off than when the normal state is set. It is set so that the rate of deviation is low. Therefore, during the probability change state (time saving state) of the game state, the frequency of occurrence of out-of-reach decreases (because it becomes difficult to perform the out-of-range change having a long change time), so the sure change state is a game state advantageous to the player ( It is possible to more efficiently perform the lottery for special symbols during the (time saving state).

Next, the details of the special variation pattern table 202d4 will be described with reference to FIG. This special fluctuation pattern table 202d4 is a fluctuation pattern table for selecting a fluctuation pattern for four special figure fluctuations when the gaming state after the jackpot is a sure-changed state or a time shortened state, and is the continuous jackpot effect described above. It is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the inside special figure variation (see FIG. 89(a)).

As shown in FIG. 109, in the special variation pattern table 202d4, the variation pattern is defined in association with the number of special symbol (special symbol) variations after the jackpot is finished, the lottery result of the special symbol, and the value of the variation type counter CS1. ing. Specifically, in the 1st to 3rd special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot, the variation time is 0.5 seconds regardless of the special symbol lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1. Short win) is stipulated.

In the fourth special symbol fluctuation after the jackpot, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, ultra short deviation of 0.5 seconds is defined regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the special symbol If the result of the lottery is a win, an ultra-short win with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is defined in the range of the variation type counter CS1 of "0 to 179", and a variation time of 32 in the range of "180 to 198". Special win of 5 seconds is specified.

With this configuration, when the gaming state after the jackpot is in the probable change state or the time saving state, it is possible to immediately execute the variation for four special symbols. As a result, like the above-mentioned continuous jackpot production, when performing a series of jackpot production using a plurality of jackpot games, it is possible to shorten the variation period of the special symbol executed between the jackpot games, The effect can be enhanced.

In addition, as will be described later in detail, in the present control example, in the state where the probability variation state or the time saving state is set as the game state (during the continuous game mode), the probability variation state or the time saving state is set again after the jackpot. When winning, the variation pattern is selected using the special variation pattern table 202d4. With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the special symbol variation time for a predetermined number of times (4 times) after the jackpot is completed only in the state where the probability variation state (time saving state) is continuously executed.

Thereby, for example, in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, when the jackpot (eg, jackpot A to jackpot D) in which the probability variation state or the time saving state is set after the jackpot is finished, that is, the jackpot end Later, there is a reserved storage of the special symbol 1, and because there is no reserved storage of the special symbol 2, in the state where the symbol variation of the special symbol 1 is likely to be executed, the variation pattern table 202d1 for jackpot or out of place (probability change) The variation pattern is set by referring to the variation pattern table 202d3.

On the other hand, in the state where the probability variation state (time saving state) is set, when the jackpot that the probability variation state or the time saving state is set after the jackpot is finished (for example, jackpot F to jackpot K), that is, after the jackpot ends, In the state where there is a reserved storage of the special symbol 2 and the symbol variation of the special symbol 2 is likely to be executed, the special variation pattern is set to an ultra-short variation of 0.5 seconds.

Further, as shown in the special variation pattern table 202d4 of FIG. 109, in the present control example, a variation pattern corresponding to the special winning is provided at a proportion (about 10%) of the case of winning the fourth rotation after the jackpot is over. (Variation time 32.5 seconds) is selected.

With such a configuration, when the jackpot is won in a state where the variation pattern is selected with reference to the special variation pattern table 202d4, what is a series of jackpot production (continuous jackpot production) continued from the previous jackpot game? In addition, it is possible to execute a special production that celebrates the success of the jackpot. Therefore, various jackpot effects can be provided to the player, and the effect of the effects can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, the special variation pattern table 202d4 is defined such that the special variation (32.5 seconds) is selected in a part of the fourth variation after the jackpot is finished, but the invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the special winning variation (32.5 seconds) may be selected even when the number of variations after the end of the big hit is one to three times. Further, in the case where the special symbol lottery result is out of order, the special fluctuation pattern table 202d4 is defined so that a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time other than 0.5 seconds is set (for example, fluctuation time 10 seconds) is selected. Good. With such a configuration, when a variation of 0.5 seconds or more is executed before the number of variations after the jackpot reaches four times, the player can be expected to win the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to perform a game in consideration of the variation time of the special symbol.

Next, details of the jackpot migration setting table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot transition setting table 202e is a table for defining a game state set after the jackpot is over, and is a jackpot type (jackpot A to jackpot K) selected by referring to the first hit type selection table 202c. , The state transition status (state transition 1 to state transition 9) is defined in association with the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

This jackpot transition setting table 202e is referred to (S1213) in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 134) described later (S1211: Yes), when it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect, the selected state transition status As a result, the game state is set according to the regulation contents prescribed in the state transition table 202f described later.

Specifically, the contents of the jackpot transition setting table 202e will be described as one of the jackpot types of "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot D", "jackpot F", "jackpot G", and "jackpot H". So, if the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 1" is set as the state transition status, "probably changed state (with high probability time saving) (ST2)", or " In the case of "time saving state (with low probability time saving) (ST3)", "state transition 2" is set as the state transition status.

When "state transition 1" is set as the state transition status, the game state is set based on the contents defined in the state transition 1 table 202f1 of the state transition table 202f (see FIG. 111) described later, and the "state transition" When "2" is set, the game state is set based on the contents defined in the state transition 2 table 202f2.

Next, if the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 3" is set as the state transition status, and the "probability variation state (high In the case of "probability time saving (ST2)" or "time saving state (low probability time saving) (ST3)", "status transition 4" is set as the status transition status, and the jackpot type is "bonus E". If the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 5" is set as the state transition status, and "probably changed state (with high probability time saving) (ST2)" or "time saving state" In the case of (there is a low probability time saving) (ST3)", "state transition 4" is set as the state transition status.

Further, when the jackpot type is "jackpot H" or "jackpot J", and the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 6" is set as the state transition status, and " In the case of the probability variation state (with high probability time saving) (ST2)" or "time saving state (with low probability time saving) (ST3)", "status transition 7" is set as the status transition status, and the jackpot type is "big jackpot K" ", and the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is "normal state (ST1)", "state transition 8" is set as the state transition status, "probably changed state (with high probability time saving) (ST2)", Alternatively, in the case of "time saving state (with low probability time saving) (ST3)", "state transition 9" is set as the state transition status.

When any of “state transition 3” to “state transition 9” is set as the state transition status, of the state transition 3 table 202f3 to state transition 9 table 202f9 of the state transition table 202f (see FIG. 111) described later. , The game state is set based on the contents defined in the corresponding table.

Here, the contents of the state transition table 202f will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This state transition table 202f is a table used for shifting the state status such as the game state and the variation pattern table based on the number of times of change of the special symbol, and the specified number counter 203j stored in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. The state status is shifted based on the value of. In the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137), the state transition table 202f is referred to when the prescribed number counter 203j is acquired when it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1211: Yes) (S1214), In the variation count subtraction process (see FIG. 129), when it is determined that the value of the specified count counter 203j is 0 (S409: Yes), it is referred to for setting the next status (S410).

FIG. 111A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the state transition table 202f in the first control example. As illustrated in FIG. 111A, the state transition table 202f in the first control example is the state transition status (“state transition 1” to “state transition 9”) set using the jackpot transition setting table 202e described above. ) Corresponding to the state transition table (“state transition 1 table 202f1” to “state transition 9 table 202f9”).

First, the details of the state transition 1 table 202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. The state transition 1 table 202f1 is a table referenced when "state transition 1" is set as the state transition status, and the state status "ST2 (probability change state) in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j. )” is specified. That is, in the state in which the state transition 1 table 202f1 is used (the state in which “state transition 1” is set), the probability variation state is continuously set until the next big hit.

Next, details of the state transition 2 table 202f2 will be described with reference to FIG. The state transition 2 table 202f2 is a table referred to when “state transition 2” is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 2 table 202f2, the status status "ST2a (probability change state)" in which the value of the specified number counter 203j is set to "4" and the status status in which "0" is set to the value of the specified number counter 203j “ST2 (probably changed state)” is specified. That is, after the jackpot ends, first, "ST2a" is set as the status status until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes "0", and then "ST2" is set as the status status.

Here, when "ST2a" is set as the status status, the special variation pattern table 202d4 of the variation pattern selection table 202d is set to be used when the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected. With such a configuration, in the state where the same gaming state (probability variation state) is continuously set, it is possible to preset a rule for selecting the variation pattern using the special variation pattern table 202d4 only for a specific period. Therefore, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

FIG. 111(d) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 3 table 202f3. The state transition 3 table 202f3 is a table referred to when “state transition 3” is set as the state transition status. In the state transition 3 table 202f3, the status status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which the value of the specified number counter 203j is set to "100" and the status status in which "0" is set to the value of the specified number counter 203j “ST1 (normal state)” is specified. That is, after the jackpot, first, "ST3" is set as the status status until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes "0" (the time saving state is set until the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches 100 in the time saving state). After that, "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status.

FIG. 111(e) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 4 table 202f4. The state transition 4 table 202f4 is a table referred to when “state transition 4” is set as the state transition status. In the state transition 4 table 202f4, the status status "ST3a (time saving state)" in which the value of the specified number counter 203j is set to "4" and the status status in which "96" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j “ST3 (time saving state)” and a state status “ST1 (normal state)” in which “0” is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j are specified. That is, after the jackpot, first, until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes "0" (until the special symbol changes four times), "ST3a" is set as the status status, and then the special symbol changes 96 times. “ST3 (time saving state)” is set as the status status, and then “ST1 (normal state)” is set as the status status. As a result, when the time saving state (100 times) is set after the end of the big hit, the variation pattern can be selected by referring to the special variation pattern table 202d4 only for the special symbol variation for the first four times.

FIG. 111(f) is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 5 table 202f5. The state transition 5 table 202f5 is a table referred to when “state transition 5” is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 5 table 202f5, the state status "ST1 (normal state)" in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j is specified. That is, the normal state is set without setting the game state (probably changed state, time saving state) advantageous to the player after the jackpot is over.

FIG. 112A is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 6 table 202f6. The state transition 6 table 202f6 is a table referred to when "state transition 6" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 6 table 202f6, the status status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which the value of the specified number counter 203j is set to "50" and the status status in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j “ST1 (normal state)” is specified. That is, after the jackpot, first, "ST3" is set as the status status until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes "0" (the time saving state is set until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes 50 times in the time saving state). After that, "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status.

FIG. 112B is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 7 table 202f7. The state transition 7 table 202f7 is a table referred to when "state transition 7" is set as the state transition status. In the state transition 7 table 202f7, the status status "ST3a (time saving state)" in which the value of the specified number counter 203j is set to "4" and the status status in which "46" is set to the value of the specified number counter 203j “ST3 (time saving state)” and a state status “ST1 (normal state)” in which “0” is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j are specified. In other words, after the jackpot, first, until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes "0" (until the special symbol changes 4 times), "ST3a" is set as the status status, and then the special symbol changes 46 times. “ST3 (time saving state)” is set as the status status, and then “ST1 (normal state)” is set as the status status. Thereby, when the time saving state (50 times) is set after the end of the big hit, the variation pattern can be selected by referring to the special variation pattern table 202d4 only for the special symbol variation for the first four times.

FIG. 112C is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 8 table 202f8. The state transition 8 table 202f8 is a table referred to when “state transition 8” is set as the state transition status. In the state transition 8 table 202f8, the status status "ST3 (time saving state)" in which the value of the specified number counter 203j is set to "25" and the status status in which "0" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j “ST1 (normal state)” is specified. That is, after the jackpot, first, "ST3" is set as the status status until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes "0" (the time saving state is set until the number of times the special symbol changes 25 times in the time saving state). After that, "ST1 (normal state)" is set as the state status.

FIG. 112D is a block diagram showing the specified contents of the state transition 9 table 202f9. The state transition 9 table 202f9 is a table referred to when "state transition 9" is set as the state transition status. In this state transition 9 table 202f9, the status status "ST3a (time saving state)" in which the value of the specified number counter 203j is set to "4" and the status status in which "21" is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j “ST3 (time saving state)” and a state status “ST1 (normal state)” in which “0” is set as the value of the specified number counter 203j are specified. In other words, after the jackpot, first, until the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes "0" (until the special symbol changes four times), "ST3a" is set as the status status, and then the special symbol changes 21 times. “ST3 (time saving state)” is set as the status status, and then “ST1 (normal state)” is set as the status status. As a result, when the time saving state (25 times) is set after the end of the big hit, the variation pattern can be selected by referring to the special variation pattern table 202d4 only for the special symbol variation for the first four times.

As described above, in the first control example, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, based on the jackpot type of the jackpot won, and the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot. The gaming state set after the jackpot or the variation pattern table used to select the variation pattern of the special symbol after the jackpot can be different. Thereby, the contents of the game can be made more complicated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the present control example, the period for selecting the variation pattern using the special variation pattern table 202d4 is set to 1 to 4 rotations of the special symbol variation after the jackpot is finished, but other configurations may be used, for example. The special variation pattern table 202d4 may be used in the eleventh to fourteenth rotations after the jackpot is finished, instead of the special symbol variation executed immediately after the jackpot. When configured in this way, the state transition table is set to the state status “ST3 (time saving state)” in which the value of the specified number counter 203j is set to “10” and the value of the specified number counter 203j is set to “4”. The status status "ST3a (time saving state)" is set, the status number "ST3 (time saving state)" is set to "46" as the value of the specified number counter 203j, and the specified number counter 203j is set to "0". The "ST1 (normal state)" may be defined. With this configuration, it is possible to select the variation pattern of the 11th to 14th rotations after the jackpot is finished, using the special variation pattern table.

In this way, by using the configuration of the above-mentioned state transition table, the state status that is set starting from the end of the jackpot and the number of fluctuations (specified number) of special symbols that the state status continues are set in association with each other. Only by doing, the game specification can be easily set, and the processing load of the main controller 110 can be reduced. Further, even when the game specification is changed, since the content of the state transition table may be changed, the game specification can be easily changed.

Further, in the first control example, when the normal state is set as the game state (when ST1 is set as the state status), "0" is set as the value of the specified number of times counter 203j, and is always set. The same variation pattern table (variation pattern table 202d1 for jackpot or variation pattern table 202d2 for deviation (normal) is configured to be referred to, but a variation pattern table that can be referred to when the game state is the normal state A plurality of variation pattern tables may be provided so as to correspond to the value of the specified number of times counter 203j. In this case, for example, when the time saving state is set as the game state, the time saving end condition is satisfied (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 50 times), and the game state shifts to the normal state. (When the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes "0" in the state transition 6 table 202f6), the value of the specified number counter 203j is set to "10" corresponding to the state status ST1.

Then, when the value of the prescribed number counter 203j is larger than "0" in the state where the state status ST1 is set, the variation pattern may be selected by referring to the special variation (normal) pattern table. With such a configuration, it is possible to select a variation pattern different from usual immediately after the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, so that the player can enjoy a game state advantageous to the player. It can make you think that it is still continuing.

In the state where the normal state is set as the game state, during the period in which the special variation pattern table is referred to, the production mode of the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the voice output device 226 is output. It is preferable that the sound mode or the light emission mode output from the lamp display device 227 be a special mode corresponding to the period. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a more special feeling. In addition, even when the jackpot is won during the period in which the special variation pattern table is referred to, it is preferable to execute a special effect mode different from the ordinary effect during the big hit. As a result, it is possible for the player to feel that he or she has won the jackpot during a special period, and it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

In the first control example, the state transition table is provided so as to correspond to each state transition status. However, a common state transition table may be used for a portion where the setting contents of the state transition table are common. With this configuration, the amount of data stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 can be reduced.

In addition, in the first control example, the configuration in which the fluctuation pattern table referred to by switching the status status based on the value of the specified number counter 203j is switched is used, but the status status is used for other elements. May be variable. For example, in the state of referring to the state transition 6 table 202f6, when the state status ST3 is set and the value of the specified number counter 203j is "40", the special symbol lottery result is out, but a small amount of privilege If a lottery result (so-called small hit) that can give a (privilege for opening the variable winning device 65 for a short period of time (for example, 3 seconds)) is won, the state status is changed from ST3 to ST3b, and the value of the prescribed number counter 203j is changed. Is set to "4", the status status ST3b is set, and the value of the specified number counter 203j is larger than "0" (in the case of "1" to "4"), the fluctuation pattern table dedicated to after the small hit Refer to. You may make it switch the fluctuation pattern table to refer. With this configuration, it is possible to select a dedicated variation pattern only for a predetermined period (a period until the special symbol varies four times) after winning the small hit.

When the value of the specified number of times counter 203j becomes "0" while the status status ST3b is set, the state status ST3 is set again, and the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is set to the status status ST3b. By configuring to set "35" subtracted by the counted value while is set, the period in which the time saving state is set as the game state (the period until the special symbol changes 50 times) It is possible to select and execute a dedicated variation pattern for a predetermined period (a period until the special symbol varies four times) based on the small hit that was won during the time saving state without changing.

Further, as will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 129, the value of the specified number counter 203j is configured to be subtracted when the variation of the special symbol is executed, but other configurations may be used. For example, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 having the above-mentioned small hit as the lottery result of the special symbol, the value of the prescribed number counter 203j may be subtracted based on the number of times the small hit is won. In this way, by switching the variation pattern table to be referred to based on the lottery result of the special symbol (based on the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a predetermined lottery result), not the number of times the special symbol fluctuates. Since the variation pattern table to be referred to can be varied at a timing different from the transition of the number of times of variation of the special symbol in the state, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected game.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105( b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 105(b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d. And, special symbol 2 reservation sphere number counter 203e, normal symbol reservation sphere number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, time saving medium counter 203h, status status storage area 203i, prescribed number counter 203j, and other memory area 203z have.

The special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a has four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area), and in each of these areas, a first random number counter C1 and a first per type counter The respective values of C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored.

More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) in the first ball entrance 64, and the acquired data is stored in four reserved areas ( Among the vacant areas from the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area, the areas having the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the reserved first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a are executed. It is shifted (moved) to the area, and based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When the data is shifted from the holding first area to the execution area, the holding first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having the smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present control example, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, the data is shifted only for the reserved areas (the second reserved area to the fourth reserved area) in which the winning data is stored.

In the pachinko machine 10, the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize), and as soon as the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired according to the starting prize, the original special symbol is acquired. Apart from the jackpot lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, based on the data (each counter C1 to C3, each value of CS1) corresponding to the start winning, various obtained when the original lottery is performed Predicting the information will be described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. In addition, the various information includes hit/fail, stop type, and variation pattern.

Then, when the pre-reading is completed, a winning information command including various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the prize information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the win/fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the prize information command and uses them as the prize information in the prize information storage area of the RAM 233. 223a.

The special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, like the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, has four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). In the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) corresponding to the start winning to the second ball entrance 140 is stored.

The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either of the left and right normal entrances (through gates) 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first Among the vacant areas from the area to the reserved fourth area, the areas having the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, like the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserve ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area is in an empty state, so as in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, other The winning process stored in the holding area of No. 1 is shifted to the holding area having a smaller area number by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is a variable display of the special symbol 1 (in the third symbol display device 81) performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting winning). This is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display that is performed) up to 4 times. The initial value of the value N1 of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time the sphere enters the first ball inlet 64 and the number of holding balls of the special symbol 1 increases, One is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S504 in FIG. 130). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol 1 is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 127).

The special symbol 2 reservation sphere number counter 203e, the variable display of the special symbol 1 which is performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the second ball inlet 140 (variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81) ) Is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of waiting times) up to 4 times. The value N2 of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is set to zero as the initial value, like the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d, and the sphere enters the second entrance 140 to be special. Every time the number of reserved balls of the symbol 2 increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 (see S510 in FIG. 130). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol 1 is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 127).

These special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number N1 of variable display in special symbol 1), and the value of special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (holding number N2 of variable display in special symbol 2) is a holding ball The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a number command (see S206 and S211 in FIG. 127 and S505 and S511 in FIG. 130). The reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e are changed. Command.

The voice lamp control device 113 is a main control by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball counter 203e is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the reserved symbol number itself of the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 held in the device 110. As a result, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b1 of the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display holding ball number managed by the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b2 are held in the main controller 110 by the influence of noise or the like. Even in the case where the number of reserved balls displayed in the actual variable display is deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the next command of the number of reserved balls received.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the number of holding balls command, and the display holding device for notifying the number of holding balls to the display control device 114 each time the number of holding balls changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved symbol in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved sphere number notified by the display reserved sphere number command.

The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is a variable display holding sphere number (standby) of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the sphere in the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. It is a counter that counts the number of times up to four times. The initial value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and every time the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S804 in FIG. 133). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol is newly executed (see S705 in FIG. 132).

When the sphere passes through either the right or left normal ball entrance 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, a second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S805 of FIG. 133). On the other hand, when the sphere passes through either the right or left normal ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c. (S803 of FIG. 133: No).

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is a probability variation state of a special symbol (high probability state of a special symbol), and if the value of the probability variation flag 203g is on, the pachinko machine 10 is It shows that the special symbol is in a probable state. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of special symbols (low probability state of special symbols). The probability variation flag 203g is initially set to OFF and is set to ON each time the "big hit A, B, D, F, G, I" end timing (big hit control process (see FIG. 137). ) S1212). On the other hand, the probability variation flag 203g is turned off every time the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off or the start of the big hit is set (S218 of special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 127)).

When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128) is executed by the MPU 201, the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is executed. In the special symbol variation start process, the probability variation flag 203g is referred to, and if the state is ON, the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is selected based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203g is off, the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is randomly selected based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 128).

In this control example, while the probability variation state is set as the game state, the time saving state of the normal symbol is also set. For this reason, when the lottery for the normal symbol is performed, the probability variation flag 203g and the value of the time saving medium counter 203h are referred to, and it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state. Specifically, if the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 1 or more, or if the probability variation flag 203g is on (time saving state or probability variation state), it is determined to be a time saving state of a normal symbol, A lottery for ordinary symbols is performed based on the random table per ordinary symbol for high probability. On the other hand, if the value of the hour saving medium counter 203h is 0, and the probability variation flag 203g is off (not in the time saving state or the probability variation state), based on the normal symbol per random symbol for low probability time, the normal symbol A lottery is performed (see S709 and S710 in FIG. 132).

The time saving medium counter 203h is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. That is, if the value of the hour/hour counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state of a normal symbol. In this time saving counter 203h, the initial value is set to 0, the main control device 110 wins the special symbol jackpot, and at the end of the jackpot, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S1212 in FIG. 137). ). Specifically, when the jackpot type is "big hit C", "100" is set as the value of the hour saving medium counter 203h at the end of the big hit, and when "big hit H, J", at the end of the big hit. "50" is set as the value of the hour/short/medium counter 203h, and in the case of "big hit K", "25" is set as the value of the hour/short/medium counter 203h at the end of the big hit.

In addition, when the jackpot type is "jackpot E", the value of the hour and hour counter 203h set at the end of the jackpot is set to be different depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. If the gaming state is a time saving state (with low probability time saving) or a probability variation state (with high probability time saving), "100" is set as the value of the hour saving medium counter 203h, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state ( If there is no low probability time saving, the value of the time saving medium counter 203h will not be set.

After that, 1 is subtracted every time the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is completed until the value of the hour/hour counter 203h becomes 0 (S402 of FIG. 129). Further, even when the value of the hour/hour counter 203h is 1 or more, when the jackpot is won, the value is reset to 0 (S218 of FIG. 127).

When the lottery for the normal symbol is performed, the value of the hour/hour counter 203h is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the lottery for the normal symbol is based on the random symbol per ordinary symbol for high probability time. On the other hand, if the value of the hour/hour counter 203h is 0, and if the probability variation flag 203g described later is off, the lottery for normal symbols is performed based on the random symbol per ordinary symbol for low probability. (See S709 and S710 in FIG. 132).

The status status storage area 203i is a storage area for storing information on the current status (ST) set by the status transition table 202f. In the state status storage area 203i, in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137), when it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1211: Yes), that is, when the jackpot ends, the acquired state status is displayed. When the value of the specified number counter 203j that is stored and then changed in the change number subtraction process (see FIG. 129) becomes 0 each time the special symbol changes (S409: Yes), is newly set. The status is stored.

The specified number of times counter 203j is a counter for measuring that the number of times of variation of the special symbol has reached the specified number of times. The specified number counter 203j corresponds to the specified number acquired at the end of the jackpot when it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) (S1211: Yes). A value is set (S1213), and then, in the variation number subtraction process (see FIG. 129), the value is subtracted every time the special symbol varies (S407). When the value of the specified number of times counter 203j changes from "1" to "0", a new status is set based on the content specified in the corresponding status transition table 202f.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 114 to 119, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described in detail. FIG. 114A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 114(a), the ROM 222 has a variation pattern table 222a, a holding rank selection table 222b, a big hit medium production selection table 222c, an addition number selection table 222d, a continuous production mode selection table 222e, and a continuation. It has at least a value main selection table 222f, a continuous value sub selection table 222g, a final mode selection table 222h, an expectation degree selection table 222i, and an expectation degree effect selection table 222j.

The variation pattern table 222a is referred to in order to select a detailed aspect of the variation effect (variation display) based on the aspect of the rough variation effect (variation display) notified by the variation pattern command from the main control device 110. It's a table. The display variation pattern command is set based on the variation effect mode selected from the variation pattern table 222a (see S3812 in FIG. 147).

The reserved rank selection table 222b is a table for selecting a reserved rank based on a reserved state of a special symbol, and a big hit performance is determined based on the selected reserved rank. Here, details of the reservation rank selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 115(b).

FIG. 115(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the reserved rank selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 115(b), this reserved rank selection table 222b has the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol), and whether the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 has the winning information showing a big hit. Pending ranks are defined in association with each other on the basis of the determination result of whether or not. With such a configuration, the effect executed during the jackpot can be determined based on the variation result (lottery result) of the special symbol (special symbol 2) executed after the jackpot.

Here, in the present control example, in the case where both the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 and the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 are present, a process of preferentially extinguishing the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is executed (see FIG. 127). ) Is configured as follows. That is, the timing at which the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 is exhausted becomes indefinite.

Therefore, in this control example, based on the winning ball included in the holding ball of the special symbol 2 that changes preferentially after the jackpot ends (holding ball whose fluctuation order is fixed after the jackpot end) and the holding ball of the special symbol 2 It is configured such that the pending rank is selected, and the jackpot effect based on the variation result (lottery result) of the special symbol executed after the jackpot is finished can be executed.

In addition, when both the reserved ball of the special symbol 1 and the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 are present, the reserved balls are arranged in the reserved order (the order of entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 140). If it is a pachinko machine 10 that uses a configuration that digests (so-called winning order digestion), instead of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2, all the reserved balls or a predetermined number of balls (eg, 4) in the order of digestion. The reservation rank may be selected as a target. Thereby, it is possible to execute the jackpot effect based on the change result (lottery result) of the special symbol executed after the jackpot is over.

The content of the reservation rank selection table 222b will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 115(b). The number of reserved balls of the special symbol (special symbol 2) is "1 to 3", and a hit is shown therein. When the winning information is “present”, the holding rank “3” is selected, and when the winning information indicating the winning is “not present”, the holding rank “2” is selected.

In addition, when the number of special symbols (special symbol 2) to be held is "4" and the winning information indicating the winning is "present", the holding rank "4" is selected, and the winning information indicating the winning is "not present". In this case, the reserved rank “1” is selected. When the number of reserved special symbols (special symbol 2) is "0", the reserved rank "1" is selected without using the reserved rank selection table 222b.

The reservation rank selected by referring to the reservation rank selection table 222b is referred to in a big hit medium effect selection table 222c described later. Next, with reference to FIG. 115(c), the big hit medium effect selection table 222c will be described. The big hit medium effect selection table 222c is a table for selecting an effect to be executed during the big hit, and receives an opening command in the hit related command process (see FIG. 142) (S3301: Yes), and a big hit medium effect. Referenced when executing the setting process (see FIG. 143) (S3406).

In the big hit medium effect selection table 222c, the big hit medium effect is defined in association with the holding rank selected in the holding rank selection table 222b and the first effect counter 223y1. Specifically, the "normal winning effect" is defined in the range where the hold rank is "1" and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is "0 to 99". This "normal hit effect" is an effect that is completed during one big hit game (see FIG. 83(b)), and an effect corresponding to the type of big hit to be executed is executed.

In the range where the hold rank is "1" and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is "100 to 149", "additional effect" is defined. This "additional effect" partially displays the number of round games executed in one big hit as described above with reference to FIG. 83(a) (for example, in the case of 15 rounds, 5 rounds are displayed), and the jackpot game progresses to display the remaining number of rounds (the number of undisplayed rounds).

When the "additional effect" is executed during the jackpot, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many rounds the jackpot currently being executed is a jackpot, and to be able to watch the effect during the jackpot game. .. Furthermore, in the "additional effect" of the first control example, when a plurality of jackpots are won in a short period of time (the next jackpot is included in the winning information (reserved symbol) acquired at the end of the previous jackpot). In the case), by adding the number of rounds of the next jackpot to the number of rounds of the previous jackpot, it is configured to be executed across a plurality of jackpots.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how many times the jackpot was won while the "additional effect" is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while enjoying how many rounds are displayed in total by the "additional effect".

Further, in the "additional effect" of this control example, the number of rounds executed in one big hit can be divided and displayed, and the number of rounds executed in a plurality of big hits can be combined and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of jackpots won during one "additional effect" and the number of rounds executed in each jackpot. As a result, for example, when the number of rounds to be executed during one jackpot is 15 rounds, a winning jackpot of 15 rounds is won in the pachinko machine 10 in which the probability state is always set as the game state after the jackpot is over. Can be made difficult to understand, and a game can be played while predicting which game state will be set after the jackpot is over.

In addition, when an effect that suggests a game state set after the jackpot is used as an effect executed during the jackpot, it is executed during one jackpot before the result of the effect is displayed. By grasping the number of rounds to be played, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the gaming state set after the jackpot is finished and the effect of the production is deteriorated.

Next, "holding rank" is "2", "normal winning effect" is defined in the range of the value of the first effect counter 223y1 "0 to 49", and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is The "additional effect" is defined in the range of "50 to 149". In the range where the hold rank is "3" and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is "0 to 49", "ordinary winning effect" is defined, and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is "50 to". In the range of "99", "additional effect" is defined, and in the range of the value of the first effect counter 223y1, "100 to 149", "continuous winning effect" is defined.

As described above with reference to FIG. 84, the "continuous winning effect" is an effect for notifying the player that a plurality of jackpots have been won at the time when the previous (first) jackpot game is started ( 84). As the “continuous winning effect” executed here, for example, a value obtained by adding up the number of rounds of the first big hit (for example, 15 rounds) and the number of rounds of the second big hit (for example, 10 rounds) (for example, 25 rounds). The effect that is notified at the time when one big jackpot game is started (the first round of the first big jackpot is started) is executed.

By executing the "continuous winning effect" in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the fact that multiple jackpots have been won, and the jackpot game can be performed with peace of mind while giving the player a sense of superiority. Can be made.

In the range where the hold rank is "4" and the value of the first effect counter 223y1 is "0 to 49", "normal winning effect" is defined, and in the range "50 to 149", "Continuous winning effect" is defined.

As described above, in this control example, based on the selected pending rank and the acquired value of the first effect counter 223y1, a different effect (a big hit medium effect) is executed during a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the effects executed during the big hit.

Furthermore, since the timing of notifying the player that the next big hit is included in the hold is made different depending on the selected big hit production, for example, at the timing when the previous big hit game is finished, Like a pachinko machine that notifies the presence or absence of a holding symbol to win the jackpot (presence or absence of the in-hold condominium), compared to the case of notifying the presence or absence of the in-hold condominium only at a specific timing, for the next jackpot win Therefore, the jackpot game can be executed while keeping expectations, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, since the contents and proportions of the big hit mid-sized effects selected according to the holding ranks are made different, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations, and the second entrance hole during the big hit game. It is possible to execute an effect in which the look-ahead result of the ball winning in 140 can be considered, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

Specifically, if the holding rank is "1", that is, the number of holding symbols is the upper limit value at the time of winning the jackpot, and if there is no winning information corresponding to the jackpot in the holding symbol, the in-hold consecutive Since the villa is not executed, it is stipulated that either the normal winning effect or the additional effect is selected, and the selection ratio is specified so that the normal winning effect is easily selected. In other words, if the holding rank is "1" at the time of winning the jackpot, the "normal winning effect" that does not cause the player to have an excessive expectation for the holding villa, or this time Any of the "additional effects" that makes it difficult to know how many rounds the jackpot is.

When the pending rank is "2", that is, when the number of pending symbols is not the upper limit at the time of jackpot winning, and there is no winning information corresponding to the jackpot in the pending symbols, the pending rank is different from "1", There is a possibility to get a new pending symbol during the jackpot game. Therefore, in order to deal with the case where the pending indoor villa is finalized during the jackpot game, even if the pending internal villa is not finalized at the time of winning the jackpot, rather than when the pending rank is "1" The ratio of selecting "effect" is set high. As a result, when a winning symbol to win the jackpot is obtained during the jackpot game, the fact can be notified to the player by the "additional effect".

If the pending rank is "3", that is, the number of pending symbols is not the upper limit at the time of winning the jackpot, and if there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot in the pending symbol, that is, the pending symbol is not the upper limit When the big hit game is executed in the state where the condominium has been confirmed, in addition to the above-mentioned "normal hit effect" and "additional effect", it is possible to notify early that the pending holiday condominium has been confirmed. If the pending rank is "4", that is, the reserved symbol is the upper limit, and there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot in the reserved symbol, the "normal winning" is selected. It is stipulated that either "use effect" or "continuous win effect" is selected.

That is, in the pending ranks "3" and "4", which have already been confirmed as the pending holiday rental, the pending rank "3" is a state in which a new pending ball (prize information) can be obtained during the jackpot game. Therefore, by making it possible to select the "additional effect", it is possible to make the player think that he or she has won the next jackpot, as if the holding ball (winning information) obtained during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, in the case of the hold rank "4", a new hold ball (prize information) cannot be acquired during the jackpot game, and there is no chance of winning the next jackpot during the jackpot game. "Production" is not selected, and the production of "continuous winning effect" is executed. By configuring in this way, when the number of holding balls at the time of winning the jackpot is the upper limit, and in other cases, that is, in the determination result of whether or not a new holding ball can be acquired during the jackpot game It is possible to suppress execution of an effect that is uncomfortable with the actual holding status by changing the option of the effect executed during the big hit based on the above.

In addition, in the present control example, it is stipulated that the "normal hit effect" is selected regardless of which of the holding ranks is selected. Therefore, when the "normal hit effect" is executed, Even if there is, it is possible to leave the possibility of an on-hold resort. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the big hit game while expecting the player to stay in the park.

Next, the additional number selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. This addition number selection table 222d is the fixed round number display mode Dm4 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 when “additional effect” is selected as the effect executed during the big hit. FIG. 86 is a table for selecting a value (additional round number) to be added to (see FIG. 86( a )).

This addition number selection table 222d is a case where a new round number command is received in the hit related command processing (see FIG. 142) (S3304: Yes), and the addition effect flag 223h is set to ON ( (S3306: Yes) is referred to in a part of the process during the additional effect (see FIG. 144) executed (S3506). The selected number of additions is stored in the area for storing the value to be added to the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 in the display round number storage area 223g (S3506).

Then, the value displayed in the running round number display mode Dm3 (the number of big hit rounds currently being executed) and the value displayed in the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 (the number of rounds confirmed to be executed) are When they are the same, the number of additions stored in the display round number storage area 223g is displayed in the round number display mode Dm10 (see FIG. 86(a)).

As shown in FIG. 116(a), the additional number selection table 222d includes the number of remaining rounds of the big hits, the presence/absence of a winning prize (whether or not the reserved hotspot is confirmed), and the second effect counter 223y2. The additional number is specified in association with. Specifically, when the value of the number of remaining rounds is "5", "5" is selected as the additional number regardless of whether or not there is a winning prize and the value of the second effect counter 223y2.

In the first control example, the number of all the jackpots (the number of the jackpots in which the jackpot effect is executed) is set to a multiple of 5 (5 rounds, 10 rounds, 15 rounds), and the remaining round number is 5. This is because in the case of a round, it is necessary to display the remaining round number in the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 at this timing.

When the value of the number of remaining rounds is “10, 15”, the winning prize is “present”, and the value of the second effect counter 223y2 is “0 to 49”, the number of additions “5” is “50 to 99”. The number of additions is “10” in the range, the number of additions is “15” in the range of “100 to 149”, the value of the number of remaining rounds is “10, 15”, and the winning prize is “none”. In the range where the value of the effect counter 223y2 is "0 to 49", the additional number "5", in the range "50 to 99", the additional number "15", and in the range "100 to 149", the additional number " 10" is defined.

As described above, when the number of remaining rounds is the same (for example, “15”), the ratio of the number of additions to be selected is defined to differ depending on whether or not there is a winning prize. As a result, it is possible to make the player predict the presence or absence of the in-hold holiday villa based on the value added during the "additional effect", and it is possible to enhance the effect.

The value of the number of remaining rounds is “20 to”, the winning prize is “present”, and the value of the second effect counter 223y2 is “0 to 49”, the additional number “5” is “50 to 99”. The number of additions is defined as "10", and the number of additions is defined as "15" in the range of "100 to 149". In the first control example, since the maximum value of the number of big hit rounds executed in one big hit game is set to "15 rounds", the value of the number of remaining rounds is "20", The winning prize is never "none". Therefore, when the value of the number of remaining rounds is “20 to” and the winning prize is “none”, the additional number “−” is defined, and when selected, the error command is set. ..

Here, when the error command is set, that is, when the remaining number of rounds actually executed is different from the remaining number of rounds managed by the voice lamp control device 113, the addition effect is continued. Since it is highly likely that an effect that gives the player a feeling of strangeness will be executed if the player is allowed to do so, the execution of the additional effect is stopped, and based on the information received from the main control device 110 for the jackpot currently being executed. The number of rounds currently set for the jackpot and the number of currently executed rounds may be configured to start execution of the effect of displaying on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the big hit mid-range effect that continuously gives the player a feeling of strangeness is continuously executed.

Next, the continuous effect mode selection table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 116(b). FIG.116(b) is the figure which showed the content of the continuous production mode selection table 222e typically. This continuation effect mode selection table 222e is an effect mode until the battle reach (final mode) is executed in the battle effect (see FIG. 90) executed during the probability change or the time saving of the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example ( It is a table for selecting the continuous production mode for setting the pre-battle production mode, and is referred to in the continuous production setting process (S3806) of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) (S4005 in FIG. 149). ), the continuous effect mode selected in the process of S4005 is stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223m (S4006). Then, the production mode of pre-battle production is set based on the continuous production mode stored in the continuous production mode storage area 223m.

As shown in FIG. 116(b), in the continuous effect mode selection table 222e, the value of a continuous effect setting counter 223q, which will be described later, presence/absence of a winning prize (whether or not the continuous holiday resort is confirmed), Different continuous effect modes are defined in association with the value of the third effect counter 223y3.

Here, the continuous effect setting counter 223q is a counter for counting the number of times the continuous effect is set in one probability variation state or one time shortened state, and the probability variation state or the time reduction state continues for a long period of time to cause a battle. It is used to determine that the effect has been executed multiple times. The detailed content of the continuous effect setting counter 223q will be described later with reference to FIG. 114(b).

The contents defined in the continuous effect mode selection table 222e will be described in detail. In the case where the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is "1" and the hold information (winning information) is set to "Yes". Therefore, the continuous effect mode "1" is defined in the range of the value of the third effect counter 223y3 "0 to 99", and the continuous effect mode "2" is defined in the range of "100 to 149". There is.

On the other hand, when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is “1” and the hold information (winning information) is “present”, the continuous effect mode “5” is set regardless of the value of the third effect counter 223y3. It is prescribed. The pattern corresponding to the continuous effect mode “5” is when the first rotation in which the battle effect is first executed after the end of the big hit wins the big hit, and provides a special feeling to the player. The dedicated continuous production mode is set.

Next, when the value of the continuation effect setting counter 223q is "2 to 5" and the hit information (winning information) is "none", the value of the third effect counter 223y3 falls within the range of "0 to 99". The continuous effect mode "2" is defined, the continuous effect mode "3" is defined in the range of "100 to 149", and when the hold information (prize information) is "win", the third effect counter 223y3. The continuous production mode "2" is defined in the range of "0 to 99", and the continuous production mode "1" is defined in the range of "100 to 149".

When the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is "6 or more" and the hit information (winning information) is "none", the value of the third effect counter 223y3 is in the range of "0 to 99". If the mode "3" is defined, the continuous effect mode "4" is specified in the range of "100 to 149", and the winning information is "present" in the hold information (prize information), the value of the third effect counter 223y3. The continuous production mode "4" is defined in the range of "0 to 99", and the continuous production mode "3" is defined in the range of "100 to 149".

In this control example, the production mode of the pre-battle production is set based on the continuous production mode selected by referring to the continuous production mode selection table 222e. For example, the pre-battle production (see FIG. 91). ), the production mode related to the display mode at the time of developing the battle reach, such as the type of own character, the type and arrangement order of the opponent character that can be selected, the type of the opponent character actually selected, and the HP value, A presentation mode that is not related to the display mode during development of the battle reach, such as the type and color of the background displayed during the pre-battle performance, and the attack pattern for the opponent character, is set based on the selected continuous production mode.

For example, when the continuous production mode “5” is selected (that is, when the first battle production is executed and there is a winning prize in the hold), the player is informed that the jackpot will be won soon. An effect mode for doing is set. Specifically, the premier character set when there is winning information for winning the jackpot in the hold is set as the character of the opponent or the opponent, or a specific value is set as the initial value or the intermediate value of the HP value of the opponent character. (For example, “777” or “333”) is displayed, or all the same characters are displayed as a combination of selectable opponent characters. By performing such a display, it is possible to suggest to the player that the jackpot is won by using a plurality of variable periods.

Next, the contents of the continuous value main selection table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. 117(a). FIG. 117(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous value main selection table 222f. Here, the continuation value in this control example will be described. In this control example, when the game state is set to a game state that is advantageous to the player (probably changed state or time saving state), battle production is executed as continuous production to show that the game state is continuing. To be done.

In this battle effect, a battle reach (final aspect) effect for indicating whether or not the advantageous game state is ended, and a pre-battle effect that is continuously executed until the battle reach is executed are executed. If, as a result of the battle reach effect, the advantageous game state does not end, the pre-battle effect is executed again.

During the pre-battle effect, the effect of reducing the HP value (continuation value) of the opponent is executed on the third symbol display device 81 as described above with reference to FIG. Based on the continuous value reduced during the pre-battle performance, the performance mode of the battle reach (HP of the opponent at the start of the battle reach (continuous value)) is determined.

In the first control example, the continuous value that is reduced during the pre-battle effect is obtained by adding the value selected by the continuous value main selection table 222f and the value selected by the continuous value sub-selection table 222g. It is configured to be calculated. By setting a continuous value to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by combining a plurality of values in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load when increasing variations of the continuous value.

Returning to FIG. 117(a), the description will be continued. In the continuation value main selection table 222f, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the result of determining the number of remaining fluctuations until the fluctuation of the special symbol to win the jackpot is executed, and the current display The continuous value to be selected is defined in association with the continuous value.

That is, the continuation value main selection table 222f is defined so that the continuation value is selected based on the special symbol lottery result. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the HP (continuous value) of the opponent that is changed during the pre-battle effect is taken over and the battle reach effect is executed.

It should be noted that, here, when the content of the continuous value main selection table 222f is set to be more complicated in order to enrich the variation of the continuous value increase/decrease display executed during the pre-battle performance, for example, in this control example, Although the continuous value is managed in units of, the continuous value is managed in smaller units (ten units), or the lottery results for special symbols are subdivided into subdivided lottery results. In the case of defining the continuous value in association with each other, there is a problem that the processing load for selecting the continuous value becomes high. However, in order to enhance the effect of the pre-battle effect, it is necessary to increase the variation of the continuous value increase/decrease display.

Therefore, in the present control example, when a continuous value is selected in the continuous value main selection table 222f, the continuous value main selection table 222f is used as an independent table to use the continuous value main selection table 222g. The continuation value selected in the selection table 222f is configured to be further variable. Thereby, the variation of the continuous value displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be increased.

In addition, as will be described later in detail, in the first control example, based on the difference value of the continuation values selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f, the continuation value in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The production mode of the production (attack production) for reducing the (HP value) is set. Then, in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f and the continuation value sub-selection table 222g is displayed as the continuation value after reduction (after updating). Is configured as follows.

Then, the attack effect managed by the value (continuous value) selected by referring to the continuous value main selection table 222f, and the continuous value set by referring to the continuous value main selection table 222f and the continuous value sub-selection table 222g ( The range of values selected in the continuation value sub-selection table 222g is set so as not to differ from the difference value of the HP value).

With such a configuration, the production mode of the production (attack production) for reducing the continuous value (HP value) in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is selected in the continuous value main selection table 222f. Even if it is managed only by the rough continuation value, the effect can be executed without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

As the attack effect set based on the difference value of the continuation values selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f, specifically, if the difference value is “0 to 200”, “weak attack” (FIG. 92). (A)), "201 to 400" is set to "medium attack", and "401 or more" is set to execute effects corresponding to "strong attack (see FIG. 92(b))". It

Thereby, for example, although the difference value of the continuous values selected by the continuous value main selection table 222f is in the range of “medium attack” (for example, 300), the displayed difference value of the continuous values is “weak”. It is possible to prevent the range of the "attack" (for example, 200) from being different, and the range of the continuous value based on the lottery of the special symbol and the range of the continuous value actually displayed to be different.

As shown in FIG. 117(a), in the continuous value main selection table 222f, the number of remaining fluctuations up to the hit fluctuation and the previously selected continuous value (of the continuous values currently displayed, the continuous value main selection table 222f The continuous value is defined in association with the value selected in. Specifically, if the value of the residual fluctuation counter 222t is "3" and the previously selected continuation value is "1000", "800" is selected, and if "900", "700" is selected. As described above, the value having the difference value of “200” is selected. Similarly, if the last selected continuation value is "400" to "800", the difference value becomes "200". If the last selected continuation value is "300", "200" is selected (difference value "100"), and if the last selected continuation value is "100" or "200", the difference value is " A value that is "0" is selected.

Next, when the value of the residual variation counter 222t is "2", if the previously selected continuation value is "300" to "700", the value with the difference value of "100" is selected respectively, and the previous value is selected. When the selected continuation value is “100” or “200”, the value with the difference value of “0” is selected. When the value of the remaining fluctuation counter 222t is "1", that is, when the next fluctuation is a hit fluctuation, when the last selected continuation value is "300" to "700", the difference value is "200". Value is selected and the previously selected value is “200”, the difference value is “0” (“200”), and the previously selected value is “100”. A value "0" having a difference value of "100" is selected.

As described above, in the present control example, based on the continuous value main selection table 222f, of the continuous values (HP values) displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, a rough ( It is configured to select 100 units) value, and the effect mode of the attack effect is set based on the difference value, so the continuous value displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. (HP value), that is, rather than setting the effect mode of the attack effect based on the continuous value (HP value) selected using the continuous value main selection table 222f and the continuous value sub-selection table 222g The number of patterns can be reduced, and the processing load when setting the effect can be reduced.

Next, the contents of the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 and the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 used as the continuation value sub-selection table 222g will be described with reference to FIGS. 117(b) and 117(c). FIG. 117(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1, and FIG. 117(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2. It is a figure.

As described above, the continuous value sub-selection table 222g is used to increase the variable pattern of the continuous value during the continuous effect, and is referred to after the continuous value is selected by the continuous value main selection table 222f. Table. In this control example, by adding the values selected in the continuation value sub-selection table 222g to the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f, the continuation value displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (Continuous value in production) is set.

In this control example, the continuation value main selection table 222f is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the selected continuation value is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 200). When the continuation value selected by referring to the continuation value main selection table 222f is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, 200), the first continuation value sub-value shown in FIG. 117B is configured. The selection table 222g1 is referred to, and when it is less than the predetermined value (for example, 200), the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 shown in FIG. 117(c) is referred to.

In the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 shown in FIG. 117(b), the continuation value is defined in association with the value of the fourth effect counter 223y4. Specifically, in the range of the value of the fourth effect counter 223y4 "0 to 39", the continuation value "0" is selected, and in the range of "40 to 79", the continuation value "-10" is selected, In the range of "80 to 119", the continuous value "-20" is selected, and in the range of "120 to 149", the continuous value "+20" is selected.

Thereby, the continuation value selected using the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 is added to the continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f, and the type of the continuation value on the display is increased. You can Specifically, referring to the continuation value main selection table 222f, when the continuation value is reduced (updated) from “1000” to “800”, the selected continuation value (“800”) is a predetermined value ( For example, since it is 200) or more, the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 is referred to. When the value of “+20” is selected in the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1, “820” is displayed as the continuation value (HP value) in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 ( FIG. 92(a)). On the other hand, when the value of "-20" is selected in the first continuous value sub-selection table 222g1, "780" is displayed as the continuous value (HP value).

Thus, by adding the value selected in the continuous value sub-selection table 222g to the continuous value selected in the continuous value main selection table 222f, the continuation displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The variation of the value (HP value) can be increased.

Here, when the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f becomes less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 200), the continuation value on the display by referring to the above-mentioned first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 ( If the (HP value) is set, the value of “+20” is selected in the first continuous value sub-selection table 222g1 while “0” is selected as the continuous value in the continuous value main selection table 222f. Then, as the attack effect, an attack effect that sets the HP value of the opponent character to "0" is executed, whereas the continuous value (HP value) on the display becomes "20".

Therefore, in this control example, it is determined whether the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 200), and if it is determined that the continuation value is equal to or less than the predetermined value, the second continuation value is determined. The sub-selection table 222g2 is configured to be referred to. In the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2, as shown in FIG. 117(c), the range of "-20" to "0" is defined as the selected value.

In the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 shown in FIG. 117(b), the continuation value is defined in association with the value of the fourth effect counter 223y4. Specifically, the continuation value "0" is selected in the range of the value of the fourth effect counter 223y4 "0 to 39", and the continuation value "-5" is selected in the range of "40 to 99". In the range of "100 to 149", the continuation value "-10" is selected.

Here, the difference between the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 and the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 described above will be described. As values that can be selected, the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 includes a value (“+20”) for adding the continuation value (for example, 500) selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f and a value (“−20”) for subtraction. 10” and “−20”). On the other hand, the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 is a value that can be selected, and the continuation value (for example, 100) selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is subtracted (“−5”, “−10”). ) Is configured to be selected only.

With this configuration, when the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is larger than the predetermined value (for example, 200), the range of the continuation value (HP value) to be displayed is set to be wide. When the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is equal to or smaller than a predetermined value (for example, 200), the displayed continuation value (HP value) is set within a range that does not give the player a feeling of strangeness. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of effects within a range that does not give the player a feeling of strangeness.

In addition to the contents of the first control example described above, a storage means for storing the value selected by the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 and a determination whether the value stored in the storage means is a positive value or a negative value And a determining means for determining which of the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 and the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 is used to select a value based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means. May be provided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the values selected by the continuous value sub-selection table 222g from being biased toward the plus direction or the minus direction.

In the first control example, as described above, the configuration for selecting the mode of the attack effect based on the continuous value selected by the continuous value main selection table 222f is used, but other configurations may be used. For example, when the continuation value selected in the continuation value main selection table 222f is less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 200), the continuation value (HP value) actually displayed on the display screen and the continuation value main selection table 222f And a calculation means for calculating a difference value from the continuation value (HP value) set based on the continuation value sub-selection table 222g, and a selection for selecting an aspect of the attack effect based on the difference value calculated by the calculation means. Means and may be used.

In the first control example, the continuous value sub-selection table 222g is included in the voice lamp control device 113, but other configurations may be used. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 includes a continuous value main selection table. Only the 222f may be provided and the continuous value sub-selection table 222g may be provided on the display control device 114 side, or the display control device 114 may perform the process of selecting the mode of the attack effect. With such a configuration, the voice lamp control device 113 only needs to manage the update of the continuous value using the continuous value main selection table 222f, and the processing load can be further reduced.

In the first control example, the continuous value main selection table 222f or the continuous value sub-selection table 222g described above that is executed when there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot as the look-ahead result of the reserved symbol In addition to the setting, that is, even when there is no winning information corresponding to the big hit as the pre-reading result of the reserved symbol, the process of varying the continuation value is executed in a stunning manner. Although detailed description is omitted, the continuous value varying process in the production is variable depending on the period during which the continuous production (pre-battle production) is continuously executed and the type of the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The subsequent continuation value is configured to be selected.

With this configuration, it is possible to frequently execute the effect of decreasing the continuous value while the continuous effect (pre-battle effect) is being executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the effect content. can do.

Further, in the first control example, the continuous value of four bodies (A to D) is displayed as the opponent candidates that can compete during the battle reach as the continuous production (pre-battle production) (see FIG. 91(a)). For example, even if the continuous value (HP) of a specific opponent is drastically reduced in the continuous production (pre-battle production), the continuous production (pre-battle production) is continued by selecting another opponent. Then you can run.

With this configuration, when the continuous effect (pre-battle effect) is executed for a long period of time (for example, when the winning is not won during the probability change), only the continuous value continues to decrease. It is possible to prevent the production of battle reach production from becoming poor.

In addition, in the first control example, in order to prevent the pre-battle effect from continuing for a long period of time, even if the special symbol is not won, the predetermined condition (for example, the special symbol is 10 If the pre-battle performance continues while changing more than once, and if the special symbol lottery result is a deviation variation pattern of 60 seconds), the battle reach is configured to be executed, and the battle reach is configured. As a result, when the winning is not won, the continuation effect (second time) is configured to be executed again, and the continuation value is initialized. As a result, when the continuous production (pre-battle production) is executed for a long period of time (for example, when the winning is not won during the probability change), only the continuous value continues to decrease. It is possible to prevent the production of battle reach production from becoming poor.

Next, the final mode selection table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. This final mode selection table 222h is a table for selecting the effect mode of the battle reach executed during the above-described continuous effect, and the judgment result of the special symbol variation in which the battle reach is executed and the fifth effect. A different final mode is defined in association with the value of the counter 223y5.

Specifically, if the special symbol hit determination result is a big hit, and if the advantageous gaming state (probably changing state or time saving state) is given to the player after the big hit ends, the value of the fifth effect counter 223y5 is The final aspect “1” is defined in the range of “0 to 49”, the final aspect “2” is defined in the range of “50 to 129”, and the final aspect “3” is defined in the range of “130 to 149”.

If the special symbol hit determination result is a big hit, and if the advantageous gaming state is not given to the player after the big hit is over, the value of the fifth effect counter 223y5 is in the range of "0 to 129" and the final aspect "4". However, if the final aspect "5" is defined in the range of "130 to 149" and the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is incorrect, the value of the fifth effect counter 223y5 is in the range of "0 to 129". 6”, the final aspect “7” is defined in the range of “130 to 149”.

Further, in the case of the special symbol variation that the special symbol hit determination result is out, and the time saving end condition is satisfied, the final aspect "4" is in the range of the value of the fifth effect counter 223y5 "0 to 129", The final aspect “5” is defined in the range of “130 to 149”.

Here, the effect contents of each final aspect selected using the final aspect selection table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. 118(b). FIG. 118(b) is a diagram for explaining the effect contents of each final aspect selected using the final aspect selection table 222h. In this control example, as the final aspect of the battle effect (battle reach), as described above with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96, an effect is performed in which either the hero character or the opponent character makes a total of three attacks. The different attack patterns are selected according to the final mode selected.

Specifically, in the final aspect “1” to “3”, an attack pattern in which a winning battle in which the hero character wins is executed is selected, and in the final aspect “1”, all three attack opportunities are selected. In the case where the attack pattern in which the hero's character attacks is selected in the final mode "2", the hero attacks on the first and third attack opportunities and the opponent character attacks on the second attack opportunity. The attack pattern to perform is selected. In the case of the final mode “3”, an attack pattern (revival effect (see FIG. 96)) in which the hero is revived and defeats the opponent character after the opponent character has made an attack in all of the three attack opportunities is selected. To be done.

Although a detailed description is omitted, the final mode selection table 222h is provided for each variation pattern (variation time) of the variation effect to be executed. For example, in the variation pattern in which the variation time is 60 seconds, three times. The final mode (final modes “1” and “2”) completed by the attack is easily selected, and in the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 90 seconds, the revival effect is easily selected. Here, in the revival effect that is executed in a variation pattern with a variation time of 90 seconds, the same effect data as the variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds (final aspect “5”) is used as the effect data for the first three attacks. What is used. As a result, the effect data is shared to reduce the data capacity, and the first half of the effect in which the winning battle is executed (the first half of the final aspect “3”) and the effect in which the defeat battle is executed (the final aspect “5”). By executing the same effect with “)”, it is possible to reliably prevent a situation where the player grasps the effect result during the effect.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description will be continued. For the final modes "4" and "5", an attack pattern is selected in which a defeat battle in which the hero character is defeated is executed. In this defeat battle, an effect is finally performed in which the HP gauge Dm21 indicating the continuation value (HP) of the hero as a result of the battle reach finally becomes zero. In the case of the final aspect "4", an attack pattern is selected in which the main character attacks at the first attack opportunity and the opponent character attacks at the second and third attack opportunities, and the final aspect "5". In the case of, the attack pattern in which the opponent character attacks in all of the three attack opportunities is selected. In this way, in the attack pattern of the defeat battle set in this control example, until the last one attack (third attack) is executed, other battles (victory battle, draw battle described later) Since the same effect is executed, it is possible to surely prevent the player from grasping the effect result during the effect.

For the final modes “6” and “7”, an attack pattern is selected in which the draw battle is executed in which neither the HP gauge Dm21 indicating the continuation value of the main character nor the HP gauge Dm22 indicating the continuation value of the opponent character becomes 0. When this draw battle is executed, the battle reach ends, and the next pre-battle effect is executed. In the case of the final aspect “6”, an attack pattern is selected in which the main character attacks at the first attack opportunity and the opponent character attacks at the second and third attack opportunities, and the final aspect “7”. In the case of, the attack pattern in which the opponent character attacks in all of the three attack opportunities is selected. In this way, in the attack pattern of the draw battle set in this control example, since the same effect as the other battle (defeat battle) is executed as the attack pattern, not only the attack pattern for the player, It is possible to keep an eye on the decrease of the HP gauge, and it is possible to reliably prevent the situation where the performance result is grasped during the performance.

In addition, in this control example, a configuration in which the same attack pattern as the defeat battle is executed is selected as the attack pattern executed during the draw battle, but it is the same as the other battles (winning battle). You may comprise so that the production|presentation in which an attack pattern is performed may be selected. Accordingly, when the third battle is executed, depending on the attack pattern executed in each attack opportunity (the first to third attack opportunities), this battle reach is either a winning battle or a draw battle (that is, , A battle without defeat) can be known to the player, and the production (battle reach) can be seen without worrying about the game state shifting to the normal state.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 has a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a state storage area 223e, a big hit information storage area 223f, and a display round number storage. Area 223g, addition effect flag 223h, display extension flag 223i, variation counter 223j, elapsed time counter 223k, continuous effect mode storage area 223m, continuous value storage area 223n, continuous period counter 223p, continuous At least an effect setting counter 223q, a continuous effect flag 223r, a precursor setting flag 223t, an effect counter group 223y, and another memory area 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a includes one execution area, four areas corresponding to the special symbol 1 (first area to fourth area), and four areas corresponding to the special symbol 2 (first area to fourth area). ), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 detects a starting prize for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140, the first random number counter C1 acquired according to the starting prize. , The first hit type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1 from each value, various information obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn (win/win, jackpot type in case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern ) Is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the various predicted information is notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when the prize information command is received, various information notified by the prize information command (whether winning, jackpot type in case of jackpot, variation pattern) is extracted as prize information, and the prize information is obtained. Is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information has four areas (first area to first entrance 64 or second entrance 140) corresponding to the type of entrance that detected the entrance (first entrance 64 or second entrance 140). Among the vacant areas of the fourth area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

In the first control example, in the main controller 110, based on various information (whether winning, jackpot type in case of jackpot, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn Although a configuration for setting the winning information command and notifying it to the voice lamp control device 113 is used, other configurations may be used.

For example, when a start winning occurs, various information predicted corresponding to the starting prize, various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b In addition to the setting means for setting the prize information command, when the prize information command is received, the various information (prize information) already stored in the prize information storage area 223a and the received prize information command are included. A configuration may be provided in which a determination unit that determines whether or not various pieces of information (winning information) match. As a result, it is possible to determine whether various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a is properly stored.

In addition, in the first control example, when a new start winning is generated, a winning information command is set and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified, but the winning information command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113. The timing of notifying is not limited to the above-mentioned timing (timing at which the prize information command is set), and for example, a storage means for temporarily storing the prize information command is provided, and in addition to the timing at which the start prize is awarded, a periodical notification is given. (For example, every 5 seconds), when the game condition is variable (for example, when the game state shifts from a time saving state to a normal state, when the jackpot game starts or ends, etc.), or the start of fluctuation of a special symbol (or A configuration may be used in which the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the winning information command stored in the storage means at the time of stop). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect (so-called prefetch effect) using the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a.

In the present control example, setting of production modes such as a big hit production, a battle production, and an expectation display production are executed as the prefetching production based on each winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. In this way, by executing various effects (prefetching effect) based on each prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a, the player is given to each reserved ball before the variable display is started. It can make you expect a big hit. It is also possible to execute a long-term effect using a plurality of variable display periods.

As shown in FIG. 115(a), the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b1 for counting the holding ball number of the special symbol 1, and the holding ball number of the special symbol 2 is counted. It has a special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b2 for, and the value of each counter according to the timing when the number of holding balls increases or decreases, such as when a prize information command is received or when a variation pattern command is received. To update.

The special symbol 1 reservation sphere number counter 223b1 is a variable display of the special symbol 1 performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and the special symbol 1 reserved on the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect up to 4 times for each type of special symbol. Similarly, the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223b2 is a variable display of the special symbol 2 performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is held on the main controller 110. It is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect of the special symbol 2 up to 4 times for each type of the special symbol.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Cannot get the value. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b2. The number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of holding balls in the variable display is added, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and the number of holding balls is subtracted. When it is done, the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the holding sphere number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 holding ball is received from the holding ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command among the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b1 or the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223b2 (see S3208 in FIG. 140). In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b1 and the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b2 are updated, The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d of the main controller 110 and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e.

The value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223b2 is used to display the holding sphere number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b1 or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b2 in response to receiving the holding ball number command. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b1 after storing, or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223b2, a display holding sphere number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. ..

In the display control device 114, when receiving this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b1 of the voice lamp control device 113, or the special symbol 2 hold The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved sphere number symbol for the value of the sphere number counter 223b2 is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b1 is changed in value in synchronization with the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d of the main controller 110, and the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223b2 is the main. The value is changed in synchronization with the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere number symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

The variation start flag 223c is turned on when the variation pattern command of the special symbol 1 or the variation pattern command of the special symbol 2 transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S3202 of FIG. 140), the third symbol display device. It is turned off when the variable display is set in 81 (see S3802 in FIG. 147). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display causes the variation display of the third symbol to be performed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control of the variation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when the special type stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S3204 in FIG. 140), and the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. It is turned off when turning off (see S3814 in FIG. 147). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

The jackpot information storage area 223f is an area for storing information on jackpots to be executed, and stores information on jackpots to be executed this time (for example, the number of rounds or a game state to be transferred after the jackpot is finished) as a main control device. This is an area for storing when received from 110. In this control example, the mode of the effect executed during the big hit is set based on the information stored in the big hit information storage area 223f.

The display round number storage area 223g is an area for storing information about the number of rounds displayed during the big hit. In the present control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 85(a), when the addition effect is executed during the big hit, the running round number display mode Dm3 indicating the number of running rounds, and internally The confirmed round number display mode Dm4 that partially confirms the set round number and the main display area of the third symbol display device 81 based on the information about the number of rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223g. It is configured to be displayed in Dm.

This display round number storage area 223g stores 0 as an initial value, receives the round number command among the hit related commands transmitted from the main control device 110 (S3304: Yes in FIG. 142), and adds the effect flag. When the 223h is set to ON (S3306: Yes in FIG. 142), the value is internally set by referring to the stored value (the number of rounds) in the additional production process (see FIG. 143). The difference between the established round number and the finalized round number is calculated, and the value of the finalized round number (round number) newly determined based on the difference value is stored.

The number of rounds stored here is added for display so as to be displayed as the confirmed number-of-rounds display mode Dm4 when the number of rounds is the predetermined number of rounds (number of rounds n) in the additional display processing (see FIG. 145). It is used when setting a display command (see S3604 in FIG. 145). Then, when the effect for addition is completed, the stored value is initialized.

As described above, in the present control example, when the new round is started, the additional production process (see FIG. 144) is executed, the fixed round number stored in the display round number storage area 223g is updated, and the predetermined round number is updated. When a round (a multiple of 5 in this control example) is started, a display process for updating the display mode of the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 is executed. Therefore, since the fixed round number is constantly updated (every round), a condition for updating the display mode of the fixed round number display mode Dm4 is added, or the fixed round number display mode Dm4 is displayed based on the operation of the player. By selecting whether or not to update the mode, it is possible to reliably deal with the case where the display timing of the confirmed round number is different.

Further, in the present control example, when the additional winning that has occurred during the jackpot is winning the jackpot, the number of rounds is specified in advance based on the winning information corresponding to the additional winning, and the preliminary identification result is shown. The display round number is set according to the total round number including the round number information.

The addition effect flag 223h is a flag for indicating that the addition effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the addition effect is selected as the big hit medium effect. The addition effect flag 223h is set to ON when the addition effect is read as the big hit medium effect in the big hit medium effect setting process (see FIG. 143) (see S3408 in FIG. 143), and the hit related command process (FIG. 142). ), the setting state is determined (S3306 in FIG. 142). Then, in the after-big hit production setting process (see FIG. 146), when it is determined that there is no on-holding holiday resort (S3703: No in FIG. 146), it is set to OFF.

The display extension flag 223i is a flag for indicating a state in which the effect during the big hit (ending display of the big hit) is extended and displayed even during the variation period of the special symbol executed after the end of the big hit, and the effect during the big hit ( It is set to on when the jackpot ending display) is extended and displayed. When the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, that is, when a big jackpot performance (ending jackpot display) is being executed, if a new jackpot is won, information on that jackpot (acquired ball The number and the number of rounds) are displayed in a display mode continued from the previous information on the big hits (the number of acquired balls and the number of rounds).

This display extension flag 223i is a big hit effect executed this time in the big hit post effect setting process (see FIG. 146) is a normal hit effect, and when the gaming state after the big hit is in the probable state or the time saving state ( 146 (S3709: Yes), it is set to ON (S3710 in FIG. 146). Then, when the special symbol changes four times after the display extension flag 223i is set to ON (S3904: Yes in FIG. 148), or when the elapsed time becomes 4 seconds (S5103: Yes in FIG. 154). , Are set to OFF (S3905 in FIG. 148, S5104 in FIG. 154).

As described above, in the present control example, the display extension flag 223i has been set to ON, the number of times the special symbol has changed reaches a predetermined number (4 times), or a predetermined time (4 seconds) has passed. It is configured to be turned off when is satisfied. This is a period during which the jackpot effect is continuously executed while the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, and when the jackpot is won during that period, the jackpot effect is This is because it is a period of continuing (continuously executing the previous jackpot effect).

More specifically, as a condition for setting the display extension flag 223i to OFF, if the number of times the special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4 times), the special symbol is held at the end of the jackpot. The value of the number of balls (the sum of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2) is less than the predetermined number of times (4 times) described above, and the player interrupts the ball launch after the jackpot is over. If it happens, the game will be interrupted without the number of times the special symbol has changed reaching a predetermined number (4 times) after the jackpot, and there is a possibility that the production during the jackpot will continue for a long period of time. is there. Furthermore, if the player stops the game in such a state, even if no one is playing the game, the big hit performance is displayed, so that a new player is There is a problem that hesitates to play a game with the pachinko machine 10 and reduces the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, in this control example, in addition to the number of times the special symbol fluctuates, the passage of time (4 seconds) is also set as a condition for setting the display extension flag 223i to OFF. As a result, it is possible to set, as a limited period, a period during which the effect during the big hit is continuously displayed and the effect over a plurality of big hits can be executed. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to win the jackpot in the limited period in which the display extension flag 223i is set to ON.

The variation counter 223j is a counter for counting the number of variations of the special symbol in the period in which the display extension flag 223i is set to ON. The variation counter 223j executes the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) with the display extension flag 223i set to ON, and “5” when the extension management process (see FIG. 148) is performed. Is set (see S3902 in FIG. 148).

The elapsed time counter 223k counts the elapsed time in the period in which the display extension flag 223i is set to ON. The elapsed time counter 223k is set to "4000 (corresponding to 4 seconds)" as a counter value when the display extension flag 223i is set to ON in the post-big hit production setting process (see FIG. 146) (see FIG. 146). The counter value is decremented by "1" every time the production update process (S3112) of the main process (see FIG. 139) of the voice lamp control device 113 that is executed every 1 millisecond is executed (see S3711) (FIG. 154). See S5102).

Then, in the production update process (see FIG. 154), when the counter value of the elapsed time counter 223k becomes “0”, the display extension flag 223i is set to OFF (see S5104 in FIG. 154). With such a configuration, when a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed after the jackpot ends, the effect during the jackpot can be ended and a normal effect corresponding to each gaming state can be executed. , You can enthusiastically play a game to win the jackpot in a limited period.

In this control example, “4000” corresponding to 4 seconds is set as the counter value of the elapsed time counter 223k, but the set time is not limited to this, and for example, 3 seconds may be set. Alternatively, each time the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, one may be selected from a plurality of times and the period may be set. In addition, as the value to be set as the counter value of the elapsed time counter 223k, it is preferable to set the value longer than the sum of the fluctuation periods for the four rotations of the special symbol 2 executed after the jackpot. With this configuration, it is possible to change the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 that is preferentially consumed during the jackpot while the display extension flag 223i is set to ON.

The continuous effect mode storage area 223m is a storage area for storing the continuous effect mode selected when the continuous effect is executed. This continuous effect mode storage area 223m is executed when the display extension flag 223i is set to OFF in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) and it is determined that the game state is the time saving state or the probability changing state. In the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 149) performed, the continuous effect mode selected by the continuous effect mode selection table 222e is stored, and until the clear autumn mode is selected by the final mode selection table (battle reach is executed. Until), the effect (pre-battle effect) corresponding to the continuous effect mode stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223m is executed.

The continuation value storage area 223n is a storage area for storing the value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f among the continuation values (HP values) increased or decreased during the continuation effect executed in this control example. Therefore, based on the continuation value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n, the updating (increase/decrease) process of the continuation value (HP value) during the continuous effect is executed.

In this control example, the continuous value (HP value) is roughly selected based on the continuous value main selection table 222f, and the detailed value of the continuous value (HP value) is selected based on the continuous value sub-selection table 222g. With such a configuration, the increase/decrease pattern of the continuous value displayed during the continuous effect is increased, but management of the continuous value (HP value) in the voice lamp control device 113 is performed in the continuous value main selection table 222f. Since it is configured to execute only the continuous value selected based on the above, the type of the continuous value (HP value) to be managed with respect to the type of the continuous value (HP value) displayed during continuous production Can be reduced.

The continuation period counter 223p is a counter for measuring the period during which the continuation effect flag 223r is set to ON, and in order to prevent the final aspect (battle reach) from being frequently executed in the continuation effect. , The counter used.

This continuation period counter 223p continues every time the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) is executed in the state where the continuation effect flag 223r is set to ON, that is, each time the variation of the special symbol is executed. In the effect setting process (see FIG. 149), 1 is added (see S4009 in FIG. 149). Then, in the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 149), when it is determined that the counter value is less than “6” (S4003: No in FIG. 149), the final mode (battle reach) is not selected. I am configuring. By configuring in this way, the value of the duration counter is 6 or more, that is, the selection of the final mode (battle reach) is suppressed until the change of the special symbol is executed 6 times after the pre-battle effect is executed. To be done.

The continuation effect setting counter 223q is a counter for measuring the number of times the battle effect is repeatedly set (the number of times the continuation effect flag 223r is set to ON) while the game state is set to the probability change state or the time saving state. Yes, it is set such that a different continuous effect mode is easily selected based on the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q. Thereby, when the continuous production is executed for a long period of time and the battle production is repeatedly set, it is possible to prevent the battle production of the same aspect from being frequently executed. Further, by setting the continuous effect mode that is executed only when the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is a specific value (for example, 1), it is possible to provide the player with an effect with a scarcity value.

The continuous effect setting counter 223q is referred to when a new continuous effect mode is selected in the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 149) (see S4005 in FIG. 149), and is incremented by 1 when the continuous effect mode is selected. (See S4007 in FIG. 149). Then, when the continuous effect is completed (when the game state shifts to the normal state or when the jackpot is won), the counter value is cleared to 0.

The continuation effect flag 223r is a flag for indicating that the continuation effect mode is selected (the pre-battle effect is being executed) during execution of the continuation effect, and when the continuation effect mode is selected. Set on. While the continuous effect flag 223r is set to ON, the pre-battle effect is executed in the same continuous effect mode without selecting a new continuous effect mode.

This continuous effect flag 223r is set to OFF when the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 149) is executed, and is set to ON when the continuous effect mode is selected (see S4008 in FIG. 149), While it is set to ON, the process for selecting the continuous effect mode is skipped (S4004: Yes in FIG. 149). Then, when the final mode is selected based on the final mode selection table 222h (that is, when the battle reach is selected and the pre-battle effect is finished), it is set to OFF (see FIG. 149: S4015).

The aura setting flag 223t is a flag used when the countdown effect is executed across a plurality of fluctuations (see FIG. 101), and is set to ON when the fluctuation display is switched during the aura effect period. When the precursor setting flag 223t is set to ON, in the countdown effect setting process (see FIG. 152) executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147), when a new variable effect is set, It is controlled so that the precursory effect of the previous fluctuation is continuously executed from the start of the fluctuation.

The sign setting flag 223t has a countdown effect having the specific effect C (refer to FIG. 101) as the prefetch information in the prize information command process (refer to FIG. 141) (see S3232 and S3233 in FIG. 141), and is currently being changed. When it is determined that the remaining variation period of the display is 10 seconds or more (S3234: Yes in FIG. 141), it is set to ON (see S3236 in FIG. 141).

Then, in the countdown effect setting process (see FIG. 152), it is referred to when setting the effect mode (see S4301 in FIG. 152), and it is determined in the process of S4301 that the precursor effect flag 233m is set to ON. In the multiple variation effect setting process (see FIG. 153) executed in step S1, the production mode is set and then set to OFF (see S4405 in FIG. 153).

The effect counter group 223y is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. This effect counter group 223y has at least a first effect counter 223y1 to a sixth effect counter 223y6, and any of the counters is an IC for random number generation electrically connected to the voice lamp control device 113. A random number value in the range of 0 to 198 acquired from (not shown) is stored. The operation clock (operation frequency) of the IC for generating random numbers is an IC that can be operated at an operation clock (for example, 1 MHz) at which at least each effect counter can be updated to a different random value to perform the determination. Is adopted. The value of the effect counter group 223y is used when performing various determinations executed by the voice lamp control device 113, such as whether or not to execute the continuous announcement effect and the determination of the announcement type of the normal press effect.

The other memory area 223z is provided with flags other than the above-mentioned flags for setting an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data and a state, and temporarily stores other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. It is an area for temporarily storing. Specifically, for example, a power cut flag used to determine whether or not there is a momentary power failure is provided. The power-off flag is set to ON before the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 and the power-off process is executed. After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a fixed time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed. Therefore, in the startup process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 138), if the power-off flag is on (3008: Yes in FIG. 138), the power-off flag is set to on for a certain time (100 This is the case when the voice lamp control device 113 starts up before the elapse of milliseconds), that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not disappeared, and unnecessary information (or incomplete information due to the disappearance of only a part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the work area information in the RAM 223 is cleared (see S3009 in FIG. 138). As a result, processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the voice lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. .. The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is a common component to reduce the cost.

Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure. The same applies to the following), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply unit 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in this control example, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem that the read speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged in a plurality of pages in succession, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory 234a has a slow reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, the instructions forming the control program can be read. It may take time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts the image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs publicly known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and publicly reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error data is not corrected based on the erroneous data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 cause the NAND flash memory 234a to have different defective data blocks. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (eg, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside while using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237, for example. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first releases the system reset. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes the boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and also designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. To output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and adds the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in this control example, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program are NOR type ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address designation to the data output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" and then the instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program. By doing so, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d to be stored in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed amount of fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer program can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a causes the first predetermined pointer of the program storage area 233a to move. It is set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various kinds of processing will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed so that the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 155) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 155) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 125) transmitted from the MPU 231 and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the drawing processing of the image for one frame and the display processing of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 157(b)), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. By this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 237 causes the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 or the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND flash memory 234a facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until displaying some image on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The MPU 231 gives an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction or transfer data information of a drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to the various information of the transfer instruction. The image data stored in the memory is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred to the storage source end address.

Thereby, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Further, since the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and the third symbol display. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a at the time of power-on, the rear image area 235c, and the character symbol area 235e, an error message image area 235f is provided, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 or the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image that displays a lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuation effect when a ball entering the mouth 140 is detected. This power-on image is an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 155).

Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 shows that the display control device 114, immediately after the power is turned on, is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power-on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display change pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the change pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the change start instruction command, the display control device 114 is displayed in FIG. As shown in FIG. 22, on the display screen of the power-on main image, a power-on variation image of the “○” symbol is displayed at the lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, the power-on variation image of the "x" symbol is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the variation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 is performed. The result is judged, and if it is a “special symbol big hit”, the image shown in FIG. 121(b) is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and if it is “a special symbol comes off”, it is shown in FIG. 121(c). The image shown is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency is prevented from being deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

In addition, the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball is detected at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140. In this case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 121(b) and 121(c) alternate. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Accordingly, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the variation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the variation effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball 1640 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is given to the third symbol display device. It can be immediately displayed on 81.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or a person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81. You can Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, image data to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. However, it is possible to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without any fear that the operation has stopped until the transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. it can.

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency is prevented from being deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 122, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c of the back image will be described. FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 122(a) shows “ 122(b) is shown for the back surface A corresponding to the "sand beach stage" and FIG. 122(b) is for the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage".

As for the rear images corresponding to the respective rear faces A and B, as shown in FIG. 122, images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while horizontally scrolling the image from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “scrolling images”) are configured such that the back images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the positions a and a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smooth. The back image is scrolled and displayed due to such connection.

When the change of the rear surface type is decided and the stage is changed to the “sand beach stage” or the “deep sea stage”, the MPU 231 sets the area between the position a and the position a′ of the corresponding rear surface image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display is further performed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a′. Therefore, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection on the third symbol display device 81 so as to flow toward the left.

Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 122(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, while the initial stage "sand beach stage" is displayed, the game is often played without changing the stage, so the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the "sand beach stage" that is displayed frequently is displayed. By making all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 122(b), the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage" is resident only in a partial area of the back surface, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the positions a and b. It is stored in the back image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images be made resident in the resident video RAM 235. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a′ (or the range of FIGS. 122(a) and 122(b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between the positions a and b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 122(a) and 122(b)) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. However, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, when the change of the stage is decided by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 can be stored. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, it is possible to immediately display the initial position of the back surface B on the third symbol display device 81, and while scrolling or changing the color tone with the passage of time. Can be displayed. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored on the back surface B, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface B scrolls the range from the position a to the position b from left to right by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b′ to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during the period. As a result, the image data from the position b′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b′ to the position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

On the back side B, the image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 is stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back-side image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 120) of the normal-use video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, and thus the back image can be displayed reliably.

On the rear surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are the images corresponding to the image between position b′ and position b. Data is stored redundantly. Then, by the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the positions c and d is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a′ is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. To do. As a result, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection on the third symbol display device 81 so as to flow toward the left.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned nine types of main symbols (see FIG. 81(b)) with the numbers “0” to “9” being the third symbols are resident. R. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 has occurred, the first symbol display device 37, although the variation effect has been started, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the sub-symbols without numbers are also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variable effect is stopped. To be As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the sub symbol that is not numbered as the third symbol is displayed in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "youth" and "female" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character symbol area 235e. Accordingly, when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but rather the character of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the symbol area 235e, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character pattern can be immediately changed even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. In the display control device 114, when the error command is received, an error message corresponding to the received error is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is previously resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data required for subsequent image drawing among the sub areas provided from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area in which the image data should be stored. Accordingly, the image controller 237 reads the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while developing the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and together with the drive signal, to the third symbol display device 81. Then, by transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes the process of displaying the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, a frame buffer that develops an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read are stored in every one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a total value storage area 233k, and a precursor effect flag 233m.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table that describes the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table, and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variation effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to large hits, round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the fluctuating effect is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating effect is a big hit A and a big hit B. If either of the above, the stop symbols showing the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

In this control example, the voice lamp control device 113 displays a display variation pattern command corresponding to a period of one special symbol variation (variation pattern (variation time) selected by the main control device 110), and a display stop type. Although it is configured to output together with the command and set the effect mode corresponding to each command received by the display control device 114, other configurations may be used, for example, the voice lamp control device 113 The display control device 114 is divided into a plurality of display variation pattern commands (for example, a first half variation pattern (30 seconds) and a second half variation pattern (30 seconds)) corresponding to a period for one special symbol variation (for example, 60 seconds). With such a configuration, the game content generated during the period in which the first-half variation pattern is being executed (for example, an operation on the frame button 22 by the player, a new entry) The display variation pattern command corresponding to the latter half variation pattern can be set based on the acquisition of information).

In addition, by using the configuration described above, when the additional display variation pattern command is received after once outputting the display variation pattern command corresponding to the period for one special symbol variation, the additional display variation It is not necessary to perform the process of rewriting the effect contents in correspondence with the pattern command, and the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced. As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 divides the display variation pattern command corresponding to the period for one special symbol variation (for example, 60 seconds) into a plurality (for example, the first half variation pattern (30 seconds) and the second half). When the variation pattern (30 seconds) is output to the display control device 114, the display stop type command may be output in addition to the first display variation pattern command.

Further, in the present control example, the display effect command for executing the continuous effect (see FIG. 96) that is continuously executed when the game state is the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and the continuous effect ends. The voice lamp control device 113 includes a final mode command for display for executing an effect (battle reach) for informing whether or not, and various other commands for increasing the expectation that the player has won the jackpot. When receiving various commands, the effects corresponding to the various commands are displayed.

Further, even when the effect contents are already set based on the reception of the predetermined display command, when the additional display command is received after that, the additional display command is dealt with. The contents are configured to overwrite the contents of the effect. As a result, based on the display variation pattern command being received, an effect for a period corresponding to a predetermined period (variation period of the special symbol) is set (created) in advance, and an additional effect is added during that period. When a display command (for example, a display command for indicating the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, acquisition of new entry information) is received, the display content of the effect can be changed smoothly.

The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 is going to a special game state and the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is repeatedly opened, and the round effect is about to start. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variation effect is stopped. It is a staging effect, and the third symbol, which is a sub symbol without the numbers “1” to “9”, is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the hall related person can recognize that the game is not being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. As for the variable display data table, which is a display data table for variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is provided for each variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. 123. FIG. 123 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this control example) for which one frame of the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The magnifying power is information for designating a magnifying power with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnifying power. If the enlargement ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed in a larger size than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one rear image, nine third symbols (design 1, design 2,...) And light in the image For each address, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as youth images and characters, is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the semitransparent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back surface type which is information for specifying the type of the back image. This rear surface type displays one of the rear surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the “morning stage”, the “evening stage”, and the “night stage”), or the rear surface A to Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, the rear surface type also includes information that specifies which rear surface image is to be displayed when specifying that a rear surface image (special rear surface AC, etc.) different from the rear surface A to C is to be displayed. ..

When it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by this back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies a back surface image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target, Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

In this control example, the case where only the backside type is specified as the drawing content of the backside image in the display data table will be described, but instead of this, which range of the backside type and the backside image corresponding to the backside type is specified. The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from when the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) indicated by the position information is started.

Further, the position information is, in accordance with the rear surface type, drawing of an image based on the information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating whether or not) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect of the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

Since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110 are the third symbol. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the number attached to the symbol and displaying the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect that is currently performed, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the third symbol is displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 75) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 125) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of complicated and enormous programs, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, which may limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, since the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, the display is performed. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the rendering mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, it is resident in the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table. Transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the general-purpose video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of sprites used in the effect defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data of the sprite (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which the transfer is started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 124). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time specified by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer corresponding to the address does not exist. Is defined as Null data (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 124).

As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address Is included.

It should be noted that "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, like the display data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 124, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data that should be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is selected. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 125) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is stored in the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 124, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified by the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. To execute the process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In the pachinko machine 10, the display controller 114 displays display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be surely transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is executed by the MPU 231 after the image data corresponding to the power-on image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. It is set to ON in the process (see FIG. 155) (see S6005 in FIG. 155). Then, by the resident image transfer setting process of the transfer setting process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 , OFF is set (see S8005 in FIG. 170(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 157(b)), and When the image display flag 233c is turned on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 of FIG. 157(b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 157(b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 157(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 158 to 166) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 157 to 169) are executed.

When the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7901 in FIG. 170A), and the simple image display flag 233c is ON. Has resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, and therefore executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 170(b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 125), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction for the is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is displayed for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 125) describing the drawing instruction contents is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 125) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

Thus, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. For specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interruption signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed (FIG. 167(b ) In S6303), the pointer update processing (see S7305 in FIG. 169) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

The MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d every time the pointer 233f is updated, and the drawing list described later is displayed. (Refer to FIG. 125), and at the same time, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Add information to the created drawing list.

Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, it is possible to display a wide variety of effects regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing is always stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 125, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol) 2,...), effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), character (character 1, character 2,... ), hold sphere number design 1, hold sphere number design 2,..., error design For each sprite, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating a RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the magnification ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the method designated by that information according to the filter designation information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of the other image to be drawn (for example, a hold number that displays the number of held balls). Based on the image and a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) is generated for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 is dependent on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved sphere number pattern 1, reserved sphere number pattern 2,..., Error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 acquires the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The clock counter 233h is a counter for counting the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets the time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

Then, on the basis of the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 157(b Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7607 of FIG. 167). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the same when the effect ends. Performs various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that the image data corresponding to each sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for every sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 155) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to the one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will always be in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S8113 in FIG. 171). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S8114 in FIG. 171). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S8202 in FIG. 172).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process for expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 simultaneously reads the drawn image information which has been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process (see S6306 of FIG. 157(b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, a frame buffer that develops an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read are stored in every one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The total value storage area 233k is an area for storing (storing) a history displayed (displayed as a total value) as a continuous value (HP value) variably displayed in the above-described continuous effect (see FIG. 91). Based on the difference between the value (total value) stored (stored) in the total value storage area 233k and the newly received continuous value (HP value), the display content in the continuous effect (for example, in FIG. The decrease value Dm12 and the display mode of the HP display area Dm17 and the effect mode of the attack effect shown) are determined and displayed.

In other words, in the present control example, the voice lamp control device 113 side is provided with a means (total value storage area 233k) for storing the previously set total value on the display control device 114 side without storing the previously set total value. Therefore, the display control device 114 calculates the difference between the previous summed value and the present summed value, and displays the display mode based on the calculation result. As a result, the configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 can be simplified.

In the present control example, a means (continuous value sub-selection table 222g, and S4105 to S4107 in FIG. 150) for setting an effect value for increasing the display variation of the continuous value (HP value) on the voice lamp control device 113 side. However, the display control device 114 may be provided with a means for setting the effect value. With this configuration, the configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 can be simplified and the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be further reduced.

The precursor effect flag 233m is a flag for determining whether or not the precursor effect is executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations. If the aura effect flag 233m is on, it means that the aura effect is in a state of being executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations. If it is off, the aura effect is executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations. It means that it is in a state not to be. The indication effect flag 233m is set to ON when the display additional indication command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7505 in FIG. 166). Further, this aura effect flag 233m is referred to in the variation pattern hearth process (see S6501 in FIG. 159), and after setting the display data table corresponding to the aura effect executed across a plurality of special figure variations. , Are set to off (see S6503 in FIG. 159). As a result, the precursor effect can be executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations.

Although detailed description is omitted, when the aura effect is executed across a plurality of special map fluctuations, the effect data of the aura effect executed in the last special figure fluctuation and the time point at which the effect data is already executed When the effect corresponding to the current special figure variation is set (S6502 in FIG. 159), the effect data stored in the above-described storage means is referred to when the effect is stored last time. The indication effect executed in the special figure fluctuation is continuously displayed. As a result, it is possible to display the precursor effect executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

In addition, in the present control example, the indication effect is set based on the reception of the display variation pattern command (that is, the indication effect is executed as a part of the variation pattern). Without being limited to this, when a display command indicating that a precursor effect is to be executed is received, regardless of the change display content, the display effect is displayed during the period in which the precursor effect is indicated by the command or the indication effect is stopped. You may comprise so that it may be displayed until a command is received.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 126 to 137. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started regularly (at an interval of 2 msec in this control example). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a regular process that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (238 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present control example, When each reaches 238, 199, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104), and first. A start winning process associated with a win (start winning) into the ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 127 to 131.

After executing the start winning process (S105), the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the normal ball entrance 67 causes the ball to pass through. Gate passing processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. After the through-gate passage processing is executed, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the firing controller 112 to fire a sphere when the firing of the sphere is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol, etc. performed at 81.

In this special symbol variation process (S104), first, now, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (the number N2 of holdings of the variable display in the special symbol 2) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

If it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e (N2) is larger than 0 (S204: Yes), the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e (N2) is subtracted by 1 (S205), The special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e changed by the calculation sets a holding sphere number command (special figure 2 holding sphere number command) (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 136) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are extracted from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the RAM 223. The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223b2 are respectively stored.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved sphere number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 128.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e (N2) is 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1) Is acquired (S208), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). By the processing of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1) is decremented by 1 (S210). , A special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d value (N1) changed by calculation is set to a holding sphere number command (special figure 1 holding sphere number command) (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process proceeds to S213.

As described above, in the present control example, when the process of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is executed, first, the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter (N2) is acquired, and the special symbol 2 holding ball If the value of the number counter (N2) is 0, that is, if the number of holding balls of the special symbol 2 is 0, then, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter (N1) is configured to be acquired. .. By configuring in this way, it is possible to preferentially execute the variation of the special symbol 2.

The process of starting the variation of the special symbol is not limited to the configuration of the present control example, and may be configured to preferentially execute the variation of the special symbol 1, or the special symbol 1 And the priority may be set to the special symbol 2, for example, the ball may be configured to execute the variation of the special symbol according to the order in which the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140. .. In this case, a storage area for storing the order in which the balls enter the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 is provided, and the special symbol 1 is provided in accordance with the order (the order of entrance) stored in the storage area. It may be configured to obtain the value of the reserved ball number counter or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter, or may be configured to use the common reserved ball number counter for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2. ..

Further, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be independently and simultaneously changed. In this case, when it is determined that one of the special symbols is in the jackpot, the variation of the other special symbol is stopped (the subtraction of the variation time is stopped until the one jackpot ends), or the other. It is preferable that the variation of the special symbol is discarded (even if the variation time has not elapsed, the lottery result is rewritten as a miss and forcibly stopped). With such a configuration, in a configuration in which a plurality of special symbols are changed at the same time, when one is in an advantageous state for the player, it is possible to play a game without worrying about the change in the other special symbol. it can.

It returns to FIG. 127 and continues description. In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, when it is determined that the variable time has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 128. When this special symbol variation start processing is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the special symbol lottery is performed. Be seen. More specifically, depending on the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined whether or not the special symbol big hit, if the special symbol big hit, the type of special symbol (special symbol 1 or special Big hit type (big hit AK) is determined according to the value of the symbol 2) and the first hit type counter C2.

In this control example, the winning jackpot type can be identified by changing the lighting pattern of the LED of the first symbol display device 37 in accordance with the jackpot type (big hits A to K). Specifically, a plurality of lighting patterns are configured by turning on or off each of a plurality of LEDs (for example, seven) provided on the first symbol display device 37. The lighting pattern of the first symbol display device 37 may be configured to have different lighting colors. Further, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to notify the outside that the special symbol is changing by causing at least one of the plurality of LEDs to blink, and is used in this blinking display. The lighting period (lighting period for indicating the stopped state of the special symbol) that is displayed after the special symbol is stopped until the next special symbol is changed is longer than the lighting period of the LED. Is configured. This allows the player to know whether the special symbol is in a changing state or in a stopped state.

After the processing of S215 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S216). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot of the special symbol (S216: Yes), the opening scenario of the specific winning opening 65a is set based on the jackpot type (S217). After that, the probability variation flag 203g is reset to OFF, the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is reset to 0 (S218), and the jackpot start is set (S219). When the jackpot start of the special symbol is set by the process of S219, when the jackpot control process (S1104) of the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed, the process branches to S1201: Yes, and the opening command is set. To be done. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the big hit effect is started.

Then, when the process of S219 is completed, next, a stop command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the information regarding the stop symbol is set (S220), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S216, if the current lottery result is out of alignment (S216: No), the fluctuation number subtraction process is executed (S221). The variation count subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 129. After that, the processing shifts to the above-described S220 processing, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and is the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the "special symbol jackpot" or "out of the special symbol" lottery (judgment determination), while the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 This is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the fluctuating effect that is referred to.

In the special symbol variation start process (S213), first, the first random number counter stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserved sphere storage area (special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b) The values of C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are acquired (S301).

Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302). The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol, and if the probability variation flag 203g is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol, and the probability variation If the flag 203g is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (low probability state).

If the probability variation flag 203g is on (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variation state of the special symbol, so the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first for high probability Based on the per-random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 10 stored in the first random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, five random numbers "5 to 9" are set as the random numbers that are the big hits of the special symbols, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value of these hits match. If you do, it is determined to be a jackpot of special symbols. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 have the same judgment value as a jackpot, but depending on whether the lottery is for the special symbol 1 or the lottery for the special symbol 2. The determination value that is a big hit may be different. By configuring in this way, the random number value determined to be out of the special symbol 1 is configured to be determined to be a hit in the special symbol 2, and the bias of the big hit can be suppressed.

Further, in the present control, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 have the same determination value as the jackpot, but the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 You may make the number of the determination values used as a big hit different. With this configuration, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 can have different jackpot probabilities, and when the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability is used for the lottery, the player wins the jackpot. Can have expectations.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, when the probability variation flag 203g is off (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability state), so the first random number acquired in the process of S301. Based on the value of the counter C1 and the first random number table for low probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table for low probability. Only "7" is set as the random number value for the special symbol big hit, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches "7", it is determined that the special symbol big hit. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

In the process of S305, the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304 determines whether it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and when it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes). ), the display mode at the time of the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202c, and a special symbol of two types (a big hit) Among AK), the jackpot type is determined. As described above, if the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 1 (special symbol 1) and the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”, the jackpot A (the number of rounds is In the 15th round, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, it is determined that the gaming state after the jackpot is a jackpot type that is set to the probability variation state of the special symbol) (see FIG. 107), “20 to 79” If it is in the range, it is determined that it is a jackpot B (the number of rounds is 10 rounds, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the jackpot type set to the probability variation state of the special symbol).

If the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “80 to 114”, jackpot C (the number of rounds is 10 rounds, the gaming state after the jackpot is over, regardless of the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning) It is determined that the time saving state is a jackpot type that is set 100 times, and if it is in the range of “115 to 164”, jackpot D (the number of rounds is 5 rounds, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, jackpot) It is determined that the gaming state after the end is a jackpot type which is set to the probability variation state of the special symbol).

Furthermore, if the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “165 to 199”, jackpot E (the number of rounds is 5 rounds, the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is in a low probability state and not in a time saving state). In the case (when it is a normal state), the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot is over, and when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than the normal state (high probability state or time saving state), after the jackpot is over It is determined that the gaming state is a jackpot type in which a time saving state is set 100 times (see FIG. 107).

Also, when the corresponding symbol type is the special symbol 2 (special symbol 2), based on the contents defined in the first hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 107) as in the case of the special symbol 1 described above. Jackpot F to jackpot K are determined.

In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A to K). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A to K) is set as the stop type.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is determined in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third until the big symbol symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81. The variable time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 108) as described above. When the process of S307 ends, the process proceeds to S310.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit (is out) (S305: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-design, and the special symbol holding sphere storage area (special symbol 1 holding sphere storing area 203a or special symbol 2 holding sphere storing area) 203b), based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the front/rear outreach, the reach other than the front/rear outreach, or complete Set whether it is off.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability change state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear deviation is set, and "98" is set. , 99”, the front/rear outreach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than front and rear deviation is set, and "98" is set. , 99”, the front/rear outreach is set.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, as in the process of S308, by comparing the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 with the specified content of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 108), the normal reach, Decide the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuations such as super reach and special reach. When the process of S309 ends, the process proceeds to S310.

In the process of S310, which is executed after the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set ( S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp controller 113 in the process of S1101 of the main process (see FIG. 136). To be done. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S311, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) is returned to.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 129, the fluctuation number subtraction process (S221) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing this variation number subtraction processing (S221). In this variation number subtraction process (S221), the hour-shortening counter 203h and the prescribed number counter 203j are subtracted based on the end of variation of the special symbol.

The time saving counter 203h is a counter for measuring the remaining number of times in which the time saving state is set, and the time saving number is set when the gaming state shifts to the time saving state after the jackpot is over. The prescribed number counter 203j is a counter for updating each scenario set in the state transition table 202f (see FIGS. 111 and 112), and is a prescribed number based on the contents of the state transition table set after the jackpot is over. Is set.

When the processing of FIG. 129 is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the hour/medium counter 203h is larger than 0 (S401). When it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203h is larger than 0 (S401: Yes), that is, when the current state is the hour/hour, the value of the hour/hour counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S402), and the hour/hour counter 203h is decreased. The remaining short time count command indicating the value of is set (S403). The remaining short time count commands set here are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1101 of the main process (see FIG. 136). To be done. The voice lamp control device 113 extracts the current game state, that is, the remaining short-time count of the short-time state from the remaining short-time count command received as a part of the state command, and stores it in the state storage area 223e.

When the processing of S403 is finished, next, whether the value of the hour/medium counter 203h is 0, that is, the value of the hour/medium counter 203h is subtracted by 1 by the processing of S402, and the value of the hour/medium counter 203h becomes 0. Whether or not it is determined (S404). In the process of S404, when it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203h is 0 (S404: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state, the corresponding state command is set (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S404, when it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203h is not 0 (1 or more) (S404: No), the process of S405 is skipped and the process proceeds to S406. Further, in the processing of S401, when it is determined that the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is not larger than 0 (is 0), the processing relating to the time saving medium counter 203h (S402 to S405) is skipped and the process proceeds to S406. ..

In the process of S406, it is determined whether the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is larger than 0 (S406). In the process of S406, when it is determined that the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is larger than 0 (S406: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S407), and the value indicating the value of the specified number of times counter 203j remains. A fluctuation count command is set (S408). The remaining variation command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1101 of the main process (see FIG. 136). The voice lamp control device 113 extracts, from the remaining variation number command received as a part of the state command, the remaining variation number of each state status, that is, the remaining variation number until the gaming state and the variation pattern selection table to be referred to are switched. , In the state storage area 223e.

After the process of S408 is finished, next, whether the value of the specified number counter 203j is 0, that is, the value of the specified number counter 203j is subtracted by 1 by the process of S407, the value of the specified number counter 203j becomes 0. Whether or not it is determined is determined (S409). When it is determined that the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is 0 (S409: Yes), the state transition according to the state transition table 202f is performed, and the corresponding state command is set (S410).

In the process of S410, for example, the state transition 4 table 202f4 is set as the state transition table 202f, and the value “4” of the specified number counter 203j set for the state status ST3a is subtracted to become “0”, When the status status shifts from ST3a to ST3, the information indicating the status status ST3 and the information indicating the newly set specified number "96" are set as status commands.

Then, when the process of S410 is completed, the value of the specified number of times counter 203j is set according to the set state transition table 202f (S411), and this process is completed. In addition, in the process of S406, when it is determined that the value of the specified number counter 203j is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S406: No), the processes related to the specified number counter 203j (S407 to S411) are skipped. This process ends.

Next, the start winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 126), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140, When there is a start winning, add the number of holding balls of each special symbol, store the value of the corresponding various counters in each holding ball storage area, and from the value of the various counters stored, in the special symbol A look-ahead process is performed to determine the lottery result in advance.

When the start winning process (S105) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize) (S501). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (the number N1 of variable display holdings in the special symbol) is acquired (S502). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the first control example) (S503).

In the process of S503, if the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (N1) is less than 4 (S503: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (N1) is incremented by 1 (S504). .. Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation is set (S505).

The reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the main process (see FIG. 136) to be described later executed by the MPU 201. In the external output process (S1101), it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b1 of the RAM 223. Store.

After the number of reserved balls command is set in the process of S505, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit number updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above. Each value of the random number counter C4 is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S506). In the process of S506, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

On the other hand, in the processing of S501, if it is determined that the ball has not won (winning) the first winning opening (ball opening) 64 (S501: No), or in the processing of S503, the special symbol 1 reserved ball When it is determined that the value (N1) of the number counter 203d is not less than 4 (4) (S503: No), the start winning process for the special symbol 1 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S507.

Next, in each of the processes of S507 to S512, the same process as each of the processes of S501 to S506 is executed for a winning (ball entry) to the second ball entrance 140. The processes of S507 to S512 are different only in that the process of holding the reserved ball corresponding to the winning of the second entrance 140 is executed, and the other processes are the same as the processes of S501 to S506. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. When each processing of S507 to S512 ends, the prefetch processing is executed (S513), and the present processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the prefetch process (S513) which is one process in the start winning process (see FIG. 130) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S513). In this pre-reading process (S513), when there is a new winning (ball entry) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140, the special symbol lottery result for that winning (entrance) is obtained in advance. A process of determining (pre-reading) and setting a command for outputting the result of the preliminary determination (pre-reading) to the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the command (winning (winning ball) information command) set here, the effect for the pending winning (winning ball) information is stored based on the winning (winning ball) information. It becomes possible to execute before the special symbol variation is executed.

In the prefetching process (FIG. 131, S513), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning (ball entry) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 (S601). As a result of the determination, if there is no new winning (ball entry) in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 (S601: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a new winning (ball entry) in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140 (S601: Yes), from the special symbol reserve ball storage area, (special symbol 1 reserve ball Storage area 203a, special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b) The value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the current winning, the value of the first hit type counter C2, the value of the stop type selection counter C3, the change type counter CS1 A value is acquired (S602).

Next, of the determination results defined in the first per-random number table 202a (see FIG. 106(a)), the per-judgment result corresponding to the acquired value of the per-first random number counter C1 is acquired (S603), Of the judgment results defined in the first hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 107), the hit type judgment result corresponding to the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is acquired (S604).

When the process of S604 is completed, then, of the determination results defined in the stop type table, the stop type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S605), and the variation pattern selection table 202d. Of the determination results defined in (see FIG. 108), the variation type determination result corresponding to the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired (S606).

Then, the hit determination result information indicating the hit determination result, the hit type information indicating the hit type determination result, the stop type information indicating the stop type determination result, and the fluctuation indicating the change type determination result, which are acquired in the processing of S603 to S606 described above. The winning information command including the type information is set (S607), and this processing is ended.

The winning (winning) information acquired in the process of S602 described above is information for indicating in advance a lottery result when a special symbol lottery is executed for a new winning (winning). If there is. The lottery result may be selected in advance by using various selection tables used for the special symbol lottery, or the same selection table as the above-described various selection tables may be provided for the prefetching process.

In addition, in the processing of S607, in the winning (winning) information command, game state information for indicating the gaming state when the special symbol variation based on the winning (winning) information that is the target of the prefetching process this time is executed. May be included. Here, the game state information will be described. In this control example, the normal state, the probability variation state, and the time saving state can be set as the game state, and the lottery result of the special symbol (the big hit determination result, the big hit type, and the variation pattern) according to each game state. ), or the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 set by the voice lamp control device 113 is different.

Further, in this control example, the game state is configured to be shifted based on the number of times the special symbol changes. Specifically, when the time saving state (100 times) is set as the game state, the game state is changed from the time saving state to the normal state on condition that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times in that state. Will be migrated.

In this control example configured in this way, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery based on the winning (ball) that is the target of the prefetching process is executed during the time saving state, and the determination result is the game state information. Is included in the prize (ball) information command to notify the voice lamp control device 113. Thereby, during the time-saving state of the gaming state, the lottery (variation) of the special symbol based on the ball that has won the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 140 (ball entry), the gaming state becomes the normal state. Even if it is executed after the transfer, it is possible to set a winning (winning) information command corresponding to the game state when the special symbol lottery (variation) is executed. Furthermore, as the prize (ball) information command, only the prize information command corresponding to the gaming state when the special symbol lottery (variation) corresponding to the prize (ball) information command is executed is set, and the voice lamp is set. Since the data can be output to the control device 113, the amount of data output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

Note that the method of setting the winning (winning) information command by the pre-reading process is not limited to the contents of this control example, and is set by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the contents of the received winning (winning) information command. The content of the effect (prefetch effect) to be performed may be configured so as to be able to suppress the problem that the result is inconsistent with the lottery (variation) result of the special symbol that is changed by the transition of the game state.

For example, when setting a winning (ball) information command in the pre-reading process of the main controller 110, it is possible to set a winning (ball) information command corresponding to a plurality of gaming states, the voice lamp controller 113 And determine the game state when the special symbol lottery (variation) corresponding to the prize (ball) information command is executed, and set the look-ahead effect based on the prize (ball) information corresponding to the discrimination result. It may be configured to do so. As a result, in the prefetching process of the main control device 110, it is not necessary to perform the process of prefetching the game state, so that the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

In addition, as the winning (winning) information command corresponding to the plurality of gaming states described above, for example, as a jackpot determination result, the first determination result of winning the jackpot in any gaming state Only in the case of the state, the second determination result that wins the jackpot, any of the third determination result that is not won in the jackpot in any gaming state, and the voice lamp control device 113 side to correspond to the gaming state The jackpot determination result may be obtained, or the information indicating the value of each counter obtained in the prefetching process may be output as it is as a winning (ball entry) information command, and a voice lamp control device 113 may be configured such that the lottery result can be determined based on the received information (information indicating the value of each counter acquired by the main control device 110 in the prefetching process).

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and the variation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 140 are accompanied. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 140a.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S701). As the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second entrance 140 is performed while the indication indicating the hit is being displayed on the second symbol display device 83. It is included during the operation. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S701: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is 0 (S704: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not 0 (S704: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S705).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S706). In the processing of S706, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S707).

Next, it is determined whether or not the present time is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S708). Specifically, the value of the time saving medium counter 203h of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or when the probability variation flag 203g is on, it is determined that the normal time saving state of the symbol, the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 0, If the probability variation flag 203g is off, it is determined that the normal symbol is in the normal state (not the time saving state).

In the process of S708, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S708: Yes), the value of the second per random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707 and the second per random number table 202b for high probability. Based on and, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S709). Specifically, the value of the second per random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second per random number table 202b for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", Usually, it is determined that the symbol is off (see 202b in FIG. 106(b)).

On the other hand, in the process of S708, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S708: No), the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707 and the second hit for low probability time. Based on the random number table 202b, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202b for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined that the winning symbol is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 7 to 239", Usually, it is determined that the symbol is off (see 202b in FIG. 106(b)).

Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S709 or S710, it is determined whether it is a normal symbol hit (S711), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S711: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S712). In the process of S712, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, it is set so that the symbol "○" is displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S714. ..

On the other hand, in the processing of S711, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S711: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be lit up as a stopped symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S714.

In the processing of S714, it is determined whether or not it is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S714), and if it is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S714: Yes), the variation time of the variable display in the second symbol display device 83. Is set to 3 seconds (S715), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S714, if it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol (S714: No), the variation time of the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S716), this processing To finish. In this way, when the high probability of the normal symbol (time saving state), compared to the low probability of the normal symbol (normal state), the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds". Therefore, the lottery frequency of ordinary symbols becomes high. Therefore, since the winning frequency in the regular symbol lottery increases, the electric accessory 140a associated with the second entrance 140 becomes easy to open, and the ball easily enters the second entrance 140. It becomes a state.

Although detailed description is omitted, the gaming state of the normal symbol is configured so that the normal state is set when the special symbol is hit during the big hit. With such a configuration, during a jackpot that is advantageous to the player, the gaming state of the normal symbol also becomes an advantageous state, and it is possible to suppress giving an excessive privilege to the player. In addition, the variable winning device 65 is easy to open (special symbol big hit period), and the electric accessory 140a is easy to open period (normal symbol hit period) overlap, the variable win that is most advantageous to the player. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the opening of the electric accessory 140a hinders winning of a ball into the device 65.

To explain the above contents in detail, when the electric accessory 140a is provided in the first flow path through which the balls flow down so that the variable winning device 65 can win, the electric accessory 140a is opened during the jackpot period. As a result, the balls flowing down the first flow path will win the electric accessory 140a, and there is a problem that the balls cannot be fully won in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot period. Therefore, for example, the electric accessory 140a is arranged below the variable winning device 65 (downstream side) and flows down the first flow path during the jackpot period (while the variable winning device 65 is open). It is possible to solve the above-mentioned problem by using a configuration that makes it easier to win the variable winning device 65, but in this case, there is a problem that the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 is limited.

On the other hand, in this control example, since the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state (normal state) during the big hit of the special symbol, it becomes difficult to open the electric accessory 140a during the big hit period, and the above-mentioned problem is solved. can do.

In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Yes (S717). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S715 or the process of S716 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the processing of S717, when it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (S717: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S717, when it is determined that the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S717: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S718). In the process of S718, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S712, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit. Display) is set. On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbols is lost and the display mode is set by the processing in S713, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set. By the process of S718, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the display is finished, the stop symbol (normal symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S712 or the process of S713.

Next, when the variable display which is currently being executed is started in the second symbol display device 83, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (the lottery result of this time) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. It is determined whether or not (S719). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S719: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the present time is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S720), and it is determined that it is in the time saving state. (S720: Yes), “1 second×2 times” is set as the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 140a associated with the second entrance 140 (S722), and the process proceeds to S723. .. On the other hand, in the process of S720, when it is determined that the normal pattern is in the normal state (not the time saving state) (S720: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second entrance 140, and the number of times of opening. As a result, “0.2 seconds×1 time” is set (S721), and the process proceeds to S723.

In the process of S723, the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 140a is set for the time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S721 or S722 (S723), and the present process is ended. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 140a is set by the process of S723, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1105) of the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed next, The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 140a is continued until the opening time and opening number set in the processing of S721 or the processing of S722 are completed. On the other hand, in the processing of S719, when it is determined that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S719: No), the processing of S720 to S723 is skipped, and the present processing is ended.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through-gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage process (S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S801). Here, the passage of a ball at the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S802). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the first control example) (S803).

The ball does not pass through the normal entrance 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f (M) is If it is not less than 4 (S803: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S801: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the number of reserved balls counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. This area is stored in the area (S805), and this processing ends. In the process of S805, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

Note that the NMI interrupt process described above is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1001). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Then, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a wait process (1 second in the first control example) is performed. Execute (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004), and if it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if it is not stored (S1005: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power-off has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S1012 in this case as well.

If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S812. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the processing of S1114 in FIG. 136. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). Upon receipt of this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears areas (work areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and is ready to start payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup process, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S1010.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S1007: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S1008). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1010, a production permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various productions. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 136, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As its outline, each processing of S1101 to S1107 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 126), output data such as a command stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral device). The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 126) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls won to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. Further, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) and the starting winning process (see FIG. 130) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 with the reserved ball number command. Also, the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 130) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 137) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the first control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1104). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the first control example, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second entrance 140 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric auditors product 140a is set by the process of S723 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132), the opening/closing control of the electric auditors product 140a is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory 140a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S721 or the processing of S722 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1106). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37. In the first control example, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the change time elapses from the start of the change, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED Is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, every time the main process is executed, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 so that the player can confirm the change of the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, if the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128) ends, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is terminated, and in the display mode set by the process of S306 or the process of S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128), the first symbol is displayed as the stop symbol (first symbol). A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the device 37.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S715 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132) or the process of S716, in the second symbol display device 83. Start variable display. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, the variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, if the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S718 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is ended, and in the display mode set by the process of S712 or the process of S713 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 132), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 ( (Lit display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108), and if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the first control example) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing ( (S1109), if the predetermined time has already passed (S1109: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101, and the above-described respective processes after S1101 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1109: No), during the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1110, S1111).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (238 and 239 in the first control example), it is set to 0. clear. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are respectively stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1102 (S1111).

Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the processing of S1108, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 134 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1112 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1112), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1113). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1114), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

The processing of S1108 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1107 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. It can be started from the process of S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 similarly to the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the power-off process, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved, the initial setting process (see S1001 in FIG. 135) is performed. By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can be started from S1101. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1104). This jackpot control processing (S1104) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 136), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1201). Specifically, the processing of S219 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1201, if the big hit of the special symbol is started (S1201: Yes), the opening command is set (S1202), and the present process is ended.

The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the opening command for display, the opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if the special symbol big hit is not started (S1201: No), it is determined whether the special symbol big hit is in progress (S1203). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1203, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S1203: No), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1203, if the special symbol is a big hit (S1203: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1204). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1204: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1205), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1206). After the round number command is set, this processing ends. The number-of-rounds command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1204, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1204: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1207). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls If, for example, 10 prizes are won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1207, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1207: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1208), and this processing ends. To do. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1207: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1209). Specifically, it is the ending effect start timing when the special game state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state (all round games (for example, 15 rounds) set for jackpot) is completed. To determine.

In the process of S1209, if it is the ending effect start timing (S1209: Yes), the ending command is set (S1210), and the present process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp control in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1209, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1209: No), it is then determined whether it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1211), and it is not the ending timing of the ending effect. When the determination is made (S1211: No), this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1211, when it is determined that it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S1211: Yes), that is, when it is determined that it is the timing when all of the jackpot games are finished, based on the first hit type selection table 202c. Then, the contents of the probability variation flag 203g and the hour/hour counter 203h are set (S1212). By the process of S1212, the gaming state (presence/absence of a probability variation state, presence/absence of a time saving state, and setting of the number of time saving) corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set.

Next, referring to the jackpot transition setting table 202e, the state transition destination is selected based on the jackpot type that has been won this time and the gaming state at the time of winning (see FIG. 110), and the state transition corresponding to the selected state transition destination The state status and the specified number of times counter 203j are acquired based on the table 202f (S1213). For example, in the state where "High probability time saving (probability change state)" is set as the game state, and "Big jackpot G" is won as the jackpot type, "State transition 2" is selected as the state transition destination, and the state Of the transition table 202f (see FIG. 111(a)), the state transition 2 table 202f2 (see FIG. 111(c)) corresponding to “state transition 2” is referred to.

After that, the state designating command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the gaming state of the special symbol after the jackpot is over (high probability state (probability change state), low probability state (normal state)) ( (S1214), the end of the big hit is set (S1215), and the present process ends.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 to 154. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

First, with reference to FIG. 138, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting associated with power-on is executed (S3001). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S3118 (see FIG. 139) occurs due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous interruption”) in the startup processing of this time. It is determined whether or not it was started during execution of () (S3002). As described later with reference to FIG. 139, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command from the main control device 110 (S3115: Yes in FIG. 139), the power-off process of S3118 is executed. The power-off processing in-progress flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing in-progress flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S3118 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S3002: No), the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and S3118 in FIG. 139. It is started after completing the execution of the power-off processing of the above, or is started (without receiving the power-off command from the main controller 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113 due to noise or the like. It is a thing. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S3006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction of the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S3003: Yes), the process proceeds to S3004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3008.

If the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power shutdown). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S3004. On the other hand, the startup process this time was started after the momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off process of S3118 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3003: No), and the process proceeds to S3008.

On the other hand, in the process of S3002, when it is determined that the power-off process in progress flag is on (S3002: Yes), the current startup process is after the momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off process of S3118 is performed. It is started when the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset during the execution of the process. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S3004, and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S3004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S3004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, and it is confirmed whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S3006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S3007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

In the process of S3008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S3118 of FIG. 139 is executed (see S3117 of FIG. 139). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S3118 is executed, the process of S3008 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is a case after the power failure occurs and the processing is started in a state where the execution of the power-off processing in S3118 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S3009), and the process proceeds to S3010. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S3008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the present startup process is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, and the process of S3004 to S3006 is followed to the process of S3008. This is a case where processing has been started or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset by noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) and started. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S3009, is skipped and the process proceeds to S3010.

It should be noted that skipping the clearing process of S3009 is performed when all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S3004 when the process of S3004 is performed through the processes of S3004 to S3006. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

In the process of S3010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3010). Next, interrupt permission is set (S3011), and time setting processing for setting reference time information (reference time) for determining the execution period (specific time zone) of the time effect is executed (S3012). , Shift to main processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S3101 was executed (S3101), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S3101: No), the process proceeds to S3113 without performing the processes of S3102 to S3112. In the process of S3101, it is mainly the process related to display (effect) in S3102 to S3112 that determines whether or not 1 msec has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing of S3113 and the variable display setting processing of S3114 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S3113 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S3114 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to perform the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S3103 to S3114 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S3108 described later (S3103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S3104). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not being turned on, the process proceeds to the process of S3105 without performing the notification by the power-on notifying process.

In the process of S3105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the held quantity display update process is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the reservation number display update process, a process of turning on a holding lamp (not shown) according to the values of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223b2 is performed.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S3107). In this frame button input monitoring/production process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. This is a process for setting the effect. Here, the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect process (S3107) will be described.

In this frame button input monitoring/effect process (S3107), first, it is determined whether or not the effective period flag indicating that the pressing of the frame button 22 is treated effectively is set to ON. Here, if the valid period flag is set to ON, then it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. When it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, the display pressing command corresponding to the pressing of the button is set, and this processing ends.

In addition, the above-described effective period flag is provided for each effect executed based on the depression of the frame button 22. For example, if the background of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 can be varied based on the depression of the frame button 22, a valid period flag (first valid period flag) for indicating that is turned on. If it is a period in which the operation effect for changing the variation effect mode of the third symbol based on the depression of the frame button 22 is being executed (the period during which the depression of the frame button 22 is effectively accepted in the operation effect), The valid period flag (second valid period flag) for indicating that is set to ON.

Further, the plurality of validity period flags described above have a predetermined priority order corresponding to the privilege value given when the player presses the frame button 22, and the plurality of validity period flags are set to ON. If so, the processing based on the depression of the frame button 22 is executed based on the valid period flag having the highest priority among the valid period flags set to ON.

With this configuration, when the periods in which the depression of the frame button 22 is effectively accepted overlaps, for example, the period in which the background can be changed (the period in which the first effective period flag is set to ON) and the operation effect. Based on the pressing of the frame button 22 based on the second effective period flag having a higher priority, when the period is executed (the period in which the second effective period flag is set to ON) overlaps. Since the processing is executed, it is possible to execute an effect having a high bonus value for the player, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

In addition, the effect executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is also configured to execute the effect for indicating that the second effective period flag is set to ON. Since only the effect corresponding to the effective period in which the priority order is set high is executed, the player operates the operation timing while watching the effect executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The frame button 22 can be pressed without making a mistake. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In this control example, as a method of setting the priority order to each validity period flag, a configuration of setting the priority order to each validity period flag in advance is used, but other configurations may be used, for example, a frame In the button input monitoring/effect process (S3107), it may be configured to determine whether or not the effective period flag is set to ON in descending order of priority. As a result, even if a plurality of valid period flags are set to ON at the same time, a process based on the depression of the frame button 22 is executed based on the valid period flags having a high priority, so that the player It is possible to execute a production with a high privilege value, and enhance the production effect.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process (S3107) is finished, the ramp edit process is executed (S3108), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S3109, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S3110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S3108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing/outputting process in S3109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the process of S3110 ends, various counter update processes are executed (S3111). In this various counter updating process, a process for updating various counters used in the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. Specifically, the counter values of the first effect counter 223y1 to the sixth effect counter 223y6 included in the effect counter group 223y are updated so as not to be synchronized. The first effect counter 223y1 to the sixth effect counter 223y6 are counters used for selecting a variation pattern and selecting various effects, respectively. The first effect counter 223y1 to the sixth effect counter 223y6 are each configured by a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 149, and each time the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed (1 msec. Each time), the update processing is executed so that the value becomes different.

In the first control example, when a plurality of effects are selected based on the value of the effect counter, a plurality of effect counters having different update values are used. Therefore, when selecting a plurality of effects in the main process Even though the same counter value is referred to, the selected effect is prevented from being biased. For example, a plurality of effect modes selected in different processes in one main process. When it is desired to synchronize, the effect modes may be selected using the same effect counter.

In addition, in the first control example, a plurality of counters (first effect counter 223y1 to sixth effect counter 223y6) having different update patterns are used, but, for example, an updated value of one effect counter is used to generate a random value. May be calculated, and each effect may be selected using the calculated value. With this configuration, the number of counters included in the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In this case, for example, among the updated values of the effect counter, the value of the first lower digit, the value of the second lower digit, and the lower one digit of the value obtained by multiplying the value of the first digit by the value of the second digit It is preferable to calculate such that each value does not have regularity, such as a value obtained by adding the value of the second digit.

When the process of S3111 ends, next, the effect update process (S3112) is executed. The effect update process is a process of updating various effects set by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the elapsed period. In this effect update process (S3112), control for effects (for example, display extension effects executed after the end of the big hit) is executed regardless of changes in the special symbol. A detailed description of this effect update process (S3112) will be given later with reference to FIG. 154.

In the process of S3113, a command determination process of performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed (S3113). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the command determination processing, the variable display setting processing is executed (S3114). In the variable display setting process, based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the effect corresponding to the special symbol variation in the third symbol display device 81 (variable effect of the third symbol and other effects). The display variation pattern command is generated and set. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 147.

When the process of S3114 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S3115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. In the processing of S3115, when it is determined that the power-off occurrence information is stored (S3115: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are both turned on (S3117), and the power-off processing is executed. (S3118). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S3119), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S3115 (S3115: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S3116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S3116: No), the process returns to S3101 to repeatedly execute the main process. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3116: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he can call a clerk in the hall or the like to request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the command determination processing (S3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination processing (S3113). This command determination process (S3113) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 136) and for executing control according to the type of command received from main controller 110.

In the command determination process, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not (S3201). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command is received (S3201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3202), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command ( (S3203), and returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to for determining a detailed display mode of the variation pattern in a variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) described later. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of variation effect and its variation pattern type.

On the other hand, in the process of S3201, when it is determined that the variation pattern command is not received (S3201: No), it is then determined whether the stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S3204). When the stop type command is received (S3204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3205), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S3206), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S3204, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S3204: No), it is then determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3207). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (S3207: Yes), the reserved ball number counter of the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) corresponding to the received reserved ball number command The value contained in the received reserved ball count command is stored (S3208), and this processing ends. Specifically, if the reserved ball number command received this time is a reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 1, from the received reserved ball number command, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 A value (the number of times N1 the variable display is held in the special symbol 1) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b1 of the voice lamp control device 113. On the other hand, if the reserved ball number command received this time is a reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 2, from the received reserved ball number command, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 (special The variable N2) of the variable display in the symbol 2 is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b2 of the voice lamp control device 113.

In the process of S3208, if the value of any one of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b1 and the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223b2 is changed, the display control device 114 is notified of the updated counter value. The display reserved sphere number command for is set. With this display reserved sphere number command, the actual reserved sphere number can be notified to the display control device 114. Therefore, in the reserved display area Dn4 of the third symbol display device 81, an accurate number of reserved symbols is always displayed. Can be displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S3207, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls command is not received (S3207: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (S3209). When it is determined that the prize information command is received (S3209: Yes), the prize information command process is executed (S3210), and the present process is terminated.

Here, the winning information command process (S3210) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information command process (S3210). This prize information command process (S3210) is a process executed when a prize information command is received from the main control device 110, and information included in the received prize information command corresponds to the prize information storage area 223a. Processing for storing in the area (reserved storage area corresponding to the winning information command) is executed.

Here, as the information included in the winning information command, the information about the winning ball, such as the information about the result of the determination of the special symbol, the information about the stop type, the information about the variation pattern, but other information is included Alternatively, for example, the winning information regarding the already-winned ball (which has received the winning information command in the past) may be included.

When the prize information command process (S3210) is executed, first, the information (prefetch information) of the received prize information command is stored in the corresponding prize information storage area 223a (S3231). As described above, the prize information storage area 223a can store a maximum of four prize information commands for the special symbol 1 and a maximum of four prize information commands for the special symbol 2, for a total of eight prize information commands. The prize information commands are stored in a designated storage area according to the order in which the prize information commands are received.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is variation type information (variation pattern information of reach or greater) having a variation time of 60 seconds or more as information (prefetch information) included in the winning information command received this time (S3232). In the process of S3232, when it is determined that there is no change type information (change pattern information of reach or more) having a change time of 60 seconds or more (S3232: No), the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is variation type information (variation pattern information of reach or greater) having a variation time of 60 seconds or more (S3232: Yes), then a specific effect C (see FIG. 101), that is, a predetermined period from the start of variation. It is determined whether or not there is variation type information indicating a specific effect (for example, an effect for causing the player to operate the frame button 22) to be executed within the period (for example, within 5 seconds) (S3233).

Here, if it is determined that the specific effect C is present (S3233: Yes), then it is determined whether the remaining variation time of the variation display currently being executed is 10 seconds or more (S3234). In the process of S3234, based on the time managed by the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S3110) executed in the main process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 139) (elapsed time with respect to the set fluctuation time). The remaining change time of the change display is determined.

In the process of S3234, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is 10 seconds or more (S3234: Yes), it is a case where the period during which the precursor effect can be added to the fluctuation display being executed is secured, and therefore the display addition is performed. The precursor command is set (S3235), the precursor setting flag 223t is set to ON (S3236), and this processing ends. By performing the above-described processing, it is possible to execute a precursor effect that straddles a plurality of variable displays, as a suggested effect targeting the specific effect C to be executed in the variable display from the next time. As a result, the specific effect executed in the early stage of the variable display (for example, the specific effect C (see FIG. 101) executed 5 seconds after the start of the change), that is, the period in which the suggestive effect is executed with only one variable display. Since it is possible to execute suggestive effects using multiple variable displays even for specific effects that are executed at a timing that cannot be secured, the frequency of occurrence of suggestive effects can be increased and the range in which specific effects can be set is increased. It is possible to widen, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of effect regarding variable display.

In the process of S3234, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is less than 10 seconds (S3234: No), that is, when it is not possible to secure a period in which the suggestive effect can be added to the fluctuation display being executed, it is being executed. This processing ends without changing the display mode of the variable display. Here, when it is not possible to secure a period in which the suggested effect can be added to the variation display being executed (S3234: No), the variation corresponding to the winning information determined to have the countdown effect in the current winning information command processing (S3210). When setting the display, the specific effect is set within a range in which the suggestive effect can be executed with only one variation display (for example, a range in which 15 seconds or more has elapsed from the start of the variation), and the suggestive effect is set.

With such a configuration, with respect to the variation to which the prize information for indicating the execution of the countdown effect is given, the timing at which the prize information is generated (the first entrance 64 or the second entrance) Depending on the timing at which the ball enters 140), the effect mode of the countdown effect can be changed, and the effect of effect can be enhanced.

In the present control example, the specific effect set at the beginning of the variable display (for example, the specific effect C (see FIG. 101) executed 5 seconds after the start of the change) is set at another period (for example, the specific effect). It is specified that the effect is that the jackpot expectation is higher than the specific effect that is executed 20 seconds after the start of fluctuation. That is, the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot winning of the special symbol is defined such that the variation pattern capable of executing the specific effect C is more easily selected.

As a result, when the suggestive effect is executed across a plurality of variable displays, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of winning the jackpot in the subsequent changes. Further, it is possible to allow the player to eagerly accumulate the holding of the special symbol so that the suggestive effect across a plurality of fluctuations is executed.

In this control example, based on the winning information included in the winning information command received as described above, and the timing at which the winning information command is received (the remaining period of the variable display being executed), a plurality of variable displays are straddled. It is determined whether or not to execute the suggestive effect, but other configurations may be used, for example, the suggestive effect is based on the timing at which the prize information command is received (the remaining period of the variable display during execution). It may be configured to determine whether or not to execute, and when it is determined to execute, to perform a precursor effect as a suggestive effect and set the specific effect at the timing of starting the next variable display. , The specific effect is set based on the operation content of the frame button 22 by the player during the period in which the indication effect is being executed (the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect is set from a plurality of specific effects). Is also good. With such a configuration, the production of the suggestive effect is performed based on the game situation (the lottery result and the variation pattern of the next variation, or the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22)) after the suggestive effect is started. Aspect can be set. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the effect can be increased as compared with the configuration in which the effect mode of the suggestive effect is determined and then executed.

Further, in the present control example, as an example of executing the suggestive effect across a plurality of variable displays, the variable display being executed and the variable display to be executed next time based on the winning information won during the variable display are displayed. Although the suggestive effect used is described, the present invention is not limited thereto, and any configuration may be used as long as the suggestive effect is executed across a plurality of variable displays. For example, the winning information won during the variable display is executed one after another. In the case of variable display, the suggestive effect may be executed so as to span the variable display being executed and the variable display executed one after another, or may be executed one after another from the variable display executed next time. The suggestive effect may be executed so as to straddle the variable display. In this case, based on the timing of receiving the prize information command (the remaining period of the variable display being executed), it is determined whether the timing of executing the suggestive effect is set to the variable display being executed or to the next variable display. It is advisable to provide a means for doing so.

The prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a is referred to when selecting the contents of various effects set by the voice lamp control device 113, and for example, a reserved display area in which the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is displayed. In Dn4, in order to suggest a hold display (holding pattern) corresponding to the winning information indicating a big hit, a pending change notice effect that changes the display mode of the holding display is set, or a special symbol corresponding to the winning information indicating a big hit. It is referred to when setting a continuous notice effect that expects a big hit as an effect of a special symbol whose fluctuation is started before.

Further, in the first control example, the winning information included in the pending is included by referring to the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a at the time of winning the jackpot, during the jackpot game, and at the end of the jackpot. It is configured to determine whether or not (the presence or absence of an on-hold holiday cottage), and to set the effect during the big hit game or after the big hit based on the determination result. In addition, the effect content is configured to be selected based on the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a even in the continuous effect executed during the probability change state.

Although a detailed description is omitted, in the present control example, when an effect (prefetch effect) that refers to the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a is being executed, a flag indicating that effect ( For example, when the pre-reading effect flag is set to ON and the pre-reading effect flag is set to ON, when a new winning information command is received, the winning information included in the winning information command is received. It is configured so that a new prefetching effect based on the information is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem that a plurality of prefetch effects are continuously executed without a gap and the player feels uncomfortable.

In addition, you may use control other than the above-mentioned content for solving the above-mentioned problem, for example, a priority rank is set to the some pre-reading effect set based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. The priority rank of the pre-reading effect that has been given and is currently being executed is compared with the priority rank of the pre-reading effect that can be set based on the winning information included in the new winning information command, and the pre-reading effect with the higher priority rank is compared. It may be controlled to execute. In this case, when it is determined that the priority rank of the new look-ahead effect is higher, the look-ahead effect switching notification is executed to notify the player that the look-ahead effect being executed ends midway. After that, a new pre-reading effect is executed, or a new pre-reading effect is executed after changing the effect mode of the pre-reading effect that is being executed to a shortened pre-reading effect mode that is earlier than the end timing that was initially set. You may do it.

Also, as the priority rank of the pre-reading effect, the priority rank of the pre-reading effect corresponding to the winning information indicating that the jackpot is won is the highest. It is better to set so that By this. When the pre-reading effect being executed ends midway, the player can be made to have a sense of expectation for the jackpot and the new pre-reading effect to be executed next can be watched.

Returning to FIG. 140, the description will be continued. In the process of S3209, when it is determined that the winning information command is not received (S3209: No), it is then determined whether or not the hit related command is received (S3211), and when the hit related command is received ( (S3211: Yes), the hit related command processing (S3212) is executed, and after the hit related command processing ends, this processing ends.

Here, the contents of the hit related command processing (S3212) will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit related command process (S3212). In the hit related command process, first, it is determined whether or not an opening command is received from the main control device 110 (S3301). When it is determined that the opening command has been received (S3301: Yes), a big hit medium effect setting process is executed (S3302), and then the opening effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81, for display. The opening command is set (S3303), and this processing ends. The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 starts the opening effect on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the contents of the big hit medium effect setting process (S3302) executed when the opening command is received (S3301: Yes) will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big hit mid-game effect setting process (S3302). In this big hit medium production setting process (S3302), the state of holding at the time of big hit winning (the contents of the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a and the counter value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b2 (the number of holding balls)) Based on, processing for setting the effect executed during the big hit is executed.

Specifically, the result of determining whether or not there is winning information indicating that the special symbol has been won, and the result of determining whether or not the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 has reached the upper limit value (4). Based on and, the effect to be executed during the big hit is selected using the big hit medium effect selection table 222c (see FIG. 115(c)).

When the big hit medium production setting process (S3302) is executed, first, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is extracted (S3401), and then based on the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b2. The current number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2) is extracted (S3402), and it is determined whether the extracted number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2) is 0 (S3403).

If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not 0 (1 or more) (S3403; No), the reserved rank corresponding to the extracted winning information and the number of reserved balls is read from the reserved rank selection table 222b (S3404), The process moves to S3406, which will be described later. On the other hand, in the process of S3403, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 0, “1” is read as the reserved rank, and the process proceeds to S3406.

In the pending rank selection table 222b, in order to select the pending rank based on the degree of expectation that the winning information for winning the jackpot again (within the holding pool) can be present in the pending at the end of the jackpot, it is stored at the time of jackpot winning. The result of determining whether or not the jackpot information included in the jackpot information is stored, and whether or not new winning information may be stored in the jackpot (whether the number of reserved balls is the upper limit or not) The pending rank is selected based on the result of determining whether or not). Further, when the number of reserved balls is “0” at the time of jackpot winning, since there is no winning information, the reserved rank “1” is set without using the reserved rank selection table 222b.

As described above, in this control example, when selecting an effect executed during the big hit, the number of winning information stored in the winning information storage area, that is, the number of reserved balls, and the content of the winning information, that is, The reservation rank is selected based on the result of the judgment. The effect executed during the jackpot is selected in the process of S3406 described below based on the reserved rank selected here.

With this configuration, an effect corresponding to the number of winning information stored in the winning information storage area, that is, the number of reserved balls, and the content of the winning information, that is, the result of winning/decreasing judgment is executed during a big hit. In addition to the effect of celebrating to the player that the jackpot has been won, an effect suggesting the game content after the jackpot can be executed.

In addition, in the present control example, the effect executed during the jackpot is configured to refer to the holding rank selected with the above-described content, but in addition to that, for example, the number of jackpots included in the winning information or , Suspend rank based on information such as type of fluctuation pattern and transition of gaming state (probability change state, time saving state, normal state) (game state that can be determined when all variations of special symbols corresponding to holding balls are completed) May be selected.

Furthermore, in addition to the above-mentioned holding rank, the jackpot type being executed this time, the number of times the jackpot winning is continued within a predetermined period (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is within 50 times), and the player are advantageous. It is also possible to use the so-called number of consecutive games, such as the number of jackpots won in a state where the game state continues, and operation information indicating the operation content of the player's operation means. Thereby, more various effects can be executed during the big hit.

In addition, in the present control example, the effect during the big hit selected based on the above-mentioned holding rank is executed by using the entire main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 86(a)). The mode is not limited to this as long as the player can grasp the contents during the big hit, and the common big hit medium effect is executed by using the entire main display area Dm, and a partial area of the main display area Dm. It is also possible to execute a jackpot effect selected based on the holding rank described above as a sub effect executed by using a device other than the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a sub display device, a lamp). Device, a frame of the pachinko machine 10, a voice output device). As a result, the player can be informed of the content of the game after the jackpot is finished, based on the pending ranks, while sharing the effect for showing that the jackpot has been won (effect for showing that the jackpot is in progress). Therefore, it is possible to easily inform the player that the big hit is in progress, and to execute an effect that has expectations after the big hit ends.

Returning to FIG. 143, the description will be continued. In the process of S3406, based on the read-out hold rank and the value of the first effect counter 223y1, the big hit medium effect selection table 222c is read to read the big hit medium effect (S3406). Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit medium presentation read this time is an addition presentation (S3407), and when it is determined that it is an addition presentation (S3407: Yes), the addition presentation flag 223h is set to ON (S3408). The display big hit medium effect command corresponding to the read big hit medium effect is set (S3409), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S3407, when it is determined that the big hit mid-sized presentation read this time is not the additional presentation (S3407: No), the processing of S3408 is skipped and the processing proceeds to the above-described processing of S3409.

It returns to FIG. 142 and continues description. In the process of S3301, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S3301: No), then it is determined whether the round number command has been received (S3304). Here, when the round number command is received (S3304: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S3305), and then it is determined whether the addition effect flag 223h is set to ON (S3306). ).

Here, when the addition effect flag 223h is set to ON (S3306: Yes), the process regarding the addition effect is executed at the timing when a new round is started (that is, the timing when the round number command is received). Since it is necessary to perform the process, the process during the addition effect is executed (S3307), after that, the addition effect command for display is set (S3308), and the round number command for display corresponding to the number of rounds extracted this time is set (S3309). ), and ends this processing. The display addition effect command and the display round number command set here are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (see FIG. 136) of the main process executed by the MPU 221 (see FIG. 136). In S3102), it is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the contents of the process during the addition effect (S3307) will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the contents of the process (S3307) during the additional effect. This addition effect mid-process (S3307) is a process executed when the addition effect is selected as the effect during the big hit in the above-described big hit mid effect setting process (see FIG. 143). This is processing for selecting the display mode of the number-of-rounds display mode Dm10 (see FIG. 86(a)) that is displayed when being executed.

This addition effect production process (S3307) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit related command process (see FIG. 142) that the round number command is received (S3304: Yes). In other words, during the big hit, the above-described additional production process is executed every time a new round is started. Thereby, it is possible to select the round number display mode Dm10 corresponding to the progress of the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 and the running round number display mode Dm3 which are already displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the present control example, the number of rounds displayed in the additional effect is included in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a in the number of rounds set for the jackpot being executed (for example, 10 rounds). It is configured to add up the number of rounds (eg, 15 rounds) per jackpot. In this control example configured in this manner, by executing the process during addition production (S3307) each time a new round is started, the winning information newly stored during the jackpot corresponds to the jackpot. Even if there is, it is possible to immediately execute the effect for addition that reflects the content, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

When the process during addition production (S3307) is executed, first, the number of big hit rounds stored in the big hit information storage area 223f, that is, the number of rounds set for the big hit currently being executed is read (S3501), and next. Then, all winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read (S3502). Then, it is determined whether or not the winning information includes winning information corresponding to the jackpot (S3503).

If it is determined that there is winning information corresponding to the jackpot (S3503: Yes), the number of rounds read by the process of S3501 (the number of rounds set for the jackpot currently being executed) and the winning information. A summing process (S3508 to S3511) for summing the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot included in the. The summing process will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no winning information corresponding to the jackpot (S3503: No), the number of display rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223g, that is, the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The display round number (“10” in the case of FIG. 86(a)) displayed as the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 is read (S3504), and is read in the process of S3506 from the per-round number read in the process of S3501. The number of displayed rounds is subtracted (S3505). By the processing of S3505, the number of rounds obtained by subtracting the number of confirmed rounds (the number of confirmed rounds) displayed by the player from the number of rounds confirmed to be executed internally, that is, the player The number of unrecognized rounds (the number of remaining rounds) is calculated.

Next, based on the number of remaining rounds calculated in the process of S3505 and the presence/absence of winning information corresponding to the jackpot, the number of display rounds is selected by referring to the number-of-addition selection table 222d and stored in the number-of-display-rounds storage area 223g. (S3506), the additional display process is executed (S3507), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3503, when it is determined that there is winning information corresponding to the big hit (S3503: Yes), the adding process is executed. In this summing process, first, the number of rounds corresponding to the winning prize stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read (S3508), and then the number of rounds read in the process of S3501 and the number of rounds read in the process of S3508. Then, the total number of rounds is calculated (S3509).

Next, the display round number stored in the display round number storage area 223g, that is, the display round number displayed as the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (Fig. 86 ( In the case of a), “10”) is read (S3510), and the display round number read in the process of S3510 is subtracted from the total round number added in the process of S3509 (S3511). By the process of S3511, the number of rounds obtained by subtracting the number of confirmed rounds (the number of confirmed rounds) displayed by the player from the number of rounds confirmed to be internally executed, that is, the player The number of unrecognized rounds (the number of remaining rounds) is calculated. Then, after executing the above-described processing of S3506, the additional display processing is executed, and this processing is ended.

As described above, among the additional production process (S3307), the processes of S3501 to S3511 are processes for setting the display mode of the number-of-rounds display mode Dm10 during execution of the additional production, and are described above. As described above, it is configured to be executed when a new round is started (a new round game is started) during the big hit. As a result, the process for setting the display mode of the effect regarding the number of rounds can be executed at the optimum timing.

The execution timing and the processing content of the process for setting the display mode for displaying as the number-of-rounds display mode Dm10 are not limited to the contents of this control example. For example, in this control example, a new round is displayed. When the process is started, the process is performed during the additional effect, thereby determining the winning information (the process of S3502 and S3503) and the setting process of the number of display rounds (S3504 to S3506, SS3510 to S3506). Process) and the process of performing the above) are integrally executed. However, the above-described prize information determination process is executed in advance at the timing when the prize information command is received, the result is temporarily stored, and the stored result is used. It may be configured to execute the display round number setting process described above.

Further, in the present control example, when the round number command is received (S3304 in FIG. 142: Yes), the processing during the addition effect is configured to be executed, but the addition effect during the round game (interval period). You may comprise so that a middle process may be performed. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the additional production process during the round game (interval period), which has a relatively small processing amount during the jackpot in which various control processes are executed, and the voice lamp control device 113. It is possible to suppress a temporary increase in the processing load of.

In this case, if the number of rounds to be executed next is determined based on the winning information command that has already been received, and the above-described additional production process is executed based on the determination result. Good. Further, in the present control example, the process during the addition effect is executed each time a new round is started, but when a specific round (for example, an even round, a multiple of 5) is started. It may be configured so that it is executed only in step S3, or it may be executed based on the lottery result by performing a lottery as to whether or not to execute the process during additional effect.

In this control example, the processing of S3501 to S3511 is executed each time a new round is started, but for example, after the processing of S3502, a new winning is started from the time when the previous round was started. A process of determining whether information has been added may be provided, and if new winning information is not added, the processes of S3503 to S3511 may be skipped. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing executed in each round.

Returning to FIG. 144, the description will be continued. When the process of S3506 is completed, next, an additional display process (S3507) that is a process for executing the effect display regarding the number of display rounds set in the process of S3506 is executed, and this process is ended. Here, the additional display processing (S3507) will be described with reference to FIG. 145.

FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the contents of the additional display processing (S3507). The additional display process (S3507) is a process for setting a display command for the additional effect corresponding to the number of display rounds (see S3508 of FIG. 144) determined in the during-addition effect process (see FIG. 144). In the present control example, when the number of rounds in the big hit reaches the predetermined number of rounds n (the number of rounds that is a multiple of 5, that is, 5 rounds, 10 rounds, 15 rounds), the number of display rounds (determined round number display mode Dm4 ) Is updated and the number of rounds immediately before the predetermined number of rounds n (the number of rounds that is a multiple of 5) is reached (that is, 4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds), the next round (the predetermined number of rounds n) ), a precursor effect (see FIG. 85(b)) that suggests that the display round number (the confirmed round number display mode Dm4) is updated is executed.

When the add-on display process (S3507) is executed, first, the number of rounds n (specifically, 5 rounds and 10 rounds) at which the current round number becomes the update timing of the round number (timing to add and display the confirmed round number). , 15 rounds, which is one less than the number of rounds n−1 (4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) (S3601). If it is determined that the number of rounds is n-1 (4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) this time (S3601: Yes), a precursor effect for additionally displaying the confirmed round number in the next round (Fig. 85 (b ) Reference), the corresponding display additional selection command is set (S3602), and the present process is terminated.

In the present control example, the effect mode of the above-mentioned precursor effect (see FIG. 85(b)) is set based on the display round number stored in the display round number storage area 223g. When the number of display rounds stored in the area 223g is 10 or more, an effect mode (see FIG. 86(b)) in which the number of “treasure boxes” displayed during the predictive effect is reduced, or a display mode during the predictive effect is displayed. An effect mode (see FIG. 86(b)) in which the display mode of the "treasure box" is made luxurious is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to allow the player to predict the effect contents of the additional display effect when the precursor effect is executed.

In addition, in the present control example, the presentation mode of the indication effect is set based on the number of display rounds stored in the display round number storage area 223g, but other than that, for example, it is internally determined. It may be configured to set the presentation mode of the indication effect based on the number of rounds (the number of rounds set for the big jackpot on hold when the number of rounds in the hold is fixed). This allows the player to predict the internally determined number of rounds based on the effect mode of the precursor effect and the effect mode of the additional effect in which the number of display rounds is added, and is executed during the big hit. It is possible to keep interest in the production.

Further, in the present control example, by changing the display mode of the "treasure box (selected images Dm5 to Dm7)" displayed during the precursory effect, the player can further develop the additional effect that is executed during the big hit. However, the display mode for other configurations may be changed, and for example, the display of "arrow (selected image Dm8)" for selecting "treasure box (selected images Dm5 to Dm7)". The mode (for example, color or size) may be changed, and the sound or the lighting pattern of the LED may be changed. Further, the period in which the precursor effect is executed may be different.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3601, if it is determined that the number of rounds this time is not n-1 rounds (4 rounds, 9 rounds, 14 rounds) (S3601: No), then the number of rounds this time is n rounds ( It is determined whether it is the 5th round, 10th round, 15th round) (S3603), and if it is the nth round (5th round, 10th round, 15th round) (S3603: Yes), the number of display rounds is stored. A display addition display command corresponding to the number of display rounds stored in the area 223g is set (S3604), and this processing ends. In addition, in the processing of S3603, when it is determined that the number of rounds this time is not the nth round (S3603: No), this processing is directly terminated.

The display additional display command set in the above-described processing of S3604 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output processing of the main processing (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221 (S3102). In the middle, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display addition display command, the display control device 114 displays the round number display mode Dm10 corresponding to the content of the command on the third symbol display device 81.

In the present control example, the number of display rounds set in the additional production process is displayed during a specific round (the number of rounds n) (the display mode of the finalized round number display mode Dm4 is changed (added)). However, the display mode of the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 may be varied (added) at other timings, for example, for determining whether or not to update the confirmed round number display mode Dm4. The lottery means may execute the lottery each time a new round starts, and set the timing for executing the effect of adding and updating the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 based on the lottery result. As a result, it is possible to make the timing of updating the contents of the confirmed round number display mode Dm4 irregular, and it is possible to make the player continue to play the game in the midst of a big hit while having a sense of expectation.

It returns to FIG. 142 and continues description. In the process of S3306, when it is determined that the additional effect flag 223h is not on (off) (S3306: No), it is not necessary to execute the additional effect producing process (S3307), and thus the processes of S3307 and S3308 are executed. The processing is skipped, the above-described processing of S3309 is executed, and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S3304, when it is determined that the round number command is not received (S3304: No), it is then determined whether the ending command is received from the main control device 110 (S3310). When it is determined that the ending command is received (S3310: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S3311), the jackpot effect setting process is executed (S3312), and this process is ended. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the ending command for display, the display control device 114 starts the ending effect on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the jackpot after-effect setting process (S3312) executed when it is determined that the ending command is received (S3310: Yes) will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the contents of post-big hit production setting processing (S3312). In this jackpot after-effect production setting process (S3312), during the period in which the jackpot ends and the variation of the special symbol is executed, the effect executed during the jackpot is continuously executed. It is a process for setting the jackpot post-effect corresponding to the executed effect.

After the jackpot effect setting process (S3312) is executed, first, the game state after the jackpot is read from the information stored in the state storage area 223e (S3701), and then the bonus effect flag 223h is set to ON. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether the effect executed during the big hit this time is an effect for addition (S3702). When it is determined that the effect is for addition (S3702: Yes), it is then determined whether or not there is winning information that was won for the jackpot in the winning information storage area 223a (whether the player holds the game in the hold) (S3703).

In the processing of S3703, when it is determined that there is winning information for the jackpot (S3703: Yes), a command for post-additional presentation jackpot is set (S3704), and this processing is ended. That is, in the processing of S3703, when it is determined that there is winning information for the jackpot (S3703: Yes), all the summed round numbers calculated in the processing of S3505 of the adding-on effect processing (S3307) of FIG. 144 are displayed. Since it is not displayed as the number of rounds, until the next big hit is executed (until the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the winning information including the big hit information is completed), the addition effect continues. Set the command for after-effect big jackpot for display to be displayed as.

The post-display extra-effect jackpot command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the after-addition-effect for display command, the display control device 114 starts the display for continuously performing the addition effect while executing the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 88(a)). With such a configuration, even after the jackpot is over, the effect performed during the jackpot can be continuously executed.

In this control example, the display round number (fixed round number display mode Dm4) is partially displayed (for example, 5 rounds) even with respect to the round number set for one jackpot (for example, 15 rounds). Since it is configured, from the effect contents of the effect for addition displayed on the third symbol display device 81, whether it is the effect for addition which is being executed during one big hit, or between a plurality of big hits (the first big hit is It is difficult to understand whether it is the additional effect that is being performed during the special symbol variation period that is performed after the end of the second big jackpot. With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the number of jackpots won while the additional effect is continuously executed, or the number of rounds set for one jackpot, in an incomprehensible manner. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while expecting the player to continue the additional effect (the jackpot continues for a long time).

Returning to FIG. 146, the explanation is continued. In the processing of S3703, when it is determined that there is no winning information that is won in the jackpot (S3703: No), all of the total number of rounds calculated in the processing of S3505 of the addition effect processing (S3307) of FIG. Is displayed, the addition effect flag 223h is set to OFF (S3705), the display round number storage area 223g is cleared (S3706), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S3702, when it is determined that the effect executed during the big hit of this time is not the additional effect (S3702: No), the effect executed during the big hit of this time is the continuous hit effect. (See FIG. 84) is determined (S3707). Here, if it is determined that the effect is for continuous hitting (S3707: Yes), the command after the effect for big hitting for continuous hitting for display is set (S3708), and this processing is ended.

The display continuous hit effect big jackpot command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. In the middle, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the command for the continuous hitting effect for display, after the big hit, while the variable display of the third symbol is executed on the third symbol display device 81, the display for continuously executing the effect for continuous hitting is started. To do. With such a configuration, even after the jackpot is over, the effect performed during the jackpot can be continuously executed.

In the process of S3707, when it is determined that it is not the continuous hit effect (S3707: No), that is, when the normal hit effect is executed during the big hit, the game state after the big hit ends is a certain change or a shortened state. If it is determined that there is a probability change or a time saving state (S3709: Yes), the display extension flag 223i is set to ON (S3710), and the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is set to "4000". The setting is made (S3711), and this processing is ended.

Here, the contents executed in the processes of S3710 and S3711 will be described. In the present control example, the effect in the big hit is selected with reference to the big hit mid effect selection table 222c shown in FIG. 115(c). As shown in FIG. 115(c), in the normal winning effect, all the holding ranks “1” to “4”, that is, the winning information stored in the winning information storing area 223a at the time of winning the jackpot. It is configured as an effect that can be executed when (held symbol) includes the information of winning the jackpot (in the case of holding in-resort) or not (when not in holding-in-resort). There is.

Then, when the gaming state after the jackpot is finished in which the normal winning effect is executed is the probability change or the time saving state, the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, and the ending display displayed during the jackpot is set to a predetermined value after the jackpot is finished. It is displayed until the condition is satisfied (see FIG. 89(a)). With this configuration, the special symbol is changed in the state where the jackpot ending display is displayed, and when the jackpot is won, the fact that the jackpot is won is displayed on the ending display screen (Fig. 89 ( See b)). As a result, even when the normal winning effect is executed, it is possible to give the expectation to the in-hold-long holiday resort and to continue and execute the big-hit effect when the in-hold holiday resort is performed.

Further, in the present control example, as a period for continuously executing the jackpot ending display even after the jackpot ends, the number of times the special symbol changes is four times or four seconds after the jackpot ends until either condition is satisfied. The period is set, and in the process of S3711, by setting the value of "4000" in the elapsed time counter 223k, the time elapses after the jackpot is finished (after the special symbols can be changed). I try to count.

In this way, the period of executing the jackpot ending display is not set based on the number of times the special symbol is changed (for example, four times), but is set based on the elapsed time from the end of the jackpot. Even when the change of the special symbol is not executed after the end (when there is no reservation of the special symbol), the jackpot ending display can be executed only for a limited period.

In this control example, the special symbol is not changed after the jackpot, and if the elapsed time after the jackpot has passed the predetermined period (4 seconds), the demo screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is configured to be displayed.

In the process of S3709, when it is determined that the gaming state after the jackpot is not a sure change or a time saving state (S3709: No), the effect executed during the jackpot is continued during the variation period of the special symbol executed after the jackpot. Then, the value of the display round number storage area 223g is cleared (S3712) without executing the process of displaying.

It returns to FIG. 142 and continues description. In the process of S3310, when it is determined that the ending command is not received (S3310: No), the process according to the other command is executed (S3313), and the present process is ended.

Returning to FIG. 140, the description will be continued. In the processing of S3211, when it is determined that the hit related command has not been received (S3211: No), then it is determined whether the status command has been received (S3213), and it is determined that the status command has been received. (S3213: Yes), extracts the current game state from the received command and stores it in the state storage area 223e (S3214).

In the process of S3214, when the state designation command set in the process of S1214 of the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the main control device 110 described above with reference to FIG. 137 is received, the current game state Separately from the above, a process of storing the game state set after the jackpot is finished is executed. With this configuration, the state command indicating the current game state and the state designation command indicating the game state (planned game state) set when the predetermined condition is satisfied (when the jackpot is over) are classified. And can be memorized. Also, after the jackpot is over, you will receive a status command indicating the current gaming status, but at that time, the content of the status command indicating the current gaming status and the content of the status designation command indicating the planned gaming status. A configuration may be used in which a determination means for determining whether or not match is provided and it is determined whether or not the game state is properly set based on the determination result of the determination means. Thereby, for example, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of illegally variably setting the gaming state after the jackpot is over to a gaming state advantageous to the player.

In the process of S3213, when it is determined that the status command is not received (S3213: No), the process according to the received command is executed (S3216), and the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

By this processing, it is possible to set commands for performing various settings to the display control device 114 based on the commands output from the main control device 110.

Next, referring to FIG. 147, the variable display setting process (S3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S3114). This variable display setting process (S3114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S4014), first, it is determined whether the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S3801). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S3801: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and therefore the processing of S3813 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S3801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is set to off (S3802), and then in the process of S3203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 140). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223.

Next, it is determined whether or not the display extension flag 223i is set to ON (S3803), and if it is determined to be set to ON (S3803: Yes), the extension management process is executed (S3804), and S3811 is executed. Move to processing. The extension management process (S3804) is a process for managing the end timing of the extended display effect in which the ending display during the big hit is continuously (extended) displayed even after the big hit ends. This extension management processing (S3804) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 148.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3803, if it is determined that the display extension flag 223i is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S3803: No), then the game stored in the state storage area 223e. The information indicating the state is read and it is determined whether the current game state is the probability change state or the time saving state (S3805). When it is determined that the state is the probability change or the time saving state (S3805: Yes), the continuous effect setting process is executed (S3806), and then the process proceeds to S3811. The continuous effect setting process (S3806) is a process for setting the effect mode of the continuous effect (battle effect) (see FIG. 91) that is executed in the probable variation or the time saving state. This continuous effect setting process (S3806) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 149.

In the process of S3805, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the probable variation or the time saving state (S3805: No), whether the variation pattern of this time is a variation pattern for executing the expectation effect based on the extracted variation pattern. It is determined (S3807). In the process of S3807, when it is determined that the variation pattern is to execute the expectation effect (S3807: Yes), the expectation effect setting process is executed (S3808), and the process proceeds to S3811. The expectation effect setting process (S3808) is a process for setting an effect mode of the effect (see FIG. 102) for suggesting the expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a big hit. This expectation effect setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 151.

On the other hand, in the process of S3807, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is the variation pattern in which the expectation effect is not executed (S3807: No), the current variation pattern executes the countdown effect based on the extracted variation pattern. If it is determined that the current variation pattern is the variation pattern for executing the countdown effect (S3809: Yes), the countdown effect setting process (S3810) is executed, and S3811. Process shifts to. The countdown effect setting process (S3810) informs the player of the timing at which the specific effect for suggesting that the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit is high during the variable display of the special symbol. This is processing for setting the effect mode of the effect (see FIG. 98) for performing. This countdown effect setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 152.

In the process of S3809, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern in which the countdown effect is not executed (S3809: No), or when the processes of S3804, S3806, S3808, and S3810 are finished, the extracted variation Based on the pattern, the current variation display mode is determined from the variation pattern table 222a of the voice lamp control device 113 (S3811), and the corresponding display variation pattern command is set (S3812).

When the processing of S3812 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S3813). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S3813: No), the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, so this variable display setting The process (S3114) is ended, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S3813: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S3814), and then in the process of S3206 of the command determination process (see FIG. 140), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3815).

Next, in the process of S3815, it is determined whether the acquired stop type is a jackpot type indicating a jackpot (S3816), and if it is determined to be a jackpot type (S3816: Yes), the jackpot information storage area 223f is acquired. The hit information (the number of rounds of the big hit and the information on the gaming state set after the big hit) corresponding to the big hit type is stored (S3817), and the process proceeds to S3818. On the other hand, in the process of S3816, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not the jackpot type (S3816: No), the process directly proceeds to the process of S3818.

In the process of S3818, the stop type extracted in the process of S3815 is set (S3818), and the display stop type command to be transmitted to the display control device 114 is set based on the set stop type (S3819). ), and ends this processing. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display of the variation effect is controlled.

Next, the extension management process (S3804) executed in the variable display setting process (S3114 in FIG. 147) will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the contents of the extension management process (S3804). In this extension management process (S3804), a process of managing whether or not the ending condition regarding the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is satisfied, out of the ending conditions of the jackpot ending display continuously displayed after the jackpot is finished, is executed.

When the extension management process (S3804) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter 223j is 0 (S3901). When it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223j is 0 (S3901: Yes), that is, when it is the time to set the first variation display after the display extension flag 223i is set to ON, the variation counter The value of 223j is set to "5" as the display ending condition (display extension ending condition) of the jackpot ending display (S3902), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3901, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation counter 223j is not 0 (1 or more) (S3901: No), that is, the second to fourth times after the display extension flag 223i is set to ON. If it is the timing to set the variation display for the second time, the value of the variation counter 223j is decremented by 1 (S3903), and then it is determined whether the value of the variation counter 223j is "1" (S3904). When it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223j is "1" (S3904: Yes), that is, it is determined that it is the timing to set the variation display of the fifth rotation after the display extension flag 223i is set to ON. In this case, since one of the conditions for ending the display extension, “up to four special symbol changes”, is satisfied, the display extension flag 223i is set to OFF (S3905), and this processing ends. To do.

In the process of S3904, when it is determined that the value of the variation counter is not “1” (it is “2” or more) (S3904: No), the display extension effect command is set (S3906), and this process is executed. finish. With this configuration, while the jackpot ending display is extended and executed, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol satisfies the condition for ending the display extension, the fluctuation corresponding to the next special symbol fluctuation The display extension flag 223i is set to OFF at the timing when the display is executed, and the extension effect (ending display) can be ended. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ending display from ending during the variable display of the special symbol and giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

In the present control example, when the probability variation or the time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, by using a dedicated variation pattern table (special variation pattern table 202d4), a predetermined period (1 to 4 rotations after the jackpot end) The short variation time (0.5 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol (see FIG. 109). As a result, when the number of holding balls of the special symbol is the upper limit (4) after the jackpot is over, the number of times the special symbol is changed (4 revolutions) is longer than the elapsed time (4 seconds) as the ending condition of the extended effect. The end condition based on the above is satisfied first.

Therefore, many special symbols are changed during the period when the jackpot ending display is extended and executed, and a special production (see FIG. 89(b)) is always tried to play with the reserved ball secured. Since it is possible to perform, it is possible to improve the operation of the game.

Regarding the management based on the elapsed time, which is one of the ending conditions of the extended effect, the effect update process (periodically every 1 ms) executed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 136) ( This is executed in S3112). This effect update process (S3112) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 154.

Next, the continuous effect setting process (S3806) executed in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) will be described with reference to FIG. 149. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the content of the continuous effect setting process (S3806). The continuous effect setting process (S3806) is a process for setting the effect mode of the continuous effect (battle effect) executed during the probability change or the time saving state. Specifically, as a continuation effect (battle effect), an effect mode of a final mode effect (battle reach) that notifies whether or not the probability change or the time saving state ends and the final mode effect (battle reach) are executed. Up to the effect mode of the effect (pre-battle effect) is stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 based on the result of the determination of the special symbol, the variation pattern (variation time), and the duration of the pre-battle effect. The setting process is executed by referring to the continuous effect mode selection table 222e, the continuous value main selection table 222f, the continuous value sub-selection table 222g, and the final mode selection table 222h.

This control example is configured to repeatedly execute the above-described continuation effect (battle effect) until the probability change or the time saving state ends. With such a configuration, when the probability change or the time-saving state continues for a long period of time, one continuous production (battle production) is delayed and each production executed during the continuous production (battle production) (for example, It is possible to prevent the effect of the effect of increasing/decreasing the continuous value (HP value) from being lowered.

Further, when the continuous production (battle production) is repeatedly executed, that is, when the final mode production (battle reach) occurs at a timing at which the game state does not change from the sudden change or the time saving state, the final mode production ( "Draw" is selected as the production result of (Battle reach), and the pre-battle production is configured to start again. However, in the configuration in which the continuous production is repeatedly executed in this way, one continuous production period is long. If you try to suppress the change, the final aspect production (battle reach with winning or losing) to show that the game state shifts, the final aspect production (draw battle battle reach) is frequently executed. However, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the final mode production at an early stage.

On the other hand, in the present control example, the elapsed period (the number of times of change of the special symbol) since the last final effect (drawing battle reach) was executed last time is measured, and the measurement result is within a predetermined period (for example, the special symbol). In the case where the number of fluctuations is less than 6 times), the final aspect effect (drawing battle reach) in which no win or loss is achieved is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the effect early because the draw reach is frequently executed in a short period of time.

Further, in the present control example, it is configured to indicate to the player the result of determination of whether or not the special symbol is on hold and the remaining period of the probability change or the time saving state, depending on the effect mode of the draw battle reach. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the draw battle reach, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the continuous effect as a whole.

In addition, in this control example, the number of times the continuous effect (battle effect) is repeatedly executed is measured, and the effect mode of the continuous effect (battle effect) is set based on the measurement result. As a result, in the case where the probability change or the time saving state continues for a long period of time and the continuous effect (battle effect) is repeatedly executed, the continuous effect (battle effect) of a different effect mode can be executed, and the player can quickly perform the effect. It is possible to suppress getting tired of.

Here, the process executed in the continuous effect setting process (see S3806 of FIG. 149) of the present control example will be briefly described. First, in the variable display this time, the battle reach is executed as the continuous effect, or before the battle. A process of determining whether to execute an effect (execution effect selection process), and a process of setting an effect mode of pre-battle effect based on the determination result of the execution effect selection process (first effect mode setting process), or , A process of setting a production mode of battle reach (second (final) production mode setting process) is executed.

As described above, in this control example, each time the continuous effect setting process (S3806) is executed, it is configured to determine whether to execute the pre-battle effect or the battle reach in the current variable display. It is possible to smoothly switch the production from pre-battle production to battle reach.

As shown in FIG. 149, when the continuous effect setting process (S3806) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the variation display of this time is a variation (variation won in the jackpot of the special symbol) (S4001). Here, when it is determined that the variation is not a hit variation (S4001: No), next, whether the variation pattern of this time is a variation pattern having a variation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds (a variation pattern capable of executing battle reach). ) Is determined (S4002), and when it is determined that the variation pattern is 60 seconds or 90 seconds (S4002: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the duration counter 223p is 6 or more (S4003).

In the process of S4003, when it is determined that the value of the duration counter 223p is not 6 or more (less than 6) (S4003: No), it is determined whether the continuation effect flag 223r is set to ON (S4004). If it is determined that the continuous effect flag 223r is not on (S4004: No), that is, if the continuous effect is not executed, the continuous effect mode is selected based on the continuous effect mode selection table 222e (S4005). The selected continuous effect mode is stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223m (S4006), the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is incremented by 1 (S4007), and the continuous effect flag 223r is set to ON (S4008).

When it is determined that the continuous effect flag 223r is not on in the above-described processing of S4004, the first variation display is set after the probability variation or the time saving state is set as the game state, or the previous variation display is final. This is a mode effect (battle reach), and is a case where a new continuous effect (pre-battle effect) is set in the current variation display.

In such a case, in the processing of S4005, based on the continuous effect mode selection table 222e, the effect mode (effect mode) of the pre-battle effect executed from the current variable display is selected. Here, in the continuous effect mode selection table 222e, as shown in FIG. 116(b), the number of times the continuous effect is repeatedly executed (the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q) and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. The continuous production mode (mode 1 to mode 5) is set based on the information and the value of the third production counter 223y3, and the selected continuous production is performed until the next final mode production (battle reach) is executed. A pre-battle effect based on the mode is executed.

In the present control example, when the continuous effect flag 223r is set to OFF, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is pre-read, and the continuous effect mode is set based on the pre-read result. The configuration for executing the process of setting the variation display mode based on the continuous effect mode set each time the variation of the special symbol is executed is used, but the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a is prefetched. However, as long as it is a configuration that executes an effect based on the prefetch result, a configuration other than that used in this control example may be used. The stored winning information is pre-read, and from the display mode of the variable display executed this time based on the pre-reading result to the display mode of the variable display corresponding to the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is preset. It may be configured to do so.

On the other hand, in the process of S4004, when it is determined that the continuous effect flag 223r is set to ON (S4004: Yes), or when the process of S4008 ends, the value of the continuous period counter 223p is incremented by 1 (S4009). .. As a result, the value of the continuous production setting counter 223q when the next continuous production mode is selected can be made different, and it is possible to suppress the continuous selection of the same continuous production mode.

In addition, in this control example, it is suppressed that the same continuous effect mode is continuously selected, and at a specific timing (timing at which the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is 1), a specific condition (holding within win). ) Is established, in order to make it possible to execute a specific effect (continuous effect mode 5), the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is incremented by 1, but the same continuous effect mode continues. Other configurations may be used in order to achieve the purpose of suppressing the selection.

For example, the value for adding the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q may be determined by a lottery (for example, a value of -5 to 5 is determined by lottery). With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the regularity in which the continuous effect mode is selected, and it is possible to enhance the effect of effect.

Further, the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q may be added based on the result of the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, or the number of consecutive big hits (the game state shifts to the normal state. Alternatively, the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q may be added based on the number of times the jackpot is successively won) or the lottery result of the special symbol when the continuous effect mode is selected.

When the process of S4009 is completed, the continuous value setting process is executed next (S4010). Details of the continuous value setting process executed in the process of S4010 will be described later with reference to FIG. 150. A display effect command corresponding to the difference continuation value set in the continuation value setting processing of S4010 is set (S4011), and this processing is ended. In the process of S4011, a production command indicating the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set as the pre-battle production of the continuous production. Specifically, the display mode corresponding to the continuous effect mode selected in the process of S4005 and the display mode corresponding to the difference continuation value set in the process of S4010 are collectively set as a display effect command. ..

The display effect command set in the process of S4011 is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display effect command as the variation pattern command, the display control device 114 displays the pre-battle effect on the third symbol display device 81.

The process from S4001 to S4003 in the continuous effect setting process (S3806) described above corresponds to the execution effect selection process, and the process from S4004 to S4011 sets the effect mode of the pre-battle effect (first effect mode). Setting process).

On the other hand, in the process of S4001, if it is determined that the current variation is a hit variation (S4001: Yes), the value of the continuous effect setting counter 223q is reset (S4012), and the process proceeds to S4013. In addition, in the processing of S4003, when it is determined that the value of the duration counter is 6 or more (S4003: Yes), that is, even when the pre-battle effect continues for six or more special symbol variations, the processing of S4013 is performed. Transition.

In the processing of S4013, the production mode of battle reach (final mode) is selected based on the final mode selection table 222h (S4013), and the corresponding display final mode command is set (S4014). The display final mode command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the final mode command for display, the battle reach using the continuation value (HP value) displayed in the pre-battle effect on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 93(a)). Is executed. With this configuration, the effect can be switched from the pre-battle effect to the battle reach without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

After finishing the process of S4014, next, the continuous effect flag 223r is set to OFF (S4015), the continuous effect mode storage area 223m is cleared (S4016), and the value of the continuous period counter 223p is cleared to 0 (S4017). , This process ends.

As described above, in this control example, the pre-battle effect is executed as a variable display corresponding to a plurality of special symbol fluctuations executed while the probability change or the time saving state is set as the game state, and one specific one Although it is configured to execute the final mode production (battle reach) for the special symbol variation (variation of the special symbol, or variation of 60 seconds or 90 seconds of variation time selected), other than that Also, for example, the final aspect effect (battle reach) may be configured to be executed by using a variable display corresponding to a plurality of special symbol variations. In this case, based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (result determination result or variation pattern in the hold) (based on the pre-reading result) the final aspect (battle reach) effect mode is displayed in a variable manner. It is preferable to configure so as to correspond to. As a result, the final aspect effect (battle reach) executed across a plurality of special symbol fluctuations can be smoothly executed.

Further, when using a configuration that executes the final aspect effect (battle reach) across a plurality of special symbol fluctuations, a plurality of target display aspects displayed in the final aspect effect (battle reach) It may be configured to be set in advance for each special symbol variation, or the production contents of the battle reach, that is, only the attack pattern and the production result are preset, and the continuous value (HP value) increase/decrease display control May be configured to be set every time the variable display of the special symbol is executed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the types of final aspect effects (battle reach) that are preset based on the look-ahead result.

Next, the continuous value setting process (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous value setting process (S4010). The continuous value setting process (S4010) is a process for setting the value of the continuous value (HP value in the battle effect) that is variably displayed during the continuous effect. In the present control example, when setting the value of this continuation value (the value of the continuation value after the variable), the value selected based on the lottery of the special symbol (the value of the hundreds of HP of the opponent) and the effect It is set so as to be summed with the value (the value of the tens digit of the HP of the opponent) selected based on the lottery for. Thereby, the variation of the displayed continuous value can be increased.

When the continuation value setting process (S4010) is executed, first, it is determined whether it is the timing to change the continuation value (S4101). Although detailed description is omitted, in S4101, the fluctuation pattern extracted from the fluctuation pattern table 222a of the voice lamp controller 113 is continued based on the rough fluctuation pattern notified from the main controller 110 by the fluctuation pattern command. Determine if it is a pattern to change the value.

In this control example, the timing for changing the continuation value (HP value) is determined based on the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern table 222a of the voice lamp control device 113 as described above. In addition to the above, a measuring means is provided for measuring the number of times that the variation pattern without changing the continuous value is continuously selected, and when the number of times measured by the measuring means reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4 times), it is forced. When the number of times measured by the above-mentioned measuring means is a specific number (for example, once), a forced change means for changing the continuation value automatically is provided. It may be provided. With this configuration, the continuous value (HP value) is not changed at all during the continuous production (during pre-battle production), and the player gets tired of the production (pre-battle production), or the continuous value is frequently generated. It is possible to prevent the situation in which the (HP value) is changed and the effect contents are difficult to understand.

Further, the continuous value change timing may be set based on the operation result of the player's frame button 22 or the pre-read result of the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. Further, the continuation value change timing is set based on the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the continuation value (HP value) selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f. You may change the frequency.

When it is determined in the process of S4101 that it is not the continuous value change timing (S4101: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the continuous value change timing (S4101: Yes), the hundreds digit of the continuous value is selected based on the continuous value main selection table 222f (S4102), and the selected continuous value (continuous value The continuous value selected based on the main selection table 222f) is stored in the continuous value storage area 223n (S4103). Although detailed description will be given later, in this control example, the effect mode of the effect (attack effect) executed when the continuous value is changed is the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223n, that is, the continuous value main The continuation value selected based on the selection table 222f is referenced and set.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation value (the value of the hundreds) selected in the process of S4102 is 200 or more (S4104), and if it is determined to be 200 or more (S4104: Yes), the first Based on the continuous value sub-selection table 222g1 (see FIG. 117(b)), the effect value (the value of the tens digit) is selected (S4105), and when it is determined that the value is less than 200 (S4104; No), the second Based on the continuous value sub-selection table 222g2 (see FIG. 117(c)), the effect value (the value of the tens place) is selected (S4106). A continuation value is calculated by adding the value selected in the process of S4102 and the value selected in the process of S4103 (S4104).

Here, as shown in FIG. 117(b) and FIG. 117(c), the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 and the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 are the production values (the value of the tens place) to be selected. ) Are configured differently, the range of selectable effect values in the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 is defined as "-20 to +20", and the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 is selectable. The range of performance values is defined as "-10 to 0". That is, in the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2, a positive value (plus value) is not selected as an effect value. In the pre-battle effect, for example, when “0” is selected as the continuation value (hundreds value) based on the continuation value main selection table 222f, internally (in the continuation value storage area 223n, Although "0" is set as the stored value, it is not "0" as the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the effect value (for example, "20"). )) This is a configuration for suppressing a value from being displayed and an effect that gives the player a feeling of strangeness.

In this way, a configuration is used in which the value of the continuation value (hundreds place value) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f is determined, and the range of selectable effect values is changed based on the determination result. In the normal state (the continuation value is 200 or more), it is possible to change the value of the continuation value (HP value) in the plus direction or the minus direction, increasing the variation of the effect and increasing the continuation value. When it is less than 200, the value of the continuation value (HP value) is changed only in the negative direction, and the occurrence of inconsistency in the effect is suppressed.

Then, when the processing of S4105 or S4106 is finished, next, the continuation value (the value of hundreds) selected in the processing of S4102 and the effect value (the value of the tens) selected in either S4105 or S4106. Is added to calculate a continuation value (HP value) (S4107), a display summing command corresponding to the calculated continuation value (HP value) is set (S4108), and this processing is ended.

As described above, in the present control example, variable management of the continuous value (HP value) that is variably displayed (increase/decrease display) while the continuous effect is being executed is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The displayed continuation value (HP value), that is, the continuation value (hundreds place value) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f, and the continuation value selected based on the continuation value sub-selection table 222g ( It is configured that only the continuation value (the value of hundreds) selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f is used instead of the sum of the values of the tens digit and the value. By configuring in this way, with respect to the display pattern of the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to reduce the pattern for performing variable management of the continuous value (HP value). Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

Further, in the present control example, even if the continuous value (HP value) is variably managed only by the continuous value (hundreds value) selected based on the continuous value main selection table 222f, the continuous value (HP value) ) And the display contents of the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are configured so as not to differ from each other, and thus the continuous production is preferably performed while reducing the processing load. Can be performed, and the staging effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the voice lamp control device 113 of this control example, the continuation value is selected based on the continuation value main selection table 222f and the continuation value sub-selection table 222g, and information (command) indicating the selected continuation value is displayed on the display control device. Output to 114. Then, only the continuous value selected by referring to the continuous value main selection table 222f is stored in the continuous value storage area 223n, and the continuous value increase/decrease management is repeatedly executed based on the stored continuous value.

Although a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 164, in the present control example, a display mode of the continuous effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, specifically, an attack pattern display mode to be executed. And a variable (increase/decrease) display mode of the continuous value (HP value) are configured and displayed by the display control device 114. That is, the display control device 114 has an area (summed value storage area) for storing the summed continuation value when the display control device 114 receives a command relating to the continuation value output from the voice lamp control device 113. The total value stored in the total value storage area and the difference between the total value calculated from the command regarding the continuous value received this time are calculated, and the attack pattern display mode based on the calculated difference value, A variable (increase/decrease) display mode of the continuous value (HP value) is set and displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably execute the continuous effect while reducing the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

In this control example, a continuation value sub-selection table 222g for selecting a continuation value for effect is provided in the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to select the continuation value for effect. However, the display control device 114 may be provided with a configuration (for example, a continuous value sub-selection table 222g) for selecting a continuous value for performance. With this configuration, the processing load on the voice lamp control device 113 can be further reduced.

In addition, in the present control example, when the continuous value is selected by the continuous value main selection table 222f, the continuous value sub-selection table 222g is also referred to and the continuous value for performance is selected. Other configurations may be used. For example, even when the continuous value main selection table 222f does not select the continuous value (for example, in the case of S4104: No in FIG. 149), the continuous value for effect ( Only the value of the tens digit) may be increased or decreased. Accordingly, it is possible to more finely set the increase/decrease display of the continuation value (HP value) executed during the continuation effect, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

In the present control example, as the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f, only the value that is smaller than the current continuation value (the continuation value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n) is selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a value increased from the current continuation value may be selected. In this case, when the value increased from the current continuation value is selected, the continuation value is not the normal attack effect but the continuation value as the effect mode of the continuation effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is preferable that the recovery effect for recovering the (HP value) is executed. As described above, by using the configuration in which the continuous value (HP value) is increased during the continuous effect, it is possible to increase the variation of the increase/decrease display of the continuous value (HP value) executed during the continuous effect, and to continue. It is possible to prevent the continuous value (HP value) from reaching the lower limit value (for example, “0”) even if the value (HP value) is frequently changed (increased or decreased).

Note that in this control example, the HP of the character is used as the continuation value that is variably displayed during the continuation effect, but in addition to that, a predetermined state (for example, an advantageous state advantageous to the player (probable variation or time saving state)) is used. ) Is set based on a variable value that determines whether or not the setting is made, and is set based on, for example, the success rate (%) of the effect to be executed and the operation content of the frame button 22. The number of operations (times) performed may be used.

Further, in the present control example, when the value of the continuous value selected by the continuous value main selection table 222f is “0”, as the continuous value (HP value) executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In order to prevent the value larger than “0” from being set, when the value of the continuation value selected by the continuation value main selection table 222f is less than a predetermined value (for example, 200), it is for production. Although a positive value is not selected as the continuous value, other configurations may be used, for example, when the continuous value selected by the continuous value main selection table 222f is "0". May be configured not to execute the selection of the continuous value for production (selection using the continuous value sub-selection table 222g).

Further, as in this control example, a process of setting rough effect contents by the first control device (voice lamp control device 113) among different control devices (voice lamp control device 113 and display control device 114). In the configuration in which the predetermined effect is repeatedly displayed by executing the process of setting the display mode of the specific effect in the second control device (display control device 114), the second control device (display control The processing result of the device 114) is output to the first control device (voice lamp control device 113), and then the first control device (voice lamp control device 113) sets a rough effect content. When executing, it is determined whether the processing result output from the second control device (display control device 114) is within the allowable range, and if it is within the allowable range, the next effect content is set as it is. If the process is executed and is out of the allowable range, the information about the rough effect contents set at the time of the previous effect content setting is corrected, and the process of setting the next effect contents is executed based on the correction result, At the timing of setting the next effect content, if the processing result is output from the second control device (display control device 114) and the processing result has not been received, the process of postponing the timing of setting the next effect content is executed. It may be configured as follows.

With such a configuration, the next effect can be set in correspondence with the effect mode already displayed by the process executed by the second control device (display control device 114), and the player can set it. The effect can be continuously executed without giving a feeling of strangeness. In this case, when it is determined that the processing result output from the second control device (display control device 114) is outside the allowable range, the processing result is in a range wider than the error range set as the allowable range. If it is within the limit range, and if the result of the determination is within the limit range, the effect can be continuously set by performing the above-described correction, and if it is outside the limit range, It is better to forcibly end the production without making corrections.

Next, the expectation effect setting process (S3808) will be described with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the content of the expectation effect setting process (S3808). This, the degree of expectation effect setting process (S3808), by changing the display mode of the degree of expectation display mode displayed during the variation effect of the special symbol, whether or not the special symbol fluctuation of this time is a big hit. This is an effect suggested to the player (see FIGS. 102 and 103).

In this control example, three types of expectation degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 (see FIG. 102(a)) are displayed as the degree of expectation effect corresponding to the passage of time of the special symbol variation. Then, among the expected degree display modes, an expected degree increase mode Dk4 for changing one of the expected display modes to a highly expected display mode is displayed, and one of the expected degree display modes Dk1 to Dk3 is displayed. The performance is executed so that can be changed. Further, the process of setting the display timing for setting the timing at which the expected degree increase mode Dk4 is displayed is also executed.

Here, in this control example, the above-described three types of expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are configured to be displayed at different timings. Therefore, the expectation increase mode is increased depending on the timing at which the expectation level increase mode Dk4 is displayed. The target of the degree-of-expectation display mode in which the display mode varies according to the mode Dk4 can be different. As a result, even when the same expected degree increase mode Dk4 is used, different effect contents can be obtained only by changing the timing at which the expected degree increase mode Dk4 is displayed, and the storage capacity of image data is reduced. can do.

In this case, it is preferable that only a still image (for example, a character image) having a small amount of image data is displayed in correspondence with the expected degree display mode in which the expected degree is increased. This makes it possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect with a small amount of data.

Furthermore, in the present control example, the display modes that are the reference of the three types of expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3 are set in advance according to the expectation effect mode level. As a result, it is possible to set the display modes of the three types of expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3, which are configured by a plurality of combinations, and reduce the processing load of the display process. Further, since the reference display mode (reference display mode) is determined according to the expectation effect mode level, it is possible to prevent the degree of increase of the expectation from being biased.

In addition, it is set according to the final display mode of the three types of expectation display modes Dk1 to Dk3 (display mode that can be displayed after the end of the expectation effect) set based on the variation pattern, and the expectation effect mode level. In the case where there is a difference in any of the expected degree display modes from the standard display mode, the expected degree increase mode Dk4 is displayed, so that the player already has a high expected degree. The effect can be executed while expecting that the display mode of the expectation display mode is changed to the display mode showing a higher expectation.

When the expectation effect setting process (S3808) is executed, first, the present expectation is selected based on the expectation selection table 222i (S4201), and then, the reference display mode based on the expectation effect selection table 222j. The expectation effect mode level for setting is selected (S4202). After selecting the expectation effect mode level, the display mode of each expectation level display mode that is predetermined in the expectation level effect mode level and the actual expectation level effect mode (each expectation level display set based on the variation pattern) The difference from the display mode) is extracted (S4203).

After the processing of S4203, it is determined whether there is a difference (S4204), and when it is determined that there is a difference, the difference is calculated for each expectation display mode (S4205), and based on the presence or absence of the calculated difference. The display timing of the expectation increase mode Dk4 is determined (S4206). Next, the differences for each expectation degree display mode are added up (S4207), and the display content (display mode, display timing) of the expectation level increase mode is determined based on the summed difference (S4208) to display the expectation level effect. The expected display effect command for display is set (S4209), and the display good expected degree target aspect notification command for notifying the expected degree display aspect that is the target of the expected degree increase aspect is set (S4210).

The process of S4208 described above will be described in detail. First, the display mode determination means determines the display mode determination process for determining the display mode (for example, “3UP”) corresponding to the difference value added up by the process of S4207. Executed. Further, the difference display means discriminates the expected degree display mode in which the difference is generated, determines a plurality of timings in which the expected degree display mode can be set based on the discrimination result, and selects among the plurality of determined timings. Is selected based on the expected degree selected by referring to the expected degree selection table 222i. As a result, the difference between the display content of the expectation display mode set in the process of S4202 and the display content of the expectation display mode set in the process of S4203 can be complemented by a plurality of timings that can be complemented by the expectation increase effect. From this, since it is possible to set one timing and set the degree of expectation increase Dk4, it is possible to increase the variation of production without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

In the example described above, the display mode of each expectation level display mode is determined first, and the content of the expectation level display mode Dk4 is set based on the value corresponding to the difference, but other configurations are possible. , The display mode of the expected degree display mode Dk4 is set based on the expected degree selected with reference to the expected degree selection table 222i, and the display content of each expected degree display mode is determined based on the setting content. It may be configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 152, the countdown effect setting process (S3810) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the content of the countdown effect setting process (S3810). The countdown effect setting process (S3810) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 140) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the received fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern for executing the countdown effect. In the process that is executed when it is determined that, as a suggestive effect for suggesting the execution timing of the specific effect executed during the variable display to the player, a countdown effect that accurately notifies the execution timing of the specific effect. Executes a process of setting an effect mode, a process of setting an effect mode of a precursor effect for suggesting that a countdown effect is to be executed, and a specific effect determination process of determining a specific effect to be the target of the countdown effect. To do.

When the countdown effect setting process (S3810) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the precursor setting flag 223t is set to ON (S4301). When it is determined that the precursor setting flag 223t is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4301: NO), the suggestive effect can be executed from the plurality of specific effects included in the current variation pattern. One specific effect set for the timing is set (S4302). That is, of the specific effects (specific effects a and b (see FIG. 100(b))) other than the specific effect (specific effect c (see FIG. 101)) that is executed at a timing when it is difficult to execute the suggested effect, Set either.

When the processing of S4302 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current variation pattern is the variation pattern that has been won (S4303). When it is determined that the current variation pattern is the variation pattern that has been won (S4303: Yes), the indication display a (timing 10 seconds after the start of variation (FIG. 100(b)) is set as the start timing of the indication effect. (See )) is set (S4304), and in the processing of S4303, when it is determined that the variation pattern of this time is a variation pattern that has not been won (miss) (S4303: No), the start timing of the precursor effect is set. The indication b (timing 17 seconds after the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 100(b))) is set (S4305). That is, in this control example, the start timing of the suggestive effect (the start timing of the predictive effect) that suggests the execution timing of the specific effect can be set based on the lottery result (winning/absence determination result) of the variation.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, the configuration of setting the start timing of the suggestive effect (start timing of the predictive effect) based on the lottery result of the fluctuation (the result of the judgment) is used, but based on the other conditions. It may be configured to set the start timing of the suggestive effect (start timing of the precursor effect). For example, the operation result of the player with respect to the frame button 22 or the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a is determined. The start timing of the suggestive effect (the start timing of the predictive effect) is set based on the result (prefetch result), the time measuring result of the time measuring means (for example, the real-time clock) that measures the time, or the past game history. You may do it.

In this way, in one variable display (variation pattern), a plurality of timings (indicative effect startable points) that can be set as the start timing of the suggestive effect (predictive effect) are prepared to satisfy the above-mentioned various conditions. By using one of the plurality of suggestion effect startable points based on the configuration, the degree of freedom of the suggestion effect to be executed can be increased and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the processing of S4304 or S4305, when the start timing of the precursor effect (indicative effect) is set, next, the countdown period is set based on the start timing of the specific effect and the start timing of the predictive effect (indicative effect) ( S4306).

This process will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 100(b). In the process of S4302, the specific effect that is the target of the suggested effect in the variable display this time is executed by the specific effect a (30 seconds after the start of the change. If the sign display a (timing 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 100(b))) is set as the start timing of the sign effect in the process of S4304, the countdown period is set to 7 Seconds are set, and in the process of S4302, the specific effect that is the target of the suggestive effect in the current variation display is set to the specific effect a (specific effect that is executed 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation), and the precursor effect is performed in the process of S4305. When the precursor display b (timing 17 seconds after the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 100(b))) is set as the start timing of, the countdown period is set to 3 seconds.

Next, the timing at which the countdown effect is started (the display timing of the countdown effect) is calculated based on the start timing of the specific effect and the set countdown period, and the start timing of the precursor effect and the display timing of the countdown effect are calculated. The interval, that is, the predictive effect period during which the predictive effect is executed is calculated (S4307). Next, in the process of S4307, it is determined whether the calculated interval (predicament effect period) is within 15 seconds (S4308), and if it is within 15 seconds (S4308: Yes), the effect mode of the indication effect (precursor) When a short effect mode is set as the effect mode (S4309), and it is determined that the interval (precursor effect period) is not within 15 seconds (longer than 15 seconds) (S4308: No), the long effect as the predictive effect mode. The mode is set (S4310).

When the process of S4309 or S4310 is completed, the display countdown effect command corresponding to the set mode (specific effect mode, countdown effect mode, precursor effect mode) is set (S4311), and the process is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the aura setting flag 223t is set to ON (S4301: YES), that is, in the winning information command process (see S3210 of FIG. 141), the aura effect has already been executed (a plurality of). In the case where the precursor effect is executed across the variable displays), the multiple variable effect setting process (S4312) is executed, and then the process of S4311 described above is executed, and the present process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 153, the content of the multiple variation effect setting process (S4312) will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the multiple variation effect setting process (S4312). In this plural variation effect setting process (S4312), a predictive effect continuation execution process for continuously executing the predictive effect executed during the previous variable display, and a countdown effect for the specific effect corresponding to the predictive effect are set. The processing to be performed is executed.

When the multiple variation effect setting process (S4312) is executed, first, the specific effect C (see FIG. 101) is set as the specific effect (S4401), and the countdown period is set to 3 seconds (S4402). Then, the display precursor command is set (S4403). The display precursor command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display indication command, the display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the same time as the start of the current variation (including the time difference that the player cannot identify). With this configuration, the indication effect can be continuously displayed from the previous variable display without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

Although detailed description is omitted, the display control device 114 of the present control example determines the means for displaying the indication effect at the timing when the variable display ends (from the voice lamp control device 113, the indication setting flag 223t is turned on. (Means for determining that a command indicating that the command has been set is being received) and the indication effect being executed when it is determined by the determination means that the indication effect is being displayed at the timing when the variable display ends The effect data storage area that temporarily stores the data together with the time data indicating the timing at which the fluctuation ends, and the precursor effect data stored in the effect data storage area when the display precursor command is received, When the indication effect is executed across a plurality of fluctuations, a series of indication effects (e.g., a car as a destination is provided. The effect (see FIG. 98(a)) to be run toward can be executed without interruption.

Further, in this control example, as the display variation pattern command indicating the variation display of the special symbol, since it is configured to output the indication sign command, a plurality of variations are straddled in correspondence with the variation display of the special symbol. It is possible to perform the display process of the effect (continuous effect) executed in. Therefore, the processing of the conventional display control device 114, that is, based on the content of the variation pattern command received each time the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the effect mode of the period until the special symbol variation is ended is displayed. The continuous effect can be executed by using the processing, and the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced. In addition, in such a configuration, in the case of performing a continuous production in which the dynamic display is continued even during the stop period of the special symbol (the symbol determination period (for example, 0.5 seconds)), based on the variation pattern command. A continuous effect having a length obtained by adding the above-described symbol fixing period to the calculated fluctuation time is set. Thereby, during the symbol fixing period of the special symbol, that is, during the period between the continuous fluctuation patterns, continuous production can be smoothly executed.

Note that, when the aura effect is executed across a plurality of fluctuations, a configuration other than the present control example may be used as long as it can be executed without interrupting a series of aura effects, for example, The indication effect is executed without setting the indication effect period (end timing of the indication effect) in the previous variable display, and the end timing of the indication effect is set based on the timing when the countdown effect is executed in this variation display. It may be configured to.

Returning to FIG. 153, the explanation is continued. When the process of S4403 is completed, next, the display countdown effect command is set (S4404), the precursor setting flag 223t is set to OFF (S4405), and the present process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the effect update process (S3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the effect update process (S3112). This effect update process (S3112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is controlled based on the elapsed time regardless of the change of the special symbol. This is a process for setting the effect.

When the production update process (S3112) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is larger than 0 (S5101). If it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S5101: No), that is, if the elapsed time is not counted, the process related to the measurement of the elapsed time is performed. It skips and moves to the process of S5108.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is larger than 0 (S5101: Yes), the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is decremented by 1 (S5102), and then the value of the elapsed time counter 223k after the subtraction is determined. It is determined whether it is 0 (S5103). Here, when it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is not 0 (1 or more) (S5103: No), the process directly proceeds to S5108.

In the process of S5103, when it is determined that the value of the elapsed time counter 223k is 0 (S5103: Yes), the display extension flag 223i is set to OFF (S5104), and the special symbol is currently changing. It is determined whether there is any (S5105). In the process of S5105, when it is determined that the special symbol is not currently changing (S5105: No), the normal display effect for notifying the display control device 114 that the extended display of the ending display of the jackpot is finished. A command is set (S5106), and the process proceeds to S5107.

On the other hand, in the process of S5105, when it is determined that the special symbol is currently changing (S5105: Yes), the process of S5106 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5107. With this configuration, when the extension effect (effect that extends and displays the ending display of the jackpot) is executed after the jackpot is finished, the time condition (4 seconds elapses) that is one of the end conditions of the extension effect. ) Is established, if the special symbol has not changed, the extension effect is immediately ended, and if the special symbol has changed, the display extension flag 223i is set to OFF, and the next special symbol variation start Sometimes the extension production ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation where the extension effect suddenly ends during the change of the special symbol and confuses the player, and the complicated effect setting process in the case where the extension effect ends during the change of the special symbol. Since it is not necessary to execute it, the processing load can be reduced.

In the process of S5108, a process related to updating of other effects is executed. Specifically, for example, a process regarding an effect based on the time information acquired from the real time clock (RTC) is executed (S5108). After that, this processing ends.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Control Example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 172. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of a command or the detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 155, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute an initialization process when the power is turned on.

The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply device 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this control example, in the boot program, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since this is a memory capable of reading data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

Here, the boot processing (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided by the conventional game machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in the present boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, subsequently, according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs that are being stored are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the end of this boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 155). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 of FIG. 155) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the present boot process is completed.

In this way, by executing the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 155), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all configured by the DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the work storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

Note that in the boot process shown in FIG. 156, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 include all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the present invention is not limited to this. The predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes the boot processing that should be processed subsequent to the processing of S6102. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is thereby started. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. Alternatively, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed after repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S6102.

As a result, even when the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present control example, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 at the time of releasing the system reset is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and thus reduces the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot process time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 155. When the boot process is completed, the initialization process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I/O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, the work RAM 233 is provided with various flags, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included, and the image controller 237 follows the transfer instruction so that the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

When all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, then the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , The start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 170(a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S7702 in FIG. 170A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Accordingly, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 157(b)), the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 157(b)) and the simple display setting process are performed so that the image at power-on is drawn. (See S6309 in FIG. 157(b)) is executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to its slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, like the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or a person related to the hall, when the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and therefore, it is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped.

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to immediately check that the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from being deteriorated.

In the display controller 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. When the player starts the game while the display device 81 is displaying, there is a ball (start prize) in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 140, and the instruction to start the variation effect is mainly given. When it is received from the control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation production period, and a simple variation production is performed. It can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer it. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on also becomes long. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery. Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes the infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157(a), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 157(a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 157(b). FIG. 157(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 125) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 157(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so not the power-on image but the normal effect image is the third symbol. In order to display on the display device 81, the command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination processing (S6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing is analyzed, and the processing according to the command is executed and the display demo command and the demo command are displayed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 millisecond. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when it is determined to start the variation effect, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and the stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 158 to 166.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. The content of is specifically specified. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169.

After the display setting process is executed, next, a task process is executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). The type of the sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and even when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously operated. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect or the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S6305). 125 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 172.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As the counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, out-of-front/rear reach, reach other than out-of-front/reach, complete) The stop type table and the stop type counter corresponding to (off) are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: YES), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 158 to 166, details of the above-described command determination processing (S6302) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 158, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command is processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S6405), the process returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 159(a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the precursor effect flag 233m is set to ON (S6501). Here, when it is determined that the indication effect flag 233m is set to ON (S6501: Yes), that is, when the indication effect is continuously executed from the previous change, the indication effect is executed from the start of the change. In order to do so, the variable display data table corresponding to the indication effect is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S6502), and the indication effect flag 233m is set to OFF (S6503).

Specifically, from the display data table set during the previous change and the time data set in the display data table, the displayed period information for indicating the period displayed during the previous change is displayed. A storage means for temporarily storing the extracted extracted information is provided, and in the processing of S6502, the continuation of the indication effect executed during the previous special figure change is executed in the current special figure change. .. Thereby, even when the aura effect is executed across a plurality of fluctuations, the aura effect can be displayed smoothly.

In this control example, the contents of the precursor effect executed during the previous variation are stored and the continuation of the stored precursor effect is executed in this variation, but other configurations are used. For example, the display data table corresponding to the indication effect is divided into a plurality of effect blocks corresponding to the passage of time, the effect block executed during the previous change is determined, and the previous change It may be configured to execute the effect block set next to the effect block executed inside. Thereby, the management of the precursor effect executed across a plurality of fluctuations can be simplified.

Further, in the present control example, as the precursor effect executed across a plurality of fluctuations, only the precursor effect for two fluctuations can be executed. Therefore, in the processing of S6501, the precursor effect flag 233m is set to ON. If it is determined that this time, the change this time is the end change of the indication effect, so the indication effect flag 233m is set to OFF in the process of S6503. However, for example, the indication effect is 3 special symbols or more If it is configured to be executed across, the counter (for example, a precursor effect counter) that can determine the period (the number of times the special symbol has changed) in which the predictive effect flag 233m is set to ON. And a storage unit (for example, a storage unit for storing the number of effect continuations) that stores how many fluctuations the aura effect is being executed, and the value of the aura effect counter is displayed each time the variation pattern command process is executed. Is determined, and whether the updated value matches the value stored in the effect continuation number storage unit is determined, and when it is determined that the value matches, the precursor effect flag 233m may be set to OFF.

In the processing of S6501, when it is determined that the precursor effect flag 233m is not on (off) (S6501: No), or when the processing of S6503 is finished, next, the fluctuation effect indicated by the display variation pattern command. The variable display data table corresponding to the pattern is determined, and the determined variable display data table is read from the variable effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S6504).

Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation is always made in the main controller 110 for several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command judgment processing is performed. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the processing of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in the present control example, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation actually longer than the set display data table is set. Even if the main control unit 110 has instructed the time-varying change effect, as will be described later, after the change effect according to the display data table buffer 233d ends, the main control unit 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuations in the design.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6504 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6505).

Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6504, time data representing the variation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6506), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S6507). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6508), the fluctuation pattern command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 159(a)), in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6507 is updated, while the display data table buffer 233d is updated by the processing of S6504. From the set variable display data table, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, S6505. The transfer data information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of 1. and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in advance.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h in which the time data is set in the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the present control example, when the precursor effect flag 233m is set to ON (S6501: Yes), the variable display data table corresponding to the precursor effect and the variable display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command are respectively set. Are set in the corresponding display data table buffers, and the display data corresponding to the indication effect is preferentially displayed at the portions where the display data overlap. Specifically, the layer in which the precursor effect is executed and displayed is provided prior to the layer in which the normal variation effect is executed and displayed, and when the display processing is executed for each layer, the precursor is displayed. The contents displayed on the effect layer can be visually recognized by the player.

It should be noted that the configuration corresponding to the indication effect may be displayed with priority over the aspect corresponding to the normal effect. As a method other than the example described above, the display data for the indication effect and the received variation pattern command may be used. The display data for normal effect set based on the above may be discriminated, and only the display data to be visually recognized by the player may be set in the display data table buffer.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 158. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a display variation type command (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described below with reference to FIG. 159(b). FIG. 159(b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front/rear outreach, reach other than front/rear outreach, or completely out) indicated by the display stop type command. Is determined (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 157(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is displayed. The stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. Is set (S6603), and this processing ends.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for identifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is identified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the identified stop The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that the main controller 110 always makes a determination of the start of a change at a distance of several seconds or more, so that no two or more display stop type commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S6602.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the "special symbol" is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit" is displayed, and the player may misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "special big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present control example, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement is set, and in reality, if the “special symbol jackpot”, the complete disengagement stop on the third symbol display device 81. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 158, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display hit related command among the unprocessed commands. This display hit related command is a command that is referred to when the jackpot is won. Specifically, it is a display opening command for indicating the start of the jackpot, a display round number command, and a display ending. It is executed when a command etc. is received.

Here, the details of the hit related command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 160. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit related command processing (S6409). The hit related command processing (S6409) is for executing processing corresponding to the display opening command, the display round number command, and the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

When the hit related command process (S6409) is executed, it is first determined whether or not there is a display opening command (S6701), and if there is a display opening command (S6701: Yes), the opening command process is executed. (S6702), the present process ends. This opening command process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of S6701, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6701: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S6703).

In the processing of S6703, when it is determined that there is a display round number command (S6703: Yes), the round number command processing is executed (S6704), and this processing is ended. This round number command processing (S6704) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 161(b). In the processing of S6703, when it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6703: No), it is determined whether there is a display ending command (S6705), and when there is a display ending command (S6705: (Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6706), and this process ends. This ending command processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 162. In the processing of S6705, when it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S6705: No), this processing ends as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 161(a), the opening command process (S6702) executed in the hit related command process of FIG. 160 will be described. FIG. 161(a) is a flowchart showing the contents of the opening command process. The opening command process is a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the opening effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the processing of S6801 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6804). Then, the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are both set to OFF (S6805), the opening command process is ended, and this process is ended.

By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S6804, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6801, The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S8702. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set opening display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a.

When the opening command process is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereby, the image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the read speed is slow, so that the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is effected. It takes a long time before the image data used for the above is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display round number command indicating the newly started round number is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 in synchronization with the timing at which the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is finished, and thus indicates the first round. When the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting is required from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There is a possibility that time will be generated and the player may feel uncomfortable as to whether or not the movement is stopped.

Further, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is matched with the timing when all the round effects in the third symbol display device 81 (for example, 15 rounds, 10 rounds, 5 rounds, 2 rounds) are finished. Since it is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, if the image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display ending command, the round effect ends. After that, a lot of waiting time occurs until the ending effect is started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable as to whether the operation is stopped or to make the player feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, in the present control example, when the display opening command is received, the transfer of the data required for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and until the variation display of the big hit ends on the third symbol display device 81. The control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is completed. As a result, when the opening effect is finished on the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects on the third symbol display device 81 (for 16 rounds). , Or 2 rounds), the ending effect can be started immediately on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player may feel uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation is stopped, and cause a sense of discomfort. Absent. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

As described above, in the present control example, when it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is the big hit stop type, the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is started from there, In the third symbol display device 81, the transfer of the image data used in the opening effect is controlled to be completed by the time the variable effect that is a big hit ends. As a result, when the variation effect which is a big hit on the third symbol display device 81 is finished, the opening effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is worried whether or not the operation is stopped. Also, it will not make you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

Next, the round number command processing (S6704) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 161(b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the round number processing, first, the round number display data table is read from the round number effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S6902). Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6901, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6904). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are turned off (S6905), the round number command processing is ended, and this processing is ended.

Next, the ending command processing (S6706) will be described with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending command processing (S6706). This ending command processing (S6706) is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing (S6706), first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the displaying ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is used for the ending effect in the data table storage area 233b. It is read from the table storage area (not shown) and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7001). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S7002). Then, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S7001, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S7003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S7004). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S7005), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this ending command process, the ending effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot of the special symbol ends, so that the player recognizes that the jackpot has ended. Can be made.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 158. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display hitting related command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S6410), If there is an image change command (S6410: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the back image change command process (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 163. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing (S6411). The back image change command process (S6411) is to execute a process corresponding to the back image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command processing (S6411), first, the back image change flag is set to ON (S7101). As a result, it is possible to determine the change of the rear image in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7603 in FIG. 171). Then, of the back surface image discrimination flags provided for each of the back surface image types (back surfaces A to C and special back surfaces A to C corresponding to time effects), the back surface corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command. The image discrimination flag is turned on, the rear image discrimination flags corresponding to other rear image types are set to off (S7102), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process (see S7603 of FIG. 171), when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S7101 is turned on, the back image determination flag set by the process of S7102 is changed to Specify the back image type of. If the specified back image type is the back image B or the back image C, the image data corresponding to these back images is not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image data is A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. If the rear-side image type after the change is the rear-side A, all the image data are resident in the resident video RAM 235, so the image transfer is not performed.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back surface A to C and the special back surface A to C corresponding to the time effect is displayed depending on the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, From the back surface image discrimination flag set by the processing in S7102, the back surface image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back surface image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the back surface image range is specified. The RAM type (whether the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) in which the image data corresponding to is stored and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, the player does not receive more than one back image change command within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, two or more backside image change commands are not stored in the command buffer area. However, a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command may be erroneously interpreted as the back image change command. In the process of S7102, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. It is also possible to extract any one back image change command and turn on the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 158. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S6412), and there is an error command. If (S6412: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 163(b). FIG. 163(b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing (S6413). This error command processing (S6413) is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing (S6413), first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred is set to ON (S7201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7202), and the error command The process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7201, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S7202, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the processing of S7202, the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person involved in the hall can correctly understand the occurrence status of the error.

Returning to the description of FIG. 158. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no error command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether there is a continuation value related command (S6414), and if it is determined that there is a continuation value related command (S6414: Yes), the continuation value related command process (S6415) is executed, S6401 and other processes corresponding to unprocessed commands are executed (S6420), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the continuation value related command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the continuation value related command processing (S6415). The continuation value related command processing (S6415) is to execute processing corresponding to the continuation value related command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the continuous value related command processing (S6415), first, the continuous value display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7301), and the total value stored in the total value storage area 233k is calculated. The value (the summed value set when the previous command was received) is read (S7302), and the difference from the summed value indicated by the command received this time is calculated (S7303).

Then, the display data table indicating the attack pattern corresponding to the difference calculated in the process of S7303 is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7304), and the value of the command received this time is stored in the total value storage area 233k. (S7305). The total value storage area 233k is configured to be able to store the total value indicated by the commands received during the period during which the continuous effect is executed, in the order in which the commands are received. Further, the value of the difference calculated in the process of S7303 is also configured to be stored.

Thus, for example, when the received summed value continuously satisfies the predetermined condition (for example, when 7 is continuously added to any summed value), or in the processing of S7303. When the value of the difference is a predetermined number (for example, 300 or more) continuously, a special attack pattern display data table can be set.

After the processing of S7305 is finished, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S7306). Then, based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7301 and S7304, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S7307), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S7308). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S7309), the continuation value related command process ends, and this process ends.

As described above, in the present control example, the voice lamp control device 113 only outputs the command indicating the summed value of the continuation values (HP values), and the summed value set in the previous continuation value related command processing is performed. , And the value of the difference is discriminated on the display control device 114 side, and the display control device 114 executes the display mode (effect mode) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the discrimination result. Running. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 while diversifying the display of the continuous value (HP value) in the continuous effect (battle effect).

In this control example, the voice lamp control device 113 has means for setting a summed value, and the display control device 114 calculates a difference between the summed value set last time and the summed value set this time. And a means for setting the display mode (attack pattern, display of the subtraction number) corresponding to the difference calculated by the difference calculating means, but the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 has a unit for setting a first continuation value (a continuation value selected using the continuation value main selection table 222f) in order to vary the continuation value (HP value). However, all the other means (means for setting the second continuation value (the continuation value selected using the continuation value sub-selection table 222g) for varying the continuation value (HP value), the sum previously set) Difference calculating means for calculating the difference between the value and the sum value set this time, and means for setting the display mode (attack pattern, display of subtraction number) corresponding to the difference calculated by the difference calculating means) Display control device 114 The voice lamp control device 113 may set only the attack pattern among the above-mentioned means.

Returning to the description of FIG. 158. In the processing of S6414, if it is determined that there is no continuation value related command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether there is an expectation effect related command (S6416), and it is determined that there is an expectation effect related command. (S6416: Yes), executes the expectation effect related command process (S6417), and returns to the process of S6401.

Here, the details of the expectation effect related command processing (S6417) will be described with reference to FIG. 165. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the expectation effect related command processing (S6417). The expectation effect related command processing (S6417) is to execute processing corresponding to the expected degree related command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the expectation effect related command processing (S6417), first, the display data table corresponding to the effect indicated by the received expectation effect related command is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7401). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S7401 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7402).

Based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7402, time data representing the variation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S7403), and the pointer 233f is set. It is initialized to 0 (S7404), and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the present control example, in the expectation effect setting process (see S3803 of FIG. 151) set and executed by the voice lamp control device 113, the display mode (see FIG. 102(a)) at the start time of the expectation effect is set. , A display mode (see FIG. 103(a)) that is a performance result (final display mode), and for notifying an expected level display mode that is a notification target in the expected level performance. And the display expected degree target aspect notification command for indicating the display aspect (see FIG. 103(b)) are set including the information indicating the display timing.

Then, in the expectation effect related command processing (S6417 in FIG. 165), the display setting corresponding to each received command is set to be displayed at the display timing corresponding to the display timing information included in each command. Specifically, the display mode (see FIG. 102(a)) at the start point of the expectation effect is displayed corresponding to the timing at which the expectation effect is started, and then the display mode corresponding to the expectation increase effect. (See FIG. 102B) is displayed. After that, if the command indicating the expected degree increase effect this time includes information for notifying the expected degree display mode to be notified, the display mode is displayed corresponding to the display timing information included in the command. Display at timing. After that, the display mode (see FIG. 103A) that is the effect result (final display mode) is displayed.

In addition, when the player is configured to be able to select which of the expected degree display modes to be the target of the expected degree increase effect among the plurality of displayed expected degree display modes, the selection result (correct answer or A command for indicating an incorrect answer) is output from the voice lamp control device 113, and based on the content of the received command, it is determined whether or not to display the final display mode. In other words, if the player's selection result is correct, the information (information for indicating the display mode, information for indicating the display timing) included in the expected display effect command for display is changed to the expected effect related command processing (S6417). If the player's selection result is incorrect, among the information (information for indicating the display mode, information for indicating the display timing) included in the display expectation effect command, The setting information regarding the display of the final display mode is cleared, and the display process is executed so that the final display mode is not displayed.

Returning to FIG. 158, the description will be continued. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no expectation effect related command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether there is a countdown effect related command (S6417). In the process of S6417, when it is determined that there is a countdown effect-related command (S6417: Yes), the countdown effect-related command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 166, the countdown effect related command processing (S6419) will be described. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the contents of the countdown effect related command process (S6419). The countdown effect-related command processing (S6419) is to execute processing corresponding to the countdown effect-related command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the countdown effect related command processing (S6419), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display additional precursory command (S7501), and when it is determined that there is a display additional precursory command (S7501: Yes), that is, the previous variation. When the precursor effect continued from the display is executed, the additional precursor data table corresponding to the effect indicated by the display additional precursor command is set in the display data table buffer (S7502), and the display data table set in S7502 is associated. The transfer data table to be used is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7503).

Based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7503, time data representing the variation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S7504), and the pointer 233f is set. It is initialized to 0 (S7509), and the process returns to the command determination process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7501, when it is determined that there is no display precursory command (S7501: No), the countdown effect data table corresponding to the received display countdown effect command is determined and set in the display data table buffer. (S7506), the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S7506 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7507).

Based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7507, time data representing the variation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S7508), and the pointer 233f is set. It is initialized to 0 (S7509), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 158, the description will be continued. In the process of S6418, if it is determined that there is no countdown effect related command (S6418: No), it is determined whether there is another display command, and if it is determined that there is another display command, each command is Corresponding processing is executed (S6420). Here, as other display commands, for example, a display reserved ball number command that indicates an increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls, or an effect (a so-called continuous notice) targeting a specific fluctuation across a plurality of fluctuations is shown. There are a continuous notice command for display and a display time effect command indicating time effect based on the measurement result by the time measuring means (so-called real-time clock) of the voice lamp control device 113.

When the display reserved ball count command is received, the new reserved ball count flag is set to ON. Then, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received reserved number of balls command for display, and the number of reserved balls displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is updated by updating the number of reserved balls based on the extracted number of reserved balls. Update display. When the display continuous notice command is received, the new continuous notice command flag is set to ON. Then, the distribution between the back of the school of fish and the back of the foam is extracted from the continuous notice command for display. Then, the continuous notice information storage area is updated based on the extracted distribution, and the continuous notice corresponding to the updated contents is displayed.

In the processing of S6401, which is executed again after the processing of each command, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), and the processes of S6402 to S6420 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6420 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 157(b)) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination processing, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. The extraction is performed and the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 159(a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 159(b)), which are the processing corresponding to the respective commands, are executed. , The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 159(a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore, in S6502. In the processing, processing for writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing its contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 167, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7601), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7601: No), When it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S7602 and S7603 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7604. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S7601: YES), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to OFF (S7602). Is turned on (S7603), and if the error occurrence flag is turned on (S7603: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed based on the error determination flag (S7604).

Here, the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 168. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the content of the warning image setting process. When the warning image setting process is executed, the warning image data is expanded based on the error determination flag (S7701), the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7702), and the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, if the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7603: No), the process of S7604 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7605.

In S7605 of FIG. 167, pointer update processing is executed (S7605). Here, details of the pointer update processing (S7605) will be described with reference to FIG. 169. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing (S7605). In this pointer updating process, the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7801). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that the pointer 233f is incremented by one each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7801, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is then End information. Is determined (S7802). As a result, if it is End information (S7782: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d past the address at which the actual data is described.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demo display data table (S7803), and if it is the demo display data table (S7803: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7804), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7805), and this processing ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, and therefore the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7803, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7803: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( (S7806) The present process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, for example, when the variable display data table is set, the address immediately before the End information is written. Since the drawing content of is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the processing of S7802, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S7802: No), this processing is terminated and returns to the display setting processing.

Here, returning to FIG. 167, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7606). Here, the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the process of S7606 together with the warning image previously developed, and the display coordinate position and the display coordinate position are set for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as magnification and rotation angle, are determined.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7607), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7608). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7608: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7608: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S7609).

As a result, if the finalization display flag is off (S7609: No), the finalization display effect has not yet been produced, and since the finalization display effect is the timing, the finalization display of the third symbol is set, so S7610. The process of S7615 is executed. In the processing of S7610, the confirmed display data table is read from the confirmed display effect table storage area of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7610), and then Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By doing so, the contents are cleared (S7611). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7612).

When the processing of S7612 ends, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7613). Then, after setting the fixed display flag indicating that the fixed display effect is being turned on in the ON state (S7614), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7615), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. Further, by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7615 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing, until the predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation was started, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of S7615, and the specification thereof is performed. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7609, if the confirmation display flag is on (S7609: Yes), the processes of S7616 to S7621 are executed to set the display mode of the demonstration effect. In the process of S7616, it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S7616). If the demo display flag is off (S7616: No), the demo display data table is read and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7617), and then Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the contents are cleared (S7618). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7619).

When the processing of S7619 is completed, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7620), the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is in the ON state is set to ON (S7621), and this processing is completed and the V Return to included processing.

As a result, even after a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the final display of the third symbol, the display variation pattern command indicating the next variation effect start or the display opening command is received. If not, the drawing content can be set so that the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 170(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7901). If the simple image display flag 233c is turned on (S7901: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting process is performed. Is executed (S7902), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 170(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7901, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7901: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7903), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7902) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170(b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting processing (S7902).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer image data that has not been transferred is given to the image controller 237 (S8001), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S8001: Yes). ) Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S8002). In this processing of S8002, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237 after the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data, it is determined that the transfer processing is completed. .. When it is determined by the processing in S8002 that the transfer processing has not ended (S8002: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S8002: Yes), the process proceeds to S8003. Also, as a result of the processing in S8001, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S8001: No), the processing proceeds to S8003.

In the process of S8003, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S8003), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S8003: No), the resident target image data is not transferred. A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident target image data for transfer is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S8004), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which resident image data is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then, during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Then, it is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S8003, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S8003: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S8005), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 157(b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 of FIG. 157(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 of FIG. 157(b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 158 to 166) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 167 to 169) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Displays the normal image. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed on the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 171) (see S7901: No in FIG. 170(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose reading speed is slow at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the voice lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 171, the normal image transfer setting process (S7903) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7903).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, with the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer updating process (S7605) of the display setting process (S6303) previously executed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S8101). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S8102), and if it is transfer data information (S8102: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S8103, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S8104), and the process proceeds to step S8105.

In the process of S8102, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S8102: No), the processes of S8103 and S8104 are skipped and the process proceeds to S8105. In the process of S8105, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S8105), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S8105: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S8106).

In the process of S8106, after the transfer instruction of the image data is set to the image controller 237, and when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the process of S8106 that the transfer process is not completed (S8106: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed by the image controller 237, and thus the normal image transfer setting process is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S8106: Yes), the process proceeds to S8107. Further, as a result of the process of S8105, even when the image data transfer instruction is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S8105: No), the process proceeds to S8107.

In the process of S8107, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S8107), and if the transfer start flag is on (S8107: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S8108), the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S8103 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S8113. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S8107: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag 233w is on (S8109). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but is off (S8109: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and thus the normal image transfer setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is turned on (S8109: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag 233w is turned off (S8110), it is provided for each back image type. Of the back image discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S8111). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state, and the transfer destination ( The head address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S8112), and the process proceeds to S8113.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back image A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the processing of S8111, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back surface A, the normal image transfer processing is directly terminated.

In the process of S8113, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S8113). The determination in the process of S8113 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S8113 (S8113: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S8113, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S8113: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S8114). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transfer here). The sub address provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S8114, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S8115), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the sub storage of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

As described above, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command indicates When it is determined that the stop type information to be given is the big hit stop type, the image data used in the big hit performance can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. When the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, if the back image of the back image of the resident video RAM 235 is included in the image data used for the back image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified in accordance with the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 172, details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 125 is generated (S8201). That is, in the process of S8201, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites that form one frame determined in the task process (S6304). A parameter necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing is associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image for one frame, and the sprite order after the rearrangement is set to the detail for each sprite. As the detailed drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 is According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S8202). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting it in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the drawing process, after the process of S8202, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S8203). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the plug-in process (see FIG. 157(b)) is executed, the drawing process is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of 1 frame are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of 1 frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of 1 frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, the display processing of the image for one frame can be continuously performed every 20 milliseconds while the drawing processing of the image for one frame is performed.

As described above, in the first control example, in the third symbol variation display for showing the special symbol lottery result to the player, a specific effect (for example, “PUSH display for operating the frame button 22”). )) as a suggestive effect for notifying the timing of occurrence, a countdown effect that is set based on the timing when the specific effect is set, and a period from the start of the suggestive effect to the start of the countdown effect. It is configured to execute the sign effect set to.

Therefore, as compared with the case where the suggestive effect for notifying the timing at which the specific effect occurs is executed for a predetermined period, the period for executing the suggestive effect (the period for performing the precursor effect) can be freely set. ..

In the first control example, the timing at which the suggestive effect is started and the specific effect that is the target of the suggestive effect are selectable from a plurality of options. With such a configuration, it is possible to variously set the period in which the suggestive effect is executed by various combinations.

Furthermore, it is determined whether or not there is a predetermined period (for example, 15 seconds) between the timing at which the suggestive effect is started and the timing at which the specific effect is executed, and based on the result of the determination, the indication effect or the countdown effect is determined. It is configured to be variable. As a result, the player can play the game while predicting an effect to be executed in the future based on the effect contents to be executed.

In addition, the mode of the indication effect and the countdown effect can be changed based on the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol. Specifically, when the special symbol lottery result is a win, a long period (for example, 7 seconds) is easily set as the period in which the countdown effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while expecting that the variable display this time corresponds to the special symbol that has been won due to the mode of the countdown effect.

In addition, as an aspect of the effect set based on the lottery result of the special symbol, a mode other than the aspect of the first control example may be used. For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit, the suggested effect period is long. The following modes may be set. In this case, a part of the production mode is configured to be variable according to the period in which the suggested production is executed (the suggested production period), and the suggested production period is long for the player and the lottery result of the special symbol is It is only necessary to inform that the correspondence is made in an easy-to-understand manner. For example, the color of the display mode of the character or the like displayed during the suggestive effect is variable according to the length of the elapsed period (blue→yellow→red→rainbow color) Alternatively, the stage index (for example, the degree of expectation) displayed during the suggestive effect may be changed according to the length of the elapsed period.

Moreover, you may set each of several specific production|generation so that a jackpot expectation degree may differ, and may make a jackpot expectation degree different according to the target specific production. In this case, a plurality of points during the variable display period are provided with locations where the specific effect can be executed, and the specific effect that is to be executed at the point that is the target of the suggestive effect among the plurality of points is selected by special symbol lottery. You may comprise so that it may set based on a result. As a result, the countdown effect is started, and even after it is known to the player at which timing (the point during the variable display period) the particular downtime effect is being executed, the special downtime effect is recognized. It is possible to make it difficult to understand which production is executed and entertain the suggestion production to the end.

In addition, in the first control example, an effect that is executed as a precursor effect among the suggested effects is used as an effect mode for indicating the period of the predictive effect (an effect mode that suggests the execution timing of the countdown effect). In this way, in addition to the effect for showing the effect period to the player, for example, the effect mode for instructing the player about the content of the specific effect that is the target of the instructive effect this time, and the variable display this time. In the above, the production mode (informing mode) for informing the player that the countdown production is to be executed may be set.

Further, in the first control example, the start timing of the suggestive effect (start timing of the precursor effect) and the end timing of the suggestive effect (end timing of the countdown effect) are set separately, The suggestion effect can be executed so as to straddle a plurality of variable displays. Accordingly, even for a specific effect set at an initial point (for example, 5 seconds from the start of fluctuation) of the variable display, the start timing of the suggestive effect can be set during the preceding variable display. Thereby, the degree of freedom in setting the suggestive effect can be increased.

In the case of using the above-mentioned technique, based on the contents of the plurality of winning information that is already stored on hold, the suggestive effect may be set so as to straddle the plurality of variable displays, and the variable display of the special symbol is executed. A means is provided to determine the balls that have won during that time (the next winning ball to be changed), and when the remaining fluctuation period is longer than a predetermined period, the suggestion effect is provided so as to straddle multiple fluctuation displays. You may set it. In the latter case, it is difficult to store the reserved memory (when the variation time of the special symbol is short, or when it is difficult for the ball to enter the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 140), the special symbol is Even when the first reserved memory (reserved memory used for the next fluctuation) occurs during the fluctuation, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect across a plurality of fluctuation displays. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the suggested effect and enhance the effect of the effect.

The variation time of the special symbol is generally configured to easily select a long variation time when a big hit is won, and the longer the suggestion production period in which the suggestion production is executed to correspond to this, the larger the jackpot expectation degree is. It is configured to be high. The conventional pachinko machine 10 configured as above has a problem that the jackpot expectation degree for the current variation display is predicted depending on the timing at which the suggestive effect is started. On the other hand, in the first control example, the timing at which the suggestive effect starts and the timing at which the suggestive effect ends are provided at a plurality of points, respectively, and the suggestive effect period cannot be predicted from the timing at which the suggestive effect starts. Is configured. Further, even if the suggestive effect period is the same, the period in which the precursor effect is executed and the period in which the countdown effect is executed are variable. Further, as the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect, any one of the specific effects having different jackpot expectations can be selected.

In the first control example configured in this way, even after the suggestive effect is started, the suggestive effect period of this time, the specific effect to be the target, and further, the period of the predictive effect and the period of the countdown effect. It is possible to prevent the effect from being predicted at an early stage and the effect of the effect from being deteriorated.

In the first control example, a countdown display in which numbers are regularly reduced (for example, every second) is used as the effect mode executed during the countdown effect, but the timing at which the specific effect is executed is determined by the game. It suffices as long as it can be accurately notified to a person, and for example, the area divided into a plurality of areas is regularly (for example, every second) filled and the specific effect is executed after a predetermined period has elapsed May be. In this case, the number of divided areas is a display mode for indicating the period of the countdown effect. Further, other configurations may be used.

In the first control example, as the display data displayed during the countdown effect, display data for a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 10 seconds) is stored in the storage area of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 and executed this time. Based on the period information indicating the period of the countdown effect set for the suggested effect, the display data corresponding to the period is displayed. By having the display data in this way, the storage capacity can be reduced.

In the first control example, the end timing of the suggestive effect (the end timing of the countdown effect) is set based on the start timing of the specific effect set for the target variable effect. It suffices that the end timing of the effect coincides with the start timing of the specific effect. For example, in the case where the specific effect is executed for a certain period (for example, 10 seconds), the setting should be made based on the end timing of the specific effect. You may comprise.

As described above, in the first control example, the end timing of the countdown effect is set based on the execution timing of the specific effect so that the end timing of the countdown effect executed as the suggestion effect matches the start timing of the specific effect. Then, the period (time) in which the countdown effect is executed is calculated back from the set end timing to set the countdown effect period. Thereby, the countdown effect for the predetermined period can be easily set in correspondence with the execution timing of the specific effect.

In the first control example described above, as a period for executing the suggestive effect, a predictive effect period in which the predictive effect is executed and a countdown effect period in which the countdown effect is executed are set in advance before the suggestive effect is executed. However, other methods may be used, for example, the timing at which the suggestive effect starts (timing at which the precursor effect is started) and the timing at which the suggestive effect ends (timing at which the countdown effect ends, that is, A configuration may be used in which only the timing at which the specific effect is started is set in advance, and the timing at which the predictive effect is switched to the countdown effect is set after the suggestive effect is executed.

In this case, for example, the display control may be executed so as to switch from the precursor effect to the countdown effect based on a predetermined operation performed on the frame button 22 during the predictive effect. As a result, the player can eagerly participate in the game in order to quickly execute the countdown effect. Further, based on the lottery result of the special symbol, the period during which the countdown effect can be executed is set in advance, and the countdown effect can be executed at the timing when the predetermined operation is performed on the frame button 22 during the precursor effect. The indication effect may be switched to the countdown effect only at the timing, and the operation effect of operating the frame button 22 during the indication effect may be executed at various timings. With this configuration, the player can enthusiastically participate in the operation effect executed during the sign effect, and the effect effect can be enhanced.

In addition, a pseudo countdown effect (pseudo countdown effect) that does not target a specific effect may be executed during the sign effect. By executing this pseudo countdown effect, it is possible to make the player think that the omen effect has ended, and it is difficult to predict future development of the effect. In this way, the pseudo countdown effect is configured to be easily executed when the jackpot is won, so that the game can be performed while expecting that the executed countdown effect is pseudo. Until the countdown effect (pseudo countdown effect) ends, it is possible to keep an eye on the effect that is being continuously executed.

In the first control example described above, the length of the aura effect period executed as the suggestive effect is determined, and the presentation mode of the aura effect period is set based on the determination result. A configuration in which the length to be executed is not determined may be used, and for example, the presentation mode of the precursory effect may be set based on the timing at which the suggestive effect is executed. In this case, since the length of the precursor effect period is not determined, it is preferable to use, as the effect mode executed as the predictive effect, an effect mode that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player at any timing. It is advisable to use a dynamic display mode that is executed according to a certain rule such as an effect in which a car continues to run at a constant speed on a road.

By using such an effect mode, even if the predictive effect is executed without determining the length of the predictive effect period, it is possible to smoothly switch to the countdown effect without giving the player a feeling of strangeness. Even when such an effect mode is used, as described above, the display mode (for example, color) of a part of the effect mode (the vehicle in the above-described example) depends on the elapsed period of the precursor effect. Of course, it may be configured to be variable.

Further, instead of preliminarily determining all the lengths of the precursor effect periods in which the predictive effect is executed, only the lengths of some periods may be determined. For example, it is possible to divide the first amenity effect period of the first half part and the second amenity effect period of the second half part so as to determine the length of the period in advance only for the second amenity effect period. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the specific precursor effect only during a predetermined period (second predictive effect period) retroactive from the end timing of the predictive effect (start timing of the countdown effect). The production can be switched from the precursor production to the countdown production.

As described above, in the above-described first control example, the gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability, no electric support) as the gaming state (probability change state (high probability, electric support exists), The production (battle production) for indicating that the time saving state (low probability, electric support is provided) is set is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the game state advantageous to the player continues.

Further, the above-mentioned battle effect is composed of an effect (battle reach) that suggests whether or not the game state advantageous to the player ends, and an effect (pre-battle effect) for determining the effect mode of the battle reach. I am configuring. With this configuration, the battle is performed in a period other than when the game state actually advantageous to the player ends (for example, when the game state is determined to shift to the normal state by the special symbol lottery). Since the effect can be continuously executed, the player feels an expectation that the game state advantageous to the player is continuing, and anxiety that makes the player think that the game state advantageous to the player has ended. You can continue playing games while holding them.

Furthermore, during the above-mentioned battle effect, an effect in which the continuation value (HP value) is increased/decreased for suggesting whether or not the gaming state (advantageous state) advantageous to the player is continuously set is executed. .. This continuation value (HP value) is configured to increase or decrease based on the currently set gaming state, the special symbol lottery result, or the remaining period for which the advantageous state is set.

Here, when the increase/decrease pattern of the above-mentioned continuation value (HP value) is increased and the production rich in variations is executed, the currently set gaming state, the special symbol lottery result, or the advantageous state is set. It is necessary to perform complicated management in which the remaining period that is displayed and the displayed continuous value (HP value) are associated with each other. Such management increases the processing load of the pachinko machine 10, and it is required to increase the variation of performance while reducing the processing load.

Therefore, in the first control example, the expected value (HP value) described above is a value that is set based on the currently set gaming state, the special symbol lottery result, or the remaining period when the advantageous state is set. The sum of the (main continuation value (for example, the value of 100s)) and the value set for the purpose of increasing the effect variation (the sub continuation value (for example, the value of the 10s)), It is configured to be displayed as a continuous value (HP value).

In this way, by adding up the value that is actually managed and set and the value that is set for the effect, it is possible to increase the display pattern of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the first control example described above, the display mode (attack pattern) corresponding to the difference amount of the continuous value is displayed. By displaying this display mode, since it is possible to visually notify the player of the degree of increase or decrease of the continuation value, it is possible to execute an easy-to-understand effect.

In the first control example, as the display mode (attack pattern) corresponding to the difference amount of the continuous value, “weak attack” and the large difference amount (attack pattern) are displayed as the display modes corresponding to the small difference amount (for example, the range of 50 to 150). For example, it has “strong attack” as a display mode corresponding to 350 to 550) and “medium attack” as a display mode corresponding to a difference amount (for example, 151 to 349 range) therebetween. When the set display mode (attack pattern) is executed, a different effect is executed for each display mode, and then the continuation value is updated.

That is, the player roughly understands the decrease amount (difference value) of the continuation value (HP) by grasping the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and then, by the updated continuation value, You will be able to understand the numerical values. By displaying in such an order, it is possible to notify the player of information about the game step by step, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

In addition, in the above-described first control example, when setting the above-described display mode (attack pattern) in order to reduce the control load of the effect, it is not the difference value of the combined continuation values (HP) but the main continuation. The display mode (attack pattern) is set based on the difference between the values. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the pattern of the continuous value (continuous value before update, continuous value after update) or difference value used when setting the display mode (attack pattern).

As described above, when the display mode (attack pattern) based on the difference value of the continuous value (HP value) is set based on the difference value of the main continuous value, the continuous value on the display (third symbol) A display mode in which the difference value of the main continuation value and the sub continuation value displayed on the display device 81) does not match the difference value of the main continuation values, and is different from the apparent difference value range. There was a problem that (attack pattern) was set.

In order to solve the above-described problem, in the first control example, when the value of the continuous value (HP) is continuously updated a plurality of times, the difference value between the continuous value (HP) on the display and the main continuous value The display mode (attack pattern) to be set is the same as the difference value of. With this configuration, the above-mentioned problem can be solved.

Further, in the first control example, a main continuation value discriminating means for discriminating the value of the set main continuation value is provided, and based on the discrimination result of the main continuation value discriminating means, the sub continuation value set for the effect is set. The selection tables for selection are different. Specifically, when the value of the main continuation value is a predetermined value (for example, 200) or more, the selection table in which “−20 to +20” is defined as the range selectable as the sub continuation value is referred to, and the predetermined value is set. When it is less than the value (for example, 200), the selection table in which “−30 to 0” is defined as the range selectable as the sub continuation value is referred to.

With this configuration, when the main continuation value is 0, it is possible to prevent the plus value from being selected as the sub continuation value.

In the first control example, as described above, a first effect (pre-battle effect) and a second effect (battle reach) are provided as effects for indicating a period (advantageous period) in which a game state advantageous to the player is set. ) And unit production (battle production). In the first effect, an effect for suggesting the effect mode of the second effect is executed, and in the second effect, an effect for informing the player whether or not the advantageous period is over is executed.

Further, in the first control example, the unit effect described above is repeatedly executed while the advantageous period is set. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the second effect a plurality of times during the advantageous period, so that the player can play the game during the advantageous period while having a sense of tension. ..

In addition, it is possible to prevent a situation in which one unit effect continues for a long period of time by allowing the unit effect to be executed a plurality of times while the advantageous period is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect contents from being delayed.

In the first control example, as a condition for ending one unit effect (condition for executing the second effect), a lottery result of a special symbol is a specific lottery result (an opportunity to end the advantageous period. In addition to the case where the remaining period of the advantageous period becomes 0, the case where the number of times the special symbol changes is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is used. As a result, the second effect is executed even when the advantageous period ends, but the second effect is executed when other conditions are satisfied. Good.

In addition, if the second effect for notifying whether or not the advantageous period is over is executed a plurality of times in a short period of time, the player gets tired of the second effect early, so the first control In the example, the second effect (pseudo second effect) executed for the purpose of effect is suppressed from being executed a plurality of times within a predetermined period. Specifically, the number of variations of the special symbol after the unit effect is executed is counted, and when the counter value is less than the predetermined number of times, the pseudo second effect is not executed. This can prevent the player from getting tired of the second effect early.

In the first control example described above, a plurality of expectation effect modes for suggesting step by step the expected degree that the special symbol being changed is a jackpot is provided and displayed as the expectation effect mode. It is configured such that an expectation degree varying (raising) effect is performed in which the effect mode is changed to an effect mode in which the expectation degree that is a big hit is higher than that effect mode.

Then, at least one of the plurality of expectation effect modes described above is configured so that the display timing is different, and the expectation variable (increasing) effect indicates which expectation effect mode the expectation degree is variable. It is executed in a display mode that is difficult for the player to grasp.

In the first control example configured in this manner, the expectation variable (increasing) effect is executed to notify that the effect aspect of any of the expectation effect aspects is variable (increased). In this state, the player should pay attention to the effect while expecting that the desired expectation effect mode (for example, the expectation effect mode in which the expectation degree that is already a big hit is already set high) is further changed (raised). You can

In addition, in the first control example, the target degree of expectation effect is changed by changing the timing at which the degree of expectation effect (rise) effect is executed. Specifically, it is configured so that the expected degree effect mode displayed after the expected degree variable (raised) effect is executed is targeted. This allows the player to pay attention to the timing at which the expected degree varying (raising) effect is executed.

In addition, in the first control example, the expectation variable (rise) effect is configured such that it is possible to change the effect modes of a plurality of expectation effect modes, and the variable amount that is varied with respect to each expectation effect mode. It is configured to display a variable amount for indicating a value obtained by adding up (steps). As a result, the expectation degree varying (raising) effect is executed, and after it is known that any of the expectation degree effect modes is variable, the player can be aware of the amount by which the expectation effect mode is changed in the current effect. it can.

Furthermore, since the expectation variable (raising) effect is executed, a notification mode for notifying the player of the target for which the expectation is increased in the present effect is displayed, so that the player can set the expected degree effect mode. It can be easily grasped.

In the above-described first control example, a plurality of expectation level effect modes having an effect mode capable of displaying the jackpot expectation level stepwise are provided, and the stages are displayed so that the respective different expectation level effect modes can be displayed. It is configured to predict whether or not the current variation is a big hit by compounding and grasping the display contents of the respective expected degree effect modes.

With such a configuration, it is possible to complicate the manner of suggesting the jackpot expectation and provide the player with enjoyment to predict, but on the other hand, the display content of each expectation effect manner is changed. There is a problem that the processing load for controlling increases. Further, when the effect form that raises the expectation degree is biased, specifically, only one expectation effect effect mode among the plurality of expectation effect effect modes is changed to an effect mode indicating that the jackpot expectation degree is high. If the remaining expectation effect mode is still the effect mode showing that the jackpot expectation degree is low, it causes the player to have an excessive expectation for the jackpot win, resulting in distrust of the effect contents. There was a problem of giving it.

On the other hand, in the first control example, in a plurality of expectation effect modes, it is configured to set the expectation effect mode before being changed by the expectation variable (raising) effect in a plurality of patterns, and a special symbol. It is configured to change (increase) the expectation of the expectation effect mode set by the pattern according to the expectation set based on the lottery result. With this configuration, it is possible to solve the above-mentioned problems.

<Example of production addition of the first control example>
Next, an example of effect addition of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 to 181. In the present additional example, an effect (title giving effect) that progresses based on the operation content of the frame button 22 is added to the above-described first control example. This title giving effect was operated during the period in which the operation effect is generated, the number of times the operation effect that requires the operation of the frame button is generated, the number of times the frame button 22 is operated (the number of valid operations), and the operation effect is not executed. Based on the number of times the frame button 22 is operated (the number of invalid operations), the privilege (title) given to the player is changed.

By using such an effect, not only the player can operate the frame button 22 as instructed, but also it is possible to provide the enjoyment of performing other operations (including non-operation), and the player can early in the game. It is possible to suppress getting tired of.

Furthermore, in this additional example, the appearance frequency of the operation effect of operating the frame button 22 (for example, the effect of dropping the accessory unit (displacement member) 450) is changed based on the privilege (title) given to the player. It is configured to let. As a result, the operation effect frequently appears for the player who is eagerly operating the frame button 22, and the appearance frequency of the operation effect is set for the player who does not want to operate the frame button 22. It is possible to lower it.

In addition, the appearance frequency of the operation effect can be matched to the player's preference based on the operation result of the operation effect executed during the game, as compared with the case of using a technique in which the appearance frequency of the operation effect is selected by the player in advance. Therefore, the operation performed by the player can be reduced.

Here, with reference to FIG. 173 and FIG. 174, the operation effect executed in this additional example will be described. FIG. 173(a) is a schematic diagram showing a conversation effect which is one of the operation effects executed in this additional example, and FIG. 173(b) is an effect when the frame button 22 is operated in the conversation effect. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content.

As shown in FIG. 173(a), in this additional example, the accessory unit (displacement member) 450 is provided so as to cover an upper part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for details, see FIG. 2). ). Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the character "I can talk with the button PUSH" that prompts the user to operate the frame button 22 is displayed. Here, when operating the frame button 22 are displayed characters "Hello" in the main display area Dm as if as shown in FIG. 173 (b), the character object unit 450 is a comment. As described above, in this additional example, the conversation effect that allows the user to have a conversation with the accessory unit 450 is executed. In addition, the accessory unit 450 can be moved to a position other than the position (initial position) shown in FIG. 173(b) (for example, a position lowered so as to cover the central portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81). Therefore, for example, it is possible to provide a discriminating means for discriminating the position of the accessory, and a comment display position setting means for displaying a comment in the display area corresponding to the position of the accessory discriminated by the discriminating means. .. As a result, regardless of the character object position, always the character object unit 450 is able to display the characters of "Hello" in the main display area Dm as if it were a comment.

Further, as the determination means for determining the position of the accessory role, a means for directly detecting the position of the accessory role unit 450 by using a proximity sensor may be used, or a drive motor for driving the accessory role unit 450 or a drive of the drive motor. A means for detecting the driving status (for example, the number of steps) of the transmission means (pulley or the like) for transmitting the force may be provided, and the means position may be determined based on the detection result of the detection means. In the case where 450 is driven based on the operation scenario, a means for determining the accessory position based on the progress of the operation scenario may be used. When using the latter configuration, it is possible to grasp the position of the future character in addition to the position of the character in the future based on the contents of the operation scenario. It can be set in advance. Furthermore, the operation scenario of the accessory unit 450 may be configured to store information regarding the display position of the comment in advance, or a plurality of means described above may be combined.

On the lower right side of the main display area Dm, a level display area Dr1 for showing the current level (setting value) and a title display area Dr2 for showing the current title are displayed. Here, the level (set value) is a value that is added (increased) based on the game history (game period, game result, effect contents, etc.), and in this additional example, “3rd grade” to “hermit”. The levels up to are provided in stages (see FIG. 176(c)), and in FIG. 173(a), "3rd grade", which is the lowest stage, is displayed.

The title is a privilege that is set based on the level (setting value) described above and the operation content of the frame button 22. Although detailed description will be given later, a plurality of systems are set for this title, and one system is set depending on the game content (operation content of the frame button 22). A unique privilege (title) corresponding to each level is set for each system, and "beginner" is displayed in FIG. 173(a).

In FIG. 173(b), based on the operation of the frame button 22 in the state of FIG. 173(a), a comment is displayed from the accessory unit 450 and the level displayed in the level display region Dr1 is increased. "2nd grade" is displayed, and "half-person" is displayed in the title display area Dr2. The comment contents of the accessory unit 450 are variably set according to the level and title, and the higher the level and title, the more advantageous information to the player (for example, the winning expectation level during change and the current game state). The information about the game) is set to be easily displayed. As a result, the player can enthusiastically play the game.

Next, the content of the accessory drive effect, which is one of the operation effects executed in this additional example, will be described with reference to FIG. 174(a). FIG. 174(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory driving effect. As shown in FIG. 174(a), when the accessory driving effect is executed, the text "Press the button to drop the accessory" is displayed in the main display area Dm as an effect to prompt the operation of the frame button 22. At the same time, an image simulating the frame button 22 is displayed.

Further, in the first display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, the character "Chance if dropped" which indicates the detection result of the accessory driving effect is displayed. During the period when this accessory driving effect is being executed (during the operation valid period of the frame button 22), when the frame button 22 is operated and the character object falls to a position covering the main display area Dm, the character is changing. It suggests that there is a high possibility that the special symbol is a big hit. As described above, in the operation effect of operating the frame button 22, by operating the frame button 22, it is possible to quickly recognize that the jackpot has been won, so that the player is motivated. The frame button 22 can be operated.

In this additional example, different privilege (title) is given depending on whether the frame button 22 is motivated to be operated or not, as described above. Therefore, when the operation effect is executed In addition, it is possible to allow the player to select whether or not to operate the frame button 22 eagerly, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Further, in this additional example, different privilege (title) is given according to the title system set as described above, so even if the game is continuously played with one title system, It is structured so that all benefits (titles) cannot be obtained. This makes it difficult to obtain all the benefits (titles) given to the player, and can prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

Further, since the title system is set by the operation content of the frame button, it is configured so that all the privileges (titles) cannot be acquired unless the operation content of the frame button 22 is devised. This makes it difficult to obtain all the benefits (titles) given to the player, and it is possible to provide the player with various effects that are executed based on the operation content of the frame button 22. The staging effect can be enhanced.

Here, as described above, different title systems need to be set in order to obtain various benefits (titles), so the current title system is initialized (the history of the operation contents of the frame button 22 is initialized). However, if all the history based on the games that have been played so far are initialized, there is a risk that the motivation of the player may decrease. ..

Therefore, this additional example has a change operation in which the player can select whether to initialize all the histories or delete the histories to the stage where different title systems can be set. FIG. 174(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen during the changing operation.

As shown in FIG. 174(b), in the main display area Dm, the characters "from the beginning" and a part of the history are displayed as the all erase selection mode Dr3 indicating the selection unit to be selected when initializing all the history. The character "from the middle" is displayed as a partial deletion selection mode Dr4 indicating a selection section to be selected when deleting. Here, when the all erasure selection mode Dr3 is selected, the level (setting value) displayed in the level display area Dr1 and the title displayed in the title display area Dr2 are set to initial values. This all-erasure selection mode Dr3 is mainly selected when erasing operation histories of different players.

On the other hand, when the partial erasure selection mode Dr4 is selected, the display traced back to the stage where a different title system can be set is displayed in the level display area Dr1 and the title display area Dr2. Although a detailed description will be given later, in this control example, when the level (setting value) is low, the same privilege (title) is given to any title system, and the level (setting value) is set. Is higher, one of the plurality of title systems is further divided into a plurality of title systems.

As a result, the contents displayed retroactively when the partial erase selection mode Dr4 is selected can be made different depending on the level (setting value) and title when the partial erase selection mode Dr4 is selected. A title system that is not set unless the partial erase selection mode Dr4 is selected may be provided. As a result, it is necessary not only to increase (increase) the level (set value) but also to subtract (decrease) the level, so that it is possible to provide a more varied game.

As described above, in the first control example, as the effect during the big hit game, when the big hit game is executed a plurality of times within a predetermined period, the big hit effect across the plurality of big hit games. (Continuous jackpot production) is configured to be executed, and according to the contents of the jackpot production executed during the jackpot game, it is configured to suggest to the player the game result after the currently executed jackpot game is over. However, if it is a gaming machine having a special gaming state other than the jackpot game, for example, a gaming machine having a jackpot game in which the privileges that can be given to the player are set smaller than those of the jackpot game, during a predetermined period When the small hit game or the big hit game (hereinafter, referred to as a hit game) is executed a plurality of times, the hit effect (continuous hit effect) across the plurality of hit games is configured to be executed. May be. As described above, in the above-described first control example, with respect to the content described for winning the jackpot, it may be executed for a game result other than the jackpot (for example, a jackpot). The game results include various game results that are conventionally known.

Further, in the first control example, as a game result after the currently executed jackpot game is finished, a configuration is provided that suggests to the player whether or not to win the jackpot again within a predetermined period (reserved storage). However, other game results may be suggested to the player by a hit effect executed during the hit game, for example, the number of winning jackpots (including small jackpots) in the pending storage, or the jackpot winning ( Details of the bonuses (including small hits), number of rounds, game status after winning big hits (including small hits) in the reserved memory (probability change state or time saving status), and multiple game results (big hits, small hits) If it is a target, it may be configured to suggest the type of the game result or the order of execution.

Further, in the first control example, not only the entry information stored at the timing when the jackpot game is executed, but also the content of the jackpot effect is changed based on the entry information newly stored during the jackpot game. It is configured to be able to. With such a configuration, it is possible to refer to more entry information, it is possible to easily execute the continuous jackpot effect, and it is possible to make the player interested in the jackpot effect.

In addition, in this control example, as the big hit continuous effect, the content of the big hit effect can be changed based on the number of stored pieces of entry information at the time when the big hit game is executed. Specifically, based on the number of stored ball entry information at the time when the jackpot game is executed, a plurality of different timings suggesting (notifying) that the jackpot will be won again within a predetermined period (reserved storage) It is configured such that the jackpot effect is executed.

Among them, in the special jackpot production (additional presentation) that can be executed when the number of reserved balls (number of pieces of entry information) of the special symbol is not the upper limit, new entry information is acquired during the jackpot game, and the entry information When the player wins the jackpot, the contents of the jackpot effect can be changed so as not to be noticed by the player.

In the above-mentioned specific jackpot production, the jackpot game executed during one jackpot (a plurality of round games (for example, 15 round games)) is partially notified (for example, five rounds of notification). Since the effect is executed, it is possible to inform the player intelligibly how many rounds of the jackpot game have been executed while the specific jackpot effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the gaming state after the jackpot in advance by the number of rounds set for the jackpot game.

In this control example, the additional display of the big hit game (additional display of the number of rounds) by the additional effect is executed every predetermined round (every five rounds). Then, the length of the inter-round interval period in the predetermined round is set to be longer than the length of the other inter-round interval period. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that fuels whether or not the jackpot is over every predetermined round (every five rounds). In addition, since it is configured such that a predetermined number of times (four rotations) of the special symbol that is executed after the jackpot is finished is executed in a shortened time (0.5 seconds), every predetermined round (every five rounds). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify the interval period and the special symbol variation period between the jackpots.

It should be noted that it is preferable that the variable period of the special symbol for a predetermined period executed after the jackpot is always constant regardless of whether or not the jackpot is won. Specifically, if the lottery result is off, the variation pattern table that selects the variation pattern of the special symbol for four rotations after the jackpot is stipulated to be 0.5 seconds for the entire period, and if the lottery result is a jackpot. It is preferable to specify that the first rotation is changed to 2 seconds, the second rotation is changed to 1.5 seconds, the third rotation is changed to 1 second, and the fourth rotation is changed to 0.5 seconds. As a result, regardless of the result of lottery of special symbols for four rotations after the jackpot ends, a predetermined period (a period until the special symbol changes four times or a period until the jackpot is won) is fixed (2 seconds). be able to. In this case, the interval period for each predetermined round (every 5 rounds) is also configured to match the above-described predetermined period (2 seconds), so that the interval period for each predetermined round (every 5 rounds) and the jackpot It is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify the special symbol variation period.

Further, the first control example, as a jackpot production executed during the jackpot, during the jackpot game (during the round game), the regular jackpot that does not suggest that the jackpot be won again within a predetermined period (in the reserved memory) Has a performance. When this normal jackpot production is executed, the end display mode displayed in the final period during the jackpot game (ending period after the end of the round game) is the predetermined period after the jackpot end (special symbol 4 variation, or, It is displayed continuously for 4 seconds. When the jackpot is won again within a period in which the end display mode is continuously displayed after the jackpot is over, the continuous hit effect is executed in which the jackpot effect is started again via the end display mode.

By configuring in this way, the entrance information corresponding to the special symbol variation executed during the predetermined period after the jackpot game is finished (special symbol 4 variations, or 4 seconds) is obtained after the jackpot game is finished, Even if the obtained entry information is a big hit, the continuous win effect can be executed. In other words, as the execution condition of the continuous jackpot production that indicates that the jackpot is continuously executed, since it is possible to include the incoming ball information acquired after the jackpot is finished, it is possible to increase the proportion of the continuous jackpot performance is executed. , The production effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the first control example, whether or not to execute the continuous jackpot production is determined based on whether or not there is the incoming ball information for winning the jackpot in the pending storage. If there is information on winning a jackpot in the jackpot, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot that is advantageous to the player, and based on the result of the determination, it is determined whether or not to perform a continuous jackpot effect. It may be determined whether or not a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a probability variation state) is set as the gaming state after the jackpot in the reserved storage is executed, and continuous determination is made based on the determination result. You may decide whether to perform a jackpot production. Furthermore, after the jackpot to be executed this time is finished, once the gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player (normal state (low probability state)) is set, the jackpot in the pending storage is given to the player as the gaming state after the jackpot is executed. It may be determined whether or not an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probability variation state) is set, and based on the determination result, whether or not to execute the continuous jackpot effect may be determined.

With this configuration, it is possible to further increase the added value to the player when the continuous jackpot effect is executed, and it is possible for the player to play the game with peace of mind.

Further, as in the second control example described above, in the gaming machine having the configuration of the falling lottery, it is difficult for the player to grasp the gaming state when the jackpot is won, so the falling lottery is performed using the continuous jackpot effect described above. The player may be informed of the lottery result.

Specifically, a means for determining the game state at the time of winning this big jackpot, a means for determining the game state set after the end of this big jackpot, and a falling lottery executed until the next jackpot is won. And a means for determining the lottery result, and whether or not to execute the continuous jackpot effect may be determined based on the determination result of each of the above-described determination means, for example, a game in the case of winning this jackpot The state is a low probability state of the special symbol, that is, the continuous jackpot production is executed only when the game state of the special symbol has fallen by the falling lottery, or the special symbol is high after the end of this jackpot. Probability state is set, until the next jackpot is won, only if it is determined that the game state of the special symbol will shift to a low probability state by the fall lottery, it is configured to execute continuous jackpot production, or fall The game state of special symbols does not shift to a low probability state by lottery, and the continuous jackpot production is executed when the gaming state won this time is also the high probability state of the special symbol even when winning the next jackpot. You may comprise so that it may be comprised.

In this control example, as the winning information used to determine the content of the jackpot production executed during the jackpot game, the winning information at the time when the jackpot game is executed is used, but when the jackpot game is executed As, as long as it is the timing after it is confirmed that the jackpot game is executed, any timing may be used, for example, the timing at which the symbol for showing that the jackpot is won is stopped and displayed, or the jackpot game is started. The timing may be a predetermined timing within a period (opening period) from the start of the big hit game to the execution of the big hit effect. Further, it may be the timing when the variation of the special symbol won in the jackpot is started or a predetermined timing within the period in which the variation is executed.

In addition, in this control example, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability, without electric support), the gaming state (probability change state (high probability, with electric support), time saving state (low probability, with electric support) )), an effect (battle effect) for indicating that the game state is continuing is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the game state advantageous to the player continues.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Additional Example of First Control Example>
Next, configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the additional example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 to 177. FIG. 175(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 175(a), the ROM 222 in this additional example has a part of the contents of the fluctuation pattern table 222a changed from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 114). The difference is that a title system selection table 222aa, a title selection table 222ab, and a character action level selection table 222ac are added. The other configuration is the same as that of the ROM 222 in the first control example.

First, with reference to FIG. 176(a), the contents of the variation pattern table 222a for accessory character movement added in the present addition example will be described. FIG. 176(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern table 222a (for accessory products). As shown in FIG. 176(a), the variation pattern table 222a (for roles) has a role action level (1 to 3) selected by a role action level selection table 222ac, which will be described later, and the extracted variation pattern ( a to z), the accessory operation frequencies (low) to (high) and (none) are defined. With such a configuration, even if the same variation pattern is selected, the accessory action frequency can be varied.

Next, the contents of the title system selection table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. 176(b). FIG. 176(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the title system selection table 222aa. In this title system selection table 222aa, a plurality of title systems (1 to 3) are defined in association with the ratio of the valid operation and the invalid operation of the frame button 22 and the button operation ratio when the operation effect is executed.

FIG. 176(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the title selection table 222ab. This title selection table 222ab defines the current level (setting value) (“3rd grade” to “Senjin”) and the title which is a privilege to be given to the player in association with the title system (1 to 3). There is. The title selected here is displayed in the title display area Dr2 (see FIG. 173(a)).

As shown in FIG. 176(c), while the level (setting value) is low (class 3 to first stage), the same title is set regardless of which title system is set. I cannot grasp the title system that is set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the currently set title system from being grasped immediately after the game is started, and to suppress the operation of changing the title system.

Next, the contents of the accessory motion level selection table 222ac will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 177(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the accessory motion level selection table 222ac. The accessory action level set in the accessory action level selection table 222ac is referred to when the variation pattern table 222a (for accessory) described above with reference to FIG. 176(a) is used.

As shown in FIG. 177(a), the accessory motion level selection table 222ac defines accessory motion levels in association with set values (levels) and title systems, and in particular, in a plurality of title systems. Among them, only in the title system 3 in which the set value can reach "Senjin", the accessory motion level 3 is selectable. In this way, by providing a character action level that is selected only when the level (set value) is raised in the state where a specific title system is set, it is possible to change the character action performed during the variation production. It is possible to give a special feeling and enhance the effect of production.

FIG. 175(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 175(b), the RAM 223 in the present modification is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the above-described first control example (see FIG. 114) in that an effect setting group 223aa is provided. .. Other configurations are the same as the RAM 223 in the first control example.

Here, the contents of the effect setting group 223aa will be described with reference to FIG. 177(b). As shown in FIG. 177(b), in the effect setting group 223aa, the operation effect number counter 223aa1, the valid operation number counter 223aa2, the operation ratio storage area 223aa3, the title system storage area 223aa4, the set value storage area 223aa5, and the invalid operation number. A counter 223aa6, a change flag 223aa7, and an accessory action level storage area 223aa8 are stored.

The operation effect number counter 223aa1 is a counter for counting the number of times the operation effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is executed. In the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 178), when the operation effect counter 223aa1 determines that the operation effect is a change pattern (S3851: Yes in FIG. 178), 1 is added to the frame button input. It is referred to when the button operation ratio is calculated in the monitoring/effect process 2 (see FIG. 179) (S5060 in FIG. 179). Then, in the change process (see FIG. 180), the history is cleared when the history of the operation effect is changed (erased) (see S5103 in FIG. 180).

The valid operation number counter 223aa2 is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the operation effect. In this control example, the value of the valid operation number counter 223aa2 is added for the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the effective period of the operation effect, and the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (FIG. 179), 1 is added when the frame button 22 is pressed during the effective period of the operation effect (see S5054 in FIG. 179), and referred to when calculating the button operation ratio (see S5060 in FIG. 179). Also referred to when calculating the effective operation ratio (see S5061 in FIG. 179). Then, in the change process (see FIG. 180), the history is cleared when the history of the operation effect is changed (erased) (see S5103 in FIG. 180).

In addition, in this additional example, the value of the valid operation number counter 223aa2 is added by the number of times the frame button 22 is operated during the effective period of the operation effect, but, for example, the frame button 22 is repeatedly hit. In the case of an operation effect to be performed, it is determined whether or not the operation conditions such as a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) being pressed, and a success rate (for example, 50%) are satisfied in the case of an operation effect in which the frame button 22 is operated a plurality of times with good timing. However, the value of the valid operation number counter 223aa2 may be incremented by 1 when the determination result satisfies the operation condition. Thereby, the value of the counter can be added fairly regardless of the content of the operation effect to be executed.

Furthermore, in the present additional example, the value of one valid operation number counter 223aa2 is added regardless of the instruction content of the operation effect on the frame button 22 (press, continuous hit, timing press, long press, etc.). However, for example, an effective operation number counter 223aa2 may be provided for each instruction content of the operation effect on the frame button 22, and the value of the corresponding effective operation number counter 223aa2 may be added. With such a configuration, the operation history indicating the operation content of the player to the frame button 22 can be classified more finely, so that the content and frequency of the operation effect can be changed to be more suitable for the player. You can

The operation ratio storage area 223aa3 includes all the operations of the frame buttons 22 based on the value of the valid operation number counter 223aa2 (the value of the valid operation number) and the value of the invalid operation number counter 223aa6 (the value of the invalid operation number) described later. This is an area for storing the ratio of the number of valid operations to the number of times (button operation ratio). In the operation ratio storage area 223aa3, the button operation ratio calculated in S5060 of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (S4007) and the effective operation ratio calculated in S5061 are stored (see S5062).

The title system storage area 223aa4 is an area for storing the title system selected using the above-described title system selection table 222aa.

The set value storage area 223aa5 is an area for storing a game content and a level (set value) set based on a change operation.

The invalid operation number counter 223aa6 is a counter for counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated at a timing other than the operation effective period (the operation effective period of the frame button 22 during the operation effect).

The change flag 223aa7 is a flag that is set to ON when the partial erase selection mode Dr4 is selected by the change operation. When this flag is set to ON, an effect that suggests a method of operating the frame button 22 for setting a different title system is executed for the player.

The character action level storage area 223aa8 is an area for storing the character action level selected using the role action level selection table 222ac described above. The appearance frequency of the character action effect (operation effect) is variably set by the variation pattern table 222a (for character effect) with reference to the character action level stored in the character action level storage area 223aa8.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device in Additional Example of First Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the additional example of the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 181. The same elements as those in the various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. First, the variable display setting process 2 in this additional example will be described with reference to FIG. 178.

FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 2 in this additional example. In the variable display setting process 2 in this additional example, in each process of S3801 to S3810 and S3812 to S3817, the same process as the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) in the first control example is executed.

When the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 178) is executed, the same processes of S3801 to S3810 as the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) in the above-described first control example are executed, and then the current variation pattern. Is a variation pattern having an operation effect (S3851), and if it is determined to be a variation pattern having an operation effect (S3851: Yes), the value of the operation effect number counter 223aa1 is incremented by 1 (S3852). , S3853. On the other hand, in the process of S3851, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not the variation pattern having the operation effect (S3851: No), the process of S3852 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3853.

In the process of S3853, the present variation display mode is determined based on the extracted variation pattern and the accessory motion level (S3851). Specifically, based on the accessory motion level selected based on the accessory motion level selection table 222ac and the extracted fluctuation patterns (a to z), a variation pattern table for character motion (see FIG. 176 ( The character action frequency defined in (a)) is set, and the present variation display mode (variation effect display and presence/absence of an accessory action) is determined. Regarding the contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 among the variable display modes determined here, the variable pattern command for display is set by the process of S3812 and set by various processes of the voice lamp control device 113. Similar to the display command, the display control device 114 is notified, and regarding the contents related to the accessory operation, the command output process (FIG. 139) executed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 139). (See S3102), the accessory operation command to be notified to the device (the other device 228 (see FIG. 4)) that drives and controls the accessory unit 450 is set. When the process of S3853 is finished, the same processes of S3812 to S3817 as in the above-described first control example are executed, and this process is finished.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (S3107) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (S3107).

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (S3107) is executed, it is first determined whether or not it is detected that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5051). Here, when the pressing is not detected (S5051: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (S5051: Yes), then it is determined whether the current time is the effective period of the conversation effect (see FIG. 173) of the operation effects (S5052). When it is determined that the conversation effect is in the valid period (S5052: Yes), a display press command corresponding to the button press is set (S5053), the value of the valid operation number counter is incremented by 1 (S5054), and S5060. Process shifts to.

The display pressing command set in the process of S5053 is configured such that the content of the command is set based on the position of the accessory unit 450, the accessory operation level, and the selected title. Is a display pressing command that sets the comment display position of the conversation effect based on the result of determining the position of the accessory unit 450 and determines the content of the comment displayed based on the accessory operation level and the selected title. Is set. The display pressing command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display pressing command, the third symbol display device 81 displays a comment in the display area corresponding to the position of the character unit 450, so that the character is imparted without giving the player any discomfort. It is possible to display an effect as if having a conversation with the unit 450.

In this control example, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the conversation effective period of the conversation effect, a display pressing command is set and a comment is displayed in the display area corresponding to the position of the accessory unit 450. Although configured, if the accessory unit 450 is configured to be movable to a plurality of positions covering the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the position of the accessory unit 450 and the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured such that the display content displayed on the display screen is discriminated and the timing of executing the conversation effect (comment display) is made different from the timing of pressing the frame button 22 based on the discrimination result. That is, the display area of the comment displayed corresponding to the position of the accessory unit 450, and the main part of the variation effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a display showing a jackpot expectation degree, In the case where it is determined that the display area indicating the symbol to be stopped and the display area) overlap, it is based on the timing when the display areas do not overlap, that is, the position of the accessory unit 450 moves. The comment display area is changed, or the change effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 progresses, and the display area of the main part is changed, so that the display areas of the comments do not overlap each other. The display of may be delayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute both the variation effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the conversation effect that is one of the operation effects, and enhance the effect effect. You can It should be noted that, without using the above-described configuration, the display area of the comment displayed corresponding to the position of the accessory unit 450 and the main part of the variation effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, When it is determined that the display showing the jackpot expectation degree and the display area showing the symbols to be stopped are overlapped, the conversation effect may be stopped.

On the other hand, in the process of S5052, when it is determined that the conversation effect is not in the effective period (S5052: No), it is determined whether the present time is the effective period of the accessory action effect in the operation effects (S5055). If it is determined that it is the effective period of the accessory action effect (S5055: Yes), the display press command corresponding to the button press is set (S5056), and the value of the effective operation counter is incremented by 1 (S5054). , S5060 is performed.

In the processing of S5055, when it is determined that it is not the effective period of the accessory action effect (S5055: No), it is then determined whether it is the change effective period (S5057), and when it is the change effective period (S5057: Yes), the change process is executed (S5058), and then the process proceeds to S5060. The contents of the change process (S5058) will be described later with reference to FIG. 180.

Here, if it is determined in the process of S5057 that it is not the change effective period (S5057: No), the value of the invalid operation number counter 223aa6 is incremented by 1 because the current pressing operation is not in the effective period of the operation effect. (S5059), the process proceeds to S5060.

In the process of S5060, the button operation ratio is calculated based on the value of the operation effect number counter 223aa1 and the value of the valid operation number counter 223aa2 (S5060). Next, the effective operation ratio is calculated based on the value of the valid operation number counter 223aa2 and the value of the invalid operation number counter 223aa6 (S5061), and the calculated button operation ratio and effective operation ratio are stored in the operation ratio storage area 223aa3. (S5062). After that, title setting processing is executed (S5063), and this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the change process (S5058) will be described with reference to FIG. 180. This change process (S5058) is a process executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the valid period of the change operation (see FIG. 174(b)), and various types of information based on the operation content of the player. This is a process for clearing (title system, set value (level), and information regarding button operation ratio referred to when selecting title system, information regarding effective operation ratio).

When the change process (S5058) is executed, first, it is determined whether the operation content this time is all reset (whether all erase selection mode Dr3 is selected) (S5101). When it is determined that all resets have been made (S5101: Yes), all information in the set value storage area 223aa5 is cleared (S5102), and the operation effect number counter 223aa1 and the valid operation number counter 223aa2 are set. All the values of the invalid operation number counter 223aa6 are cleared (S5103), the information in the title system storage area 223aa4 is cleared (S5104), and this processing is ended. As a result, all the information based on the operation content of the player is cleared, the level display area Dr1 displays the initial value "3rd grade", and the title display area Dr2 displays the initial value "starter". (See FIG. 173(a)).

On the other hand, in the process of S5101, if it is determined that the operation is not all reset (S5101: No), it is determined whether the operation content is partially reset (whether the partial erase selection mode Dr4 is selected) (S5105). If it is determined that the partial reset is performed (S5105: Yes), the change flag 223aa7 is set to ON (S5106), the information in the set value storage area 223aa5 is set to the first stage (S5107), and the process proceeds to S5103. .. In the process of S5105, when it is determined that the reset is not performed in part (S5105: No), the present process is terminated.

Next, the title setting process (S5063) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the content of the title setting process (S5063). When this title setting process (S5063) is executed, first, the title system is selected based on the title system selection table 222aa (S5201). Then, the selected title system is stored in the title system storage area 223aa4 (S5202), then the set value is determined based on the value of the operation effect number counter 223aa1 and stored in the set value storage area 223aa5 (S5203).

After that, a display set value command is set (S5204), a title is selected based on the title selection table 222ab (S5205), and a display title command is set (S5206). Next, it is determined whether the change flag 223aa7 is set to ON (S5207), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S5207: Yes), the display operation instruction command is set (S5208), and the change flag is set. 223aa7 is set to OFF (S5209), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5207, when it is determined that the change flag 223aa7 is not on (off) (S5207: No), this process is ended as it is.

As described above, in the above-described additional example, the effect mode (for example, the appearance frequency or effect content) of the operation effect that is an effect for operating the frame button 22 is set to the operation content (operation history of the frame button 22. ) Based on the variable setting. Thereby, as compared with the case where the changing operation for changing the frequency of the operation effect to the frequency desired by the player is executed separately from the game, the desired effect mode is set without causing the player to feel annoyed. be able to.

In the pachinko machine 10 in which the effect mode of the operation effect is changed based on the operation history of the player as described above, in order to be able to set the effect mode of the operation effect suitable for various types of players, Although a plurality of effect modes are prepared, as long as the same operation is repeated for the frame button 22 (for example, when the operation effect is executed, the frame button 22 is always operated more than the necessary amount), However, there is a problem that only the same effect mode is set and various operation effects cannot be provided to the player.

Therefore, in the above-described additional example, different privilege (title) is configured to be given to the player by accumulating the game content, and the type of the privilege (title) is at least the frame button 22 of the player. It is configured to be different according to the operation content (operation history).

With this configuration, various operations are performed on the frame button 22 in order to obtain different benefits (titles). Then, the effect mode of the operation effect is variably set based on the contents of various operations performed on the frame button 22. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with various operation effects that are variably settable based on the operation content (operation history) of the frame button 22.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration in which different benefits (titles) are given by accumulating game contents, set values (for example, levels) are variably set in stages according to the accumulation status of game contents, and set. It is common to use a configuration that gives a privilege (title) corresponding to the set value (level) that has been set, but when the set value (level) reaches the upper limit, obtain more privilege (title). There is a risk that the player's willingness to play may be diminished as a result. Further, if the upper limit of the set value (level) is set high in order to prevent the set value (level) from reaching the upper limit, there is a problem that the storage capacity for the effect increases.

Therefore, in the above-described additional example, one of a plurality of systems (title systems) with different privilege (title) to be granted is set based on the operation content (operation history) on the frame button 22. Thus, the privilege (title) to be given to the player is determined based on the set value (level) and the set system. As a result, it is not possible to obtain all the benefits (titles) by simply accumulating the game content, and thus it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play the game from decreasing.

Furthermore, in the above-described additional example, since the erasing means for erasing the past game content is provided, when setting a system different from the system currently set, the operation content (operation history) executed in the past It is possible to prevent the system from being set based on the. In addition, in this additional example, in order to prevent the system from being set based on the operation content (operation history) executed in the past, the erasing means for erasing the past operation content (operation history) is used. Other configurations may be used, for example, by inputting that a different system is desired to be set (by performing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22), in that case, a predetermined period A new system may not be set until (the operation history period referred to when setting the system) elapses.

Further, in the above-described additional example, as the erasing means, there are an all erasing means for erasing all past game contents and operation contents, and a partial erasing means for erasing a part thereof. The partial erasing means is used when setting a different system from the currently set system, and the past operation content (operation history) referred to when setting the system can be set by different systems. It is configured to erase to a state. As a result, when setting a different system, it is not necessary to restart the game from the beginning, and thus it is possible for the player to set a different system eagerly.

In addition, in this additional example, when the partial erasing unit is operated, a part of the past operation content (operation history) is erased and a process of setting an initial value as a set value (level) is executed. However, by operating the partial erase means, it may be easier to set a system different from the currently set system rather than starting the game from the beginning (rather than operating all erase means), for example, You may make it erase|eliminate only a part of past operation content (operation history) with the setting value (level) continuing. Further, the player may designate a desired system, and a part of past operation content (operation history) may be deleted until the specified system can be set.

Here, even if the player operates the partial erasing means to erase a part of the past operation content (operation history) in order to set a system different from the currently set system, an operation to be executed later If the frame button 22 is not appropriately operated for the effect, a different system is not set, and the player may be dissatisfied. Specifically, if the operation effect is digested in the same operation mode as before after operating the partial erasing means, the same system as the system set before operating the partial erasing means may be set. There is.

Therefore, in the present additional example, guidance operating means is provided for guiding the operation content of the frame button 22 by the player so that a different system is set after operating the partial erasing means. By digesting the operation effect based on the content notified by the guide notification means, it is possible to easily set a different system. In addition, since the guide notification means notifies different operation contents from the conventional operation contents in order to set a different system, the operation effect is produced by digesting the operation effect according to the notification contents by the guide notification means. The content is also variably set. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an operation effect different from that in the past, and enhance the effect.

Note that the content notified to the player by the guide notification means may simply be a content that prompts an operation different from the operation for the operation effect, or a content that specifically indicates the operation content to be executed. In addition to the notification by the guide notification means, a progress notification means may be provided for notifying the player of the progress until the condition for setting a different system is established. As a result, the player can easily understand whether the operation effect is being digested so that a different system is set.

Further, in the system set in the above-mentioned additional example, when the set system and the set value (level) satisfy a predetermined condition, it can be set only when a predetermined erasing means is operated. Lines may be added. By providing such a system, for example, a dedicated system can be set only when the all erasing means is operated while the set value has reached the upper limit, or the set value is one less than the upper limit. In the case of the set value of, the dedicated system may be set only when the partial erasing means is operated.

Also, based on the erasing timing by the erasing means, the settable system may be different, and specifically, when the erasing means is operated during a big hit game or while a specific variation effect is being executed. Only, a special system may be settable. In this case, it is preferable that the above-described specific variation effect is executed only when the variation effect executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol satisfies the predetermined condition.

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to set different systems depending on the timing of operating the erasing means, and it is possible to enthusiastically participate in the game.

In the above-described additional example, the configuration in which the privilege (title) is set in advance corresponding to each set value (level) of each system is used, but other configurations may be used and already obtained. A storage unit for storing the privilege (title) may be provided, and the privilege (title) to be given may be set based on the privilege (title) stored in the storage unit.

In the above-described additional example, as the content (content of the title) of the privilege (title) given to the player, the content that suggests the setting condition of the currently set system is used. With this, by grasping the contents of the acquired privilege (title), it is possible to predict the conditions necessary for setting different systems.

Further, when a predetermined game condition is satisfied, the player may be notified of a condition necessary for setting a desired system, and among the obtainable benefits (titles), the benefit already acquired The player may be notified of the number and ratio of (titles). As a result, the player's motivation to participate can be increased in order to obtain all the benefits (titles).

As described above, based on the operation content (operation history) on the frame button 22, one of a plurality of systems (title system) with different benefits (titles) to be granted is set, When configured to determine the privilege (title) to be given to the player based on the set value (level) and the set system, the system currently set based on the granted privilege (title) There is a problem that the player can easily understand.

On the other hand, in the above-described additional example, the same privilege (title) is given until the set value (level) reaches a predetermined level, whichever system is set. Is configured as follows. By this, until the set value (level) reaches a predetermined stage (if a game is not executed for a certain period after the predetermined system is set), the player can understand which system is set. Can be difficult.

In addition, as the operation content (operation history) to the frame button 22 referred to in the above-described additional example, for example, the operation effect count information for indicating the number of times the operation effect is executed, the frame button for the executed operation effect. 22. Operation execution frequency information for indicating the presence/absence of an operation to 22, operation success frequency information for indicating the number of successful operation effects (the number of times a predetermined operation condition is satisfied), during the period in which the operation effect is not executed (operation Information indicating the operation status of the player with respect to the frame button 22, such as invalid operation count information for indicating the number of times the frame button 22 has been operated (outside the valid period), may be used.

Further, as the content of the operation effect, in addition to the pressing effect of simply pressing the frame button 22 within a predetermined period, a timing operation effect of operating the frame button 22 at a predetermined timing, or the frame button 22 a predetermined number of times or more within a predetermined period. A continuous hit operation effect to be operated and a long press operation effect of continuously pressing the frame button 22 for a predetermined period or more may be provided. In this case, it is preferable to manage the operation content (operation history) on the frame button 22 for each type of operation effect that has been executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to determine in detail whether the player dislikes simply operating the frame button 22 or dislikes a predetermined operation (continuous hit, long press, timing press) on the frame button 22. Will be possible. Therefore, when setting the operation effect corresponding to the operation content (operation history), it is possible to provide the operation effect more suitable for the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unsatisfied.

Further, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 provided with a plurality of operation means, each information may be configured to be manageable for each operation means, or the operation contents for all operation means may be added up and managed. It may be configured. Furthermore, when an operation effect of operating different operation means according to the jackpot expectation degree is executed, information indicating the number of times the operation effect is executed and the number of times the operation means is operated is managed in association with the jackpot expectation degree. Alternatively, the operation content (operation history) may be managed only for the operation effect that is executed when the jackpot is won.

In the above-described additional example, it is referred to when determining the mode (execution frequency, effect mode, etc.) of the operation effect and the privilege (title) to be given, based on the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22) for the operation effect. The system and the set value (level) are configured to be set. However, based on the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22), other than the mode of operation effect (execution frequency, effect mode, etc.) Alternatively, only one of the system and the set value (level) described above may be set.

In the above-described additional example, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player, and it is determined that the operation means has been operated by the player's pressing operation, but other configurations are used. Alternatively, a lever-shaped operation means capable of determining that the player has operated by tilting left or right or front and back, or a touch capable of determining that the player has operated due to contact or proximity A sensor type operation means, a wireless type operation means capable of discriminating the operation by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used, or a plurality of the operation means described above may be provided.

As in the above-described additional example, when a configuration in which the mode of the operation effect is changed based on the operation content (operation history) of the player or a predetermined privilege (title) is used is used, another day It is preferable that the game can be played in a state in which the operation contents (operation history) of the game performed on are continued. Specifically, by performing a predetermined operation (end operation) when ending the game, The information related to the game contents and the operation contents is configured so that the player can acquire it (password issuance process), and the output information related to the acquired information is input to the pachinko machine 10 to continue from the acquired information. It is good to be configured so that a game in a state can be played.

<Regarding the second control example>
Next, a second control example of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 188. In the first control example described above, the gaming machine in which the probability variation state continues until the next jackpot is won when the jackpot of the special symbol is won and the probability variation state is set after the jackpot is finished.

On the other hand, in the second control example, apart from the jackpot lottery for determining whether or not the special symbol is hit, the probability state (that is, a high-probability state with a high jackpot probability) to the normal state (that is, a low-probability state with a low jackpot probability) A game machine that is executed each time a condition for determining whether or not a special symbol is won is performed will be described. In this way, in the gaming machine having the function of the lottery, even if the probability change state (high probability state) is set, the period for which the high probability state is surely continued is not set, so the variation of the special symbol is executed. It is possible to give the player a sense of tension every time.

Further, in the second control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, when the probability variation state is set, the high probability state that the jackpot probability is high probability, and the time saving state in which the electric auditor product 140a is easily opened. Even if you win the falling lottery and fall from the high-probability state to the low-probability state, the special symbol changes 100 times after the jackpot. Until it reaches)) is configured to set a time saving state. As a result, even if the player wins the falling lottery immediately after the jackpot is over (for example, 3 rotations), the time saving state is set for the predetermined period (100 rotations), and therefore, the falling lottery is won depending on the operation state of the electric accessory 140a. It is possible to prevent the player from being aware of this.

Also, as will be described later in detail, the falling lottery is configured to be executed before the jackpot lottery for special symbols, and the jackpot lottery for special symbols when winning the falling lottery is executed as a low probability state. To be done. In other words, if you win the falling lottery in a state where the above-mentioned predetermined period (for example, after the jackpot is over, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times), when the special symbol fluctuation is started, it is in a normal state as a game state. (Low probability state and non-time saving state) is set.

In this case, by using the variation time of the special symbol that was won in the falling lottery, even if an effect that suggests to the player whether or not it was won in the falling lottery is executed, it is possible to fall just by looking at the operation status of the electric accessory 140a. There is a problem that it is possible to easily determine whether or not the lottery is successful. Therefore, in the second control example, when the jackpot lottery is won before the falling lottery in a state where the predetermined period described above (for example, after the jackpot is over, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times), It is configured to shift the game state to the normal state before the fluctuation of the symbol is started.

With such a configuration, the operation content of the electric accessory 140a suddenly becomes the operation content in the non-time saving state in a state where the predetermined period (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the jackpot is 100 times) is exceeded. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the player has won the falling lottery or the jackpot lottery, and to give the player a sense of expectation until the change of the special symbol ends. it can.

Further, in the second control example, by using the continuous effect described in the first control example described above, it is possible to set an effect mode capable of suggesting the win/fail situation of the falling lottery to the player. With such a configuration, the player pays more attention to the effect to be executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Electrical configuration in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 184. In the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 are partially changed from those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, and in the voice lamp control device 113. The difference is that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 182(a) is a block diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 182(a), the ROM 202 in the present control example has a point in which a falling lottery table 202ba and a falling state transition table 202bb are added to the ROM 202 in the first control example, and the first hit type selection table 202c. (Refer to FIG. 107) In the game state after the jackpot, the content that was defined as "probable variation time shortened next time" is different in that it was defined as "probable variation until falling lottery winning, falling lottery winning or shortening up to 100 times" , And other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The falling lottery table 202ba is a table that is referred to when performing a determination (falling lottery) as to whether or not to fall from the probability changing state to the normal state in the probability variation state of the special symbol, and a random number value determined to fall ( The counter value) is stored. In the probability change state of the special symbol, every time the special symbol lottery is executed, the falling lottery table 202ba is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol is to fall into the normal state. Here, the details of the falling lottery table 202ba will be described with reference to FIG. 182(b).

FIG. 182(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the falling lottery table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 182(b), a random number value (counter value) determined to fall in the fall lottery is stored. Specifically, in the probability change state of the special symbol (high probability state), two random number values of "100, 101" (counter value) as the determination value corresponding to the fall to the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol) ) Is specified. In the probability change state of the special symbol, when performing the lottery of the special symbol, the value of the falling lottery counter (not shown) and the random number value (counter value) corresponding to the falling defined in the falling lottery table 202ba are compared. , If the values match, it falls to the normal state. The falling lottery counter (not shown) is composed of a loop counter that is regularly updated (for example, every time the main process (see FIG. 136) is executed) in the range of “0 to 299”. Of the 300 random number values (counter values) that the falling lottery counter can take, two random numbers that are determined to be falling are defined. Therefore, the probability of being determined to be falling in one falling lottery is 1/150. Is. In addition, the random number value (the value of the first random number counter C1) determined to be a big hit in the probability changing state is five (5 to 9) (see FIG. 106(a)), and is a big hit during the probability changing state. Since the probability is 1/48, the probability of being a big hit is set to be higher than the probability of being determined to be a fall in the falling lottery during the probability change state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect to be a big hit a plurality of times before falling into the normal state once the state shifts to the probability changing state, so that the player's interest in the game during the probability changing state can be improved. it can.

The falling state transition table 202bb is a state transition table that is referred to when the falling lottery is won in the probability changing state. The description of the same elements as those of the state transition table 202f described in the first control example will be omitted.

FIG. 182(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the falling state transition table 202bb. As shown in FIG. 182(c), the falling state transition table 202bb stores a falling state transition 1 table 202bb1 and a falling state transition 2 table 202bb2. Here, the contents of the falling state transition 1 table 202bb1 will be described with reference to FIG. 182(d).

FIG. 182(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the falling state transition 1 table 202bb1. This falling state transition 1 table 202bb1 is different from the state transition 1 table 202f1 described in the first control example in that a state status when a falling lottery is won is added to each state status. Are the same.

Specifically, if the status status is “ST2” and the specified number of times counter is greater than 0 (maximum 100), if the winning of the falling lottery is won, the status status is set to ST3 (with low accuracy time saving). The value of the frequency counter continues as it is. Further, when the status status is “ST2” and the specified number of times counter is 0, if the falling lottery is won, the status status is set to ST1 (no low accuracy time saving).

In other words, even if the value of the prescribed number counter is set to 100 and the falling lottery is won before the value of the prescribed number counter is reduced to 0, it is possible to save time until the value of the expected number counter is reduced to 0. State is given.

Next, the falling state transition 2 table 202bb2 will be described with reference to FIG. 182(e). FIG. 182(e) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the falling state transition 2 table 202bb2. This falling state transition 2 table 202bb2 is different from the state transition 2 table 202f2 described in the first control example in that a state status when a falling lottery is won is added to each state status, and other than that. Are the same.

Specifically, when the status status is "ST2a" and the specified number of times counter is larger than 0 (maximum 4), if the winning of the falling lottery is selected, the status status is set to ST3a (special with low accuracy time saving), The value of the specified number of times continues. If the status status is "ST2" and the specified number of counters is greater than 0 (maximum 96), if you win the falling lottery, the status status will be set to ST3 (with low accuracy time), and the value of the specified number of times counter will be set. Continues as is. Further, when the status status is “ST2” and the specified number of times counter is 0, if the falling lottery is won, the status status is set to ST1 (no low accuracy time saving).

In other words, even if the value of the prescribed number counter is set to 100 and the falling lottery is won before the value of the prescribed number counter is reduced to 0, it is possible to save time until the value of the expected number counter is reduced to 0. State is given.

FIG. 183(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 183(a), the ROM 222 in the present control example is different from the ROM 222 in the first control example in that a continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222e is provided instead of the continuous effect mode selection table 222e, and a final mode selection. The difference is that a final mode selection 3 table 222h is provided instead of the table 222h, and other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 184(a). FIG. 184(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222e. This continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222e is associated with the value of the remaining period (remaining fluctuation count) stored in the remaining period storage area 223bb, with respect to the continuous effect mode selection table 222e of the above-described first control example. The difference is that the correspondence of the continuous effect mode is selected. Also, if there is prize information that indicates a jackpot winning in the hold at the time of falling winning, it is a special state that immediately after winning the falling lottery, the jackpot is immediately won (big hit in low probability state), so regardless of the remaining period Instead, it is possible to select the special mode B and give the player a bonus effect.

Next, the contents of the final mode selection 3 table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. 184(b). FIG. 184(b). It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the final aspect selection 3 table 222h. The final mode selection 3 table 222h is different from the final mode selection table 222h used in the above-described first control example in that the final mode is changed according to the setting state of the falling flag 222ba, and other The points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 184(b), even if the result of the win/no win determination is out of place, if there is winning information indicating a jackpot win in the hold, it can be suggested in the final mode this time.

Returning to FIG. 183(b), the description is continued. FIG. 183(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 183(b), the RAM 223 in the second control example is different from the RAM 223 in the first control example in that a fall flag 223ba and a remaining period storage area 223bb are provided, and the other points are the same. is there. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The falling flag 223ba is a flag for indicating that the falling lottery has been won, and is set to ON when the state command indicating that the falling lottery has been won is received from the main control device 110.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Main Controller 110 in Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 185, a control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the second control example will be described. In this control example, in place of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 128) of the first control example described above, the special symbol variation start process 3 (S213) is used, and other points are the same. .. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special fluctuation start process 3 (S213) is executed, first, the processes of S301 and S302 are executed similarly to the special fluctuation start process of the first control example (see FIG. 128), and then the value of the falling lottery counter , The random number value (counter value) corresponding to the fall defined in the fall lottery table 202ba is compared (S351), and whether the value of the fall lottery counter matches the random number value corresponding to the fall (the lottery result corresponding to the fall Is determined) (S352).

In the process of S352, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall has been obtained (S352: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF to cause the game state to fall to the normal state (S353), and to fall ( A state command for notifying the voice lamp controller 113 that the gaming state has been changed to the normal state is set (S354).

Then, similarly to the special variation start process (see FIG. 128) of the first control example, after executing the processes of S303 to S307, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of this time is won after the short-term period (S355). Here, in the case of winning after the time saving period (S355: Yes), the time saving intermediate counter 203h is reset (S356), and thereafter, as in the special variation start process of the first control example (see FIG. 128), S310 and S311. The process is executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in the second control example, when the advantageous state (probability change state) advantageous to the player is set and the variation start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol lottery (big hit) Before the (lottery) is executed, a falling lottery is performed to determine whether or not the game state is shifted from the advantageous state to the normal state (a game state that is more disadvantageous than the advantageous state).

Further, in the present control example, when the electric accessory 140a is easily opened (probably changed state or time-saving state (hereinafter, referred to as high probability state of ordinary symbol)), when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, It is configured to shift the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state before starting the fluctuation of the special symbol of interest.

According to the control process of the main controller 110 in the second control example described above, there are two ending conditions for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol. Specifically, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the time saving state has reached a predetermined number (the number of time saving given to the set state) as the first ending condition, and is changed as a game state. When the state is set, winning the falling lottery is the second end condition, and when both of the above two end conditions are satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured to end. .. In addition, regardless of whether or not the above-described two ending conditions are met, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the ending condition of the time saving condition is met.

In other words, for example, if you win the jackpot that the probability state (next time) is set as the game state after the jackpot is over, and 100 times are saved, the special symbol has changed 100 times. It is a condition, and winning the falling lottery is the second ending condition described above. Specifically, in the above example, if you win the falling lottery at the 10th rotation of the special symbol variation after the jackpot, the second end condition is satisfied at that time, but the first end condition is Since it is not established, the first finish condition is satisfied (the special symbol is changed 100 times) (until the two finish conditions are both satisfied), the high probability state of the normal symbol is continued. Then, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times, the two ending conditions are both satisfied, and the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state.

On the other hand, in the state where the number of special symbol fluctuations after the jackpot has exceeded 100 times (the first ending condition is satisfied), the falling lottery is not won (the second ending condition is satisfied). If there is no), the high probability state of ordinary symbols will continue until you win the fall lottery. Then, when the falling lottery is won (when the second ending condition is satisfied), the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state.

In this way, by providing a plurality of conditions (two) necessary for shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state, it is possible to diversify the state transition timing of the normal symbol. In addition, if only the second end condition described above is not satisfied (in the above example, if the high probability state of the normal symbol is set in a state where the number of special symbol fluctuations exceeds 100 times) ), because it becomes difficult for the player to know at what timing the normal symbol is transferred to the low probability state (whether to win the falling lottery), the normal symbol is high probability state for the player as long as possible You can play while expecting to become.

In the second control example, as one of the conditions for shifting the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol to the low probability state (normal state), the special symbol variation frequency of 100 times is set. However, a plurality of times may be set according to the jackpot type, for example, a plurality of times may be set stepwise such as “1 time”, “25 times”, and “50 times”. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a plurality of timings at which the high-probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol ends together with whether or not the falling lottery is won. Specifically, before the number of special symbol fluctuations after the jackpot has reached a predetermined number (for example, 25, 50, 100 times), if you have won the falling lottery, the number of special symbol fluctuations is a predetermined number ( For example, 1,25,50,100 times), when the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol ends, for example, 25 times is set as the number of special symbol fluctuations after the jackpot is ended, When the number of special symbol fluctuations exceeds 25 times, the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol ends immediately when the falling lottery is won.

Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing when the high-probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol ends.

Furthermore, in the second control example, the number of times of variation of the special symbol is used as one of the conditions for ending the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal symbol, but other ending conditions may be provided, For example, the lottery result of the special symbol is a lottery result (so-called, small hit winning) in which a game for opening the variable prize device 65 for a short period of time is executed although it is out (the number of times the variable prize device 65 has operated). Or, the number of times the special symbol changes is measured separately for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, and the number of variations of the special symbol 1 reaches 10 times, or the total number of variations of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 reaches 100 times. What has been done may be set as the end condition.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Second Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 186 and 187, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In the present control example, the command determination process 3 (see FIG. 186) is executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 140), and the command determination process 3 (see FIG. 186) is different from the first control example described above. The difference is that a state determination process (see FIG. 187) is added as a sub process, and the other parts are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 186. In the command determination process 3, the processes of S3201 to S3214 are executed similarly to the command determination process (see FIG. 140) in the first control example described above.

When the process of S3214 ends, next, the state determination process (S3251) is executed, then the process of S3215 is executed, and this process ends. Here, the details of the state determination process (S3251) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 187. In this state determination process (S3251), various processes on the side of the voice lamp control device 113 when the falling lottery is won are executed.

When the state determination process (S3251) is executed, it is first determined whether a command indicating a fall has been received (S3252). The command indicating this falling is set (see S354 of FIG. 185) when the falling lottery is won by the special symbol variation start process 3 (see FIG. 185) of the main controller 110 (S352: Yes of FIG. 185). When the command indicating the fall has not been received in the process of S3252 (S3252: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the command indicating the fall is received (S3252: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is during the short-term period (S3253). If it is determined that the time saving period is in progress (S3253: Yes), the fall flag 223ba is set to ON (S3254), and the remaining time saving number is calculated (S3255). Then, the calculated remaining short time count is stored in the remaining period storage area 223bb (S3256).

Next, it is determined whether or not there is winning information for the jackpot in the hold (S3257), and if it is determined (S3257: Yes), the special condition satisfaction information is stored in the remaining period storage area 223bb (S3258). When the special condition satisfaction information is stored in the remaining period storage area 223bb, the special mode B is selected when the continuous effect mode is set using the continuous effect mode selection 3 table 222e (see FIG. 184).

After finishing the process of S3258, next, it is determined whether or not a command indicating that the game state is the normal state is received (S3260), and when it is determined that the command indicating the normal state is received (S3260), the player falls. It is determined whether the flag 223ba is set to ON (S3261). In the process of S3261, when it is determined that the fall flag 223ba is set to ON (S3261: Yes), that is, it is the timing when the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state in a state where the fall lottery is won. If determined, the fall flag 223ba is set to OFF (S3262), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3260, when it is determined that the command indicating the normal state has not been received (S3260: No), or in the process of S3261 the fall flag 223ba is not set to ON (set to OFF). ) (S3261: No), the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the second control example, apart from the jackpot lottery for determining whether or not the special symbol is hit, the probability change state (that is, the high-probability state with a high jackpot probability) to the low-probability state with a low jackpot probability. And a transition lottery to make a transition (fall) (hereinafter referred to as a fall lottery). A game machine that is executed each time a condition for determining whether or not a special symbol is true is satisfied will be described. In this way, in the gaming machine having the function of the lottery, even if the probability change state (high probability state) is set, the period for which the high probability state is surely continued is not set, so the variation of the special symbol is executed. It is possible to give the player a sense of tension every time.

Further, in the second control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, when the probability variation state is set, the high probability state that the jackpot probability is high probability, and the time saving state in which the electric auditor product 140a is easily opened. And is configured to be set, for example, even if the winning lottery is won and the high-probability state falls to the low-probability state, a predetermined period (for example, after the jackpot ends, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times Until it reaches)) is configured to set a time saving state. As a result, even if the player wins the falling lottery immediately after the jackpot is over (for example, three rotations), the time saving state is set for the predetermined period. Therefore, the player who wins the falling lottery depending on the operation state of the electric accessory 140a is likely to win. It is possible to prevent the user from being perceived.

Also, as will be described later in detail, the falling lottery is configured to be executed before the jackpot lottery for special symbols, and the jackpot lottery for special symbols when winning the falling lottery is executed as a low probability state. To be done. In other words, if you win the falling lottery in a state where the above-mentioned predetermined period (for example, after the jackpot is over, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times), when the special symbol fluctuation is started, it is in a normal state as a game state. (Low probability state and non-time saving state) is set.

In this case, by using the variation time of the special symbol that was won in the falling lottery, even if an effect that suggests to the player whether or not it was won in the falling lottery is executed, it is possible to fall just by looking at the operation status of the electric accessory 140a. There is a problem that it is possible to easily determine whether or not the lottery is successful. Therefore, in the second control example, when the jackpot lottery is won before the falling lottery in a state where the predetermined period described above (for example, after the jackpot is over, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 100 times), It is configured to shift the game state to the normal state before the fluctuation of the symbol is started.

With such a configuration, the operation content of the electric accessory 140a suddenly becomes the operation content in the non-time saving state in a state where the predetermined period (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the jackpot is 100 times) is exceeded. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the player has won the falling lottery or the jackpot lottery, and to give the player a sense of expectation until the change of the special symbol ends. it can.

In addition, in the second control example, it is possible to set an effect mode capable of suggesting to the player whether or not the falling lottery is successful by using the above-described continuous effect. With such a configuration, the player pays more attention to the effect to be executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the above-described second control example, when the falling lottery is won during the probability change state and the falling timing is during the shortened period, the fluctuation pattern table continuously used during the shortened period after the falling is set. It is difficult for the player to understand whether or not the player has won the falling lottery by being configured to select the variation pattern, but other configurations may be used, for example, as shown in FIG. 188. Alternatively, another example may be used in which a variation pattern is selected by using a special variation pattern table when the falling lottery is won.

Here, with reference to FIG. 188, the contents of the above-described another example will be described. FIG. 188(a) is a block diagram schematically showing a variation pattern selection table 202d provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 when the above-mentioned another example is used. As shown in FIG. 188(a), in the above-described another example, the post-fall variation pattern table 202d5 is added.

The contents of the post-fall variation pattern table 202d5 will be described with reference to FIG. 188(b). FIG. 188(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the post-fall variation pattern table 202d5. As shown in FIG. 188(b), the post-fall variation pattern table 202d5 is a variation pattern table used for four rotations of the special symbol after winning the fall lottery during the short time period. In the post-falling variation pattern table 202d5, the variation pattern of 60 seconds is easily selected even if the variation pattern is lost. Therefore, immediately after winning the falling lottery, the battle reach is likely to occur. As a result, each time a battle reach occurs, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect while giving a sense of tension.

In this case, it may be configured to notify the player at a predetermined ratio of the effect of notifying that the player has not won the fall lottery, depending on the effect mode of the battle reach. Specifically, depending on the opponent (opposite character) of the battle reach that is selected, it may be possible to indicate whether or not the fall lottery is won, or depending on the effect (attack pattern) executed during the battle reach, the fall lottery The presence or absence of the winning may be suggested, or the presence or absence of the winning of the falling lottery may be suggested based on the result of the battle reach (the value of the remaining HP at the time of the draw battle reach). As a result, in addition to whether or not the jackpot is won as the end of the battle reach, whether or not the falling lottery is won is also taken into consideration, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

Furthermore, when the big hit is won during the period when the variation pattern table after falling is used, it is preferable that a special effect mode is executed as a special win. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the big hit has been won in the low probability state immediately after winning the falling lottery by seeing the effect mode executed as the special win. In this case, the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the special hit may be a variation time that cannot be set in other variation pattern tables. As a result, the player can be informed of the immediate hit after the fall due to an uncomfortable feeling due to the difference in the varying time.

<Explanation of another example of the suggestive effect described in the first control example>
Next, another example of the suggestive effect described in the above-described first control example will be described. In the above-described first control example, the effect mode of the suggestive effect including the precursor effect and the countdown effect is set in the variation display setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 147) executed at the timing when the special figure variation is started. The configuration set in the countdown effect setting process (S3810 in FIG. 152), which is a part of the process, is used. On the other hand, in this another example, in the countdown effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 189) executed at the timing when the special figure variation starts, only the start timing of the suggestive effect (the start timing of the precursor effect) is set, It is configured to set the specific effect that is the target of the current suggested effect based on the operation on the frame button 22 performed during the precursor effect.

With this configuration, the start timing of the precursor effect that triggers the start of the suggestive effect is set to the start timing of the special figure variation, and while the predictive effect is being executed (while the suggestive effect is being executed). In addition, it is possible to set a specific effect as a target of the suggestive effect. Therefore, as compared with the case where the suggestive effect is executed for the predetermined specific effect, the effect mode of the suggestive effect can be freely set, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, similar to the above-described first control example, as suggestive effects, a predictive effect that roughly notifies the timing at which the specific effect is executed, and a countdown effect that specifically notifies the timing at which the specific effect is executed. Since it is configured to be executable, even if the specific effect is set after the suggestive effect is executed (during the precursor effect is being executed), the suggestive effect can be executed without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

<Regarding Control Processing Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Another Example of Suggested Rendering>
Next, with reference to FIG. 189 and FIG. 190, the control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in this another example will be described. In this another example, in contrast to the above-described first control example, the countdown effect setting process 3 (FIG. 189) is used instead of the countdown setting process (see FIG. 152), and the frame button input monitoring/effect process (FIG. The difference is that the processing content executed in S3107 of 139 is changed to the processing content of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (see FIG. 190). The other elements are the same as those in the above-described first control example, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 189, the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810) executed in this another example will be described. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the content of the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810). As shown in FIG. 189, when the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810) is executed, the same processes of S4301 to S4305 as in the above-described first control example are executed, and thereafter, the current variation pattern is set. Based on the variation time and the start timing of the suggestive effect (start timing of the predictive effect), the effect mode of the predictive effect is set (S4351), the display predictive effect start command for display is set (S4352), and the processing is ended. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the precursor setting flag 223t is turned on in the process of S4301 (S4301: Yes), the multiple variation effect setting process is executed similarly to the above-described first control example (S4321), and then this process is executed. finish.

As described above, in this additional example, in the countdown effect setting process 3 (S3810) executed in the variable display setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 147) executed when the special symbol starts changing, The start timing of the precursor effect, which is the start opportunity, is set. Thereby, the precursor effect is set without setting the specific effect that is the target of the suggestive effect.

In addition, in this additional example, it is configured to change the start timing of the suggestive effect (start timing of the predictive effect) depending on whether or not the special figure fluctuation of this time is a fluctuation pattern that is won in the jackpot. The start timing of the suggestive effect (start timing of the predictive effect) may be set using other conditions. For example, the start timing of the suggestive effect (start timing of the predictive effect) may be set according to the length of the variation pattern to be executed. ) May be set, or a plurality of start timings of suggestive effects (start timings of predictive effects) that can be set for one variation pattern are provided, and start timings of the plurality of suggestive effects (start timings of predictive effects). It is also possible to provide a lottery means for performing a lottery for determining the start timing (start timing of the precursor effect) of one suggestive effect from among the above, and set it based on the result of the lottery. Further, the start timing of the suggestive effect (the start timing of the predictive effect) may be set based on the operation content of the player operating the frame button 22 before the change of the special symbol this time is started.

Further, the start timing of the suggestive effect (start timing of the predictive effect) may be changed based on the currently set game state. Specifically, for example, when the currently set gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a probability variation state), a sign A( It may be configured to set a point where the period from the start of fluctuation is short (see the precursor pattern A shown in FIG. 100A). As a result, the player can be informed of the currently set game state in addition to the result of the variation lottery depending on the effect mode of the suggested effect, so that the player is interested in the executed suggested effect. Can be made. Further, as in the second control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 having a transition (falling) means for shifting (falling) the gaming state from the positive variation state, which is most advantageous to the player, to the time saving state, without the player being aware of it. In, since it is an effect for suggesting the game state, it is possible to make the player more interested.

In addition, as a method of setting the start timing of the suggestive effect (start timing of the precursor effect), when a change pattern corresponding to super reach or special reach is set as the change pattern, a predetermined timing from the start of the change (for example, 5 seconds later, 10 seconds later), the suggestion effect start timing (precursor effect start timing) may be set at any timing.

When the suggestion production is started in a state in which the suggestion production end timing (countdown production end timing), that is, the start timing (start timing) of the specific production that is the target of the suggestion production is not set, as in this additional example. Is a state in which the effect period of the suggestive effect is not set, and thus there is a problem that the effect mode of the aura effect cannot be set based on the set effect period as in the first control example described above. is there.

On the other hand, in this additional example, in the process of S4351, the presentation mode of the indication effect is set based on the variation time of the variation pattern executed this time and the start timing of the suggestive effect (start timing of the indication effect). It is configured to do. Specifically, when the variation pattern of this time is 60 seconds or more and the start timing of the suggestive effect (the start timing of the predictive effect) is the predictor A, the predictive effect of the predictive effect is a long-term predictor. A long effect mode (second path Dc2b in FIG. 98(a)) corresponding to the effect is set, and in other cases, a short effect mode corresponding to a short-term precursor effect (the first effect in FIG. 98(a)). The route Dc1a) is set.

In this manner, the effect mode of the precursor effect is roughly set based on the period in which the suggestive effect can be executed (the effect executable period based on the start timing of the suggestive effect and the variation time of the variation), and is set later. It is possible to set a production mode that does not give the player a feeling of strangeness with respect to the specific production (production period of suggestive production).

Next, with reference to FIG. 190, the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (S3107) executed in this another example will be described. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (S3107). In the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (S3107), the effect mode of the suggested effect is set based on the pressing operation on the frame button 22 executed while the precursor effect set in the process of FIG. 189 is being executed. The setting process is performed.

As shown in FIG. 190, when the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (S3107) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed (S5051), and if it is not pressed (S5051: No). ), and this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed in the process of S5051 (S5051; Yes), then it is determined whether or not the present is in the precursor effect period (S5071).

In the processing of S5071, when it is determined that the present is not during the precursor presentation period (S5071: No), the processing related to the other frame button operation is executed (S5078), and the present processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5071, if it is determined that the present is in the precursory effect period (S5071: Yes), then a specific effect corresponding to the content of the frame button 22 being pressed is set (S5072).

Here, the process of S5072 will be specifically described. In this additional example, when the indication effect is being executed (that is, when the display of FIG. 98(a) is displayed), the frame button 22 is given to the player in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. An operation effect to be operated is executed. In this operation effect, an effect that changes the moving mode (moving speed or moving position) of the character Dc1 simulating the vehicle displayed in the sub display area Ds is executed as a precursor effect based on the operation of the frame button 22. .. Then, in the sub-display area Ds that scrolls in response to the movement of the character Dc1, a specific effect suggestion mode for indicating the type of the specific effect set in the present suggestive effect is displayed, and the specific effect suggestion acquired by the character Dc1. A specific effect corresponding to the aspect is set.

Here, the specific effect suggestion mode displayed in the sub-display area Ds during the precursory effect is a mode in which the player can understand the content of the corresponding specific effect (for example, PUSH effect) (for example, the characters “PUSH” are attached). Displayed mode). Then, the specific effect display mode is set based on a specific effect (a specific effect corresponding to the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery) that can be set in the special figure variation pattern this time, and specifically, FIG. ), the specific effect display mode corresponding to the "cut-in effect" executed 26 seconds after the start of fluctuation and the "PUSH display effect" executed 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation is displayed. To be done.

In this addition example, the aspect of the specific effect and the timing at which the specific effect are executed are associated with each other, but the aspect of the specific effect and the timing at which the specific effect are executed can be set separately. It may be configured to. With such a configuration, it is possible to determine which one of the plurality of specific effect display modes displayed in the operation effect executed during the precursor effect, which specific effect mode should be set to lengthen the suggestive effect period. It is possible to prevent the person from grasping it. Therefore, even after the operation effect is completed, it is possible to make the whole of the suggestion effect difficult to understand, and it is possible to continuously entertain the suggestion effect to the player.

Further, based on the content of the variation pattern of the special symbol this time (variation time and jackpot lottery result), the execution timing of the specific effect corresponding to the specific effect display mode acquired during the operation effect may be set. good. As a result, the player can select a specific effect desired, and the player can enthusiastically participate in the game. Even when such a configuration is used, the timing at which the specific effect selected by the player is executed is based on the content of the variation pattern of this special symbol (variation time and jackpot lottery result) as described above. By setting, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the effect performed during the change of the special symbol.

Returning to FIG. 190, the description will be continued. When the processing of S5072 is finished, then, the period from the present time to the start timing of the countdown effect is calculated (S5073). In the process of S5073, the start timing of the countdown effect (3 seconds in this additional example) is calculated by back-calculating from the execution timing of the specific effect set in the process of S5072, and the period from the present time to the start timing of the countdown effect is calculated. calculate. That is, it is possible to lengthen the period calculated in the process of S5073 by operating the frame button 22 as soon as possible during the operation effect executed during the sign effect.

Next, it is determined whether or not the interval calculated in the process of S5073 is within 15 seconds (S5074), and when it is determined that the interval is within 15 seconds (S5074: Yes), the presentation of the aura effect currently being executed. If the mode is set to the short effect mode (S5075), and if it is determined that it is not within 15 seconds (longer than 15 seconds) (S5074: No), the effect mode of the omen effect currently being executed is long effect. The mode is set (S5076).

That is, in this additional example, at the variation start timing of the special symbol, first, based on the content (variation time, jackpot lottery result) of the variation pattern this time, the effect mode of the aura effect is roughly set (S4351 in FIG. 189). ), the precursor effect is executed along the set effect mode. Then, while the predictive effect is being executed, at the time when the specific effect that is the target of the suggestive effect is set, the predictive effect based on the remaining period of the suggestive effect (the remaining period of the predictive effect) is set. It is configured to change the effect mode.

With this configuration, the suggestive effect can be displayed without a sense of discomfort toward the specific effect executed during the variable display. In addition, since it is possible to change the display mode of the indication effect based on the operation content during the operation effect, for example, it is easy to intentionally set the short effect mode as the sign effect mode (the remaining period of the sign effect is short. ) Enjoying whether or not the long production mode is set by operating the frame button 22 in the final stage of the operation production which is the timing (whether or not the variation pattern this time is a long variation time), or vice versa. The indication effect executed in the long indication manner by operating the frame button 22 at the beginning of the operation effect when the long indication manner is easily set intentionally (the remaining duration of the indication effect is long) Can be enjoyed and an effect can be executed according to the player's request.

After the precursor effect mode is set in the process of S5075 or S5076, the display countdown effect command corresponding to the set effect mode is set (S5077), the process of S5078 described above is executed, and the process ends.

As described above, in this additional example, in the countdown effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 189) that is executed at the timing when the special figure fluctuation starts, the suggestion effect start timing (precursor effect start timing). Only the specific effect is set, and based on the operation on the frame button 22 executed during the sign effect, the specific effect which is the target of the current suggested effect is set.

With this configuration, the start timing of the precursor effect that triggers the start of the suggestive effect is set to the start timing of the special figure variation, and while the predictive effect is being executed (while the suggestive effect is being executed). In addition, it is possible to set a specific effect as a target of the suggestive effect. Therefore, as compared with the case where the suggestive effect is executed for the predetermined specific effect, the effect mode of the suggestive effect can be freely set, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, similar to the above-described first control example, as suggestive effects, a predictive effect that roughly notifies the timing at which the specific effect is executed, and a countdown effect that specifically notifies the timing at which the specific effect is executed. Since it is configured to be executable, even if the specific effect is set after the suggestive effect is executed (during the precursor effect is being executed), the suggestive effect can be executed without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

In addition, in this additional example, since it is possible to variably set the production mode of the precursor production, which is a partial production (production performed in the first half) of the suggested production, the production mode of the entire suggested production is changed. It can be set without discomfort. In addition, in this additional example, the production mode of the countdown production executed as a partial production of the suggested production (production performed in the latter half) is fixed (countdown display for 3 seconds), but not limited to this. The timing until the specific effect is executed at the timing (see S5073 in FIG. 190) at which the specific effect to be executed this time is set (see S5074 in FIG. 190), and the countdown effect is produced based on the determination result. The period may be set (for example, 3 seconds or 7 seconds).

Each of the configuration and the technical idea described in the above-described first control example may be added to the above-described additional example, and the contents of the above-described first control example and the contents of this additional example You may provide the pachinko machine 10 which has each.

<Explanation when the various effects described in the first control example are used in the second control example>
Next, the contents in the case where the contents of the first control example and the contents of the second control example are combined will be described. Specifically, based on the lottery result of the fall lottery, or the preliminary determination result of the fall lottery that is previously determined based on the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the above-described first control The contents in the case of setting the production mode of various productions described in the example will be described.

In the above-described first control example, in the big hit medium effect setting process (see S3302 of FIG. 143) for setting the big hit effect, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 and the winning information for winning the big hit in the reserved ball Based on the determination result of whether or not there is, it is configured to be able to set the continuous big hit production by referring to the big hit medium production selection table 222c, but in the gaming machine having the configuration of the falling lottery, the lottery result of the falling lottery Alternatively, it may be configured to set the jackpot performance by also referring to the pre-determination result of the falling lottery that is pre-determined based on the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

Specifically, a second pre-determination unit is provided which can determine the winning information to be won as a big hit as the prefetch information and the winning information to be won in the falling lottery in association with the order in which the special symbol variation is executed. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information to be won in the falling lottery is executed after the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information to be won in the jackpot is executed, the continuous jackpot effect is set. It should be configured not to. As a result, when the continuous jackpot production is executed, the winning information held and stored at that time does not include the winning information for winning the falling lottery. Value can be increased.

In addition, by the second pre-determination means, when it is determined that the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information to win the jackpot is executed after the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information to win the falling lottery is executed, continuous It may be configured to set a jackpot performance. Thereby, it is possible to execute the jackpot continuous effect without executing the fall suggestion effect that suggests that the player has won the fall lottery. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy when the fall suggestion effect is executed.

In addition, if it is determined that, among the pre-read information at the time of winning the jackpot, the winning information corresponding to the first rotation after the jackpot ends includes the information indicating that the falling lottery is won, the jackpot in the jackpot As an effect, it is preferable not to execute an effect that suggests that a game state (probably changed state) advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot is over. In other words, if you win the falling lottery at the start timing of the special symbol variation of the first rotation after the end of the big jackpot, you will never receive the jackpot lottery of the special symbol in a high probability state that is advantageous to the player. In such a state, if an effect that suggests that a gaming state (probability variation state) that is advantageous to the player is set during the jackpot after the jackpot is over, an excessive expectation is given to the player. It will be. When the above-described configuration is used, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations.

Next, in the above-mentioned first control example, a continuous effect (battle effect) for informing the player of a period in which the advantageous game state (probably changed state or shortened state) is continuously set is configured to be executable. , The production mode of the continuous production (production mode of pre-battle production, and production mode of battle reach), the special symbol lottery result of this time, information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a, and Although the display mode of the continuous effect (battle effect) is set based on the number of times of the battle effect repeatedly executed during one advantageous state (during the probability change state or the time saving state), In the game machine having the configuration of the falling lottery, the lottery result of the falling lottery or the preliminary determination result of the falling lottery that is preliminarily determined based on the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a is also referred to. It may be configured to set a presentation mode of continuous production.

In each of the control examples described above, the variation pattern (variation effect) is set at the timing when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. That is, the setting of the variation pattern (variation effect) based on the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a is also configured to be executed at the variation start timing of the special symbol. In this case, because the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter (special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d or special symbol 2 holding ball number 203e) in order to start the variation of the special symbol is a state of subtracting 1, There is a problem that the variation pattern (variation effect) cannot be set in a state where the information (prefetch information) stored in the information storage area 223a has reached the upper limit number.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, as a configuration for setting a variation pattern (variation effect) by the voice lamp control device 113, it is commonly executed regardless of the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a. A first variation pattern setting means for setting a first variation pattern (for example, an effect of varying the third symbol), and a first variation pattern executed based on information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a. The second variation pattern setting means for setting two variation patterns (for example, a suggestion effect indicating that there is a hit in the hold), and the variation start timing, that is, the following configuration may be used. That is, in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) executed when the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 140), only the above-described first variation pattern is set.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the variation effect is executed based on the first variation pattern, the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (preread information) by the second variation pattern setting means. ), the second variation pattern is set, and the variation effect in which the information indicating the second variation pattern is added to the variation effect executed in the first variation pattern is executed. With this configuration, the timing of setting the variation pattern (variation effect) based on the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a can be delayed from the variation start timing of the special symbol.

Therefore, it is possible to set a variation pattern (variation effect) based on the prefetch information in a state where the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a has reached the upper limit number, and an effect based on the prefetch information ( It is possible to facilitate the execution of the prefetch effect.

In addition, even if the timing for performing the process of setting the second variation pattern by the above-described second variation pattern setting means is set after a certain time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the variation of the special symbol was started. Alternatively, the setting timing of the second variation pattern may be changed corresponding to the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern setting means. With such a configuration, the timing of setting the look-ahead effect can be changed depending on the variation pattern to be executed, so that the player can eagerly store the reserved balls.

Here, as the execution timing set corresponding to the first variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern setting means, for example, a relatively long variation time (variation time of 60 seconds or more) is used as the first variation pattern. If it is set, the setting timing of the second fluctuation pattern is set 15 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and if a relatively short fluctuation time (30 seconds fluctuation time) is set as the first fluctuation pattern, the second fluctuation pattern is set. It is advisable to set the pattern setting timing 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation.

In addition, when the variation time of the first variation pattern set by the first variation pattern setting means is less than a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the second variation pattern setting means may not be executed. With this configuration, when the variable time period during which the pre-reading effect is difficult to execute is set, the pre-reading effect is not added during the change, and the effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed. Can be suppressed.

Further, as the second variation pattern (prefetch effect) that can be set by the second variation pattern setting means, a short effect (for example, a comment display notice) executed in a short period (for example, 2 seconds) and a long time (for example, a notice display). Even if the long effect (for example, advance notice of chance stop) that is executed in 20 seconds) can be set, the change time of the first change pattern set by the first change pattern setting means. Is less than the predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the second variation pattern setting means is configured not to execute, so that the variation time of the first variation pattern set by the first variation pattern setting means is the predetermined period. In the case of (for example, 10 seconds) or more, the second variation pattern setting means can facilitate the execution of the second variation pattern (prefetch effect).

As described above, in the case where the second variation pattern setting unit is configured not to be executed according to the variation time of the first variation pattern set by the first variation pattern setting unit, the winning information storage area 223a is stored. Among the stored winning information, the winning information that has already been determined by the second variation pattern setting means whether or not to set the second variation pattern and the winning information that has not been stored are stored in a distinguishable manner. When the second variation pattern setting means is configured as described above, whether or not the second variation pattern is already set by the second variation pattern setting means out of the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a. It may be configured to exclude the winning information for which the determination has been made and execute the setting determination of the second variation pattern.

In addition to the above-described example, a pre-reading effect execution command indicating that the second change pattern (pre-reading effect) set by the second change pattern setting means is executed by the display control device 114 is output from the display control device 114 as a voice lamp. When it is configured to output to the control device 113 and the voice lamp control device 113 sets the second variation pattern (prefetch effect), but the prefetch effect execution command cannot be received (the prefetch effect was not executed. In the case), the second variation pattern setting means may be executed again for the same winning information in the next variation.

Starting prize of the special symbol (first prize hole 64 or second prize hole 140) the memory means which can memorize a plurality of (holding memory), and the special symbol based on the information (prize information) stored in the memory means Before the lottery (change) is executed (before the lottery condition for special symbols based on the winning information stored in the storage means is established), the contents of the winning information stored in the storage means are changed. In a gaming machine having a pre-determination means (pre-reading means) for pre-determining, when performing a variation effect (pre-reading effect) based on the determination result of the pre-determination means, at the start of variation of the special symbol, There is a configuration in which an effect mode setting means for setting the effect mode of the special symbol change this time is provided based on the determination result of the determining means.

According to the gaming machine having the above-mentioned configuration, since it is possible to set the effect mode based on the determination result of the pre-determination means as the effect mode corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol, the effect mode to be executed this time is The special symbol lottery result and the determination result of the winning information stored in the storage means can both be suggested, and an effect that interests the player can be executed. However, since the effect mode based on the determination result of the pre-determination result is determined when the variation of the special symbol is started, the effect mode is set in a state where the number of winning information stored in the storage means does not reach the upper limit number. There was a problem that had to be. That is, the timing of setting the effect mode is the timing of executing the variation of the special symbol by using the oldest winning information (the winning information used for the next special symbol variation) stored in the storage means (stored in the storage means). Since it is the timing when the winning information is reduced by one), the effect mode cannot be set in a state where the number of winning information stored in the storage means has reached the upper limit, and the pre-determination means There is a problem that the execution frequency of the variable effect (prefetch effect) based on the determination result of is decreased.

Further, in the above-described configuration, at the timing of starting the change of the special symbol, the process of determining the content of the winning information stored in the storage means, and the process of setting the effect mode corresponding to the change of the special symbol, It has to be executed, and there is a problem that processing load concentrates in a short period of time and processing load increases.

Further, in addition to the above-mentioned configuration, as a configuration for executing the variation effect (prefetch effect) based on the determination result of the prior determination means, the advance determination means described above is based on the fact that new winning information is stored in the storage means. There is also a gaming machine that executes the determination by (1), and based on the determination result, performs an effect (prefetch effect) for showing a result of the preliminary determination different from the variable display of the special symbol.

With such a configuration, the look-ahead effect can be executed at the timing when the new winning information is stored in the storage unit, so that the effect based on the determination result of the pre-determination unit can be smoothly performed. However, since the effect to be executed becomes an effect for showing the determination result of the pre-determination means, the display content overlaps with the effect showing the determination result of the special symbol that is currently being executed, so that the player can see the result. There was a problem that the display was difficult to understand. Further, since the control for executing the prefetching effect is performed at the timing when the new winning information is stored in the storage means, there is a problem that the processing load is temporarily increased.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, as a configuration for setting a variation pattern (variation effect) by the voice lamp control device 113, it is commonly executed regardless of the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a. A first variation pattern setting means for setting a first variation pattern (for example, an effect of varying the third symbol), and a first variation pattern executed based on information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a. The second variation pattern setting means for setting two variation patterns (for example, a suggestion effect indicating that there is a hit in the hold), and the variation start timing, that is, the following configuration may be used. That is, in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) executed when the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process (see FIG. 140), only the above-described first variation pattern is set.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the variation effect is executed based on the first variation pattern, the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (preread information) by the second variation pattern setting means. ), the second variation pattern is set, and the variation effect in which the information indicating the second variation pattern is added to the variation effect executed in the first variation pattern is executed. With this configuration, the timing of setting the variation pattern (variation effect) based on the information (prefetch information) stored in the winning information storage area 223a can be delayed from the variation start timing of the special symbol.

<Third control example>
Next, another control example of the continuous effect described in the above-described first control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 90, the above-described first control example is configured such that the battle effect (pre-battle effect and battle reach) is repeatedly executed during high accuracy (during the probability changing state or the time saving state). .. In the control content of the first control example described above, a variation pattern that can execute battle reach (variation pattern that the variation time is 60 seconds or more) or a variation pattern that cannot execute battle reach depending on the lottery result of the special symbol. In some cases, the (variation pattern in which the variation time is 5 seconds) is continuously selected. In the above-mentioned first control example, in order to prevent the interest of the player from being lowered, the fluctuation pattern capable of executing the battle reach (the deviation fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 60 seconds or more) is within the predetermined period. When a plurality of selections are made (for example, within the interval in which the special symbol fluctuates six times), the battle reach is unnecessarily executed by configuring the latter so that the battle reach is not executed. Although it is configured to solve the problem of reducing the effect of production, a variation pattern that can execute battle reach and a variation pattern that cannot execute battle reach are randomly generated based on the lottery result of the special symbol. In the first control example selected to, depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, the fluctuation pattern in which the battle reach cannot be executed (the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 5 seconds) is continuously selected, and the pre-battle performance Remained the problem for a long time.

Therefore, in the third control example, it is configured such that the continuous effect (battle effect) is executed during the probability variation state as the game state, and the special symbol for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol executed during the probability variation state. As a variation pattern table used when selecting a variation pattern of variation, a variation pattern table in which pre-battle performance is executed (easy to perform) and a variation pattern table in which battle reach is executed (easy to perform) are predetermined. It is configured to be used according to the rules (variable scenario).

With this configuration, when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, if the number of times the special symbol variation is the predetermined number of times (for example, the 14th rotation from the end of the jackpot), be sure to execute the battle reach. Therefore, the above-mentioned problems can be solved. Further, in the third control example, the variation scenario used while the probability variation state is set is selected from a plurality of variation scenarios having different contents and used. Thereby, even when the configuration in which the variation pattern is selected according to a predetermined variation scenario is used, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

Furthermore, in the third control example, a plurality of types of jackpots are prepared for jackpots that provide the same value (contents of jackpot game, game state set after the jackpot is finished), and the jackpot type selected It is configured to select a fluctuation pattern to be executed after the jackpot is finished, based on the fluctuation scenario corresponding to. Thereby, it is possible to set a variation scenario executed after the jackpot is finished according to the type of the jackpot, so that the variation pattern along the variation scenario is surely selected from the special symbol variation of the first rotation after the jackpot is finished. be able to.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 to 202. In the pachinko machine 10 in the third control example, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main controller 110 are partially changed from those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, and the sound lamp control is performed. The difference is that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the device 113 are partially changed, and the contents of the character ROM 234 provided in the display control device 114 are partially changed, and the other points are different. Are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 191(a) is a block diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 191(a), the ROM 202 in this control example is different from the ROM 202 in the first control example in that a variation scenario setting table 202ca is added, and the contents of the first type selection table 202c are partially changed. The difference is that the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d are partially changed, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202c in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 192. FIG. 192 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202c in the third control example. The detailed description of the same elements as the first hit type selection table 202c used in the above-described first control example will be omitted.

In the first hit type selection table 202c in the third control example, a big hit type (big hit A to big hit K) corresponding to the contents (round number) of the big hit game and the game state set after the big hit game is further added. The subdivided jackpot types (jackets Aa to Aj) are defined. Specifically, among the values “0 to 19” of the first hit type counter C2, which are defined in association with “big hit A”, the value of the first hit type counter C2 falls within the range of “0, 1”. Is defined as being associated with "big hit Aa", the range of "2,3" is defined as being associated with "big hit Ab", and the range of "4,5" is "big hit". "Ac" is defined in association with each other, "big hit Ad" is associated with the range of "6, 7", and "big hit Ae" is associated with range of "8, 9". In addition, the “big hit Af” is defined in association with the range of “10, 11”, and the “big hit Ag” is defined in association with the range of “12, 13”. The "big hit Ah" is defined in association with the range of "14, 15", and the "big hit Ai" is defined in association with the range of "16, 17". In the range of “18, 19”, “major jackpot Aj” is associated and defined.

In other words, in the third control example, among the 200 possible counter values (random number values) of the first hit type counter C2, 10 types of 20 random number values for which “big hit A” is selected are selected. It is stipulated that the big hit types (big hits Aa to big hits Aj) are evenly distributed, and the proportion of each big hit type (big hits Aa to big hits Aj) being selected is 1%.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the third control example, when any one of the "big hit Aa" to "big hit Aj" is selected, the big hit game (15 rounds) defined in "big hit A" is selected. (Game) is executed, and after the jackpot game is over, the gaming state defined in “jackpot A” is set. Then, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation for indicating the special symbol lottery result executed after the jackpot game is configured to be different depending on the selected jackpot type (jackpot Aa to jackpot Aj). ..

By configuring in this way, when a specific jackpot game is set, it is possible to make the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed after the jackpot game end, for example, as a jackpot type "jackpot Aa" It is possible to easily select a variation pattern having a short variation time as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed after the jackpot game is finished, as compared with the case where is selected. That is, even if the jackpot type that the same gaming state is set with the same jackpot game contents, the number of fluctuations per unit time in the special symbol variation after the jackpot game can be made different depending on the jackpot type. It is possible to give a player who wants to win the next jackpot quickly to the expectation for the jackpot type that has been won until the timing when the special symbol variation is executed after the jackpot game is over.

Similar to the above "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit D", "big hit G", "big hit I" defined in the first hit type selection table 202c, that is, a high probability after the big hit game ends. For the jackpot type to which the state and the time-saving state (hereinafter, referred to as a probability variation state) are given, it is defined that the small classifications “a to j” of each jackpot type are evenly allocated. On the other hand, "big hit C", "big hit H", "big hit J", "big hit K", that is, a high-probability state and a time-saving state are not given after the jackpot game is finished (a low-probability state and a time-saving state are given. ) For the jackpot type, a small classification (a to j) of the jackpot type is not defined, and a common variation pattern is selected as a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation executed after the jackpot game ends. Is configured as follows.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 193(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202d in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 193(a), in the third control example, in comparison with the first control example, the special variation pattern table 202d4 is deleted, and the jackpot (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc1 and the first off The difference is that a (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc2, a second deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc3, and a special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc4 are added.

Here, the jackpot (probability change) variation pattern table 202dc1 will be described with reference to FIG. 193(b). FIG. 193(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot (probability change) variation pattern table 202dc1. This jackpot (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc1 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the gaming state is the probability variation state and the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 193(b), it is configured such that one of the fluctuation patterns having the fluctuation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds is selected. Specifically, in the range where the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0 to 179”, fluctuation patterns (various types of super reach) having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds are associated and defined, and the range of “180 to 198” is defined. A fluctuation pattern (various special reach) with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is associated and defined in the range. In the third control example, when the variation pattern in which the variation time is 60 seconds is selected, the voice reach control device 113 executes the battle reach (victory battle) in which three attacks are unfolded (see FIG. 94). , 90 second fluctuation pattern is selected, a battle reach (winning battle) is performed in which a revival effect is performed after three attacks have been unfolded (see FIG. 96).

Next, with reference to FIG. 193(c), the first deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc2 will be described. FIG. 193(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202dc2. This first deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2 is a fluctuation pattern table that is referred to when selecting a fluctuation pattern when the game state is a probability change status and the special symbol lottery result is out. There is one.

As shown in FIG. 193(c), in the first deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202dc2, a variation pattern having a short variation time (for example, 3 seconds, 5 seconds) has a long variation time (for example, 60 seconds). It is configured so that it can be selected more easily than the variation pattern. Specifically, a variation pattern (short deviation a) having a variation time of 3 seconds is associated with the range of the value of the variation type counter CS1 of “0 to 149”, and is defined as “150 to 197”. A variation pattern having a variation time of 5 seconds (short deviation b) is associated with the range, and a variation pattern having a variation time of 60 seconds (long deviation a) is associated with "198". Has been done.

That is, in the first deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202dc2, among 199 counter values (random number values) that the variation type counter C1 can take, 198 random number values (range of “0 to 197”) The short deviation (short deviation a, short deviation b), which is a variation pattern with a short variation time, is defined, and the variation pattern with a long variation time is long with respect to the remaining one random number value (“198”). Since the deviation (long deviation a) is defined, the fluctuation time is short in most cases (about 99.5%) when the fluctuation pattern is selected by referring to the first deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2. A fluctuation pattern is selected.

In the third control example, when the variation pattern having a variation time of 3 seconds (short deviation a) or the variation pattern of 5 seconds (short deviation b) is selected, the pre-battle effect (FIG. 91, refer to FIG. 92) is executed, and when “short deviation b” is selected among them, an attack effect (refer to FIG. 92) for increasing or decreasing the opponent's continuous value (HP value) is executed. In addition, when "short deviation a" is selected, for example, the effect of conversation between the own character and the character of the other party or the other character without executing the effect of increasing or decreasing the continuous value (HP value) of the other party The effect of switching the character is executed. Further, when "out of bounds a" is selected, a battle reach (drawing battle) in which three attacks are unfolded is executed (see FIG. 94).

Next, with reference to FIG. 193(d), the contents of the second deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202dc3 will be described. FIG. 193(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202dc3. This second deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202dc3 is a fluctuation pattern table that is referred to when a fluctuation pattern is selected when the game state is a probability change status and the special symbol lottery result is out. As shown in FIG. 193(d), one variation pattern is selected from the variation patterns having a variation time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds.

Specifically, in the range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 of “0 to 197”, a fluctuation pattern (long deviation a) having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is associated and defined, and “198” is defined as A variation pattern (long deviation b) with a variation time of 90 seconds is associated and defined.

FIG. 193(e) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc4. This special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc4 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the jackpot gaming state is the probability variation state, and the variation time is regardless of the special symbol lottery result. A variation pattern of 0.5 seconds is selected. Specifically, in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is out of alignment, the variation pattern (ultra-short out) of the variation time of 0.5 seconds corresponds to the entire range of the variation type counter CS1 (“0 to 198”). If the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern of the variation type counter CS1 (“0 to 198”) has a variation time of 0.5 seconds (per ultra short). Are specified in association with each other.

Returning to FIG. 191(a), the description will be continued. The variation scenario setting table 202ca is a variation pattern that defines the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 193(a)) that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol variation, in association with the number of variations of the special symbol, It is defined in association with the jackpot type. This variation scenario setting table 202ca is determined in the jackpot control process (see S1104 of FIG. 137) executed by the main controller 110, when it is the ending timing of the ending effect, that is, the jackpot game ending timing (FIG. 137). S1211: Yes) is referred to for setting the variation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type that has been won this time, and the variation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type that has been won this time is read out and stored in the variation scenario storage area 203ca.

Here, the contents of the variation scenario defined in the variation scenario setting table 202ca will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 194(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation scenario setting table 202ca. As shown in FIG. 194(a), this variation scenario setting table 202ca is associated with each variation scenario (variation) in association with the jackpot type (small category of jackpot type (a to j)) and the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning. Scenario 1 to variation scenario 11) are specified.

In other words, in the third control example, according to the jackpot type that is won and the gaming state when the jackpot is won, the variation pattern of the special symbol variation that is executed after the jackpot is finished (special symbol variation that is performed after the jackpot is finished. The range of selecting the variation pattern) can be different. Therefore, in the case of winning the jackpot, in addition to the contents of the jackpot game (the number of rounds) and the gaming state set after the jackpot game, the variation pattern set after the jackpot game can also be made different, The interest can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 194(a), the variation scenario set after the jackpot is configured to be different depending on the gaming state when the jackpot is won. Specifically, if the gaming state when you win the big jackpot is a state without time saving (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state is common), which jackpot type (small classification of jackpot type (a to j)) Even if is set, set a common variation scenario (variation scenario 1), and if the gaming state when you win the jackpot is a time saving state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state common) The variable scenarios (variation scenarios 2 to 11) corresponding to the set jackpot type (small category (a to j) of the jackpot type) are set.

By configuring in this way, the number of special symbol fluctuations per unit time is greater in the case of winning the jackpot (probability variation jackpot) in the state of time saving than in the case of winning the jackpot (probability variation jackpot) in the state without time saving It becomes possible to do. Therefore, the player can be made more aware of the game state when the jackpot is won, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the third control example, when the big hit (probability variation jackpot) is won in the time saving state, the variation scenario (variation scenario 1) set when the jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is won in the state without time saving The set variation scenarios (variation scenario 2 to variation scenario 11) configure each variation scenario such that the number of special symbol variations per unit time increases, but the invention is not limited to this, for example, no time saving. Each fluctuation scenario may be configured such that the number of special symbol fluctuations per unit time is increased when the jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is won in the state. With such a configuration, for example, in the effect mode that can be set only when the probability variation jackpot is won in the time saving state, the privilege image can be executed for a long time.

In addition, some of the variation scenarios (variation scenario 2 to variation scenario 11) that are set when you win the jackpot (probability variation jackpot) in the state with time saving You may set it so that the number of special symbol fluctuations per unit time is less than the fluctuation scenario (variation scenario 1) set when you win, or when you win a big hit (probable variation big hit) in a state without time saving , A plurality of variation scenarios may be set based on the jackpot type (small category (a to j) of the jackpot type).

Next, the contents of each variation scenario defined in the variation scenario setting table 202ca will be described with reference to FIGS. 194(b) to 196(d). FIG. 194(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation scenario 1. First, the contents specified in the variation scenario will be described with reference to FIG. 194(b). The variation scenario refers to the number of variations of the special symbol executed after the jackpot game is finished (that is, one special symbol variation after the jackpot game is the number of variations 1) and the variation pattern of the variation is selected. And the fluctuation pattern table to be defined are associated with each other and are defined.

Further, in the third control example, as described above, when the jackpot type in which the probability variation state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished, the corresponding variation scenario is set by the variation scenario setting table 202ca, and the variation scenario is set. The variation pattern is selected in accordance with the contents specified in 1).

As shown in FIG. 194(b), in the variation scenario 1, table A (special (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc4) is defined as the variation pattern table referred to when the number of variations is “1 to 4”, and the number of variations is Table B (displacement (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3) is defined as the variation pattern to be referred to when "5".

As shown in FIG. 194(a), this variation scenario 1 is set when all the jackpots to which the jackpot type (small category) is given in the state where the time saving state is not given as the game state. To be done. When the variation scenario 1 is set, the special symbol variation 1 to 4 rotations after the jackpot is finished, the special (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc4 (table A) (see FIG. 193(e)) is used, and the special symbol is used. A variation pattern having a variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected regardless of the lottery result.

Then, after the fifth special symbol fluctuation after the jackpot, the deviation pattern (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 (table B) (see FIG. 108(d)) is used, and the fluctuation time is from 7 seconds to 90 seconds. The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the acquired value of the fluctuation type CS1. In addition, since the variation scenario 1 is a scenario set when the gaming state is the probability variation state, if the special symbol jackpot is won in the state where the variation scenario 1 is set, as described above, for the jackpot A (variable) fluctuation pattern table 202dc1 is used to select a fluctuation pattern.

Next, the contents of the variation scenario 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 194(c). As shown in FIG. 194(c), in variation scenario 2, table A (special (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc4) is associated with the range of variation times “1 to 4” as in variation scenario 1 described above. Table C (first deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range of the number of fluctuations of “5 to 13”, and when the number of fluctuations is “14”, table D (for the second deviation ( (Probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202dc3) is defined.

Thereafter, until the number of fluctuations reaches “199”, the table C (the first deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in association with the number of fluctuations 9 times, and the table D (second The deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202dc3) is associated and defined. That is, during the period in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the jackpot is "5 to 199", the variation pattern is selected using the table C after nine times of the special symbol variation is performed, and the variation pattern is determined using the table D. The scenario in which the selected special symbol variation is executed is repeatedly executed.

With such a configuration, in the battle effect executed during the period when the probability variation state is set as the game state, the special symbol variation in which the pre-battle effect is executed (short deviation (short deviation a using table C a , Short symbol b) selected special symbol variation), and special symbol variation that battle reach is executed (long symbol deviation (long symbol deviation a, long symbol deviation b) selected using table D) , Can be set in advance, it is possible to change the effect mode of the pre-battle effect toward the special symbol variation in which the battle reach is executed.

In addition, in the third control example, when the variation pattern is selected using the table C, a slight out-of-range a (out-of-range variation of 60 seconds) is selected although it is slight. Thereby, when the variation scenario is set in advance, the battle reach can be executed at an unexpected timing. As a result, in the case where the battle reach is executed at an unexpected timing (that is, when the variation time capable of executing the battle reach (variation time of 60 seconds or more) is selected), the player wins the jackpot. You can play a game while expecting to win.

In addition, as described above, by setting the variation scenario and allowing the period during which the pre-battle effect and the battle reach are executed to be set in advance, the player can feel a sense of incongruity for a long time (for example, hold). It is possible to set the production mode of pre-battle production in a period in which a number of special symbol variations greater than the upper limit of memory is executed), but each time the battle production is executed, the same variation scenario is set each time. If the production based on this is executed, there is a problem that the player gets tired of the battle production itself.

In order to solve such a problem, in the third control example, the jackpot game content (the number of rounds) and the game state set after the jackpot are the same jackpot type (for example, "jackpot A") On the other hand, a plurality of jackpot types (for example, “jackpot Aa” to “jackpot Aj”) in which different variation scenarios are defined are provided so that the player cannot easily understand the content of the variation scenario during the battle production. I am configuring.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the demerit (monotony of the effect) of the scenario while having the advantage of providing the scenario of the variation pattern (providing the long-term effect that does not give the player a feeling of strangeness). Further, since the jackpot game content (the number of rounds) and the game state set after the jackpot are configured for the same jackpot type (for example, "jackpot A"), a plurality of variation scenarios are configured. Even when the player grasps the game contents of the jackpot and the game state set after the jackpot, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp in which variation scenario the special figure variation is executed after the jackpot. .. Therefore, when the battle reach is executed, it is difficult to understand whether it is a predetermined battle reach (drawing battle) based on the variation scenario or a battle reach (win or defeat battle) based on winning the jackpot. It is possible to enhance the effect.

In this control example, the jackpot type with “a to j” is assigned to all of the “jackpot A”, “jackpot B”, “jackpot D”, “jackpot G”, and “jackpot I”. However, the jackpot type defined for each jackpot may be different, for example, when a jackpot game corresponding to "jackpot A" is executed, a specific variation scenario (eg, variation scenario It may be configured such that only 2) can be set. This makes it easier for a player who has been playing a game for a long period of time to understand the relationship between the big jackpot game content and the variation scenario. Therefore, after a specific jackpot game (for example, a jackpot game corresponding to "jackpot A") is finished, when a battle reach is executed at a different timing from usual, it is possible to increase the expectation for the jackpot.

Then, in the range where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is “200 to”, the table B (displacement (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d3) is defined in association with each other. With such a configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the probability variation state continues until the next big hit as in the present control example, it is not necessary to create infinite variation scenarios, and thus the data capacity of the main control device 110 is reduced. You can In the third control example, with respect to the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the probability variation state (about 1/48 (see FIG. 106(a)), the variation reached when the lottery is executed four times or more the probability. When the number of times exceeds "200", the table B (displacement (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3) is configured to be executed. ) The fluctuation pattern table 202d3) may be configured to be executed. For example, when the number of fluctuations “500” that is reached when a lottery of 10 times or more of the jackpot probability is executed, the table B is used. It may be configured such that the selected variation pattern is executed.

Further, in the third control example, when the number of fluctuations “200”, which is the upper limit of the fluctuation scenario, is exceeded, the selection of the fluctuation pattern using the table B is executed. A table may be used, for example, a variation pattern using Table A may be configured to be executed until the next jackpot is won, and variation may be performed from the variation count “200” which is the upper limit of the variation scenario. During the period of the number of times "399", the variation pattern is selected using the table A, and when the number of variations exceeds "400", the variation pattern is selected using the table B until the next jackpot is won. You may comprise so that it may be comprised.

As described above, in the third control example, the battle effect is executed based on the variation scenario for the special symbol variation within the range of the lottery number that can be normally won in the jackpot. However, when the upper limit of the variation scenario (the number of variations “200”) is exceeded, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to execute an effect other than the battle effect. In this case, it is preferable to perform a privilege effect in which a video or sound that cannot be normally viewed by the player is provided, or the points collected by the player are added. As a result, it is possible to give a special privilege to the player who cannot win the jackpot over a long period of time. In addition, in the third control example, the privilege effect described above is executed by using a variation pattern different from the variation pattern corresponding to the variation scenario set to smoothly execute the battle effect executed during the probability variation state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of privilege production.

Next, the contents of the variation scenario 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 194(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the variation scenario 3. The variation scenario 3 is configured such that the variation pattern 2 is selected from the variation scenario 2 described above (see FIG. 194(c)) in a period in which a variation pattern is selected using the tables C and D. Specifically, in variation scenario 3, table A (special (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc4) is defined in association with the range of variation times “1 to 4” in the same manner as in variation scenario 2 described above. Is defined in the range of “5 to 9” (first deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2), and when the number of fluctuations is “10”, table D (second deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table) 202 dc3) is defined.

After that, until the number of fluctuations reaches “190”, the table C (first deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in association with the number of fluctuations 5 times, and the table D (second The deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202dc3) is associated and defined. In other words, during the period when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the jackpot is “5-190”, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the table C after the special symbol fluctuation is selected five times, and then the fluctuation pattern is determined using the table D. The scenario in which the selected special symbol variation is executed is repeatedly executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to change the timing at which the battle reach (drawing battle) based on the variation scenario is executed depending on the type of the variation scenario to be set. Therefore, the battle reach (based on winning the jackpot) It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether it is a victory or defeat battle), and it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

Then, as in the case of the variation scenario 2 described above, the table C (the first deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range of the variation number “190 to 198”, and the variation number is “199”. The table D (the second deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202dc3) is defined, and the table B (the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3) is defined in the range where the number of fluctuations is “200 to”.

In this way, regardless of the jackpot type, the period of the pre-battle performance (the period in which the number of changes is "190 to 198") corresponding to the final battle reach (the battle reach executed when the number of changes is "199") By unifying, it is possible to easily unify the effect contents executed regardless of which jackpot type is set. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare for each jackpot type an effect that suggests to the player that the battle effect will end (an effect that makes the pre-battle effect and the effect mode of the battle reach different from normal). Can be reduced.

It should be noted that it is not necessary to unify the effects that suggest the player that the battle effect will end (effects that make the pre-battle effect and the effect mode of battle reach different from normal) for all jackpot types, and at least 2 The variation scenario should be configured so that the effects that suggest to the player that the battle effect will be completed for each of the four jackpot types (effects that make the pre-battle effect and the effect mode of battle reach different from normal) are unified. In this case, the capacity of effect data can be reduced.

Next, the contents of the variation scenario 4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 195( a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation scenario 4. This variation scenario 4 defines the same content as variation scenario 2 (see FIG. 194(c)) described above in the period in which the number of variations is “1 to 14”, and the content defined thereafter. Is configured to be different from the variation scenario 2. In this way, by setting the same contents for a predetermined period after the jackpot ends and changing the contents after the predetermined period elapses, a plurality of fluctuation scenarios are set for the player this time. It is possible to make it more difficult to understand what the fluctuation scenario is.

FIG. 195( b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation scenario 5. This variation scenario 5, unlike variation scenarios 2 to 4, after the number of variations “1 to 4” for which a variation pattern is selected using table A, a special symbol variation in which a variation pattern is selected using table D Is executed. That is, the battle reach (drawing battle) is executed without executing the pre-battle effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a great sense of discomfort with respect to the battle effect, as compared with the case where another variation scenario is set. Therefore, the expectation of a jackpot can be increased for the battle reach executed immediately after the start of the battle production. Since the other contents are the same as those of the above-mentioned variation scenarios 2 to 4, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, FIG. 195(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation scenario 6. As shown in FIG. 195(c), this variation scenario 6 does not have a period in which the variation pattern is selected using the table A, and the special symbol variation in which the variation pattern is selected using the table D. Is different from other fluctuation scenarios. The other elements are the same as those in the above-mentioned variation scenarios 2 to 4, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, with respect to the above-mentioned variation scenario 6, in order to prevent the variation scenario from being easily understood by the player, the variation pattern tables defined in the variation scenario are made the same and are associated with each variation pattern table. The variation scenario 7 (see FIG. 195(d)) in which only the variation frequency is changed is provided. As a result, even if the variation pattern is selected using the table C after the jackpot is over (that is, the battle effect is started immediately after the jackpot is over), the variation currently set for the player is set. You can obscure what the scenario is.

Next, the contents of the variation scenario 8 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 196(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation scenario 8. As shown in FIG. 196(a), the variation scenario 8 is different from the above-mentioned variation scenarios 1 to 7 in that the period in which the variation pattern is selected using the table A is set to be long. .. Specifically, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed after the end of the big hit is defined in association with the table A in the range of "1 to 10". With this configuration, it is possible to lengthen the period for selecting the variation pattern by using the table A in which the variation pattern having the variation time of 0.5 seconds is selected regardless of the special symbol lottery result. The jackpot can be offered in a short time.

Further, during the period in which this table A is defined in association with the third symbol display device 81, the same display as the extended display of the above-described first control example, that is, the ending screen showing the end of the jackpot game. It is configured to be displayed. As a result, a series of jackpot effects can be executed for a plurality of jackpot games.

Next, the variation scenario 9 will be described with reference to FIG. 196(b). FIG. 196(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation scenario 9. As shown in FIG. 196(b), this variation scenario 9 is different from the other variation scenarios in that the variation pattern table initially defined after the jackpot is replaced with table A instead of table A. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the probability variation state is not set as the game state after the jackpot is over. After that, when the period defined by the correspondence with the table B (the period of the number of fluctuations “1 to 4”) elapses, the fluctuation pattern using the tables C and D is selected like other fluctuation scenarios. Since the battle effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in association with the selected variation pattern, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

FIG. 196(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation scenario 10. As shown in FIG. 196(c), the variation scenario 10 is different from the other variation scenarios in that the period for selecting the variation pattern using the table D is not set. That is, in the variation scenario 10, since the variation pattern is not selected using the table D during the period in which the battle effect is executed, the battle reach (drawing battle) predetermined based on the variation scenario is executed. Never be done.

In this variation scenario 10, when the variation type counter CS1 has an acquired value of “198” when a variation pattern is selected using the table C, and a variation pattern having a variation time of 60 seconds (long deviation a) is selected. Alternatively, the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and the battle reach is executed when the change pattern of the change time of 60 seconds or 90 seconds is selected using the big hit (probability change) change pattern table 202dc1. .. Therefore, when the present variation scenario 10 is set, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the jackpot when the battle reach is executed, as compared with the case where other variation scenarios are set.

Further, in the third control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, the lottery result of the special symbol is a big jackpot, and a certainty variation jackpot in which a certainty variation state is given as a game state after the end of the jackpot, and the jackpot. It has a normal jackpot that is given the normal state as the game state after the end, and in the battle reach that is executed during the battle production, the winning battle is executed when you win the probability variation jackpot, and you win the normal jackpot. A defeat battle is executed in this case, and a draw battle is executed when the special symbol lottery result is missed.

That is, when the present variation scenario 10 is set, it is possible to reduce the frequency of execution of a draw battle as compared with the case where another variation scenario is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect contents when the battle reach is executed, and it is possible to enhance the effect effect. In addition, when the variation scenario is set without using the table D as in the variation scenario 10, the pre-battle effect may be executed for a long period of time, and thus, for example, the variation pattern that can be selected using the table C ( It is preferable to use a table (table C2) in which a variation pattern having a shorter variation time (variation pattern having a variation time of 0.5 seconds to 1 second) can be selected than a variation pattern having a variation time of 3 seconds to 5 seconds. .. Thereby, the period during which the pre-battle effect is continuously executed can be shortened.

Next, the variation scenario 11 will be described with reference to FIG. 196(d). FIG. 196(d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation scenario 11. In this variation scenario 11, as shown in FIG. 196(d), the variation pattern table first defined after the jackpot is set as table C, after a predetermined period has elapsed since the jackpot was finished (the special symbol is changed 249 times). After that, the table A is defined, and the upper limit number of fluctuation scenarios is set to “400”, which is different from other fluctuation scenarios.

According to the variation scenario 11, as in the variation scenario 10 described above, since there is no period in which the variation pattern is selected using the table D, there is a possibility that the jackpot is won when the battle reach is executed. (Possibility of executing a victory or defeat battle) can be increased, and the player can be focused on the effect contents of the battle reach.

Also, when the number of special symbol fluctuations after the jackpot has exceeded a predetermined number (399 times), the table A has the highest number of fluctuations per unit time, so the probability state is set as the gaming state. Despite this, the player feels dissatisfaction when the period without winning the jackpot continues for a long period of time (for example, the period in which the number of special symbol fluctuations is 10 times the value of the denominator of the jackpot probability). The feeling can be suppressed.

As described above, in the third control example, a plurality (10 types) of variation scenarios can be set for the jackpot type in which the same jackpot is executed, and the battle reach (drawing) based on the variation scenario is configured. Battle) and battle reach (victory or defeat battle) based on winning the special symbol jackpot, but it is difficult to understand, but the type of variation scenario is not limited to this, and from more types The variable scenario may be settable.

In addition, in the third control example, a variation scenario is set for all periods during which the battle effect is executed, and the content of the battle effect (pre-battle effect, battle reach) can be discriminated in advance. Only a part of the period in which the battle effect is performed (for example, the period from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol variation is executed 50 times, or the period for 10 special symbol variations calculated backward from the timing when the battle effect ends) only It may be configured to define a variation scenario.

In the third control example, the configuration for setting the variation scenario of the special symbol variation based on the winning jackpot type is used, but other than that, an element for setting (variable) the variation scenario may be used, for example, Although the lottery result of the special symbol is off, even if it is configured to set (variable) the variation scenario when the lottery result (so-called small hit) that gives the player a smaller amount of privilege than the jackpot Alternatively, the falling scenario may be set (variable) when the falling is won by the falling lottery means used in the second control example. Furthermore, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol fluctuation reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), a means for performing a lottery for varying the variation scenario is provided, and the variation scenario is set based on the result of the lottery (variable). It may be configured to do so.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 used in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 191(b). FIG. 191(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 191(b), the RAM 203 of the third control example is different from the RAM 203 of the first control example described above in that a variation scenario storage area 203ca is added. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation scenario storage area 203ca is an area for storing the variation scenario set using the variation scenario setting table 202ca. In the third control example, the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected based on the variation scenario stored in the variation scenario storage area 203ca. This variation scenario storage area 203ca stores a variation scenario corresponding to the type of the jackpot that is won when the special symbol big hit is won, and the variation number subtraction process 4 (which is executed each time the special symbol is changed) (See FIG. 204)) (see S452 of FIG. 204). In this way, after winning the jackpot (after the process of starting the variation of the special symbol to indicate that you have won the jackpot is executed) until the variation of the special symbol after the jackpot is executed Since the variation scenario is stored in the meantime, the variation pattern of the special symbol executed after the jackpot is finished can be reliably selected based on the variation scenario stored in the variation scenario storage area 203ca.

Next, with reference to FIG. 197, the details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 197(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 197(a), the ROM 222 of the third control example has the continuous value main selection table 222f and the continuous value sub-selection table 222g deleted from the ROM 222 of the first control example described above. Points, a variation scenario storage area 222ca, a first continuous value main selection table 222cb, a second continuous value main selection table 222cc, a third continuous value main selection table 222cd, and a continuous effect mode selection 2 table 222ce. The difference is that they are added. Since the third control example shows a modification of the continuation effect (battle effect) of the above-described first control example, among the elements provided in the ROM 222 of the above-described first control example, the continuation is continued. Descriptions of elements that are not related to production are omitted, and other elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

The variation scenario storage area 222ca is an area in which information for indicating the contents of a plurality of variation scenarios defined in the variation scenario setting table 202ca of the main controller 110 is stored, and is output from the main controller 110. Based on a command for indicating the setting status of the variation scenario (for example, a command for indicating the jackpot type or a command for indicating the variation scenario that has been set), the variation scenario is updated on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Information used for management is stored.

This variation scenario storage area 222ca is determined when it is determined in the command determination processing 4 (see FIG. 205) of the voice lamp control device 113 that a status command including relevant information related to the variation scenario is received (S3271 in FIG. 205: Yes). ), the variation scenario corresponding to the received command is read and set in the variation scenario update area 223ca (see S3272 in FIG. 205).

With this configuration, the variation scenario set by the main control device 110 and the variation scenario managed by the voice lamp control device 113 can be synchronized with each other, so that the variation pattern selected by the main control device 110 in the future can be synchronized. (Variation pattern selected based on the set variation scenario) can be grasped in advance on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Therefore, it is possible to easily set a long-term effect without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

That is, in the conventional game machine, the contents of the plurality of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a are determined, and based on the determination result, specific winning information (for example, the third winning information is selected. Special symbol variation is executed prize information), for a long time using the variation period of the special symbol variation executed before that (special symbol variation executed first and second in the prize information) However, for example, when a plurality of winning information is not stored in the winning information storage area 223a, it is difficult to perform a long-term effect. Along with this, the maximum value of the range in which long-term production can be executed is the variation period of the special symbol variation corresponding to the maximum number of winning information that can be stored in the winning information storage area 223a, so the production period is limited. was there.

On the other hand, in the third control example, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is managed by a scenario, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol to be executed in the future can be easily determined. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom for long-term production.

Further, in the third control example, since the voice lamp control device 113 has the variation scenario storage area 222ca, the main control device 110 does not need to output all the contents of the variation scenario to be set, and is set. Since it suffices to output the information for indicating the variation scenario (for example, the information indicating the jackpot type that has been won or the identification information that can specify the variation scenario to be set from a plurality of variation scenarios), the main controller 110 The data amount of information to be output can be reduced.

In addition, although a detailed description is omitted, in the third control example, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (when there is a power failure), the main control unit 110 is restored when the power supply is restored. From the power supply to the voice lamp control device 113 is cut off (or until the processing of the main control device 110 is stopped after the power supply is cut off), a recovery process for outputting the stored game state is executed. It is configured as such, in the information for indicating the game state output in the recovery process, as information for indicating the currently set fluctuation scenario, at least the jackpot type that was won last time, is currently set Information to indicate any of the variation scenarios, the update status of the variation scenario that is currently set, information to indicate any of the number of variations of special symbols that have been executed since the last jackpot was included, It is configured to As a result, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted during a game due to a power failure or the like, the contents of update of the variation scenario set in the main controller 110 after the restoration and the variation managed by the voice lamp controller 113 The updated contents of the scenario can be easily synchronized.

In this case, as a restoration process, based on the information output from the main controller 110, a predetermined period after the restoration management process of the variation scenario by the voice lamp controller 113 is restored (for example, the special symbol varies a plurality of times (five times)). The period before the change and the period until the change pattern table defined in the change scenario is changed) are managed by the change contents of the change scenario set in the main controller 110 and the voice lamp controller 113. It may be used as a confirmation period for determining whether or not the update contents of the change scenario are correctly updated. As a result, it is possible to more accurately restore the change scenario update management processing. In addition, during the above-described confirmation period, in order to show that the variation effect corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110 and not based on the variation scenario, and is being restored. It is recommended that the recovery display of is executed. Thereby, the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The first continuation value main selection table 222cb is a table to be referred to when updating the continuation value (HP value) when the continuation effect (battle effect) is being executed, until the battle reach is executed. When the period (remaining period) is a predetermined period or more (for example, when the number of special symbol changes until the special symbol change corresponding to battle reach is executed is 4 or more), it is a table to be referred to.

Here, the method of setting the continuation value in the third control example will be described focusing on the differences from the first control example described above. In the first control example described above, in order to set the main continuation value for performing update management of the continuation value in the voice lamp control device 113, and the continuation value (HP value) for the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The sub-continuation value of each is set by referring to the corresponding table, the summed value of the set main continuation value and the sub-continuity value is calculated, and the information command for indicating the summed value is displayed. On the other hand, in the third control example, only the value of the main continuation value is set by the voice lamp control device 113, and the main continuation value set by the voice lamp control device 113 is shown. Is output to the display control device 114, the sub continuation value is set based on the information command received on the display control device 114 side, and the summed value is calculated.

That is, in the third control example, when the continuous value is repeatedly increased or decreased, only the main continuous value, which is the value managed to correspond to the lottery result of the special symbol or the variation scenario, is selected by the voice lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 is configured to perform storage and to perform all other processing. As a result, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be greatly reduced.

Here, the contents of the first continuous value main selection table 222cb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 198 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first continuation value main selection table 222cb. In the first continuation value main selection table 222cb, the selected selection value (main continuation value) is different from the value (main continuation value) stored in the current continuation value (continuation value storage area 223n). Is defined as

The selection ratio is set by allocating each value to a range (for example, 0 to 199) that can be taken by the value of a dedicated effect counter (not shown). Further, in the first continuation value main selection table 222cb, the lower limit of selectable selection values is defined as “400”. As described above, in the first continuation value main selection table 222cb, when the value of the remaining number counter is 4 or more, that is, the special symbol is at least four times before the battle reach defined by the variation scenario is executed. This is because it is a table used when it is necessary to make a change, so that a low selection value is set unnecessarily, and the progress of the effect of increasing or decreasing the continuous value is prevented from being delayed. As a result, when the value of the remaining number counter 223cb becomes 3 or less, that is, when the battle reach is about to start, the effect of increasing or decreasing the continuous value can be executed without a feeling of strangeness.

Explaining the contents shown in FIG. 198, when the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223n is “1000”, the ratio of “1000” being selected as the selected value (main continuous value) to be selected Is 5%, “900” is 50%, “800” is 30%, “700” is 10%, and “600” is 3%. %, the proportion at which “500” is selected is defined as 2%.

Here, the contents of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 corresponding to the increase/decrease of the continuation value (main continuation value) will be described. In the third control example, an effect corresponding to an increase/decrease in a total value obtained by adding the main continuation value selected by the voice lamp control device 113 and the sub continuation value selected by the display control device 114 is executed. .. Since the effect to be executed is configured such that the sub continuation value is selected such that the increase/decrease range of the main continuation value is the same as the increase/decrease range of the combined value, as in the first control example described above. Substantially, the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined by the selection value (main continuation value) selected using the first continuation value main selection table 222cb.

Specifically, when the current main continuation value is "1000" and the selection value is "1000", the "control" effect is executed, and the effect that the continuation value (HP value) on the display screen does not increase or decrease is executed. To be done. When a selection value that does not decrease the main continuation value is selected in the first continuation value main selection table 222cb, a command indicating that is output to the display control device 114, and when the command is received, The display controller 114 is configured not to select the sub continuation value. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the sub continuation value is selected and the continuation value (HP value) on the display increases or decreases even though the main continuation value does not decrease.

Next, if the current main continuation value is "1000" and the selection value is "900" to "500", an "attack" effect that reduces the opponent's continuation value (HP value) is executed. The detailed production mode of the "attack" production is set by the difference value between the current main continuation value and the selected value. When the difference value is 100, "weak attack", when 200, "medium attack", In the case of 300, "strong attack" is set, in the case of 400, "strong attack" is set, and in the case of 500, "strongest attack" is set. With this configuration, it is possible to predict the amount of decrease in the continuous value (HP value) based on the effect contents executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, so that the effect contents for the player are changed. Can make you interested.

Similarly, when the value stored in the continuation value storage area 223n is "900", the selection value (main continuation value) to be selected is "900" at a ratio of 10% and "800". Is defined as 50%, “700” is selected as 30%, “600” is selected as 5%, and “500” is selected as 5%. When the value stored in the storage area 223n is “800”, the selection value (main continuation value) selected is “800” at a rate of 20% and “700” at a rate. Is defined as 50%, the proportion in which “600” is selected is 20%, and the proportion in which “500” is selected is 10%.

When the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223n is “700”, the selection value (main continuous value) selected is “900” at a ratio of 10% and “700”. The selected ratio is 30%, the selected ratio of “600” is 40%, the selected ratio of “500” is 20%, and the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223n is “600”. In the case of, the ratio of “800” selected is 10%, the ratio of “600” selected is 40%, the ratio of “500” selected is 40%, and the continuous value storage area 223n is specified. When the stored value is "500", the percentage of selecting "900" is 10%, the percentage of selecting "700" is 10%, and the percentage of selecting "500" is 80%. If the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223n is “400”, the ratio of “900” selected is 30%, the ratio of “700” selected is 20%, and the value of “500” is The selection rate is defined as 10%, and the selection rate of "400" is defined as 40%.

As described above, when the value stored in the continuous value storage area 223n is "700" to "400", the selected value may be higher than the current continuous value. In this case, a "recovery" effect in which the continuous value (HP value) of the opponent increases is executed as an effect executed on the display screen. By executing this recovery effect, when the continuation value (HP value) unexpectedly decreases, the effect of increasing or decreasing the continuation value (HP value) can be continuously executed again.

As described above, in the first continuation value main selection table 222cb used when the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is 4 or more, the proportion (light attack) in which the main continuation value is gradually decreased is selected. Is set higher than the rate at which other effects are selected. As a result, even if the pre-battle effect is executed for a long period of time, the effect of increasing or decreasing the continuous value can be advanced. Further, even if the ratio of selecting "weak attack" is set to be high, as in the first control example described above, the effect mode executed on the display screen is changed corresponding to the selected sub continuation value. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with various presentation modes, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

Returning to FIG. 197, the description will be continued. The second continuation value main selection table 222cc is used when the production mode of the pre-battle effect is selected when the pending winning flag 223cc is set to ON, that is, when the special symbol is a big hit after a few changes. This is the table used. Next, the contents of the second continuous value main selection table 222cc will be described with reference to FIG. 199. FIG. 199 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second continuous value main selection table 222cc. As shown in FIG. 199, the second continuation value main selection table 222cc is different from the first continuation value main selection table 222cb described with reference to FIG. 198 as the selectable selection values “777”, “333”, The major difference is that "300" to "0" are added. Hereinafter, description will be made focusing on the points different from the first continuation value main selection table 222cb. Note that, of the contents defined in the second continuation value main selection table 222cc, detailed description will be omitted for elements that are the same as the first continuation value main selection table 222cb or have different selection ratios. ..

The second continuation value main selection table 222cc is configured such that “777” and “333” can be selected as the values of the main continuation value in order to notify in advance that the winning information corresponding to the jackpot is present in the hold. There is. When “777” or “333” is selected as the selection value, a dedicated command indicating that is output to the display control device 114, and when the command is received, the display control device 114 is a sub continuation. It is configured so that no value is selected. As a result, the second continuous value main selection table 222cc is used to select the main continuous value for indicating that the jackpot is won, but the sub continuous value is selected, and the continuous value on the display (HP It is possible to suppress the situation where the value) increases or decreases.

In addition, in the third control example, when the main continuation value indicating that the jackpot is won is selected, by prohibiting the sub continuation value from selecting a value, the main continuation is given to the player. Although the value values (“777” and “333”) are configured to be notified, other configurations may be used and when a command related to the main continuation value indicating that the jackpot is won is received. In addition, the display control device 114 is configured to select the sub continuation value using a dedicated selection table, and when the value (sub continuation value) selected using the dedicated selection table is "0". Only, "777" and "333" may be displayed as the continuous value (HP value) on the display screen. In this case, for example, when the main continuation value is “777” as the values that the above-described dedicated selection table can take, a value to which “23” and “13” are added and “7” and “17” are added. It is preferable that the value for subtracting is selectable. With this configuration, when a value other than “0” is selected as the sub continuation value, the last digit of the continuation value (HP value) can be set to “0”. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that "777" has been selected as the continuation value, and the added value of displaying the continuation value (HP value) for indicating that the jackpot is won on the display screen. Can be increased.

Further, unlike the first continuous value main selection table 222cb, the second continuous value main selection table 222cc is configured to be selectable from "300" to "0". As a result, when the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen in the pre-battle effect becomes less than “300”, it is possible to make the player predict that the battle reach will be executed soon. .. Although details will be described later, also in the third continuation value main selection table 222cd (a table used when the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is 3 or less), “300” to “0” are selected as the second selection values. The continuation value main selection table 222cc is configured to be selectable at a lower selection ratio. With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the expectation for the jackpot.

In FIG. 199, a plurality of values such as “1000 to 800” are collectively shown as the current continuation value and the selected value, but in reality, “1000”, “900”, and “800” are independent contents. Is specified, and since the contents specified for each are the same, a plurality of values are collectively described.

Further, in the second continuation value main selection table 222cc, when the revival effect is executed, the value of "1000 to 800" is selected as the selected value regardless of the value of the main continuation value that is currently set. The ratio is set high. This is because the second continuation value main selection table 222cc is configured such that "777" and "333" can be selected as main continuation values for indicating that the jackpot is won, and the continuation value (HP value) is restored. In the pre-battle performance after doing, by increasing the continuous value (HP value) to a range in which the main continuous value for indicating that the jackpot is won, it is possible to win the jackpot again to the player. In order to show, the game can be played while expecting the main continuation value to be selected.

Returning to FIG. 197, the description will be continued. In the third continuation value main selection table 222cd, when the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is 3 or less, that is, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the battle reach set based on the fluctuation scenario is executed is 3 times or less. It is a table used when selecting a presentation mode of pre-battle production. Next, the third continuous value main selection table 222cd will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 200 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the third continuous value main selection table 222cd.

As shown in FIG. 200, the third continuation value main selection table 222cd has contents similar to those of the second continuation value main selection table 222cc shown in FIG. 199. Specifically, it is possible to win the jackpot. The points at which the main continuation values (“777”, “333”) for selection are set to “0”, the points at which the selection value “0” is set to “0”, and the whole The difference is that the selection rate of low values (“300” to “0”) is reduced as a selection value, and the other selection contents are similar to some extent with a slight difference in selection rate.

Returning to FIG. 197, the description will be continued. The continuous effect mode selection 4 table 222ce is a table for selecting an effect mode (effect mode) of pre-battle effect in the effect effect. Here, the contents of the continuous effect mode selection 4 table 222ce will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 201 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the continuous effect mode selection 4 table 222ce. Continuation production mode selection 4 table 222ce is, when the upper limit of the variation scenario is reached with respect to the continuation production mode selection table 222e of the above-mentioned first control example (the number of variations of the special symbol is 200 when the probability variation state is set). The difference is that a special effect (mode 6) is selected when the number of times is exceeded. The other elements are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In other words, in the third control example, for the special symbol variation after the jackpot, the variation scenario is set, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is set using the variation pattern table defined in the set variation scenario. Is configured to be selected. Then, in consideration of the data capacity of the main controller 110, the variation scenario is set up to a range in which the number of times of variation of the special symbol is a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times corresponding to the denominator of the jackpot probability multiplied by 5), and thereafter. Is configured so that a variation pattern is selected using a specific variation pattern table (table B) until the next jackpot is won (see FIG. 194).

In the third control example configured in this way, when the number of times of change of the special symbol exceeds the above-described predetermined number of times, it becomes difficult to execute the continuous effect using the change scenario, so a special effect mode “Mode 6” is selected as. When "mode 6" is selected, the battle effect ends, and the identification corresponding to the variation pattern (see FIG. 108(d)) defined in the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 (table B) The performance is executed. As the specific effect, for example, an effect that cannot be normally seen is executed, such as an effect in which a party is settled with an opponent who has not been settled during the battle effect.

In the third control example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, which is the upper limit of the fluctuation scenario, is set to "200" or "400", and only when the period during which the jackpot is not won in the probability variation state is long. Although it is configured to execute the above-described specific effect and give the player a feeling of satisfaction, other than that, for example, set when a jackpot is won in a particular jackpot type (eg, small category “k”). Only the specific variation scenario to be performed, the variation number of the special symbol which is the upper limit of the variation scenario may be set to “20”, and the above-mentioned privilege effect may be easily seen. As a result, when a plurality of jackpot types (small categories "a" to "k") are provided for a big jackpot (for example, a large jackpot "big jackpot A") in which the same jackpot game is executed, a game is played for each small bucket. The privilege (ease of performing a specific effect) given to a player can be made different, and even after winning the jackpot, it is possible to make the winning jackpot type interesting.

Next, with reference to FIG. 197(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 197(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example. The RAM 223 of the third control example is different from the RAM 223 of the first control example in that the continuation period counter 223p is deleted, the variation scenario update area 223ca, the remaining number counter 223cb, the pending hit flag 223cc, and the continuation setting flag 223cd. The difference is that is added. In the third control example, another control example regarding the continuous effect of the above-described first control example is described. Therefore, among the elements defined in the RAM 223, the elements that are not involved in the continuous effect are The description is omitted.

The variation scenario update area 223ca is an area that is updated and managed in order for the voice lamp control device 113 side to grasp the variation scenario set in the main control device 110 and the update status of the variation scenario. This variation scenario update area 223ca is determined in the command determination processing 4 (see FIG. 205) when it is determined that variation scenario related information for indicating the variation scenario set in the main controller 110 has been received (FIG. 205: S3271). : Yes), the variation scenario corresponding to the received variation scenario related information is selected from the plurality of variation scenarios stored in the variation scenario storage area 222ca, the selected variation scenario is set, and the variation display setting process ( Each time (see FIG. 147) is executed, the progress status of the variation scenario is updated. In the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207), the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is set based on the change status of the change scenario set in the change scenario update area 223ca. Then, when the jackpot is won, the set variation scenario is cleared (not shown).

The remaining number counter 223cb is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the next battle reach is executed based on the fluctuation scenario, and when the set value becomes 0, the battle reach Is configured to run. This remaining number counter 223cb calculates the number of times of change of the special symbol until the next battle reach is executed based on the information of the change scenario update area 223ca in the continuation effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207), and calculates it. The set value is set as the value of the remaining number counter 223cb (S4052 of FIG. 207).

The value set in the remaining number counter 223cb is decremented by 1 each time the continuation effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207) is executed (see S4057 in FIG. 207) to execute battle reach as a continuation effect or pre-battle effect. Referenced when determining whether to execute. Further, in the prize information command processing (see FIG. 206), when it is determined that there is a winning prize in the hold (S3251 in FIG. 206: Yes), the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is referred to correspond to the winning prize in the hold. It is determined which of the special symbol fluctuations to be performed first, and the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the battle reach executed when the value of the remaining number counter 223cb becomes 0. 206, S3253). Then, when the battle reach is executed, the value is set (cleared) to 0 (S4060 in FIG. 207).

The pending winning flag 223cc is a flag for indicating whether or not there is prize information to be won for the jackpot in the prize information storage area 223a, and when it is set to ON, the prize information storage area 223a. It shows that there is winning information for winning the jackpot.

The pending winning flag 223cc is not necessarily set to ON when the winning information for winning the jackpot exists in the winning information storage area 223a, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information for winning the jackpot is generated. When it is determined that the process is executed before the value of the remaining number counter 223cb becomes “0” (S3253: Yes in FIG. 206), it is set to ON. In continuation value setting process 4 (see FIG. 208), it is determined whether or not the pending-holding hit flag 223cc is set to ON (see S4151 in FIG. 208), and when it is determined to be ON (see FIG. 208). (S4151: Yes), the hundreds digit of the continuation value is executed based on the second continuation value main selection table 222cc.

The continuation setting flag 223cd is a flag for determining whether or not the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is set in the probability variation state, and the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is set when it is set to ON. It indicates that

In the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207), the setting status of the continuous setting flag 223cd is determined (see S4051 of FIG. 207), and it is determined that it is not set to ON (set to OFF). (S4051 of FIG. 207: No), after the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is set, it is set to ON (S4053 of FIG. 207). On the other hand, in the processing of S4051 of FIG. 207, when it is determined that the setting is ON (S4051 of FIG. 207: Yes), the processing of setting the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is skipped. Then, when the battle reach is executed, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is cleared to 0 (see S4060 of FIG. 207).

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the value of the remaining number counter 223cb from being reset when the value is already set in the remaining number counter 223cb. Thus, after the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the remaining number counter 223cb every time the continuous effect setting process 4 (see FIG. 207) is executed (see S4057 of FIG. 207). It is possible to easily synchronize the update status of the variation scenario set in the main control device 110 and the update status of the variation scenario managed by the voice lamp control device 113 by simply executing.

Further, in the process of S3254 executed in the prize information command process 4 (see FIG. 206), a value that does not correspond to the variation scenario, that is, a value that indicates the number of special symbol variations until the prize information to win the jackpot is executed. When the remaining number counter 223cb is set, the subtraction based on the value can be surely executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 202, details of the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 202 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an electrical configuration provided in the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 202, the display control device 114 of the third control example is different from the display control device 114 of the first control example described above in that a continuous value storage area 233ca is added to the work RAM 233 and the character ROM 234. The difference is that a first continuous value sub-selection table 234a3 and a second continuous value sub-selection table 234a4 are added to the NAND flash memory 234a.

The continuous value storage area 233ca is an area for storing a continuous value calculated based on the display continuous value command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and in the continuous value related command process 4 (see FIG. 210), The calculated continuation value is stored (see S7305 in FIG. 210). Then, in the final mode command processing (see FIG. 211), when it is determined that the final mode executed this time is not the winning battle (S8305: No in FIG. 211), the stored value is referred to (FIG. 211). S8306).

The first continuation value sub-selection table 234a3 and the second continuation value sub-selection table 234a4 are the first continuation value sub-selection table 222g1 (FIG. 117(b)) provided in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first control example described above. And the second continuation value sub-selection table 222g2 (see FIG. 117(c)), which is a table having the same contents and is provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first control example described above. The difference is that an effect counter (not shown) provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is used instead of the counter 223y4.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller 110 in Third Control Example>
Next, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present control example, with respect to the above-described first control example, instead of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127), a point using the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 203), the variation number subtraction process (FIG. 129) The difference is that the variation number subtraction process 4 (see FIG. 204) is used instead of the reference number), and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 203, the special symbol variation process 4 (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 4 (S104). The special symbol variation process 4 is a special symbol variation process of the above-described first control example (see FIG. 127), the variation time of the special symbol has passed (S214: Yes), and the lottery result of this time is a big hit. When the determination is made (S216: Yes), the contents of the processing executed are partially different, and the same processing is executed for the other elements. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the special symbol variation process 4 is executed, first, the same processes of S201 to S216 as the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 127) described above are executed. Then, in the processing of S216, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a big hit (S216: Yes), then the first big hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 192) is referred to, and the big hit type is selected. Based on this, a scenario for opening a specific winning opening is set. Specifically, the jackpot game content to be executed this time (for example, 15 rounds), the opening period from the start of the jackpot to the start of the first round, the interval period between the rounds, the last round (for example, , 15th round), including the ending period from the end of the jackpot to the end of the jackpot, a scenario in which the specific winning opening is opened in this jackpot is set.

When the process of S217 is finished, the probability variation flag 203g and the time saving medium counter 203h are reset (S218), the big hit start is set (S219), and the state command based on the big hit type is set (S251). Then, the same processing of S220 as in the above-described first control example is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S216, also when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (is out) (S216: No), the same process of S221 as the first control example described above is executed, and the process of S220. Is executed, and this processing ends.

In the process of S251 described above, a state command including at least information for indicating the jackpot type of the jackpot that has been won this time is set. The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 136) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holding-balls command, it extracts the information about the jackpot type from the state command, and responds from the variation scenario stored in the variation scenario storage area 222ca of the ROM 222 based on the extracted information. A variation scenario is selected, and the selected variation scenario is stored in the variation scenario update area 223ca.

With such a configuration, at the timing when the jackpot game is started, the voice lamp control device 113 side can understand which variation scenario is used to select the variation pattern of the special symbol after the jackpot is over. .. As a result, for example, compared with the case where the information command indicating the fluctuation pattern at the timing when the jackpot ends and the fluctuation of the special symbol starts and the command for indicating the fluctuation scenario set this time are output at the same time, the fluctuation is sure The production corresponding to the scenario can be set.

Further, in the third control example, the state command set at the timing when the jackpot game is started includes the information for indicating the variation scenario set after the jackpot is over, and therefore corresponds to the content of the state command. You can also set a big hit performance. Therefore, since the variation scenario set after the jackpot is finished can be suggested to the player by the effect executed during the jackpot, it is possible to make the player interested in the effect performed during the jackpot. it can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 204, the contents of the variation number subtraction process 4 executed in the third control example will be described. FIG. 204 is a flow chart schematically showing the contents of the variation count subtraction process 4. The variation number subtraction process 4 is different from the variation number subtraction process (see FIG. 129) of the first control example described above in that the process (S451, S452) for updating the variation scenario stored in the variation scenario update area 223ca is performed. The difference is that they are added, and the others are the same. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As illustrated in FIG. 204, when the variation count subtraction process 4 is executed, the same processes 401 to S411 of S3709 as the variation count subtraction process (see FIG. 129) of the first control example described above are executed. Next, it is determined whether a variation scenario is stored in the variation scenario update area 223ca (S451), and when it is determined that the variation scenario is stored (S451: Yes), the stored variation scenario is updated ( S452), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S451, when it is determined that the variation scenario is not stored (S451: No), this processing is terminated without executing the processing of S452.

Here, the update contents of the variation scenario executed in the process of S452 will be described in detail. First, the variation number subtraction process 4 (see S204) is executed as a subroutine of the special symbol variation process (see S203). Thereby, the variation scenario can be surely updated when it is determined that the variation of the special symbol is started.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Third Control Example>
Next, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present control example, in comparison with the first control example described above, the command determination process (see FIG. 140) is used instead of the command determination process 4 (S205), and the winning information command process (see S141) is used. , The point that the winning information command process 4 (see FIG. 203) is used, the difference is that the variation number subtraction process 4 (see FIG. 204) is used instead of the variation number subtraction process (see FIG. 129), and other points are used. Are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, when the process of FIG. 205 is executed, the same processes of S3201 to S3214 as in the above-described first control example are executed. Then, when the processing of S3214 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the received status command includes related information for setting the fluctuation scenario (S3271), and the related information for setting the fluctuation scenario is included. If it is determined (S3271: Yes), the variation scenario corresponding to the variation scenario related information included in the received state command is selected from the variation scenario storage area 222ca and stored in the variation scenario update area 223ca (S3272). .. Then, the display state command is set (S3215), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3271, when it is determined that the related information for setting the variation scenario is not included (S3271: No), the process of S3272 is skipped, the process of S3215 is executed, and the present process is executed. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 206, the winning information command processing 4 will be described. FIG. 206 is a flow chart showing the contents of the prize information command processing 4.

When the prize information command process 4 is executed, first, the information of the received prize command is stored in the corresponding prize information storage area (S3231), and whether the prize command received this time includes the information corresponding to the jackpot ( It is determined whether or not it is a winning prize (S3251). In the process of S3251, if it is determined that the winning is a winning (S3251: Yes), based on the place where the winning information received this time of the winning information storage area is stored, the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning information received this time The order in which is executed is calculated (S3252).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is larger than the variation order calculated in the process of S3252 (S3253), and when it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is larger (S3253: Yes). The value set in the remaining number counter 223cb, that is, the value indicating the remaining number of times (special symbol variation number) until the battle reach is executed based on the contents of the set variation scenario, that the jackpot is won. Based on the above, variably set to a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the battle reach is executed (S3254).

With this, it is possible to flexibly set and determine the period until the battle reach is actually executed, so during the battle production, the pre-battle production that is continuously executed until the battle reach is executed. The content (content of increase/decrease of continuous value) can be set based on the remaining period until the next battle reach is executed. Therefore, the effect of production can be enhanced.

When the process of S3254 is completed, the pending-holding flag 223cc is set to ON (S3255), other prefetching process is executed (S3256), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3251, when it is determined that the winning command received this time is not a winning prize (S3251: No), the processes of S3252 to S3255 are skipped, the process of S3256 is executed, and this process is ended. To do.

Next, the content of the continuous effect setting process 4 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 207. FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing the content of the continuous effect setting process 4. This continuous effect setting process 4 (S3806 in FIG. 207) is for setting an effect mode of a plurality of effects executed during the continuous effect. When the continuation effect setting process 4 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the continuation setting flag 223cd is set to ON (S4051). If it is determined that the continuation setting flag 223cd is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4051: Yes), then the remaining number counter is determined based on the information stored in the variation scenario update area 223ca. The value of 223cb is set (S4052).

Here, the processing of S4052 will be described. The variation scenario update area 223ca stores a variation scenario corresponding to (synchronized with) the variation scenario set by the main controller 110. Then, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the special symbol fluctuation in which the fluctuation pattern is selected using the table D is executed is calculated, and the calculated number of times is set in the remaining number counter 223cb. As a result, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb indicates the number of times the special symbol has changed until the next battle reach is executed based on the variation scenario.

In the third control example, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is discriminated, and the table for setting the continuation value is changed based on the discrimination result. Thereby, the continuation value set corresponding to the period until the next battle reach is executed (the number of changes of the special symbol) can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the continuous value is greatly reduced despite the situation that the battle reach is not executed for the time being (the situation in which the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is large).

Further, in a situation where the battle reach will be executed soon (a situation where the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is small), the continuous value can be greatly reduced in order to make the player expect the victory battle to be executed in the battle reach. it can.

Further, in the third control example, it is configured to determine in advance the number of fluctuations of the special symbol until the special symbol variation in which the battle reach is executed based on the information (variation pattern information) defined in the variation scenario. Therefore, it is possible to determine the variation of the special symbol for which the battle reach is executed, regardless of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol or the content of the winning information stored and stored. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an effect that is not uncomfortable.

In addition, as will be described later in detail, in the fluctuation pattern that is stored on hold, the fluctuation in the special symbol fluctuation that is executed before the battle reach (drawing battle) that is previously determined using the fluctuation scenario is executed. A variation pattern in which the lottery result of the special symbol is off at 60 seconds (variation pattern selected when the value “198” of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired in the first out-of-place (probability variation) variation pattern table (table C)) ), and the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and, if it is determined that the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (two times) or more before the special symbol variation is executed, the special symbol A value corresponding to the number of special symbol fluctuations until is changed is set as the value of the remaining number counter 223cb. Thereby, when the battle reach is executed without being based on the variation scenario, that is, even when the battle reach is executed based on the lottery result of the special symbol, in the special symbol variation executed by the battle reach (battle In the previous presentation), the continuous value can be appropriately increased or decreased.

Returning to FIG. 207, the description will be continued. When the process of S4052 is completed, the continuation setting flag 223cd is set to ON (S4053). As described above, while the continuation setting flag 223cd is set to ON, the determination processing of S4051 prevents the processing of S4052 from being executed. This prohibits the value of the remaining number counter 223cb from being set again when the value is already set in the remaining number counter 223cb. Therefore, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb which is not based on the variation scenario (when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb set corresponding to the special symbol variation which is the big hit) is set. Even if it is, the value can be continuously maintained.

After finishing the process of S4053, next, it is determined whether or not the current variation (special symbol variation) is a winning variation corresponding to a big hit (S4054), and if it is a winning variation (S4054: Yes), the battle In order to set the production mode of battle reach, which is the final mode of production, the process proceeds to S4013 described below. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation is not the hit variation (the variation is out-of-range) (S4054: No), then it is determined whether the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is 0 (S4055).

Here, when it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is 0 (S4055: Yes), that is, the special symbol variation of this time is a special symbol variation in which the battle reach is executed based on the variation scenario (see Table D). If the variation pattern is a special symbol variation that is selected using, it proceeds to the processing of S4013 described later, when it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is not 0 (1 or more) (S4055: No). ) Next determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern of this time is a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds (S4056).

In the process of S4056, it is determined using the first deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table (table C) whether the fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds (long deviation a) has been selected, and the fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds. If it is determined to be (S4056: Yes), the process proceeds to S4013 described below. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern is not 60 seconds (long deviation a) (S4056: No), the process proceeds to S4057.

In other words, in the above-described determination processing of S4054 to S4056, whether the pre-battle effect is set as the variation effect (the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81) set corresponding to the special symbol change this time, or the battle reach is set. It is determined whether or not to set, in S4054, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, and in S4055, it is determined whether or not the battle reach is set based on the variation scenario of the special symbol. Then, in S4056, in the special symbol lottery, it is determined whether or not the player wins out of the special symbols but the result is a specific lottery.

When the variation effect to be executed corresponding to the special symbol variation this time is the pre-battle effect, the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is decremented by 1 (S4057), and then, similarly to the first control example described above, S4004. The process from S4008 to S4008 is executed, then the continuous value setting process 2 is executed (S4058), and the present process is terminated. The contents of the continuation value setting process 2 (S4058) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when the variation effect to be executed corresponding to the special symbol variation this time is battle reach (when Yes is determined in any of S4054, S4055, and S4056), it is determined based on the final aspect selection table 222h. A mode is selected (S4013), a corresponding final mode command for display is set (S4014), the continuation effect flag 223r, the continuation setting flag 223cd, and the pending retention hit flag 223cc are set to OFF (S4059), and the remaining number counter 223cb is set. Is set to 0 (S4060), the contents stored in the continuous effect mode storage area 223m are cleared (process 4016 of S3709), and this process is ended.

Next, the continuous value setting process 4 (S4058) executed in the continuous effect setting process 4 (see S3806 of FIG. 207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuous value setting process 4 (S4058). In the continuation value setting process 4 (S4058), a process of determining a selection table for selecting a continuation value according to the value of the remaining number counter 223cb and the setting status of the pending-hold hit flag 223cc is executed. In this way, by changing the selection range of the continuation value set as the presentation mode of the pre-battle effect depending on the game situation, with respect to the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It can be of interest to the player.

When the continuous value setting process 4 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current change is the continuous value change timing. In the third control example, when the short deviation b having a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is selected in the first deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2 (table C), it is determined that it is the continuous value fluctuation timing. .. In the third control example, as the variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation pattern (short deviation b) that is determined to be the continuous value variation timing and the variation pattern (short deviation a that is not the continuous value variation timing). ) Is provided, but not limited to this, when the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to change the continuous value, and the continuous value is changed for the same change pattern. It may be configured such that it can be set whether or not to set. Further, when it is determined that the player has performed a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 (operating means), it may be determined that it is the continuous value change timing. With such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to enthusiastically participate in the game.

In the process of S4101, when it is determined that it is the continuous value change timing (S4101: Yes), in S4151 in order to execute the process for setting the effect mode for increasing/decreasing (changing) the continuous value in the current variable effect. Move to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the continuous value change timing (S4101: No), this processing is ended as it is.

In the processing of S4151, it is determined whether or not the pending-holding hit flag 223cc is set to ON (S4151). Here, when it is determined that the pending-hold winning flag 223cc is set to ON (S4151: Yes), that is, when the winning information corresponding to the special symbol to be won for the big hit exists in the pending, the second Based on the continuation value main selection table 222cc, a main continuation value value (hundreds of HP) is selected (S4157), and the selected main continuation value is a specific value (“333” or “777”). It is determined whether there is any (S4158).

In the process of S4158, when it is determined that the value of the selected main continuation value is a specific value (S4158: Yes), the display control is performed to display the selected value as it is on the third symbol display device 81. The device 114 sets the display specific continuous value command to which the effect continuous value (sub continuous value) is not added (S4159), and the present process is terminated. As described above with reference to FIG. 206, even when there is a special symbol to win the jackpot in the pending special symbol, the variation of the corresponding special symbol is executed based on the variation scenario until the variation of the corresponding special symbol is executed. When the battle reach (drawing battle) is executed, the pending winning flag 223cc is not set to ON, so that the main continuation value is not selected using the second continuation value main selection table 222cc. Thereby, the battle reach (victory or defeat battle) can be executed immediately after the battle reach (drawing battle) based on the variation scenario is executed. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect that is surprising to the player.

As described above, in the third control example, based on the variation order of the special symbol that is won in the jackpot that exists in the hold and the special symbol that the battle reach (drawing battle) is executed based on the variation scenario, In general, it is configured so that the value of the main continuation value is selected with the content corresponding to the special symbol variation that is executed earlier, but other configurations may be used, for example, it exists in the hold. The type of jackpot to be performed is determined in advance, and the determination result is a predetermined determination result (for example, a determination result corresponding to a probability variation jackpot in which a winning battle is executed) and a predetermined determination result (for example, a defeat battle The selection table for selecting the value of the main continuation value may be different between the case where the determination result corresponds to the normal hit executed).

Specifically, for example, when the variation of the special symbol in which the battle reach (drawing battle) is executed based on the variation scenario is executed earlier than the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot existing in the hold. , The variation number until the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the probability variation big hit is newly set to the value of the remaining number counter 223cb, and the variation scenario than the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the normal hit existing in the hold When the variation of the special symbol in which the battle reach (drawing battle) based on is executed is performed first, the value of the already set remaining number counter 223cb is not changed. In this way, by changing the value of the main continuation value that can be selected until the battle reach is executed, based on the type of jackpot to be executed (probability variation jackpot or normal jackpot), pre-battle performance It is possible to predict the type of jackpot according to the effect mode of, and the effect of effect can be enhanced.

Further, in the battle reach which is the draw battle, the continuation value finally displayed may be taken over as it is and the presentation mode of the next battle effect may be set. As a result, it is possible to make the battle effect that is repeatedly executed a plurality of times relevant, and to make the player interested in the effect that is executed for a long period of time.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4151, if it is determined that the pending-holding hit flag 223cc is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4151: No), then the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is 4 or more. Is determined (S4152), and when it is determined to be 4 or more (S4152: Yes), the main continuation value (hundreds of HP) is selected based on the first continuation value main selection table 222cb. (S4153), the process proceeds to S4154.

In addition, in the processing of S4152, when it is determined that the value of the remaining number counter 223cb is not 4 or more (3 or less) (S4152: No), the main continuation value is determined based on the third continuation value main selection table 222cd. A value (hundreds of HP) is selected (S4156), the process proceeds to S4154, a display continuation value command corresponding to the main continuation value selected this time is set (S4154), and the process proceeds to S4155. Transition.

In the process of S4155, the value of the main continuation value selected in the processes of S4153, S4156, and S4159 described above is stored in the continuation value storage area 223n. This makes it possible to read the value of the main continuation value selected this time and select a new continuation value at the next timing of setting the continuation value. When the process of S4155 ends, this process ends.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device 114 in Third Control Example>
Next, the control processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 209 to 211. In the present control example, in contrast to the above-described first control example, the command determination processing 4 (see FIG. 209) is used instead of the command determination processing (see FIG. 209), and the continuous value related command processing (see FIG. 164) is used. ) Instead of the continuation value related command process 4 (see FIG. 210) and the final mode command process (see FIG. 211) is added, and the other points are the same. The same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the third control example, in contrast to the above-described first control example, the value of the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during continuous production (pre-battle production, battle reach). Is configured to be set by the display control device 114. In this way, by setting the value of the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen by the display control device 114, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. As described above, the special symbol lottery result and the main continuation value set based on the variation scenario are set by the voice lamp control device 113, and the command for displaying the set main continuation value is displayed and controlled. Since it is configured to output to the device 114, more information than is necessary for the display control device 114 (for example, information for indicating a lottery result of a special symbol, or an update status of a variation scenario). It is not necessary to output a command to show (information). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load of the processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 (processing for setting a continuous value, processing for setting a command to be output to the display control device 114).

First, the content of the command determination processing 4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination processing 4. In this command determination processing 4, with respect to the command determination processing (see FIG. 158) of the above-described first control example, processing executed when there is a continuation value related command and whether or not there is a display final aspect command. The difference is that a process for determining is added.

When the command determination process 4 is executed, the same processes of S6401 to S6414 as the command determination process of the first control example (see FIG. 158) described above are executed, and it is determined that there is a continuation value related command in the process of S6414. If so (S6414: Yes), the continuation value related command process 4 is executed (S6451), and the process proceeds to S6401. The continuous value-related command processing 4 executed in the processing of S6451 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6414 that there is no continuation value related command (S6414: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display final mode command (S6452), and it is determined that there is a display final mode command. In the case (S6452: Yes), the display final mode command process is executed (S6453), and then the process proceeds to S6401.

The detailed display mode command processing executed in S6453 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6452 that there is no final aspect command for display (S6452: No), after executing the same processing of S6420 as the command determination processing of the first control example (see FIG. 158) described above, The process moves to step 6401 of S3709.

Next, the content of the continuation value related command process 4 (S6451) executed in the above-described command determination process 4 (see FIG. 209) will be described with reference to FIG. 210. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuation value related command processing 4. In the continuation value related command process 4, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set while the continuation effect is being executed, and the process for displaying and the continuation effect. The process for displaying the effect executed during is executed.

When the continuation value related command process 4 is executed, it is first determined whether or not the command received this time includes a display specific continuation value command (S7351). This display specific continuous value command is a specific value (“333” for indicating that the jackpot is won as the main continuous value in the continuous value setting process 4 (see S4058 of FIG. 208) executed in the voice lamp control device 113. ," 777") is selected. Although a detailed description will be given later, in the present process, when it is determined that there is a display specific continuation value command, the main continuation value output from the voice lamp control device 113 is displayed on the display screen as it is. doing. As a result, when a specific value (“333”, “777”) indicating that the jackpot is won as the main continuation value is selected, the display control device 114 sets the sub continuation value, and the main continuation value is set. To prevent the situation where the player cannot be notified of the specific value (“333”, “777”) that indicates that the jackpot is won by displaying the continuous value that is the sum of the above and the sub continuous value on the display screen. You can

In the processing of S7351, if it is determined that there is no display specific continuation value command (S7351: No), that is, if the display continuation value command is received, the continuation value (main continuation value) corresponding to the command received this time ) Is calculated (S7352), and it is determined whether the calculated continuation value (main continuation value) is 0 (S7353). In the processing of S7353, when it is determined that the continuation value (main continuation value) is not 0 (100 or more), the sub continuation value is selected based on the first continuation value sub selection table 234a3, and the processing of S7356. Transition. Since each sub-continuation value defined in the first continuation-value sub-selection table 234a3 is the same as that in the first continuation-value sub-selection table 222g1 (see FIG. 117(b)) of the above-described first control example. , The description is omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S7353, when it is determined that the continuation value (main continuation value) is 0 (S7353: Yes), the sub continuation value is selected based on the second continuation value subselection table 234a4, and the process of S7356. Move to. Since each sub continuation value defined in the second continuation value sub selection table 234a4 is the same as the second continuation value sub selection table 222g2 (see FIG. 117(c)) of the first control example described above. , The description is omitted.

Then, in the process of S7356, the continuation value (main continuation value) corresponding to the received command and the sub continuation value selected by the process of S7354 or S7355 are added (S7356). As described above, when the continuation value (main continuation value) corresponding to the received command is 0, the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is larger than 0. Since the second continuation value sub-selection table 234a4 in which the sub continuation value that cannot be a value (that is, a positive value cannot be selected as the sub continuation value) is defined is used, the audio lamp control device is configured. With respect to the content indicated by the continuation value (main continuation value) selected in 113 (the content indicating that the opponent's continuation value (HP value) is set to "0" and winning the probability variation jackpot in this battle production) It is possible to suppress a situation where the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is inconsistent (a value other than “0” is displayed).

When the process of S7356 is completed, next, the summed value stored in the summed value storage area 233k is read (S7357), and the summed value calculated by the process of S7356 and the summed value read by the process of S7357 are read. The difference is calculated (S7358). Then, the attack pattern display data table corresponding to the calculated difference is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7359), the total value calculated this time is stored in the total value storage area 233k (S7360), and the process of S7365 is performed. Move to.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7351 that there is a display specific continuation value command (S7351: Yes), then the summed value is read from the summed value storage area 233k (S7361), and the continuation calculated in the process of S7352 is performed. The difference between the value and the total value read in the processing of S7361 is calculated (S7362), the attack pattern display data table corresponding to the calculated difference is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S7359), and calculated this time. The continuous value is stored in the summed value storage area 233k (S7360), and the process proceeds to S7365.

When the process of S7360 or the process of S7364 described above is finished, the continuation value calculated in the process of S7352 is stored in the continuation value storage area 233ca (S7365), and then the continuation value related to the first control example described above. The same processing of S7306 to S7309 as the command processing (see FIG. 164) is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the final mode command processing (S6453) executed in the above-described command determination processing 4 (see FIG. 209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final mode command processing. In this final mode command processing, the process of setting the effect mode of battle reach (the display mode of the continuous value (HP value)) for indicating the result of the continuous effect (battle effect) and the set effect mode are displayed on the display screen. The process for displaying and the process are executed.

When the final mode command process (S6453) is executed, first, the final mode data table corresponding to the received command is determined (S8301). The received command indicates the final mode selected based on the final mode selection table 222h (see FIG. 118(a)) in the continuous effect setting process (see S3806 in FIG. 149) executed in the voice lamp control device 113. Information is included and the final aspect data table corresponding to the information is read from the character ROM 234 and determined.

Next, the summed value stored in the summed value storage area 233k, that is, the continuous value (HP value) currently displayed on the display screen is read (S8302), and the initial state of the final mode data table determined in the process of S8301 is read. It is set as value data (S8303). In this way, data relating to the continuation value (HP value) capable of setting various values is additionally set to the effect data corresponding to the effect pattern (attack pattern mode) of the predetermined number of battle reach. By making it possible, it is possible to reduce the amount of data relating to the effect mode of battle reach.

When the process of S8303 is finished, the final result information included in the received command is then read (process 8304 of S3709), and it is determined whether the read final result is information indicating a victory (S8305). Here, as the final result information included in the received command, the final result is determined using the information indicating the final mode selected based on the final mode selection table 222h (see FIG. 118(a)). Alternatively, the final display mode command processing may be executed by including the dedicated information for indicating the final result of the battle.

In the process of S8305, when it is determined that the final result is not victory (defeat or draw) (S8305: No), the continuous value stored in the continuous value storage area 233ca and the combined value storage area are stored. The difference value with the summed value being calculated is calculated (S8306), and the subtraction value of the attack effect data of the first self among the effect data of the determined final aspect data table is changed to the subtraction value obtained by adding the calculated difference. (S8307), the process proceeds to S8308.

Here, the processing contents of S8306 and S8307 described above will be described. In the third control example, the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is the main continuous value set by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the lottery result of the special symbol. The display control device 114 is configured to be created by adding the sub continuation value set for presentation. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen while reducing the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113, and it is possible to enhance the effect. However, in the battle reach that displays the result of the continuous effect (battle effect), the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen may be close to "0" without limit.

In such a case, for example, even if the voice lamp control device 113 sets a main continuation value at which the continuation value (HP value) of the opponent does not become “0” based on the lottery result of the special symbol, the display control device 114. There is a possibility that the continuation value (HP value) of the other party displayed on the display screen may become "0" due to the sub-continuation value for presentation set in. That is, while the displayed continuation value (HP value) is large, there is an error between the main continuation value set and managed by the voice lamp control device 113 and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen. Even if there is, there is no adverse effect on the production side, but rather it has a positive effect of increasing the variation of the production, whereas when the displayed continuous value (HP value) becomes small, the voice lamp control device The difference between the main continuation value set and managed by 113 and the continuation value (HP value) displayed on the display screen causes a contradiction in the result of the effect, and the effect that gives the player a feeling of distrust is executed. There was a problem that there is a risk of doing.

Therefore, in the third control example, when the final aspect (battle reach) of the continuous production (battle production) is set, the final result of the current continuous production (battle production) is determined, and the determination result is In cases other than victory, that is, when the opponent's continuous value (HP value) does not become "0", the error between the main continuous value and the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen is attacked during battle reach. I try to solve it by directing.

With this, it is possible to suppress the above-described problem that occurs when the result of the continuous effect (battle effect) is displayed while leaving an error between the main continuous value and the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen. You can In the third control example, the main continuation value and the continuation value (HP) displayed on the display screen in the first attack pattern of the player himself/herself set as the final aspect (battle reach) of the continuation effect (battle effect). Since it is configured to eliminate the error with respect to the value), the effect mode of the remaining attack pattern of itself (for example, the second time or the third time) can be made common.

In addition, when the production mode of the attack pattern of 0 times is set as the production mode of the final mode (battle reach) selected this time, the continuous value of the opponent does not decrease during the battle reach. Since it is a mode, even if the error between the main continuous value and the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen is not eliminated, the error between the continuous value (HP value) displayed on the display screen is produced. Since the problem of causing inconsistency in the result does not occur, in the process of S8307, the attack effect data change process is configured not to be executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S8305, when it is determined that the final result is victory (S8305: Yes), the processes of S8306 and S8307 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S8308.

In the process of S8038, the final mode data table determined in the process of S8301 is read from the countdown effect table storage area (not shown) of the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8308). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S8308 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8309).

Then, based on the attack pattern display data table included in the final aspect data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8309, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8310), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S8311). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S8312), the final mode command process ends, and this process ends.

<Regarding another control example of the third control example>
Next, another control example of the above-described third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 to 214. In the above-mentioned third control example, by setting the variation scenario based on the jackpot type and selecting the variation pattern based on the set variation scenario, during the period in which the continuous production is executed, the pre-battle production is performed. , Battle Reach and was configured to be able to execute effectively. Further, in order to prevent the player from getting tired of the continuous effect executed in accordance with a predetermined variation scenario in advance, a plurality of variation scenarios are prepared, and different depending on the jackpot type. It was configured to select a variable scenario.

Although the third control example configured in this manner has a configuration capable of enhancing the effect of continuous effect, it is set in correspondence with the storage capacity for storing a plurality of fluctuation scenarios and the plurality of fluctuation scenarios. There is a problem that the storage capacity for storing a plurality of jackpot types increases. In particular, since the main controller 110 needs to store various processing and data relating to games within a limited storage capacity, the storage capacity increases, so that other processing and data storage capacity can be reduced. There was a risk that the game would be stressed and, as a result, the interest in the game would be diminished.

On the other hand, in another control example of the third control example, even if the number of variation scenarios is reduced, in order to be able to provide continuous production with a large variety of variations, as in the third control example described above, the jackpot type In addition to the variation scenario set corresponding to, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result, variation using a different variation scenario for a predetermined period (for example, 10 variations of the special symbol variation) The pattern is selected.

With such a configuration, even when one variation scenario is set, the content of the continuous effect to be executed can be changed depending on the timing when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the specific lottery result. it can. Further, since the effect mode during continuous effect is set by combining a plurality of variation scenarios, even if the number of variation scenarios to be stored is reduced, it is possible to execute a continuous effect with a wide variety of variations.

<Electrical configuration in another control example of the third control example>
Here, with reference to FIGS. 212 to 214, an electrical configuration in this separate control example will be described. This separate control example is different from the above-described third control example in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 are partially changed and that the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are partially changed. doing. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 212A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in another control example of the third control example. As shown in FIG. 212(a), in this separate control example, in addition to the above-described third control example, a small hit type selection table 202da is added, and the contents of the first random number table 202a are partially changed. This is different from the point that the contents of the variation scenario setting table 202ca are partially changed. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first hit random number table 202a in this separate control example is provided with a range for determining "small hit" in a part of the case where the special symbol lottery result is out of alignment. The first random number table 202a in this control example for each book will be described with reference to FIG. 213(a). FIG. 213(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first random number table 202a in the control example for this.

As shown in FIG. 213(a), in the above-mentioned third control example, the range of the first random number counter value C1 (“5 "Small hits" are defined for the range of "295 to 299" which is a part of (299"). When the "small hit" is won as the special symbol lottery result, a privilege that is less than the above-mentioned big hit but is advantageous to the player is given.

Specifically, control is performed to open the variable winning a prize device 65 for a short period so that the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. As described above, since "small hit" can be selected when the special symbol lottery result is not a big hit, when the "small hit" is won, the game set in the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to prevent the state from being set.

Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202da will be described with reference to FIG. 213(b). FIG. 213(b) shows the contents of the small hit type selection table 202da. As shown in FIG. 213(b), in another control example of the third control example, a plurality of small hit types are set. Specifically, in the range of "0 to 49", the acquired value of the small hit type counter value C5 that can acquire any one of the total 100 counter values "0" to "99" , "Small hits A" are associated and defined, and "Small hits B" are associated and defined in the range of "50 to 99".

Then, when the "small hit A" is won, a change scenario for executing a specific change pattern is additionally set, and when the "small hit B" is won, a specific change pattern is executed. The change scenario of is configured so that it is not set additionally.

Next, the contents of the variation scenario setting table 202ca in the present control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 214(a) and 214(b). FIG. 214(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the change scenario A1 stored in the change scenario setting table 202ca, and FIG. 214(b) shows the change scenario setting table 202ca. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content prescribed|regulated in the stored small post-small variation scenario.

In the variation scenario setting table 202ca in this separate control example, only the above-mentioned two variation scenarios are stored, and when the probability variation jackpot is won in the lottery for the special symbol, the variation scenario A1 is set after the jackpot is over. The variable scenario storage area 203ca is configured to be stored. In addition, when the small hit is won in the lottery of the special symbol 2 executed during the probability change state, the small hit post-variation scenario is set and stored in the variation scenario storage area 203ca. Then, after the small hit, the number of special symbol fluctuations specified in the variation scenario after the small hit, the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected based on the content specified in the variation scenario after the small hit. There is.

Although detailed description is omitted, also in the present control example, the variation number subtraction process 4 (see FIG. 204) is executed as in the third control example described above, and each time the special symbol variation is executed ( In the special symbol variation process 4 (see FIG. 203), each time it is determined that the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed), the variation scenario set in the variation scenario storage area 203ca is configured to be updated. ..

The variation scenario storage area 203ca is configured to be able to store both the variation scenario A1 and the variation scenario after the small hit, and when the small hit is won in the probability variation state, both variation scenarios are subjected to the variation number subtraction processing 4 (See FIG. 204). Therefore, the variation scenario A1 can be updated regardless of the number of small wins during the probability variation state, and the table B can be set when the number of special symbol variations after the end of the big hit reaches 200 times. ..

As shown in FIG. 214(a), in the variation scenario A1, the above-described table A (special (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc4) is defined in association with the range of the number of variations "1 to 4", and the number of variations Is defined in the range of “5 to 13” (first deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2), and the number of fluctuations is “14” in table D (second deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202dc3). Is prescribed.

After that, until the number of fluctuations reaches “195”, the table C (first deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in association with the number of fluctuations 9 times, and the table D (second The deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202dc3) is associated and defined. In other words, during the period when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the jackpot is “5 to 195”, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the table C after the special symbol fluctuation in which the fluctuation pattern is selected is executed nine times. The scenario in which the selected special symbol variation is executed is repeatedly executed.

Then, the table C (first deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202dc2) is defined in the range of the number of fluctuations of "195 to 198", and table D (second deviation (probability change) fluctuation is set to "199" as the number of fluctuations. The pattern table 202dc3) is defined. Then, in the range where the number of fluctuations is “200 to”, the table B is defined in association with the third control example as described above.

As shown in FIG. 214B, in the post-small hit variation scenario, the above-described table A (special (probable variation) variation pattern table 202dc4) is defined in association with the range of variation times “1 to 9”, Table D (the second deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202dc3) is defined in the range of the number of fluctuations of "5 to 13", and table D (second deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table of the number of fluctuations is "10". 202 dc3) is defined. Then, the variation scenario is configured to end when the number of variations exceeds 10. When the variation scenario after the small hit ends, the variation pattern of the special symbol is continuously selected in accordance with the content defined in the variation scenario A1 in which the variation scenario is updated at the same time.

As described above, in another control example of the third control example, when the small hit is won as the lottery result of the special symbol, a different variation scenario occurs for a predetermined period (for example, 10 variations of the special symbol). Since it is configured to be set, it is possible to change the fluctuation pattern table used when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol according to the timing of winning the small hit. Therefore, it is possible to provide continuous effects of various patterns without preparing a plurality of variation scenarios in advance as in the third control example described above.

In addition, at the end of the variation scenario used when the small hit is won, the variation pattern table (table D) in which the battle reach is executed (is easy) is defined. It is possible to prevent the situation where the battle reach is not executed for a long time.

In addition, in this separate control example, the configuration having one variation scenario (variation scenario A1) is used as the variation scenario set after the end of the probability variation jackpot, but as in the third control example described above, there are a plurality of variation scenarios. A configuration may be used. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide continuous production of more patterns. In addition, in this separate control example, when a small hit is won, the small hit type (small hit A) that sets different fluctuation scenarios and the small hit type (small hit B) that does not set different fluctuation scenarios are the same. Although it is configured to have a ratio (50%), it has, but the distribution ratio of each small hit type may be set appropriately, the probability of winning a small hit, the battle reach in the variation scenario A1. The variation pattern table (table D) in which is executed (is easily executed) is set based on the interval and the content of the privilege (prize ball) provided at the time of winning the small hit.

Further, in the control example according to the present invention, the same variable winning device (variable winning device 65) is opened in the case of winning the special symbol big hit and the case of winning the small prize. The machine 10 may be provided with a second variable winning device which is opened only when the small hit is won. In this case, it is preferable to configure that the opening of the second variable winning device is harder to understand than the opening of the variable winning device 65. With this configuration, the small hit is won during the continuous effect. This can make it difficult for the player to grasp the facts, so that continuous production of various patterns can be provided to the player without discomfort. In addition, in this case, it is difficult for the player to understand the display of the third symbol for indicating that the small hit has been won, for example, at the timing of stopping the third symbol, the third symbol is reduced or displayed, In the main display area Dm of the three-symbol display device 81, it is preferable to display a lively effect that is more conspicuous than the third symbol.

In this separate control example, the first random number table 202a is configured so that only the special symbol 2 is won as a small hit, but the special symbol 1 may be configured to be won as a small hit. In this case, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may have different probabilities of winning a small hit.

In another control example of the third control example described above, as a condition to set a variation scenario (variation scenario after small hit) different from the variation scenario (variation scenario A1) that is predetermined based on the lottery result of the special symbol , Shows the case where the special symbol is won as a small hit, but it may be configured to set a different variation scenario when other conditions are satisfied, for example, in the second control example described above. A different change scenario may be set when the falling lottery used is won.

<Regarding another control example of the suggestive effect described in the first control example>
Next, another control example of the suggestive effect (see FIG. 100) described in the above-described first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216. In the above-mentioned first control example, the execution timing and the end timing of the suggestive effect are set separately, and the period in which the suggestive effect is executed can be adjusted. Specifically, the end timing of the suggestive effect (the end timing of the countdown effect that is the latter half part) is set based on the execution timing of the specific effect that is the target of the suggestive effect, and the start timing of the suggestive effect (the precursor part that is the first half part). The start timing of the effect) can be set from a plurality of points, and the suggestive effect is executed without setting the period to be executed in advance to increase the degree of freedom in setting the suggestive effect. In the suggestive effect of the first control example described above, the timing at which the specific effect that is the target of the suggestive effect is executed is set from a plurality of timings, and the end timing of the suggestive effect (countdown effect of the countdown effect is set based on the execution timing of the suggestive effect. By setting the end timing) and the execution period of the suggestive effect, various combinations of suggestive effects can be executed.

On the other hand, in this separate control example, the suggestive effect is executed in a state where the end timing of the suggestive effect is not set, and a predetermined condition that is satisfied during the period in which the suggestive effect is being executed (operation content of the frame button 22) Based on the above, the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect is determined, and the countdown effect is executed toward the determined specific effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the presentation mode of the suggestion production depending on the operation content of the frame button 22 by the player during execution of the suggestion production, so that the player is motivated to participate in the game. You can

First, with reference to FIG. 215, the flow of suggestive effects in the control example for each book will be described. FIG. 215 is a timing chart showing the flow of effects when the effect mode of the suggested effects is changed depending on the operation content of the frame button 22 during execution of the suggested effects. The same elements as those in the timing chart (see FIG. 100) showing the flow of the suggested effect in the above-described first control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 215, when the variation of the special symbol capable of executing the suggestive effect is started, the precursor display (the first half part of the suggestive effect (see FIG. 98(a)) is executed for 13 seconds after 10 seconds from the start of the change. To be done. A button operation valid period for validly determining the pressing operation on the frame button 22 is set for the latter eight seconds of the display period in which the precursory display is displayed, and the frame button 22 in the button operation valid period is set. Depending on the content of the operation to, the effect mode (display mode, display period) of the countdown effect, which is the latter half part of the suggested effect, is determined.

Specifically, during the button operation effective period, the comment "Press the button at the right time" is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the player operates the frame button 22 for the display. The timing is determined by the operation timing determination means. The operation timing determination means is configured to be able to determine the operation timing of the player with respect to the frame button 22 in a plurality of stages, and the frame button 22 can be operated at the best timing (for example, within 0.2 seconds before and after the specified timing). When the operation (hereinafter, referred to as button operation B) is performed, and the range deviated from the designated timing with respect to the button operation B (for example, within the range of 1 second before and after the designated timing, the range of the button operation B is excluded. When the frame button 22 is operated (hereinafter, referred to as button operation A) within the range, the frame button 22 is operated at other timing, or the frame button 22 is not operated (hereinafter, no button operation is performed). At least).

Here, when the operation timing determination means determines that the button operation is A, that is, when the button operation is performed during the button operation valid period, but the operation timing is slightly deviated, it is executed during the current variation effect. Among the specified effects, the countdown effect for the specific effect b (cut-in display executed 26 seconds after the start of fluctuation) is set. Specifically, a countdown display for 3 seconds is executed as the countdown effect (the values displayed in the second display area of the display screen of FIG. 98(b) are "3", "2", "1", " The effect of counting down in the order of "0" is executed). Then, the cut-in display that is the specific effect b is displayed at the timing when the numerical value displayed in the countdown effect is "0".

Next, if the operation timing determination means determines that the button operation is B, that is, if the button operation is performed at a timely timing during the button operation valid period, the operation is specified among the specific effects executed during the current variable effect. A countdown effect for the effect a (PUSH display executed 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation (see FIG. 99)) is set. Specifically, a 7-second countdown display is executed as the countdown effect. Then, the PUSH display which is the specific effect a is displayed at the timing when the numerical value displayed in the countdown effect is "0".

If the operation timing determination means determines that there is no button operation, that is, if no button operation is performed during the button operation effective period, or if the button operation is performed at a significantly deviated timing, the countdown effect is executed. Without performing, the suggestive effect ends at the timing when the precursor effect ends (gasse suggestive effect).

As described above, this separate control example sets the execution timing and the end timing of the suggestive effect at different timings (conditions) as in the first control example described above. , The specific effect which is the target of the suggestive effect being executed is determined based on a predetermined condition (a determination result of the operation content of the frame button 22) that is established during the precursor effect execution period which is the first half part, and the latter half part of the suggestive effect is determined. The display mode (display mode, display period) of the countdown effect is set. This allows the player to participate in the game eagerly.

In this control example, the later the specific performance (specific performance a, specific performance b) executed at a plurality of timings, the higher the degree of expectation that the special symbol variation of this time is a big hit. It is configured to be high. Therefore, if the button operation is performed at a good timing during the button operation effective period, the countdown effect is executed for the specific effect with a high expectation for the jackpot, which can reassure the player.

That is, in FIG. 215, the variation pattern in which the specific effect a and the specific effect b are executed is shown as an example. However, among the plurality of variation patterns set in the pachinko machine 10, only the specific effect b is executed. Since there is also an out-of-shift variation pattern, when the button operation A is performed in the variation pattern shown in FIG. 215, the target of the suggestive effect is the specific effect b, which causes the player to do so. However, it is not possible to notify in advance whether or not this variation pattern is a variation pattern in which both the specific effect a and the specific effect b are executed, and the effect proceeds with the player feeling uneasy. Become.

However, when the frame button 22 is operated in good timing during the button operation effective period, the countdown effect for the specific effect a is executed, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind without feeling uneasy. Can be made. Therefore, the player can participate in the game in which the frame button 22 is motivated.

In the control example according to this embodiment, in a variation pattern in which the specific effect a and the specific effect b are executed as one variation pattern, a specific condition that is a target of the suggestive effect is satisfied after the suggestive effect is executed. Although the determination is made based on the operation content of the frame button 22), the specific effect that has not been the target of the suggestive effect may not be displayed. Further, in a variation pattern in which only the specific effect a is executed as one variation pattern, the timing at which the specific effect a that is the target of the suggestive effect is executed is determined based on a predetermined condition that is established after the suggestive effect is executed. It may be configured to do so. With this configuration, when the frame button 22 cannot be operated at a good timing, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the content of the suggestive effect executed when the frame button 22 can be operated at a good timing, so that the player is motivated. Can operate the frame button 22.

In the another control example described above, as the operation content of the frame button 22 after the suggestion effect is started, the operation effect for operating the frame button 22 at a proper timing is executed during the aura effect which is the first half part of the suggestion effect. However, it is configured to determine the specific effect that is the target of the suggestive effect based on the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated during the operation effect, and set the effect mode of the countdown effect corresponding to the determined specific effect. ing.

In this case, as the operation effect, the characters "Press the button at the right time" are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device as the display mode showing the content of the operation effect, and the index display for indicating the specified timing of the operation effect. It is preferable to display the mode and the moving display mode that moves with the passage of time, and to display to the player that the timing when the moving display mode overlaps with the index display mode is the best timing. This allows the player to be notified of the content of the operation effect in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, as a result of the operation of the frame button 22 for the operation effect, the movement display mode is stopped and displayed at the timing when the frame button 22 is actually operated, and an error from the index display mode is displayed so that the player can visually recognize it. It is advisable to display the letters “Excellent” and “Good” for notifying whether the error range is within the allowable range (whether it corresponds to button operation A or button operation B). This allows the player to be notified of the result of the operation effect in an easy-to-understand manner.

According to the example described above, in order to vary the effect mode of the suggestion effect based on the operation content of the frame button 22, a configuration for discriminating an error between the operation timing of the frame button 22 and a previously specified timing However, other configurations may be used as long as the production mode of the suggested production can be changed based on the predetermined specified condition and the actual operation content, for example, within the period in which the operation production is executed. Alternatively, the number of times the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) may be determined, and the effect mode of the suggestive effect may be varied based on the result of the determination, or the frame button may be used as an operation means that can be operated by the player. It is also possible to provide operation means other than 22, determine whether or not a specific operation means is operated among the plurality of operation means, and vary the effect mode of the suggestive effect based on the result of the determination.

In another control example shown in FIG. 215, the production mode of the suggested effect (the production mode of the countdown effect which is the latter half part of the suggested effect) is set based on the operation content of the frame button 22 during the button operation effective period. However, in order to achieve the same effect, the effect mode of the suggestive effect may be set based on the timing when the pressing operation is executed during the button operation effective period. Here, a detailed description will be given with reference to FIG. 216.

FIG. 216(a) is a timing chart showing the flow of effects when the effect mode of the suggested effect is changed depending on the operation timing (pressing timing) of the frame button 22 during execution of the suggested effect. The same elements as those in the timing chart (see FIG. 100 or FIG. 215) showing the flow of the suggested effect in the above-described first control example and another control example are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 216, in this control example, the button operation effective period (8 seconds) set during the precursor effect period which is the first half part of the suggested effect is determined to be the first half (2 seconds) and the second half (6 seconds). It is classified as possible. Here, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. 216(b) to 216(d) of the production mode of the suggestive production set based on the operation timing (pressing timing) of the frame button 22 during the button operation effective period.

FIG. 216(b) is a timing chart showing an effect mode of suggestive effect when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the first half (2 seconds) of the button operation effective period. ) Is a timing chart showing an effect mode of suggestive effect when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) within the latter half (6 seconds) of the button operation effective period, and FIG. It is the timing chart which showed the production mode of suggestive production when the frame button 22 is not operated (pressed) during the operation effective period.

First, as shown in FIG. 216(b), when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) within the first half (2 seconds) of the button operation valid period, the target of the suggestive effect is the specific effect a. Then, the first half (2 seconds) of the button operation valid period to 1 second later is set as the precursor period (8 seconds), and the second half (6 seconds) of the button operation valid period is started. It is set as an execution period (12 seconds) of the countdown effect from 1 second to the timing when the specific effect a is started.

In this way, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first half (2 seconds) with respect to the switching timing of the first half (2 seconds) and the second half (6 seconds) defined in the button operation effective period (8 seconds). In the case where it is determined that the frame button 22 is operated just before the end of the first half (2 seconds), the timing of switching the production mode of the suggestive production (switching from the precursor production to the countdown production) is delayed by 1 second. Even if there is, it is possible to execute the process of smoothly switching the effect using the period (1 second) until the effect is switched.

In this case, the button operation effective period changing process for invalidating the operation of the frame button 22 is executed for the latter half (6 seconds) of the preset button operation effective period (8 seconds). As a result, even if the countdown effect is executed during the period in which the button operation effective period is set in advance, the operation on the frame button 22 during that time can be invalidated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 216(c), when it is determined that the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) within the latter half (6 seconds) of the button operation effective period, the target of the suggested effect is specified. b, and is set as the execution period (3 seconds) of the countdown effect from the timing when the button operation effective period ends to the timing when the specific effect b starts. Then, when there is no operation on the frame button 22 during the button operation effective period, as shown in FIG. 216(d), the specific effect which is the target of the suggested effect is not set and the frame operation is performed during the button operation effective period. The precursor effect (13 seconds) is executed, and thereafter, the suggestive effect is finished without performing the countdown effect (geek suggestive effect).

As described above with reference to FIG. 216, even if the specific effect that is the target of the suggestive effect is set based on the operation timing of the frame button 22 during the button operation effective period, the above description is made. The same effect as that of FIG. 215 can be obtained.

In the example described with reference to FIG. 216, the button operation valid period (8 seconds) is divided into two periods (first half and second half), and different times (first half (first half ( 2 seconds) and the latter half (6 seconds)) are set, but it is only necessary to be able to identify the operation timing of the frame button 22 during the button operation valid period. The period may be divided into two or more periods (for example, divided into three periods), or the same time may be set for the divided periods. Further, the button operation effective period (8 seconds) is divided into two periods (for example, period A (1 second) and period B (1 second)), and the period A and the period B are set alternately. You may do it. As a result, a different suggestive effect is executed only by slightly shifting the timing when the button operation is performed on the frame button 22, and the effect can be enhanced.

As described above, in another control example of the suggestive effect described in the first control example described with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216, the operation mode of the player with respect to the frame button 22 as the predetermined condition that is satisfied during execution of the suggestive effect ( Although the presence/absence of the operation, the operation content, and the operation timing are set, other conditions may be set. For example, the prize (the first entrance 64, the second entrance) generated during the suggestive performance execution. Even if the occurrence timing of the entry of the ball into the mouth 140, the entry of the ball into the general winning opening 63, the entry (passing) of the ball into the through gate 67, or the content of the occurrence is set as a predetermined condition. good. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player stops firing the ball during the change of the special symbol.

Further, in another control example of the suggestive effect described in the first control example described with reference to FIGS. 215 and 216, an example in which the suggestive effect is completed during one special symbol change is shown, for example, As shown in FIG. 101 of the first control example described above, the suggestive effect may be executed across a plurality of special symbol variations.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Device 113 in Another Control Example of Suggested Rendering Explained in First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 217 to 219, a control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present control example will be described. In this separate control example, in contrast to the above-described first control example, a countdown effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 217) is provided in place of the countdown effect setting process (see FIG. 152), frame button input monitoring/effect. The difference is that the process 5 (see FIG. 218) is provided. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the countdown effect setting process 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 217. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the contents of the countdown effect setting process 5. When the countdown effect setting process 5 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a hit (S4303). If it is determined that the hit is a hit (S4303: Yes), it is specified 26 seconds after the start of the variation. For the effect b (cut-in), the specific effect a (PUSH) is set after 30 seconds (S4371), and the process proceeds to S4373.

On the other hand, in the process of S4303, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is not hit (S4303: No), the specific effect b (cut-in) is set 26 seconds after the start of the variation (S4372), and the process of S4373 is performed. Transition.

In the process of S4373, the button operation effective period is set in the period of 15 seconds to 23 seconds from the start of fluctuation (S4373), the precursor effect corresponding to the current variation pattern is set (S4374), and the precursor effect command for display is set. Then (S4375), the present process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 218. FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 5. When the frame button input monitoring/effect process 5 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (S5051), and when it is determined that it is not detected (S5051: No), this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has been detected (S5051: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the valid period of the first precursor effect (S5081), and if it is determined that it is in the valid period of the first predictive effect. (S5081: Yes), if it is determined that the processing related to the frame button operation during the first omen effect (S5082 to S5088) is executed and it is determined that the first omen effect is not valid (S5081: No), the second It is determined whether it is during the valid period during the omen effect (S5089), and if it is determined that the second omen effect is during the effective period (S5089: Yes), processing related to the frame button operation during the second omen effect. The second predictive effect setting process is executed (S5090). On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the effective period of the second aura effect (S5089: No), the present process is terminated.

Next, the process (S5082 to S5088) related to the frame button operation during the first omen effect will be described. First, an error between the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated and the designated timing set in the precursor effect is calculated (S5082), and it is determined whether the error is within 0.1 second (S5083). If the error is within 0.1 second (S5083: Yes), the specific effect a is set as the effect target (S5084), and the period from the start of fluctuation to 23 seconds to 30 seconds is set as the countdown effect period (S5085). ), a display countdown effect command corresponding to the set mode is set (S5077), and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the error is not within 0.1 seconds (S5083: No), then it is determined whether the error is within 0.5 seconds (S5086), and it is determined that the error is within 0.5 seconds. If determined (S5086: Yes), the specific effect b is set as the effect mode (S5087), the period from 23 seconds to 26 seconds from the start of fluctuation is set as the countdown effect period (S5088), and the process of S5077 described above is performed. Then, the process ends. In the processing of S5086, when it is determined that the time is not within 0.5 seconds (S5086: No), the process directly proceeds to the above-described processing of S5077, and the present processing ends.

Next, the second predictive effect setting process executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 5 (see FIG. 218) will be described with reference to FIG. 219. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the content of the second aura effect setting process. When the second precursor effect setting process is executed, first, it is determined whether the present is the first half period, that is, the period in which the frame button 22 is operated is the first half period (S5091). In the process of S5091, when it is determined that it is the first half period (S5091: Yes), the specific effect a is set as the effect target (S5092), the precursor effect period is set to 8 seconds (S5093), and 18 times from the start of fluctuation. The period from second to 30 seconds is set as the countdown effect period (S5094), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the first half period (S5091: No), then it is determined whether the present is the second half period, that is, the period in which the frame button 22 is operated is the second half period (S5095). If it is determined to be the second half period (S5095: yes), the specific effect b is set as the effect target (S5096), the precursor effect period is set to 13 seconds (S5097), and 23 seconds to 26 seconds from the start of fluctuation. Is set as the countdown effect period (S5098), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5095 that it is not the second half period (S5095: No), the precursor effect period is set to 13 seconds (S5099), and the present process is ended.

<Regarding Another Example of Control Process of Audio Lamp Control Unit 113 in Extended Display Described in First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 220, another example of the extended display process (process for extending and displaying the ending display of the big hit during the special symbol variation period after the end of the big hit) set after the big hit is described. In the above-described first control example, when the number of times the special symbol has changed is executed a predetermined number of times (4 times) after the extended display is executed, or a predetermined period (4 seconds) elapses after the extended display is executed. It uses the configuration to determine that the end condition of the extended display is satisfied when it is done, before the end condition based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, if the end condition based on the elapsed period is satisfied, the third symbol Demonstration display is performed on the display device 81, and the demonstration display is configured to be continued until the special symbol variation in which the variation time of a short period (0.5 seconds) is set is completed.

On the other hand, in this another example, the end condition based on the elapsed period is satisfied before the end condition based on the number of times of change of the special symbol, and the short-term (0.5 seconds) change after the extended display ends. When the special symbol variation that time is set is executed, the variation effect is set based on the remaining number of variations of the special symbol variation in which the variation time of the short period (0.5 seconds) is set. There is.

Specifically, a specific period effect in which a variation effect of a period longer than the actual special symbol variation period (0.5 seconds) is executed is set, and, for example, the remaining variation number of the special symbol is two times (this time variation In the case of), a variation effect of 2 seconds is set, and when the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol is 3 times (including the variation this time), a variation effect of 3 seconds is set, and the remaining variation of the special symbol When the number of times is four (including the change this time), a change effect of 4 seconds is set.

Then, when the next special symbol variation is executed while the variation effect that is the specific period effect is being executed, the remaining period of the variation effect that has already been executed is newly executed. The change effect is set to be rewritten so that

With this configuration, when the extended display is executed after the jackpot is over, and the special symbol fluctuation executed during the predetermined period after the jackpot is over (special symbol fluctuation 4 times or 4 seconds) is won. On the other hand, in order to continue the effect during the big hit without feeling uncomfortable, when a short period (0.5 seconds) is set for the predetermined number of special symbol changes after the big hit ends, after the big hit ends Even if the special symbol fluctuation is not performed a predetermined number of times (4 times) within the predetermined period (4 seconds), it is possible to execute the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

Here, with respect to the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in this another example, differences from the above-described first control example will be described with reference to FIG. 220. The present modified example is different from the above-described first control example in that the contents of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) are partially changed, and the other processes are the same. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 6 in this another example. When the variable display setting process 6 is executed, first, the same processes of S3801 to S3804 as the variable display setting process (see FIG. 147) of the first control example described above are executed. When it is determined in the processing of S3803 that the display extension flag 223i is not on (off) (S3803: No), it is then determined whether the value of the variation counter 223j is 1 or more (S3871). That is, it is determined whether or not a predetermined period (4 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the extended display is executed after the jackpot is over until the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (4 times).

In the process of S3871, if it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223j is not 1 or more (is 0), the same steps of S3811 to S3817 as the above-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 147) of the first control example are performed. The process is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3871, when it is determined that the value of the variation counter 223j is 1 or more (S3871: Yes), next, the specific period effect corresponding to the value of the variation counter 223j is determined (S3872). , The display specific period effect command is set (S3873), the value of the fluctuation number counter 223j is decremented by 1 (S3874), and the same S3812 to S3817 as the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 147) of the first control example described above. The process is executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in this another example, in a state in which the predetermined period (4 seconds) elapses between the time when the extended display is executed after the jackpot is finished and the special symbol is changed a predetermined number of times (4 times). , When the special symbol variation is started, since it is configured to execute a specific period effect corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol variations (variation number counter value), a predetermined period (4 Even if the special symbol variation is not executed a predetermined number of times (4 times) within a second, it is possible to execute the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

In the case of using the configuration of another example described above, the period for which the extended display is executed (the number of special symbol fluctuations) may be set larger than the upper limit number (4) of the special symbols 2, for example, the extension. Set the maximum number of special symbol fluctuations that can be executed before the elapsed period (4 seconds), which is one of the display termination conditions (for example, 0.5 second variation 8 times), as the extended display termination condition You may do it. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of continuing the production during the big hit, and enhance the production effect.

In addition, although detailed description is omitted, it is executed in a state where a predetermined period (4 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the extended display is executed after the jackpot is over until the special symbol is changed a predetermined number of times (4 times). If you win the jackpot in the special symbol fluctuation, the jackpot game is started after the special symbol fluctuation of 0.5 second fluctuation is executed, but other configurations may be used, for example, 0.5 In addition to the special symbol variation period of seconds, it may be configured to execute variation effect using the opening period of the jackpot game. With such a configuration, the variable effect can be executed for a period of 0.5 seconds or more, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand effect.

<Regarding another control example of the expectation suggestive effect described in the first control example>
Next, another control example of the expectation suggestion effect of the first control example described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 to 225. In this separate control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, the effect period in which the expectation degree 1 display Dk1 to the expectation degree 3 display Dk3, which are the expectation degree display modes displayed in one variation effect, can be displayed, respectively. And a period during which each expected degree display mode can display the expected degree increase mode Dk4 that is a sum of variable amounts that are varied during the variation effect are set in one variation effect (see FIG. 221), and each effect period is set. The valid operation period for validating the operation of the frame button 22 is settable.

Further, when setting the variation effect, when the effect mode that does not display the three expectation degree display modes is selected, it is possible to change the display mode of the pending symbols by using the points acquired by the expectation degree increase mode Dk4. I am configuring. With this configuration, it is possible to use the points obtained by the degree of expectation increase Dk4 for the game result other than the lottery result corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed, so that the player is motivated. You can participate in the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 221 to 223, the effect contents in the individual control example will be described. FIG. 221 is a timing chart showing the flow of the anticipation suggestion effect in this separate control example. Note that the description of the same elements as those in the above-described expectation suggesting effect of the first control example will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 221, when the variation production in which the expectation suggestion production is performed is executed, the expectation for informing the expectation increase mode Dk4 in the present variation production for 10 seconds from the time when 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the variation. The variable degree suggestive effect is executed (see FIG. 102(b)). Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 221(b), the display screen shown in FIG. 222(a) is displayed. Here, with reference to FIG. 222(a), the display content displayed during the expectation suggestive effect will be described.

FIG. 222(a) is a diagram schematically showing a display example in the period from the notification of the expectation increase mode Dk4 to the execution of the expectation increase effect. As shown in FIG. 222(a), the value (“3UP” in this figure) acquired as the expected degree increase mode Dk4 is displayed in the second sub display area Ds2. Returning to FIG. 221, the description is continued. After that, when 33 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the expectation increase effect in which the first operation valid period of 5 seconds is set is executed (FIG. 221(c). In this state, FIG. 222(b)). The display screen shown is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the first operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 223(a), the display mode of the expectation 1 display Dk1 is changed and the expectation increase mode Dk4 is set. The value is subtracted. As described above, by operating the frame button 22 during each operation valid period, the display mode of the corresponding degree of expectation display can be changed, so that the player can operate the frame button 22 enthusiastically. It will be possible. Further, as shown in FIG. 221, since the expectation level 1 display is displayed over a plurality of operation valid periods, no matter which operation valid period the frame button 22 is operated, The display mode may change. As a result, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first operation effective period, the display mode of the expectation 1 display Dk1 does not change, or the amount of change is small, that is, the intermediate stage of the variation effect ( It is possible to prevent the player from losing his/her expectation of a big hit early during one operation valid period).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 224 and 225, a control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in another control example of the expectation suggestive effect will be described. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the contents of the expectation effect setting process 7. When the expectation effect setting process 7 is executed, first, the expectation is selected based on the expectation selection table 222i similarly to the first control example described above (S4251). Then, the points to be awarded in the expected degree increase mode Dk4 are set based on the selected expected degree (S4252), and the effect is executed in each of the first period, the second period, and the third period based on the expected degree. The mode is set (S4253).

When the process of S4253 is finished, it is determined whether or not there is a period (vacant period) in which the effect mode is not set in each period (first period, second period, third period) (S4254), and the effect mode is set. If there is an unused period (vacant period) (S4254: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a has winning information indicating a win (S4255). Here, when it is determined that there is the winning information indicating the winning (S4255: Yes), during the period (vacant period) in which the effect mode is not set, the reserved symbol variable effect mode for changing the reserved symbol is set. (S4256) and S4257 processing is entered. On the other hand, in the process of S4254, when there is no period in which the effect mode is not set (S4254: No), or when it is determined in the process of S4255 that there is no winning information indicating a win (S4255: No), it is S4257 as it is. Process shifts to.

In the process of S4257, an operation effective period (first operation effective period, second operation effective period, third operation effective period) for effectively determining the operation of the frame button 22 is set for each period in which the effect mode is set. This is set (S4257), a display expectation effect command is set (S4258), and this processing is ended.

As described above, in the expectation degree effect setting process 7 (S3808), using the expectation degree selected based on the expectation degree selection table 222i, the award points used in the current variation effect and the award points are set. The effect mode used is set. Then, the effect mode using the imparted points is the presence or absence of the selected setting in each of the plurality of periods (first period to third period) defined in association with the variation pattern of the variation effect executed this time. (Whether or not to set the effect mode), and the effect mode based on the content of the effect mode (type of expected degree display mode to be set, display mode).

With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to make it difficult to understand which period (first period to third period) which presentation mode is executed. Further, since the number of expected degree display modes in which the display mode can be changed using the value acquired as the expected degree increase mode Dk4 during the expected degree variable suggestion production period becomes indefinite, the expected level increase mode Dk4 is obtained. Even if there is a small value (for example, 2UP), if the number of displayed expected degree display modes is small, use the value obtained as the expected degree increase mode Dk4 for the expected degree display mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's willingness to play is lowered due to the effect during the expected degree variable suggestion effect period.

Note that, in another control example of the expectation suggestive effect, as shown in FIG. 221, a configuration in which the expectation variable suggestive effect period is executed once in the early stage of the variable effect is used, but the invention is not limited to this. It may be provided in the middle stage of the variation effect (for example, between the second operation effective period (see FIG. 221(d)) and the third operation effective period (see FIG. 221(e))). With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the period that is the target of the effect using the value obtained as the expectation degree increasing mode Dk4 during the expectation degree varying suggestion effect, so that a large value ( For example, when 3) is acquired, the expectation for a jackpot can be further increased. Further, the expectation variable suggestion effect may be configured to be executed a plurality of times (for example, twice) during one variation effect.

Further, in another control example of this expectation suggestion effect, a display mode of a pending symbol as an additional effect when the effect mode using the award points is not set for a plurality of periods in which the operation valid period can be set. However, other contents may be used as additional effects, for example, a value collected by the player (for example, in another example of the first control example described above). It may be configured to add an effect for adding the accumulated value (see FIG. 176(c)) described above and an effect for suggesting the current game state.

In addition, even when the production mode using the award points is set for all of the plurality of periods in which the operation valid period can be set, the production selection means capable of selecting the production to be executed by the player. (For example, a means for displaying a selection screen for selecting an effect to be executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and selecting an effect to be executed by the operating means operable by the player) Based on this, the effect to be executed may be varied.

In the expected effect setting process 7 described with reference to FIG. 224, the expected degree variable suggestion effect period is for display defined in the fixed period of the variable effect (the period of 15 seconds to 25 seconds from the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 221). Although the expectation effect command is configured to be set, as another configuration, for example, based on the determination result of the determination unit that determines the expected degree selected by referring to the expectation selection table 222i, 221. A plurality of periods (for example, 15 seconds to 25 seconds from the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 221 and a period after the first period shown in FIG. 221 (40 seconds from start of fluctuation) It is also possible to provide an expectation degree variable suggestion effect period setting means for setting any period of the period of 50 seconds)). This makes it possible to set a plurality of timings at which the expected degree variable suggestion effect is executed, and enhance the effect.

Further, the expectation degree variable suggestion effect production period setting means described above is configured to set a period in which the expectation degree variable suggestion effect is executed based on an element other than the expectation degree selected by referring to the expectation degree selection table 222i. Alternatively, for example, the period during which the expectation variable suggestion effect is executed may be set based on the content of the operation performed by the player on the operation means, or the prize stored in the prize information storage area 223a. It may be configured to set the period in which the expected degree variable suggestive effect is executed based on the information included in the information.

Next, the frame button input monitoring/production process 7 will be described with reference to FIG. 225. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 7. When the frame button input monitoring/effect process 7 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the operation (press) of the frame button 22 is detected (S5051), and if it is detected (S5051: Yes), then the variable hold effect setting is performed. It is determined whether it is during the period (S5901), and when it is determined that it is during the variable holding effect setting period (S5901: Yes), a variable command for display for changing the pending symbol is set (S5902), and subtraction is performed. A display command indicating a subsequent grant point is set (S5903), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5901, when it is determined that the variable hold effect setting period is not in progress (S5901: No), it is determined whether it is the first operation valid period (S5904), and it is determined that it is the first operation valid period. In the case of (S5904: Yes), the display variable command for changing the first expectation degree display (expectation degree 1 display) Dk1 is set (S5905), and the display command indicating the added point after subtraction is set. (S5903), this process ends.

In the processing of S5904, when it is determined that the first operation valid period is not set (S5904: No), it is determined whether the second operation valid period is set (S5906), and when it is determined that the second operation valid period is set. (S5906: Yes), the display variable command for changing the second expectation display (expectation 2 display) Dk2 is set (S5907), and the display command indicating the added points after subtraction is set (S5903). , This process ends.

In the process of S5906, when it is determined that the second operation is not valid (S5906: No), it is determined whether the third operation is valid (S5908), and when it is determined that the third operation is valid. (S5908: Yes), the display variable command for changing the third expectation display (expectation 3 display) Dk3 is set (S5909), and the display command indicating the added points after subtraction is set (S5903). , This process ends.

As described above, in the control example according to the present embodiment, similarly to the first control example described above, the expectation degree 1 display Dk1 to the expectation degree 3 display, which is the expectation degree display mode displayed in one variation effect. The effect period in which each Dk3 can be displayed and the period in which each of the expectation degree display modes can display the expectation degree increase mode Dk4, which is the sum of the variable amounts varied during the fluctuation effect, are set in one fluctuation effect ( (See FIG. 221), the operation valid period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid can be set for each effect period.

Further, when setting the variation effect, when the effect mode that does not display the three expectation degree display modes is selected, it is possible to change the display mode of the pending symbols by using the points acquired by the expectation degree increase mode Dk4. I am configuring. With this configuration, it is possible to use the points obtained by the degree of expectation increase Dk4 for the game result other than the lottery result corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed, so that the player is motivated. You can participate in the game.

It should be noted that the points awarded in this separate control example are set so that they can all be used when the frame button 22 is operated during the entire operation valid period, and the amount of time when the frame button 22 is not operated ends the fluctuation. The time may be configured to remain, and the content of the above-described title-giving production may be changed with respect to the remaining award points at the end of the change.

The phrase "at the beginning of jackpot (big hit game) (at the time of execution)" used when explaining each of the control examples described above, is won in the jackpot lottery of the special symbol, and it is confirmed that the jackpot game is started. It is used as a concept that indicates the timing that is, specifically, the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with a combination of symbols to show that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and the jackpot. Is a concept that includes the timing of starting the opening period, the timing of starting a round game of jackpot, and the like.

The phrase "at the end of the jackpot (big hit game)" used when explaining each control example described above is used as a concept indicating the timing at which the jackpot game ends. Specifically, the jackpot The concept includes the timing when the final round ends, the timing when the jackpot ending period ends, and the timing when the first special symbol is drawn after the jackpot ends.

With respect to each wording used in such a concept, when a specific timing is not designated in each control example described above, any one of the above timings may be appropriately adopted.

The configurations of the pachinko machine 10 described in each of the control examples described above may be appropriately combined and implemented. For example, the pachinko machine 10 having a falling lottery means for executing the falling lottery used in the second control example described above. On the other hand, a small hit lottery means for executing the small hit lottery used in the third control example described above may be provided.

Further, the falling lottery means used in the above-mentioned second control example executes a lottery for shifting (falling) the jackpot probability of the special symbol from the high probability state to the low probability state, but other than that. It may be used to shift (fall) the content set for the element of, for example, to shift (fall) the probability of hitting a normal symbol (second symbol) from a high-probability state to a low-probability state. Alternatively, a lottery for changing the time saving state to a normal state (falling down) may be executed.

In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 that can be pressed by the player is used as the operation means that can be operated by the player, but a configuration different from the frame button 22 may be provided as the operation means. Lever-shaped operation means that allows the player to operate in the front-rear direction, touch-sensor-type operation means that detects that the player has touched (or approached), and shooting results of shooting means that shoots the movement of the player. It is also possible to provide a camera-type operation means or the like for determining. Further, the number of operating means is not limited to one, and a plurality of operating means may be provided.

In each of the control examples described above, a configuration is used in which various effects to be executed are executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. However, a plurality of display means of the pachinko machine 10 are provided, and a plurality of display means are provided. It may be configured to execute the various effects described above using, and in the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing at least two or more effects among the various effects described in each control example described above. Alternatively, the player may select an effect that is actually executed from two or more effects that can be executed.

The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right property, a 3rd right property, etc.) that can increase the expectation value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Alternatively, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated. In addition, a lottery (variation) of a plurality of types of special symbols (special symbol 1, special symbol 2) may be carried out simultaneously on a pachinko machine (so-called simultaneous variation machine).

In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever with a coin inserted and a symbol effective line is determined, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that “a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms the identification information is provided, The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific".In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is caused to do so. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Concept of the Invention Taking Projection Plate Member 620 of Projection Unit 600 as an Example>
A light transmitting member which is formed of a light transmissive material in a plate shape and has a reflecting portion, and a light irradiating means for irradiating the side end surface of the light transmitting member with light are incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. In a gaming machine in which the reflected light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member, the proportion of the light emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member in the light emitted from the light emitting means is increased. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that the emission increasing means is provided and the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area.

Here, a light-transmitting member that is formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting material and that has a reflecting portion, and a light irradiating unit that irradiates the side end surface of the light transmitting member with light, are provided from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. A game machine is known in which incident light is reflected by a reflecting portion and emitted from the front of a light transmitting member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-29735). According to this type of gaming machine, for example, by disposing the light transmitting member on the front side of the liquid crystal display device in the game area, the player can display the liquid crystal display device through the light transmitting member in a normal state. On the other hand, when a predetermined game state is formed, the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the light traveling inside the light transmitting member is reflected by the reflecting portion. Then, the light is transmitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the reflecting portion is provided with a plurality of groups including a plurality of reflecting surfaces, and each group has a shape of a pattern or a pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or a pattern. That is, it is possible to display (display) a pattern or a design on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device together with the display of the liquid crystal display device.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, there is a problem that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is weak. Therefore, it becomes difficult to clearly show (display) a pattern or a pattern. In this case, if the output of the light irradiation means is increased, not only the cost and power consumption increase, but also the amount of heat generation increases, which causes a problem that other members and devices are affected by the heat.

On the other hand, the gaming machine A1 includes the emission increasing means for increasing the ratio of the light emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member to the light emitted from the light emitting means. The light emitted from the front surface of the transmissive member can be strengthened. As a result, the pattern or pattern can be clearly displayed (displayed). Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the light irradiation means, it is possible to reduce the amount of heat generation and suppress the influence of heat on other members and devices. Further, since the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the emission increasing means, and accordingly, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the appearance.

The position where the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member is formed may be, for example, the back surface of the light transmitting member or the inside of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine A1, the emission increasing means is provided with an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the gaming machine A2, the emission increasing means includes the outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, so that the side end surface of the light transmitting member is irradiated with the light by the light emitting means. Not only the light that directly arrives but also the light that is emitted from the light emitting means and reflected by the outer edge member can be made incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. The light collection efficiency can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to increase the amount of the light emitted from the light irradiating unit that reaches the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member, so that the light reflected from the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is strengthened. , It is possible to clearly show (display) a pattern or pattern. Further, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the light irradiation means, it is possible to reduce the amount of heat generation and suppress the influence of heat on other members and devices.

Further, in this way, the emission increasing means is provided with the outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, so that when another device in the game area emits light. Can prevent the light from the other device from being blocked by the outer edge member and entering from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiation means is turned off (when the light is not incident on the light transmitting member and the pattern or the pattern is not displayed on the front surface of the light transmitting member), the light from another device is incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pattern or the pattern from being displayed on the front surface of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine A2, the outer edge member is provided on each of a front surface and a back surface of the light transmitting member, and the gaming machine A3 is characterized.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2, the outer edge member is provided on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member. The light that is not directly incident on the side end surface and that deviates to the front side and the back side of the light transmitting member is reflected by the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, respectively, and is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. be able to. Therefore, the light-collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be further increased accordingly.

Further, by thus providing the outer edge member on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, even when the light emitted by the other device in the game area reaches from either the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. Since the light can be blocked by the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, it is possible to suppress the incidence from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiation means is turned off (when the light is not incident on the light transmitting member and the pattern or the pattern is not displayed on the front surface of the light transmitting member), the light from another device is incident on the light transmitting member. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably suppress the display of the pattern or the design on the front surface of the light transmitting member.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the outer edge member is disposed so as to project outward from a side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the outer edge member is arranged so as to project outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, so that the light emitted from the light irradiating means is provided. The light can be easily reflected by the projecting portion of the outer edge member (the surface continuous with the side end surface of the light transmitting member) and easily enter the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light-collecting efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be further increased accordingly.

The gaming machine A5 according to any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, wherein the outer edge member is formed of a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member.

According to the gaming machine A5, in the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the outer edge member is made of a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member, so that the light is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Light can be easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can easily reach the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected from the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the pattern or pattern is made clear. It can be displayed (displayed).

That is, for example, when the light transmission member and the outer edge member are formed of a material having the same refractive index, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmission member is difficult to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmission member and the outer edge member, It is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member returns to the light transmissive member after being totally reflected (or partially reflected) on the outer surface (boundary with air) of the outer edge portion, but the light returned from the outer edge member to the light transmissive member. Includes not only those traveling in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member, but also those traveling in the direction toward the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the amount of light reaching the reflecting portion is reduced. On the other hand, like the gaming machine A4, the outer edge member is formed of a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member, so that the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is transmitted to the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. Since the light can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) at the boundary with, it is possible to secure the light that reaches the reflecting portion.

In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the outer edge member is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the outer edge member and the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the gaming machine A6, in the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the outer edge member is arranged in a state in which a predetermined gap is formed between the front edge and the back surface of the light transmitting member. The light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily reflected on the front surface or the back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can easily reach the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected from the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the pattern or pattern is made clear. It can be displayed (displayed).

That is, for example, when the light transmissive member and the outer edge member have the same refractive index or a relatively small difference in refractive index, when the light transmissive member and the outer edge member are in close contact with each other, from the side end surface of the light transmissive member. The incident light is difficult to be reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member, and is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member returns to the light transmissive member after being totally reflected (or partially reflected) on the outer surface (boundary with air) of the outer edge portion, but the light returned from the outer edge member to the light transmissive member. Includes not only those traveling in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member, but also those traveling in the direction toward the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the amount of light reaching the reflecting portion is reduced. On the other hand, like the gaming machine A5, by disposing the outer edge member in a state in which a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Since the reflected light can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) on the front surface or the rear surface (boundary with the air) of the light transmitting member, it is possible to secure the light that reaches the reflecting portion.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, a rotation mechanism that rotatably supports the light transmitting member and applies a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member is provided, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. A curved rack gear is engraved along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape, and the rotation mechanism rotationally drives the pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member and the pinion gear. A gaming machine A7 comprising a driving means.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface of the annular shape. A curved rack gear is engraved with the pinion gear that is meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member, and a drive mechanism that rotationally drives the pinion gear is provided.Therefore, by rotationally driving the pinion gear by the drive means, The rotation of the pinion gear can be transmitted to the outer edge member via the curved rack gear, and thus the light transmitting member can be rotated together with the outer edge member. Therefore, the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member can be visually recognized by the player in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member has a role of condensing the light emitted from the light emitting means on the side end surface of the light transmitting member and a role of transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the light transmitting member to rotate the outer edge member. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved due to the simplification of the structure.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A7, a rotating mechanism that rotatably supports the light transmitting member and applies a rotational driving force to the light transmitting member is provided, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. A gaming machine A8, wherein a guide groove is provided along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the annular shape, and the rotating mechanism includes a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide groove.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A7, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and the guide groove is formed along the circumferential direction of the outer peripheral surface of the annular shape. Since the rotating mechanism is provided with a plurality of support wheels that are recessed and guided along the guide grooves, the action of the guide grooves and the support wheels exposes the side end surface of the light transmitting member, that is, The light transmitting member can be rotatably supported in a state in which light can enter from the side end surface of the transmitting member. Therefore, by rotating the light transmitting member, the player can visually recognize the pattern or the pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member in a displaced (rotated) state.

In this case, the outer edge member can be made to have both the role of condensing the light emitted from the light emitting means on the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of rotatably supporting the light transmitting member together with the support ring. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced by that amount, and the product cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved due to the simplification of the structure.

The support wheel may be rotatably rotatably supported or may be non-rotatably fixed. In this case, as a form in which the support wheel is guided along the guide groove, a rotatably supported support wheel rolls along the guide groove or slides while rolling, or a non-rotatable form. A form in which the fixed support wheel slides along the guide groove is exemplified.

Further, in the gaming machine A8 subordinate to the gaming machine A7, the outer edge member having the curved rack gear engraved is provided on one of the front surface and the rear surface of the light transmitting member, and the outer edge member having the guide groove is provided as the light transmitting member. It is preferable to dispose them on the other of the front surface and the back surface, respectively. That is, since the outer edge member is provided on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light emitted from the light irradiating means is not directly incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member, but the front surface of the light transmitting member. This is because the light that deviates to the side and the light that deviates to the back side can be reflected by the outer edge member on the front side and the outer edge member on the back side, respectively, and can be incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Further, as described above, the outer edge member is provided on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, so that the light emitted by the other device in the game area reaches from either the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. Even in such a case, the light can be blocked by the front outer edge member and the back outer edge member, and the incidence of light from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine A8, the outer edge member is formed such that the outer peripheral side thereof faces the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member with a predetermined distance therebetween, and the facing portion between the outer edge member and the light transmitting member is the guide. A gaming machine A9 characterized by being a groove.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A8, the outer edge member is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral side faces the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member at a predetermined distance, and the outer edge member and the light transmitting member. Since the guide groove is provided between the light guide member and the outer edge member, the structure including the light transmitting member and the outer edge member can be downsized. That is, by having one of the inner walls of the guide groove supported by the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, it is not necessary to form the outer edge member in a U-shaped cross section, and the thickness dimension of the outer edge member can be reduced. Therefore, the structure can be downsized by that amount.

Further, since the outer edge member is disposed in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is transmitted to the front surface of the light transmitting member. Alternatively, it can be easily reflected on the back surface (boundary with the air). As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can easily reach the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected from the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the pattern or pattern is made clear. It can be displayed (displayed).

In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A9, a side end surface of the light transmitting member is formed orthogonal to a front surface and a back surface of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiating means has an irradiation direction of light from the irradiation surface. A gaming machine A10, characterized in that the irradiation surface is arranged so as to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A9, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is formed orthogonal to the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiating means irradiates the same. Since the irradiation surface of the light is directed to the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the irradiation surface is arranged to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is irradiated by the light irradiation means. It is possible to easily reflect the light incident from the front side or the back side of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can easily reach the reflecting portion, so that the light reflected from the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the pattern or pattern is made clear. It can be displayed (displayed).

<About the concept of the invention with the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising a target member to be a target of light irradiation, and a plurality of light emitting means distributed around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed to the target member. At least two of the light emitting means are mounted, and one or a plurality of substrate members that are elastically deformable are formed, and a base member that holds the substrate members in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. Characteristic game machine B1.

Here, there is known a gaming machine including a target member to be a target of light irradiation and a plurality of light emitting means arranged such that the target member has an irradiation surface facing the target member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015). -29735 publication). According to this gaming machine, by irradiating the light from the light emitting means and causing the light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the incident light is advanced inside the light transmitting member and reflected by the reflecting portion. The light can be emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member. In this case, the applicant of the present application forms the target member in the shape of a disc from a light-transmissive material and forms the reflecting portion, and at the same time, forms a plurality of light emitting means on the outer peripheral surface of the disc shape (the target member) on the irradiation surface. A structure has been devised in which the light radiated from each light emitting means is incident from the outer peripheral surface of the target member in such a manner that the target member is surrounded by the light emitting device (not known at the time of application of the present application).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it has been newly found that there is a problem in that it is necessary to dispose a plurality of light emitting means around each of the target members, which makes the disposing work troublesome. In particular, since it is necessary to dispose the plurality of light emitting means so that their respective irradiation surfaces are directed toward the outer peripheral surface of the target member (that is, the orientations are different from each other), the labor of the disposing work increases from this point as well. ..

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, at least two or more light emitting means are mounted and one or a plurality of substrate members which are elastically deformable, and the substrate members are held in a predetermined elastically deformed posture. Since one base member is disposed on the base member, the disposing work of at least two or more light emitting means can be completed. Therefore, the labor of disposing the light emitting means can be reduced accordingly.

Further, when the substrate member is arranged on the base member, the substrate member is held in the elastically deformed predetermined posture, so that the direction of the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be defined. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose the plurality of light emitting means such that their irradiation surfaces are individually directed toward the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the labor of disposing the light emitting means can be suppressed also from this point.

The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that the gaming machine B1 is provided with a block body which is formed to have higher rigidity than the board member and is arranged on the board member, and the block body is held by the base member.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the block body is formed to have higher rigidity than the board member and is arranged on the board member, and the block body is held by the base member. It is possible to suppress the warp and the bending of the substrate member and easily define the posture of the substrate member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the posture of the light emitting means from being affected by the warp or bending of the substrate member, and to direct the irradiation surface of the light emitting means in an appropriate direction and to easily maintain the orientation.

In the gaming machine B2, the light emitting means is arranged in a region of the substrate member in which the block body is arranged.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2, the light emitting means is disposed in the area of the substrate member where the block body is disposed, so that the attitude of the light emitting means is such that the substrate member warps. It is possible to more reliably suppress the influence of bending and bending. Therefore, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be oriented in an appropriate direction, and the direction can be more easily maintained.

In the gaming machine B2 or B3, a plurality of the block bodies are arranged on the substrate member with a predetermined space therebetween, and the base member is in a posture in which the substrate member located between the block bodies is elastically deformed. A gaming machine B4, which is held by the body.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2 or B3, a plurality of block bodies are arranged on the substrate member at predetermined intervals, and the substrate member positioned between the block bodies is elastic. Since the base member is held in a deformed (bent) posture, the posture (direction of the irradiation surface) of the light emitting means is stabilized as compared with the case where the elastically deformed substrate member is directly held by the base member. be able to.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the light emitting means is disposed in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is provided on the opposite side of the target member from the substrate member. A gaming machine B5, which is arranged on the back surface.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the light emitting means is arranged in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is on the side opposite to the target member. Since it is arranged on the back surface of the substrate member, the light emitting means can be brought closer to the target member while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture of the substrate member by the block body.

In the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by a screw from the front surface of the substrate member, and the head of the screw is projected to the front surface of the substrate member B6.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by a screw from the front surface of the substrate member, and the head of the screw is projected to the front surface of the substrate member. Can be protected by screw head. That is, for example, when the movable member is displaced to the front surface of the substrate member, the head of the screw is brought into contact with the member, and it is possible to suppress the damage due to contact with the light emitting means.

In the gaming machine B6, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is arranged between the heads of the two screws.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is arranged between the heads of the two screws. The light emitting means can be easily protected by the head of the screw.

The two screws are preferably arranged along the displacement direction of the movable member. By disposing the light emitting means between the heads of the screws thus arranged, the movable member can be easily brought into contact with the head of the screw, and the light emitting means can be easily protected.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B7, one of the base body and the block body is provided with a protrusion, and a fitting hole for receiving the protrusion and fitting is provided on the other of the base body and the block body. A gaming machine B8 characterized by being recessed in.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B2 to B7, a projection is provided on one of the base body and the block body, and the projection is received and fitted. Since the hole is recessed in the other of the base body and the block body, the block body can be arranged on the base body by fitting the protrusion into the fitting hole, and the labor of the arrangement work can be suppressed. .. Particularly, when a plurality of block bodies are arranged on the substrate member and the block bodies are arranged in an elastically deformed (bent) posture, one block body is positioned by fitting (temporary fixing). In addition, since the work can be performed in a mode in which the substrate member is elastically deformed (bent) and the other block body is fitted, the workability of such arrangement work can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the block body is provided with a recess on the surface on the side where the board member is disposed, and the recessed portion of the block body stores the electronic component disposed on the board member. A gaming machine B9 characterized by being played.

According to the gaming machine B9, in any of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the block body is provided with a concave portion on the surface on the side provided with the substrate member, and the concave portion of the block body is provided with the substrate member. Since the electronic component is stored, the electronic component can be covered and protected by the block body. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the movable member from coming into contact with and damaging the electronic component.

<About the concept of the invention with the vertical displacement unit 800 as an example>
A game including a base member, a displacement member that is disposed on the base member and is displaceable between a first position and a second position, and a drive unit that applies a driving force to the displacement member to displace the displacement member. The machine includes an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member moves from the first position to the second position by the action of gravity. Is disposed in the base member in a form of being displaced in the direction, and in a state where the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, A gaming machine C1 characterized in that the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced.

Here, a base member, a displacement member that is disposed on the base member and is configured to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, and a driving unit that applies a driving force to the displacement member to displace the displacement member. There is known a gaming machine that is provided with and produces an effect by displacing a displacement member (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is arranged in a retracted position (for example, one of the first position and the second position) that is invisible to the player or is located on the outer edge side of the game area, while the predetermined game is performed. When the state is formed, the displacement member is displaced toward the overhang position (the other of the first position or the second position) overhanging the game area, and the operation of the displacement member displaced toward the overhang position is played. An effect that is visually recognized by the person is performed. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the drive means, and since the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed, it is difficult to cause the displacement member to perform an interesting displacement. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the displacement member includes an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member is moved from the first position to the first position by the action of gravity. It is arranged on the base member in such a manner that it is displaced in the direction toward the second position, and when the application of the driving force from the drive means to the displacement member is released, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, Since the gravity acting on the displacement member balances with the elastic recovery force of the elastic member, a reciprocal displacement (approximate single vibration is generated around the balance position (predetermined position) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member. ) Can be performed on the displacement member. That is, the displacement of the displacement member in the gravitational direction can be an orthographic motion of a uniform velocity circular motion, and the displacement velocity can be changed, so that the displacement member can be made to have an interesting displacement.

On the other hand, if a driving force is applied from the driving means to the displacement member, the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position in a mode different from the above-described displacement (orthogonal motion of uniform velocity circular motion). Therefore, the variation of displacement can be increased accordingly. That is, it is possible to increase the variation of displacement only by switching whether or not to apply the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member, and it is not necessary to complicate the structure and the control. It is possible to improve.

In the gaming machine C1, one end of the displacement member is rotatably supported by the base member, and the other end is lifted between the first position and the second position. Gaming machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, one end side is rotatably supported by the base member, and the other end side is lifted between the first position and the second position. In the case where the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is canceled and the displacement member is caused to perform the reciprocal displacement (approximately a single vibration) by the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member, The displacement of the other end of the displacement member can be a combination of not only the linear motion in the vertical direction but also the rotational motion with the one end side as the center of rotation. As a result, it is possible to cause the displacement member to perform an interesting displacement.

In the gaming machine C2, a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member is provided, and the transmission means is rotatably arranged on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means. And a connecting member whose one end is rotatably connected to a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member and whose other end is rotatably connected to the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C2, the transmission means is rotatably arranged on the base member and is rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and an eccentricity from the rotation center of the rotation member. Since the connecting member having one end connected to the above position and the other end connected to the displacement member is provided, the application of the driving force from the drive means to the displacement member is released, and the action of gravity and the elastic recovery of the elastic member are released. When the displacement member is caused to perform a reciprocating displacement (approximate single vibration) by a force, the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member. Since the posture of the connecting member is changed, it is possible to change the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member of the force in the pushing and pulling direction. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed, and as a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member can be changed. It is possible to make such a displacement member perform an interesting displacement.

In the gaming machine C3, at the predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, with respect to the direction connecting the rotation center of the rotating member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the connecting positions of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting positions of the connecting member and the displacing member are substantially orthogonal to each other.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3, at a predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the rotation center of the rotating member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. Since the direction connecting the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacing member is substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting the The magnitude of the force component can be maximized at the balance position (predetermined position), and the force component can be reduced in either direction of pushing and pulling from the balance position. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced, the resistance received by the displacement member from the transmission means can be changed substantially symmetrically about the balance position, so that the reciprocal displacement of the displacement member can be easily continued.

In the gaming machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating member and the connecting member includes a protruding portion protruding toward the other, and the predetermined position in the movable range between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in the center side range including, the projecting portion is not opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, and the first position or the second position is greater than the center side range. When the displacement member is displaced in the outer range close to, the projecting portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be able to come into contact therewith.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating member and the connecting member is provided with a projecting portion projecting toward the other, and between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in the center side range including a predetermined position of the movable range of the movable member, the protruding portion is not opposed to the other of the rotating member and the coupling member, and the first position or When the displacement member is displaced in the outer range close to the second position, the projecting portion faces the other of the rotating member and the connecting member, so that the application of the driving force from the drive means to the displacement member is canceled. , When the displacement member is made to perform reciprocal displacement centered on the balance position (predetermined position), the reciprocal displacement of the displacement member can be smoothed by avoiding the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the protruding portion in the central range. On the other hand, in the case of displacing the displacement member by the driving force of the drive means, in the outer range, the projecting portion is made to face the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so that they can rotate, Rattling between the member and the connecting member can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the center range, and the center range is set to a range including the predetermined position and the second position. A gaming machine C6 characterized by the above.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central range, and the central range includes the predetermined position and the second position. Since the displacement member is set to the range, when the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the protrusion is used to suppress the rattling between the rotating member and the connecting member, and thus the posture of the displacement member is changed. While it can be stabilized, when the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position by the driving force of the drive means, it is possible to avoid the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the protruding portion, so that it acts on the displacement member. The displacement member can be smoothly displaced while utilizing gravity.

For example, when the first position is a retracted position where the displacement member is retracted to the outer edge side of the game area, and the second position is an extended position where the displacement member is projected toward the center side of the game area, At the first position (retracted position), rattling of the displacement member is suppressed to improve the appearance and durability, and it is possible to prevent the performance of other members from being hindered. When displacing the first position from the first position to the second position (overhang position), the second position can be quickly overhanged (displaced), and the effect of the overhang operation can be enhanced. ..

In the gaming machine C6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacing member are located on a substantially straight line. Gaming machine C7.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C6, at the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacing member are substantially straight. Since it is located on the line, even if the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, the pushing and pulling direction is toward the rotation center of the rotating member, and the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member is A state that does not occur (that is, a dead center) can be formed. Therefore, when displacing the displacing member toward the second position, it is possible to avoid the generation of resistance due to sliding of the protruding portion and to displace the displacing member smoothly (quickly). After being arranged at the position, the action of the dead point described above can suppress the rattling of the displacement member, and can improve the appearance and the durability.

In any of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the connecting member includes an abutting portion formed so as to be abuttable on the base member, and the abutting portion is the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member and the rotation. It is arranged on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting member, and is arranged on the opposite side of the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member with the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member interposed therebetween. Gaming machine C8.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the connecting member is provided with the contact portion formed so as to be capable of contacting the base member, and the contact portion includes the displacement member and the base. Since it is arranged on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and is located on the side opposite to the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member with the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member interposed therebetween. When the displacement member rattles with respect to the base member, the contact portion of the connecting member is brought into contact with the base member, so that the rotating member and the connecting portion of the connecting member (the rotating member and one end of the connecting member can rotate). It is possible to easily suppress the inclination of the rotation shaft) of the portion connected to the shaft support hole. As a result, the driving force of the drive means can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member via the transmission means.

<About the concept of the invention with the displacement unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a base member, a displacement member displaceably disposed on the base member, and a drive unit that applies a drive force to the displacement member, the drive unit includes a first drive unit and a first drive unit. And a case in which the displacement member is displaced by the drive force applied from the first drive means, and a case in which the displacement member is displaced by the drive force applied by the second drive means. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced in a different manner.

Here, there is known a gaming machine that includes a base member, a displacement member that is displaceable on the base member, and a drive unit that applies a driving force to the displacement member, and that produces an effect by the displacement of the displacement member. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is placed in a retracted position which is invisible to the player or is located on the outer edge side of the game area, and when a predetermined game state is formed, the displacement member is extended to the game area. The effect of displacing the displacement member toward the projecting position and allowing the player to visually recognize the operation of the displacement member displaced toward the projecting position is performed.

However, in the conventional game machine, there is a problem that the effect of the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient. Specifically, in the conventional gaming machine, since the displacement mode of the displacement member (the locus when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one, the effect produced by the displacement of the displacement member is one pattern. Therefore, it was difficult to produce a game that surprises the player. Even if the driving force of the driving means is changed to be stronger or weaker, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases and decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) remains constant, so that the player's surprise is produced. It was difficult to do.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the drive means includes the first drive means and the second drive means, and the displacement member is displaced by the drive force applied from the first drive means, and The displacement member is displaced in a different manner from the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the two driving means, and therefore the effect of the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member can be enhanced. That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member (the locus when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one, the production does not have one pattern, and at least two displacement members are used. Since the displacement can be performed in the same manner as the normal displacement mode, it is possible to perform an effect that surprises the player by switching between the displacement modes.

In the gaming machine D1, a first member slidably arranged on the base member and driven by the first driving means, and a second member slidably arranged on the base member and the second driving means. And a second member driven by the second member, wherein the first portion and the second portion of the displacement member are respectively rotatably connected to the first member and the second member, respectively. ..

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, a first member that is slidably arranged on the base member and is driven by the first driving means, and a slidably arranged member on the base member are provided. And a second member driven by the second driving means, wherein the first portion and the second portion of the displacement member are at least rotatably connected to the first member and the second member, respectively. When the first member is slidably displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, it is possible to form a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side, while the second driving means drives the second member. When the member is slid and displaced, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side can be formed. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two different displacement modes, by switching between these displacement modes, it is possible to produce a player's surprise.

In particular, according to the gaming machine D2, two types of displacement modes are not formed by making the rotation centers the same and making the rotation directions different, but the rotation directions are different and the rotation centers are made different. Therefore, the change of the displacement mode of the displacement member can be increased, and the player's surprise can be facilitated.

In the gaming machine D2, the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a connecting pin protruding from one of the first portion of the displacement member or the first member is provided. A gaming machine D3, which is rotatably and slidably inserted into a guide groove formed on the other side.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D2, the first member and the second member are linearly displaceable on the base member, and one of the first portion and the first member of the displacement member is provided. Since the connecting pin protruding from the other is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guide groove formed in the other, the driving force of the first driving means linearly displaces the first member or the driving force of the second driving means. According to whether to linearly displace the second member, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side and a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side are formed. it can. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two different displacement modes, by switching between these displacement modes, it is possible to produce a player's surprise.

In this case, since the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, there is no need to have a complicated structure as in the case of sliding displacement along a curved locus (the curved locus Then, it is necessary to provide not only a mechanism for guiding the first member and the second member in a curved shape but also a mechanism for continuously applying a driving force to the first member and the second member that are displaced in the curved shape. Occurs), for example, a rack and pinion mechanism can be utilized, and its structure can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the durability and operation reliability.

In the gaming machine D3, the direction of linear displacement of the first member and the direction of linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel to each other.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, the direction of the linear displacement of the first member and the direction of the linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel to each other, so the first driving means or the second In addition to the displacement mode in which only one of the drive units is driven to rotate the entire displacement member, both the first drive unit and the second drive unit are driven to linearly displace (for example, traverse) the entire displacement member. Aspects can be formed. That is, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least three different displacement modes, by switching between these displacement modes, it is possible to facilitate an effect that surprises the player.

In particular, according to the gaming machine D4, the type of displacement (rotation) is the same as the displacement mode of the displacement member, but the type of displacement itself is made different in addition to making the direction of rotation and the position of the center of rotation different. Since it is possible (that is, rotation and linear displacement can be formed), the change in the displacement mode of the displacement member can be further increased, and the player's surprise can be further facilitated.

In the gaming machine D4, the displacement speed of the first member and the displacement speed of the second member are different when the first member and the second member are driven by the first drive means and the second drive means, respectively. A gaming machine D5 characterized by being set to speed.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D4, when the first member and the second member are respectively driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, the displacement speed of the first member and the second speed Since the displacement speed of the member is different from that of the displacement member, the displacement of the displacement member can include a rotational motion and a linear motion. That is, the displacement member can be not only displaced (linearly moved) in parallel with the linear displacement direction of the first member and the second member while maintaining its posture, but also can be linearly moved while rotating its posture. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the production of the player's surprise.

Displacement of the displacement member in a displacement mode that combines such rotational movement and linear movement is not possible with the conventional configuration in which the displacement member slides along the slide groove by the driving force of the one drive means. The present invention, for the first time, makes it possible to utilize the two driving means as in the present invention.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the base member is provided with a second displacing member that is displaceable, and when the displacing member is displaced by the driving force of the first drive means, the displacement The second displacement member is displaced together with the member, and the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second drive means. Gaming machine D6.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the gaming machine D6 includes a second displacement member displaceably arranged on the base member, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first drive means. When the displacement member is displaced, the second displacement member is displaced together with the displacement member, while when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second drive means, the second displacement member is maintained in the stopped state. The device (change) between the displacement mode by the first drive means and the displacement mode by the second drive means can be increased. Therefore, by switching between the displacement modes, it is possible to easily perform an effect that surprises the player.

<About the concept of the invention with the projection unit 5600 as an example>
In a gaming machine provided with a target member to be a target of light irradiation and a light irradiator for irradiating light toward the target member, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiator is formed to be displaceable. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means is changed by the displacement of the one or both.

Here, a game is provided that includes a displacement member that is displaceable between the first position and the second position, and a drive unit that applies a driving force to the displacement member to displace the displacement member, and performs an effect by displacement of the displacement member. A machine is known (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-239870). In this gaming machine, light irradiating means (LED) is arranged inside the displacement member, and a light-transmitting portion made of a light-transmitting material is provided on the front surface (the surface on the player side) of the displacement member. By irradiating the light section from the back surface with the light irradiating means, the player can visually recognize the form in which a part (translucent section) of the displacement member is emitting light. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the irradiation mode of the target member is constant by the light irradiation means, there is a problem in that the mode of change visually recognized by the player is small and it is difficult to provide the interest.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiating means are formed to be displaceable, and the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiating means is changed by the displacement of one or both. The mode visually recognized by the player can be changed. As a result, the player can easily be entertained.

Note that, as a mode in which the light irradiation mode is changed, for example, a mode in which the position of the target member irradiated by the light irradiation unit is changed, and a distance from the irradiation surface of the light irradiation unit to the irradiation position of the target member is changed. Examples of the forms include a combination of these forms and the like.

The gaming machine E1 is provided with a base member, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably disposed on the base member.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably arranged on the base member. The static wiring can be fixed, and accordingly, the occurrence of disconnection can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine E2, a shield member having an opening and arranged on the base member is provided, and a part of the target member is made visible to the player through the opening of the shield member, and the target member is a light source. Formed in a plate shape from a transmissive material and provided with a reflecting portion, the light emitted from the light irradiating means and incident from the side end face is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member. A gaming machine E3 characterized by.

Here, in the reflecting portion, a plurality of groups including a plurality of reflecting surfaces are arranged, and each group has a shape of a pattern or a pattern. Therefore, the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member can be recognized by the player as a pattern or a pattern.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the gaming machine E3 is provided with a shielding member having an opening and arranged on the base member, and allows the player to visually recognize a part of the target member from the opening of the shielding member. By displacing the target member, the player can visually recognize a different portion of the target member through the opening of the shielding member.

For example, a first position in which a first group of the plurality of groups forming the reflection unit is visible through the opening, and a second group which is a group different from the first group are the openings. When the target member is displaceable between the second position and the second position where it can be seen through, the target member is arranged at the first position so that the first group can be moved through the opening of the shielding member. While allowing the player to visually recognize the first pattern or pattern to be formed, by displacing the target member from the first position to the second position, the pattern or pattern to be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member is displayed. , The second pattern or pattern formed by the second group can be changed.

In this case, since the target member is formed of a light-transmissive material, when the target member is displaced in order to change the pattern or pattern visually recognized by the player, the light from the light irradiation means is not irradiated. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the target member is displaced.

In the gaming machine E3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape in a front view, and is rotatably arranged on the base member with a center of the circular shape or the annular shape as a rotation center. Playing machine E4.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape in a front view, and is rotatable with respect to the base member with the center of the circular shape or the annular shape as the rotation center. As compared with the case where the target member is slidably displaceable, the target member can be disposed while ensuring the number of patterns and patterns to be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member. The space required for can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine E2, the target member is formed of a light-transmissive material in a circular plate shape in a front view and is also provided with a reflecting portion, so that the light emitted from the light irradiating means and incident from the side end surface is incident. The light irradiating means is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member, and a plurality of the light irradiating means are arranged in a distributed manner around the target member in a posture in which an irradiation surface is directed to a side end surface of the target member. The gaming machine E5, wherein the target member is rotatably disposed on the base member with a center of the circular shape as a center of rotation.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E6, the target member is formed of a light transmissive material in the shape of a circular plate and is also provided with a reflecting portion, and is irradiated from the light irradiation means from the side end surface. The incident light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member, and the light irradiating means has a plurality of dispersed arrangements around the target member with the irradiation surface facing the side end surface of the target member. Therefore, by rotating the target member while irradiating light from the light irradiating means, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front surface of the target member in the rotated state. it can.

In the gaming machine E5, the gaming machine E6 is characterized in that the plurality of light irradiation means are dispersedly arranged in a circumferential direction at positions equidistant from a rotation center of the target member.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E5, since the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member, the rotational position of the target member ( The light emitted from the front surface of the target member can be easily made constant regardless of the phase. That is, it is possible to stably form a pattern or a pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front surface of the target member.

The gaming machine E1 is provided with a base member, and the light irradiation means and the target member are displaceably arranged on the base member.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, the light irradiating means and the target member are displaceably arranged on the base member. It is possible to increase the variation of changes in the irradiation mode. Therefore, the mode visually recognized by the player can be further changed, and the player can be more easily entertained.

In the gaming machine E7, a driving unit that applies a driving force to the target member to displace the target member is provided, and the light irradiating unit is in contact with the target member displaced by the driving force applied from the driving unit. Then, the gaming machine E8, which is displaced together with the target member.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E7, the gaming machine E8 includes a driving unit that applies a driving force to the target member to displace it, and the light irradiation unit is a target that is displaced by the driving force applied from the driving unit. When the member is brought into contact with the target member, the member is displaced together with the target member, so that the member can also serve as a driving unit for displacing the target member, and it is not necessary to separately provide a driving unit for displacing the light irradiation unit. it can.

<Feature F group> (Free setting of countdown notice)
Of the different effect periods, effect period setting means for setting one effect period, specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect in a specific time period set in the one effect period, and the specific effect executing means A notification effect executing unit that executes a notification effect that notifies in advance that a specific effect is to be executed, and a start timing of the notification effect that is set based on predetermined first information, and a second time different from the first information. A gaming machine F1 comprising: a notification effect setting means for setting an ending opportunity of the notification effect based on information.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period of time to suggest to the player whether or not a win has been won. And, among the effects executed for a predetermined period, a pre-notification effect (countdown effect) for informing the player in advance of the timing at which a specific effect (for example, a cut-in effect) is executed is configured to be executable. There is an opportunity. (For example, JP2013-198568A).

In such a conventional game machine, the player can be informed in advance of the timing at which a particular effect is executed, so that the variable effect can be executed while increasing the player's expectation for the jackpot. However, when it is determined that the preliminary notification effect is to be executed, since the period for executing the preliminary notification effect (that is, the start timing and the end timing) is set, the effect content becomes monotonous, There is a problem that the player gets tired of the production early. In addition, in the conventional game machine having the above-described configuration, while changing the pre-notification effect, the effect mode of the pre-notification effect is changed (for example, the specific effect that is the target of the pre-notification effect is changed. ), there was a problem that it was not possible to enhance the effect.

According to the gaming machine F1, as the execution period of the notification effect for notifying that the specific effect is to be executed, the notification effect setting means sets the start timing based on the first information, and based on the second information. The termination trigger is set. Thus, the period for which the notification effect is executed is set based on a plurality of different pieces of information, so that there is an effect that the period for which the notification effect is executed can be freely set and the effect effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine F1 has an execution information discriminating unit that discriminates the execution information of the specific effect, and the notification effect setting unit uses the execution information of the specific effect determined by the execution information determining unit as the second information. A gaming machine F2 characterized in that

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine F1, the execution timing for setting the notification effect is set as the second information, which is the execution information for indicating that the specific effect is executed. It is possible to set a notification effect corresponding to. Therefore, while it is possible to freely set the period in which the notification effect is executed, it is possible to execute the notification effect corresponding to the specific effect to be executed, so that there is an effect that the effect effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine F2, the execution information determining means determines at least a timing at which the specific effect is executed, the gaming machine F3.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2, execution information for indicating that the specific effect is to be executed is used as the second information to set the end timing of the notification effect, so the execution timing of the specific effect is set. It is possible to set a notification effect corresponding to. Therefore, while it is possible to freely set the period in which the notification effect is executed, it is possible to accurately notify the timing at which the specific effect is executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine F2 or F3, as the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means, there is provided a specific effect setting means for setting one of the specific effects having a plurality of different execution timings. A gaming machine F4 characterized by the above.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2 or F3, it is possible to easily set, for a plurality of specific effects having different execution timings, a notification effect in accordance with the timing at which the specific effects are executed. it can. Therefore, while the period during which the notification effect is executed can be freely set, the period during which the specific effect is executed can be accurately notified, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machines F1 to F4, the notification effect setting means sets the start timing of the notification effect different from the timing of setting the start timing of the notification effect on the basis of the first information, and the end timing of the notification effect on the basis of the second information. A gaming machine F5, characterized in that

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the execution period of the notification effect can be set at different timings, so that the period in which the notification effect is executed is freely set. Therefore, there is an effect that the staging effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine F5, the notification effect period setting means sets an end timing of the notification effect based on the second information while the notification effect execution means is executing the notification effect. Characteristic game machine F6.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F5, it is possible to set an ending timing of the notification effect after executing the notification effect, so that the notification effect is executed after the notification effect is executed. The execution period will be set. Therefore, it is possible to freely set the period in which the notification effect is executed, and it is possible to enhance the effect. Further, at the time when the notification effect is executed, since it is not set at what timing the notification effect is targeted for the specific effect, the content of the notification effect may be predicted by the player in advance. It can be surely prevented.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, operation means operable by the player, operation effect execution means for executing operation effect for operating the operation means, and the operation executed by the operation effect execution means. And an operation determination means for determining that the operation means is operated during the performance, wherein the notification performance setting means sets the performance mode of the notification performance based on the determination result of the operation determination means. A gaming machine F7 characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the presentation period of the notification production is set based on the operation content of the operation means during the operation production, so that the player participates in the production. It has the effect of increasing motivation.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the notification effect setting unit sets a first notification effect period and a second notification effect period set after the first notification effect period as a period in which the notification effect is executed. And at least the second notification effect period is set on the basis of the second information, the gaming machine F8.

According to the gaming machine F8, in any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, it is possible to set the second notification effect period based on the second information in the period in which the notification effect is executed, so that the notification effect period can be freely set. In the gaming machine that can be set to, it is possible to secure a period for performing the effect based on the second information, and it is possible to perform an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine F8, the notification effect executing means executes a time-dependent effect that suggests a time period until the specific effect is executed during the second notification effect period. Machine F9.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F8, the timing effect can be executed during the second notification effect period, so that the player can easily be notified of the timing at which the specific effect is executed. There is an effect that you can.

In the gaming machine F9, based on the notification effect period determination means for determining the effect period of the notification effect set by the notification effect setting means, and the length of the effect period determined by the notification effect period determination means, A gaming machine F10, comprising: a temporal effect period setting means for setting a period for which the temporal effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F9, the time-dependent effect period setting means executes the time-dependent effect period for a certain period of time based on the length of the effect period in which the notification effect is executed. Since the timing obtained by subtracting a certain period from the execution timing of the specific effect is determined as an opportunity to execute the time-dependent effect, even if a different effect period is set by the effect period setting means, the start timing of the specific effect is accurate. The effect is that it can be suggested to the player.

In any of the gaming machines F8 to F10, the notification effect setting means sets the effect mode of the first effect executed during the first notification effect period based on the first information, and A gaming machine F11 having a first effect mode changing means for changing the first effect mode when a predetermined effect variable condition is satisfied during one notification effect period.

According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines F8 to F10, the effect mode of the first effect executed during the first notification effect period is established while the first effect is being executed. It is changed when possible production variable conditions are satisfied. As a result, after the notification effect is executed, the effect mode of the notification effect can be changed, so that the effect effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine F11, the effect variable condition is satisfied when the notification effect setting means sets a timing for ending the notification effect.

According to the gaming machine F12, when the timing of ending the notification effect is set and the effect period of the notification effect is determined, the effect mode of the first effect can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to execute the first effect corresponding to the set termination trigger, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine F1, operation means operable by a player, operation effect execution means for executing operation effect for operating the operation means, and the operation during the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means. An operation determining means for determining that the means has been operated, and the operation effect executing means executes the operation effect while the notification effect is being executed by the notification effect executing means. The gaming machine F13 is characterized in that the notification effect setting means sets the second information based on a determination result by the operation determining means.

According to the gaming machine F13, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the timing of ending the notification effect is set based on the operation content for the operation effect executed during the notification effect. Therefore, the effect period of the notification effect can be changed by the operation of the player, and the effect effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine F13 has a specific period setting means for setting the specific period based on the determination result by the operation determining means, and the notification effect setting means indicates the specific period set by the specific period setting means. A game machine F14, characterized in that the information for is the second information.

According to the gaming machine F14, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F13, a specific period during which the specific effect is executed is set based on the operation content for the operation effect executed during the notification effect, and within the set specific period. Since the effect period of the notification effect can be varied based on this, there is an effect that the notification effect corresponding to the specific effect to be executed can be executed.

In the gaming machine F14, the specific period setting means sets one predetermined period out of a plurality of predetermined periods as the specific period, and the specific effect executing means is set by the specific period setting means. A gaming machine F15, which executes the specific effect corresponding to the specific period.

According to the gaming machine F15, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F14, a specific effect corresponding to the specific period set by the specific period setting means is executed, so that different specific effects are executed depending on the operation content of the operation means. You can Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically participate in the game.

In the gaming machine F15, the notification effect setting means sets a first notification effect period and a second notification effect period set after the first notification effect period as a period in which the notification effect is executed. The operation effect executing means executes the operation effect during the first notification effect period, and the length of the second notification effect period corresponds to the specific time period set by the specific time period setting means. It is provided with a production period changing means for making it change. A gaming machine F16 characterized by the following.

According to the game machine F16, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine F15, in the notification effect set from the first notification effect period and the second notification effect period, the operation effect is executed during the first notification effect period, The length of the notification effect is changed by changing the length of the second notification effect period based on the operation content of the operation means during the operation effect. Therefore, when changing the length of the notification effect, it is possible to secure a period in which the operation effect is executed, and thus it is possible to execute an effect that makes it easier for the player to operate the operation means.

<Characteristic G group> (variation of HP display)
Judgment means for executing the judgment based on the effect information, variable effect execution means for executing the variable effect for changing the effect value based on the judgment result by the judgment means, and the variable effect is executed by the effect execution means. If the first effect value is determined by the first effect value determining means for determining a first effect value for varying the effect value, and if the first effect value is determined by the first effect value determining means, the effect value And a second effect value determining means for determining a second effect value different from the first effect value that can be changed.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period of time to suggest to the player whether or not a jackpot is won. Then, as a fluctuating effect, a game machine that executes the effect (battle effect) in which the own character and the enemy character play a battle, and notifies the result of whether or not the jackpot is won depending on the value of each physical strength point at the end of the effect. is there. (For example, JP-A-2015-9075).

In such a conventional game machine, the production of reducing the physical strength points of the own character or the enemy character is performed multiple times during the battle production, and the physical strength points to be reduced are discriminated by whether or not the jackpot is won to the player. By informing the player in advance of the timing at which the effect is executed, it is possible to execute the variable effect while increasing the player's expectation for the jackpot. Furthermore, by setting the physical strength points that decrease during the battle production in detail, the production pattern of the battle production is increased and the player is prevented from getting tired of the battle production. However, the conventional game machine manages the detailed physical fitness points displayed on the display screen and sets the next physical fitness point based on the managed physical fitness points, which reduces the physical fitness points. There is a problem that the amount of processing for managing becomes enormous. It should be noted that it is possible to simplify the management of reduction of physical strength points by reducing the pattern that reduces physical strength points during battle production, but in this case, the production pattern of battle production will decrease, and the player will be able to quickly There was a problem of getting tired of.

According to the gaming machine G1, since the effect value is determined based on the values determined by the plurality of determining means, it is easier to increase the variation of the effect value than when the effect value is determined by one determining means. There is an effect that can be done.

In the gaming machine G1, an effect state setting unit capable of setting a specific effect state in which the variable effect is continuously executed, and the effect value when the specific effect state is set by the effect state setting unit. The production value updating means for continuously variably updating, and the first production value storage means capable of storing the first production value determined by the first production value determining means, the production value updating means, A gaming machine G2, which variably updates the effect value based on the first effect value stored in the first effect value storage means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, when the effect value determined based on the first effect value and the second effect value is variably updated, it is not the summed effect value but the first effect value. Since only one effect value is stored and the effect value is variably updated based on the first effect value, the effect value (actual value obtained by adding the first effect value and the second effect value) that is actually displayed is With respect to the display pattern, it is possible to reduce the pattern of the value (first effect value) that is variably updated by the effect value updating means, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

In the gaming machine G2, an effect mode setting unit that sets an effect mode based on the variable amount of the effect value that is variably updated by the effect value updating unit, and an effect that displays the effect mode set by the effect mode setting unit. A mode display means, and a gaming machine G3.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2, a performance mode based on the variable amount of the performance value variably updated by the performance updating means is displayed. Therefore, by viewing the performance mode to be executed, There is an effect that the player can be informed easily of the variable amount of the effect value.

In the gaming machine G3, the first effect value is a part of the effect value, the second effect value is configured with a value different from the first effect value, and the first effect and the A gaming machine G4 having an effect value adding means for adding the second effect value to calculate the effect value.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G3, the first effect value that is a part of the effect value and the second effect value that is different from the first effect value are added by the effect value adding means. Since the effect value is determined, there is an effect that the effect value can be further varied.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, a privilege is awarded based on a determination unit that performs determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and that the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result. A gaming machine G5, comprising: a privilege giving means, wherein the first effect value determination means determines the first effect value when the determination means executes the determination.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G1 to G4, the first effect value is determined when the determination is performed by the determining means, and the effect value is variable, so that the effect value is variable. The effect can be executed so as to be related to the determination result of the determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player pay attention to the variable state of the effect value and enhance the effect of effect.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the second effect value determination means determines the second effect value based on the fact that the first effect value determination means determines the first effect value. A gaming machine G6 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, when the first effect value is determined, the second effect value is determined, so the first effect value and the second effect. The effect value that is the sum of the value and the value is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the variable amount of the effect value that is changed by the determination performed by the determination means, and it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting.

In the gaming machine G5 or G6, the first effect value determining means changes the variable amount of the first effect value based on the determination result of the determining means.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G5 or G6, the variable amount of the effect value can be varied based on the determination result of the determining means, so that the variable amount of the effect value for the player is changed. The effect of being able to pay attention to and enhancing the effect of production can be obtained.

In the gaming machine G7, the first effect value determination means facilitates the determination of the first effect value so that the variable amount increases when the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result. A gaming machine G8 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G7, the larger the variable amount of the effect value, the easier it is to give the privilege. Therefore, the player can watch the variable amount of the effect value. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G8, as the selection range in which the second effect value determined by the second effect value determination means can be selected, the first range or a second range different from the first range. And a determination value determining means for determining whether the first effect value determined by the first effect value determining means is a predetermined value or more, and the second effect value determination The means selects one of the plurality of selection ranges stored in the selection range storage means based on the determination result of the determination value determination means to determine the second effect value. A gaming machine G9 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G8, if the selection range in which the second effect value is selected is different based on whether or not the first effect value is equal to or more than a predetermined value. Can be made. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily increase the variation of the effect value.

In the gaming machine G9, the selection range storage means stores a range in which the first effect value can be increased or decreased as the second effect value, and a range in which the first effect value can be decreased. And the second effect value determining means determines that the determination result of the determination value determining means determines that the first effect value is less than a predetermined value. In the gaming machine G10, the second selection range is selected to set the second effect value.

According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G9, when the first effect value is less than the predetermined value, the second effect value for decreasing the first effect value is selected, and thus the first effect. It is possible to prevent the effect value, which is the sum of the value and the second effect value, from becoming larger than the first effect value. Thereby, for example, when the lower limit value (for example, 0) is determined as the first effect value, it is possible to prevent the effect value from being determined to be a value larger than the lower limit value, which gives the player a feeling of strangeness. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the execution of the production that is caused.

<Characteristic H group> (Notification of advantageous period of falling lottery machine)
First determination means for performing determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and privilege game execution for executing a privilege game when the first determination result by the first determination means is a predetermined first determination result Means, and a high probability state in which the first determination result by the first determination means tends to be the predetermined first determination result, and a first determination result by the first determination means is higher than the predetermined probability by the first determination result. When the predetermined determination condition is satisfied in a state in which the high probability state is set by the probability setting means and the probability setting means that can set a low probability state in which the first determination result is unlikely to occur, The probability setting means sets the low probability state when the second determination result by the second determination means is the predetermined second determination result. Yes, as a game state, a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state in which the predetermined determination condition is easily established and a second game state in which the predetermined determination condition is less likely to be established than the first game state. In the gaming machine having the game state setting means and a period effect executing means for executing a period effect for notifying a period in which the first game state is set, the game state setting means includes: In the state where the first game state is set, the second game state is set when the first condition is satisfied, and the period effect executing means determines whether or not the first condition is satisfied. The period effect including a first effect for showing and a second effect for determining an effect mode of the first effect is repeatedly executed, and the first condition is set by the probability setting means. Established when both the first requirement that the low probability game is set and the second requirement that the first determination means executes a predetermined number of determinations in the state where the first game state is set are satisfied. The gaming machine H1 is characterized by comprising period effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the period effect corresponding to the establishment information of the first requirement or the second requirement.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the gaming state is set to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on that the winning is won (for example, a probability variation state in which the probability of winning is high) There is a gaming machine that suggests to the player whether or not the period in which the gaming state continues is indicated by the result of the effect (for example, battle effect). (For example, JP 2011-143197 A).

In such a conventional game machine, when the winning state is won when the advantageous gaming state continues, the effect result of the winning pattern that the own character wins is displayed, and when the winning state is won when the advantageous gaming state ends, the own character is won. The result of the defeat pattern that is defeated is displayed, and when the winning result is not won (when the advantageous game state is still set), the effect of the battle is displayed so that the result of the draw pattern that does not win or lose is displayed. Since it is executed, the contents of the battle effect can be watched by the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. However, in the advantageous game state, when the game is executed for a long time without being won, the battle effect in which the effect result of the draw pattern is displayed as a result is easily executed, and the player for the battle effect is executed. There was a problem that the degree of expectation of was lowered. Further, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, as a result of the lottery, if a specific variation pattern is drawn without winning the winning, the battle effect of the draw pattern is executed, so that When a specific variation pattern is continuously drawn, there is a problem that the battle effect of the draw pattern is continuously executed, and the expectation of the player for the battle effect is further lowered.

According to the gaming machine H1, among the period effects executed in the state where the first game state is set, the effect mode of the second effect is set corresponding to the establishment information of the first requirement and the second requirement. Then, it is possible to predict whether or not the first requirement and the second requirement are satisfied based on the rendering mode of the second rendering. Thereby, even when the period effect is repeatedly executed, the player can predict the game state based on the effect mode of the second effect that is newly executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the user from getting tired of the period effect early.

In the gaming machine H1, the period effect mode setting means includes a first effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the first effect.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, the effect mode of the first effect for indicating whether or not the first condition is satisfied is, in addition to the effect result of the second effect, the first requirement or Since it is set based on whether or not the second requirement is satisfied, it is necessary to predict the result of whether or not the first condition is satisfied and the situation until the first condition is satisfied, depending on the effect mode of the first effect. You can Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be more closely watched in the effect mode of the first effect, and the effect effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the period effect mode setting means includes a second effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode of the second effect.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the production mode of the second production for determining the production mode of the first production is based on whether the first requirement or the second requirement is satisfied. Therefore, the situation until the first condition is satisfied can be predicted according to the effect mode of the second effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect mode of the second effect and enhance the effect.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the period effect mode setting means sets a different effect mode when any one of the first requirement and the second requirement is satisfied. Characteristic gaming machine H4.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, any one of a plurality of requirements for satisfying the first condition is satisfied, so that the production mode of the period effect is achieved. It is variable. Therefore, it is possible to predict the period until the first condition is satisfied, depending on the presentation mode of the period presentation. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player pay attention to the production mode of the period production and enhance the production effect.

The gaming machine H4 has a remaining period determination means for determining the remaining period until the second requirement is satisfied, and the period effect mode setting means is one of the remaining period determination means when the first requirement is satisfied. A gaming machine H5, characterized in that an effect mode of the period effect corresponding to a determination result is set.

According to the gaming machine H5, the effect mode of the term effect is set based on the remaining period until the first condition is satisfied. Thereby, it is possible to suggest the remaining period until the first condition is satisfied, depending on the presentation mode of the period presentation. Therefore, it is possible to make the player enthusiastically play the game with a sense of crisis, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the period effect executing means switches the period effect being executed from the second effect to the first effect when a predetermined effect switching condition is satisfied, and It is characterized in that ease of establishment of the effect switching condition is made different depending on whether the high probability state is set by the probability setting means or the low probability state is set. Gaming machine H6.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the high probability state is set by the probability setting means and the low probability state is set by the probability setting means. Since the frequency with which one effect is executed can be varied, the currently set probability state can be predicted based on the frequency with which the first effect is executed, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine H6, the gaming machine H7 has condition setting means for facilitating the fulfillment of the effect switching condition for a predetermined period after the first requirement is met.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H6, the first effect can be easily executed for a predetermined period after the low probability state is set by the probability setting means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player predict the currently set probability state based on the frequency with which the first effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the period effect executing means executes the first effect when the first determination result by the first determining means is the predetermined first determination result. A gaming machine H8 characterized by the above.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the first effect is executed even when the determination result of the first determining means is the determination result of executing the privilege game. Therefore, when the first effect is executed, the effect is watched while paying attention to whether or not the bonus game is won or whether or not the first condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the effect to be executed and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8, there is provided a number-of-times measuring means for measuring the number of times of the period effect executed while the first gaming state is continuously set by the gaming state setting means. The second performance mode setting means sets the second performance mode based on the number of executions of the period performance measured by the number measuring means, the gaming machine H9.

According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines H1 to H8, when the period effect is repeatedly executed, the second effect mode is set based on the number of times it is repeated. When the game state is continuously set for a long period of time, it is possible to prevent the same effect mode from being repeatedly set as the second effect mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In any one of the gaming machines H6 to H9, in the state where the effect period determination means for determining the effect period after the first effect is executed by the period effect execution means and the predetermined effect switching condition are satisfied, When the effect period determined by the effect period determining means is within a predetermined period, the effect control means controls the execution of the first effect by the period effect executing means. Characteristic gaming machine H10.

According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines H6 to H9, even if the effect switching condition is satisfied, it is determined that the effect period from the execution of the first effect is within the predetermined period. In that case, the execution of the first effect is restricted by the effect restricting means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first effect from being frequently executed, and thus it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of executing the first effect.

In the gaming machine H10, the first effect executed when the first determination result by the first determination means is the predetermined first determination result is that it is not restricted by the effect restriction means. Characteristic gaming machine H11.

According to the gaming machine H11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H10, the first effect executed when the privilege game is executed is executed regardless of the determination result of the effect period determination means, so that the privilege game is executed. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a reduction in the effect of the effect when executed. Further, when the first effect is executed again within a predetermined effect period after the previous first effect is executed, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation that the privilege game is executed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect. There is an effect.

<Characteristic J group> (The target performance is changed at the notification timing of the expectation increase effect)
Expectation display control means capable of displaying on the display means a plurality of expectation display modes capable of stepwise suggesting the expectation for indicating that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the expectation display control means for displaying the expectation display control means. At least one of the plurality of expected degree display modes, the display mode changing means for changing the expectation level display mode stepwise, the variable information setting means for setting the variable information changed by the display mode changing means, And a variable suggestion effect executing means for executing a variable suggestion effect indicating that the degree display mode is variable, and the expectation degree display control means is an expectation degree of at least one of the plurality of expectation degree display modes. A game machine J1 for displaying a display mode on the display means at different timings, and having an execution timing setting means for setting a timing for executing the variable suggestion effect.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period of time to suggest to the player whether or not a jackpot is won. Then, as the display mode of the character displayed on the display screen in the effect executed for the predetermined period, there are a plurality of display modes corresponding to the expectation degree of the jackpot, and the jackpot expectation degree of the current variation effect is displayed. There is a gaming machine that informs the player according to the display mode of the character. (For example, JP 2013-248305 A).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, since the expectation of the jackpot to the player can be shown by the display mode of the character displayed during the variable effect, it is possible to make the effect content of the variable effect executed interesting. It is possible to enhance the effect. Further, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, among the plurality of display modes, a plurality of types of expectation level display modes for displaying the display mode corresponding to the expectation level of the jackpot are provided, and the display modes of each expectation level display mode are combined. Since it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation to the player by making a positive judgment, it is possible to allow the player to predict the jackpot expectation based on the display modes of a plurality of types of expectation display modes, and to be executed. It was possible to make the player pay attention to the contents and enhance the effect of production. Further, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, the suggestive effect for suggesting the display mode of the expectation display mode is configured to be executable, and it is suggested which display mode is displayed as the expectation display mode. There is also a gaming machine configured as described above and performing an expectation display mode pre-indication production that causes the player to predict which display mode the expectation display mode is displayed as the variation production. There is also a gaming machine in which the display mode of the expectation level display mode is changed from the display mode once displayed on the display screen.

However, in a gaming machine having a plurality of types of expectation display modes, when the expectation display mode advance suggestion effect corresponding to a specific expectation degree display mode is executed, the expectation that is not the target of the expectation display mode advance suggestion effect There is a problem in that the change in the degree display mode is implicitly denied and the effect is reduced.

According to the gaming machine J1, the variable suggestion effect execution means provides the variable suggestion effect suggesting that one of the plurality of expectation degree display modes displayed on the display means at different timings is variable. To be executed. Since the execution timing of the variable suggestion effect is set by the execution timing setting means, the execution timing of the variable suggestion effect can be different. Thereby, even if the same effect mode is used as the variable suggestion effect, there is an effect that the expectation degree display mode that is the suggestion target of the variable suggestion effect can be different.

In the gaming machine J1, a determination unit that performs determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and a privilege granting unit that grants a privilege based on the result of the determination made by the determination unit being a specific determination result, A gaming machine J2, characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination result of the determination means is the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1, when the privilege is given, the expectation degree display mode can easily show a high expectation degree, and thus the player can display the expectation level display mode. You will pay attention to the contents. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the variable suggestion effect is for notifying variable information of an expected degree display mode that is gradually changed.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the variable suggestion effect can notify the variable information of the target degree of expectation display mode. There is an effect that it can be made to gaze and the staging effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine J3, the variable suggestion effect is for displaying a plurality of variable amounts including at least a variable amount for indicating the degree to which the expected degree display mode is actually changed. J4.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J3, a plurality of variable amounts are displayed as a variable suggestive effect, so a larger variable among the plurality of variable amounts displayed to the player. There is an effect that the game can be played while expecting the amount to be an actual variable amount, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Any of the gaming machines J1 to J4 has a target notifying unit for notifying the expected degree display mode which is the target of the variable suggestion effect executed by the variable suggestion effect execution unit, before the variable suggestion effect is finished. A gaming machine J5 characterized in that

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, by informing the player in advance of the target of the variable suggestion effect to be executed this time, the variable to be executed for the player is changed. There is an effect that the suggestive production can be entertained with peace of mind.

In any of the gaming machines J2 to J5, based on the determination result of the determination means, based on the expected degree type setting means for setting the expected degree type, and the expected degree type set by the expected degree type setting means An expectation degree setting means for setting an expectation degree for each of the plurality of expectation degree display modes, wherein the expectation degree display control means sets the plurality of expectation degree display modes set by the expectation degree setting means. The expected degree display mode for indicating at least a part of the expected degree of the expected degree is displayed in advance, and the variable suggestion effect is set by the expected degree already displayed and the expected degree setting means. A gaming machine J6 characterized by suggesting a difference from the expected degree as the variable amount.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines J2 to J5, an effect that suggests a difference between the already displayed expectation and the preset expectation as a variable amount is executed. Therefore, even if the variable amount displayed as the variable suggestion effect is small, if the variable suggestion effect is executed for the expectation degree display mode in which the high expectation degree is already displayed, the privilege is granted. It is possible to increase the possibility that Therefore, not only the effect content of the variable suggestion effect, but also the display mode of the current expectation level display mode is selected, and the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine J2, the operation means operable by the player, the operation effect execution means for executing the operation effect for operating the operation means, and the operation in the operation effect executed by the operation effect execution means. An operation discriminating means for discriminating that the means has been operated, and the display mode changing means changes the expectation degree display mode in accordance with the discrimination result by the operation discriminating means. Characteristic game machine J8.

According to the gaming machine J8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J2, the expectation degree display mode is changed corresponding to the operation on the operating means, so that the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine J8, a determination means that performs determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game when the determination result by the determination means is a predetermined determination result, When a predetermined acquisition condition is satisfied, an acquisition unit that acquires entrance information and the entrance information acquired by the acquisition unit are stored with a predetermined number as an upper limit until the predetermined determination condition is satisfied. A possible storage means, a pre-determination means for performing a pre-determination based on the entry information stored in the storage means, and a number of entry information indicating the number of the entry information stored in the storage means. In a gaming machine having display means for displaying the number of pieces of entered ball information, when a predetermined additional condition is satisfied, it is displayed by the means for displaying the entered piece of ball information corresponding to the discrimination result by the operation discriminating means. A gaming machine J9, characterized in that the gaming machine J9 has additional effect executing means for executing an additional effect for changing a display mode for indicating the number of pieces of ball entry information.

According to the gaming machine J9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J8, it is possible to change the display mode for indicating the number of pieces of entered ball information by the additional effect that is executed in response to the operation on the operating means. There is an effect that the player can motivate the operation means.

The gaming machine J9 has an effect condition determination means for determining whether or not the expected degree display mode displayed by the expected degree display control means satisfies a predetermined effect condition, and the effect condition determination means satisfies the effect condition. A gaming machine J10, characterized in that the additional condition is satisfied when it is determined that the additional condition is not satisfied.

According to the gaming machine J10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J9, when the expectation degree display mode displayed on the display means does not satisfy a predetermined effect condition, an additional effect is executed, so that a plurality of effects are achieved. There is an effect that it is possible to have relevance and enhance the effect of production.

In the gaming machine J10, the effect condition determination means determines that the effect condition is not satisfied when the expected degree display control means does not display a predetermined number of the expected degree display modes. Amusement machine J11.

According to the gaming machine J11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J10, it is possible to complement the number of effects to be executed by executing an additional effect. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease.

<Characteristic K group> (Big hit production during holding consecutive times)
When the predetermined determination condition is satisfied, the determination unit that performs the determination, the privilege game execution unit that executes the privilege game when the determination result by the determination unit is the predetermined determination result, and the predetermined acquisition condition are When it is established, an acquisition unit that acquires entry information, and a storage unit that can store the entry information acquired by the acquisition unit up to a predetermined number until the predetermined determination condition is established. , A pre-determination means for performing a pre-determination based on the entry information stored in the storage means, the pre-determination means, at least the pre-determination conditions during the privilege game is satisfied In the case of playing, the pre-determination is executed, and it is provided with a production mode setting means for setting a production mode during the privilege game in accordance with a determination result of the pre-determination means. Gaming machine K1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the entering information is acquired based on the entry into the starting opening, and the holding means that can hold the entering information until the lottery conditions are established, and the lottery conditions are established. In the case of having a lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the entry information, and an executing means for executing a winning game which is advantageous to the player when the lottery result of the lottery means is hit There is a game machine. Then, it has a pre-determination means for pre-determining the entry information held in the holding means before the lottery is performed by the lottery means, and the pre-determination means that there is a hit in the hold at the end of the winning game. There is a gaming machine that continuously displays the display mode (the number of rounds) during the winning game when it is determined. (For example, JP, 2014-30737, A).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, a special effect can be executed during the second hitting game when the player wins the winning again in the hold, and the player can be satisfied. However, it is a configuration that determines the winning information that is withheld at the end of the big hit, and since the effect set at the time of the winning game is only executed during the first winning game, for example, the winning is won during the first winning game. Even if the winning information to be held is held, there is a problem that the effect for the first hit game cannot be changed and the effect cannot be enhanced.

Further, the effect is configured to be continuous for a plurality of hit games, but since the player can easily identify the break between the first hit game and the second hit game, the effect is only executed. However, there is a problem that it is possible to easily predict how much the winning game will be executed during the performance continuously executed during the winning game.

According to the gaming machine K1, the effect mode during the privilege game is set based on the determination result of the pre-determination means executed during the privilege game, so compared with the case where the effect mode during the privilege game is set in advance. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the processing load when setting the effect mode corresponding to the result of the preliminary determination.

In the gaming machine K1, the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means is one in which a plurality of small privilege games are executed, and when the small privilege game is executed, the pre-determination condition is satisfied. A gaming machine K2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, the pre-determination condition is satisfied when the small privilege game is executed, and the presentation mode during the privilege game is set, so the execution status of the small privilege game is executed. It is possible to set the presentation mode of the privilege game according to. Therefore, even if the presentation mode of the privilege game is set during the privilege game, there is an effect that the privilege game can be executed without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

In the gaming machine K2, as the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, there is a privilege game selecting means for selecting one privilege game from among the plurality of privilege games in which different numbers of small privilege games are executed. A gaming machine K3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K2, one privilege game is selected as a privilege game from a plurality of privilege games in which different numbers of small privilege games are executed. There is an effect that the game can be changed and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K3, the pre-determination means includes, when the result of the pre-determination is a predetermined pre-determination result, the storage means including the entry information for executing the privilege game. The effect mode setting means sets the effect mode during the privilege game in correspondence with the number of small privilege games executed in the privilege game which is pre-determined by the pre-determination means. A gaming machine K4 characterized by being

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K3, the performance mode during the privilege game is set according to the number of the small privilege games discriminated by the pre-determination means. There is an effect that it is possible to pay attention to the presentation mode.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the number-of-execution storage means for storing the number of small privilege games of the privilege game selected by the privilege game selection means, and the number of the small privilege games stored in the executed number storage means. Of the small privilege game number informing means for informing at least a part of the number, the number of the small privilege games stored in the executed number storage means, and the small privilege informed by the small privilege game number informing means First difference determination means for determining a difference from the number of games, and notification for setting the number of the small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means based on the determination result of the first difference determination means. A game machine K5 having a number setting means.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K3 or K4, the number of small privilege games (round games) executed during the privilege game (big hit) is partially reported, so that one benefit It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of small privilege games executed during the game, and play the game while expecting to execute more small privilege games while the privilege games are being executed. The effect is that it can be done.

In the gaming machine K5, there is provided an addition means for adding the number of the small privilege games executed in the privilege game pre-determined by the pre-determination means, to the execution number storage means. Machine K6.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K5, when it is preliminarily determined that the privilege game is executed by the predetermination means during the privilege game (big hit), in the preliminarily judged privilege game. The number of small privilege games to be executed is stored in the executed number storage means by the addition means. Accordingly, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times at short intervals, the number of small privilege games notified while the previous privilege game is being executed is changed to the small privilege game executed in the later privilege game. The number of can be taken into consideration when setting. Therefore, it is possible to predict whether or not the next privilege game will be executed by looking at the number of small privilege games notified during the privilege game by the small privilege game number notification means, and one privilege game is completed. There is an effect that it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the game after playing.

In the gaming machine K5 or K6, when the small privilege game is executed, it has an update judging means for judging whether to update the number of the small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means. A gaming machine K7 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K5 or K6, the update determination means determines whether to update the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means. Even if the number of small privilege games is set by the setting means, the number of small privilege games may not be updated. Therefore, even if the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means is not updated when a new small privilege game is executed, when the small privilege game is executed next time, It is possible to leave the possibility that the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means will be updated, and to perform a game while expecting to execute more small privilege games. effective.

In the gaming machine K7, when the determination result by the first difference determination means satisfies the first condition, a forced update means for updating the number of the small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means is provided. A gaming machine K8 characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K7, when the determination result by the first difference determining means satisfies the first condition, the forcible updating means notifies the small privilege game number informing means. By forcibly updating the number of small privilege games that are present, there is an effect that it is possible to set a period in which the player can execute the privilege game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine K7 or K8, the executed small privilege game number notification means for notifying the number of the small privilege games already executed, and the number of the small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means, When the difference between the number of small privilege games notified by the executed small privilege game number notification unit and the result of the determination by the second difference determination unit satisfy the second condition And a forced update means for updating the number of the small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means, and a gaming machine K9.

According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K7 or K8, when the determination result by the second difference determining means satisfies the second condition, the compulsory updating means notifies the small privilege game number notifying means. Since the number of small privilege games that have been performed is forcibly updated, it is possible to prevent the number of executed small privilege games from becoming larger than the number of small privilege games notified by the small privilege game number notification means. The effect is that you can.

In any of the gaming machines K5 to K9, the small privilege game number notification means determines the advance of the entrance information acquired by the acquisition means during a specific period of the period during which the privilege game is being executed. A gaming machine K10, which executes a specific small privilege game number notification when the result of the above is the predetermined preliminary determination result.

According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effect exhibited by any of the gaming machines K5 to K9, the entry information acquired within the specific period during the period during which the bonus game is being executed is the bonus game as a result of the preliminary determination. If the player has been won, the specific small privilege game number notification is executed by the small privilege game number notification means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the enjoyment of acquiring the entry information during the bonus game.

In any of the gaming machines K5 to K10, the number of the small privilege games stored in the executed number storage means and the number of the small privilege games notified by the executed small privilege game number notification means With the third difference determining means for determining a difference and one of the privilege games ended, if the determination result of the third difference determining means satisfies the third condition, the one privilege game ends. A gaming machine K11, characterized in that the gaming machine K11 has an effect continuation means for continuing the effect executed during the privilege game from the beginning until a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine K11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K5 to K10, if the determination result by the third difference determining means satisfies the third condition, it is executed during the bonus game by the effect continuation means. The effect is continuously displayed. As a result, in the case where it is determined by the pre-determination means that the privilege game is to be executed, it is possible to continuously display the effect to be executed during the privilege game after the first privilege game is finished. is there.

In the gaming machine K11, the specific condition is at least not satisfied until the next privilege game is executed, the gaming machine K12.

According to the gaming machine K12, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K11, the effect is continued during the privilege game during the period from the end of the first privilege game to the execution of the second privilege game by the effect continuation means. It is possible to surely execute the effect. Therefore, since a series of effects can be executed for a plurality of privilege games, it is possible to perform a game while expecting to execute more small privilege games while the effects are being executed. effective.

In any of the gaming machines K5 to K12, when the result of the determination by the determining means is a predetermined determination result, a storage number determination means for determining the number of the ball entry information stored in the storage means, And an effect mode storage unit that stores a plurality of effect modes executed during the privilege game, and is stored in the effect mode storage unit based on the number of the ball entering units determined by the storage number determination unit. A gaming machine K13 having a privilege game effect mode selecting means for selecting one effect mode from the plurality of effect modes.

According to the gaming machine K13, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines K5 to K12, in the case of a predetermined determination result, an effect mode during the bonus game based on the number of pieces of entry information stored in the storage means. Is selected, it is possible to provide the player with various effects during the bonus game. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine K13, the effect mode storage means, as the plurality of effect modes, that the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means is the predetermined pre-determination result when the privilege game is started. A game machine K14, which stores at least a first effect mode that can be notified to the player and a second effect mode that can be notified to the player after the bonus game is completed.

According to the gaming machine K14, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K13, it is informed that the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means is a predetermined pre-discrimination result due to the effect mode selected by the privilege game effect mode selection means. Since different timings can be used, the effect of production can be enhanced.

<Feature L group> (Change the production frequency in the game history)
There is a determination means for performing a determination when the determination condition is satisfied, a performance executing means for performing an effect for showing the determination result of the determination means, and an effect for showing the specific determination result by the effect executing means. Privilege giving means for giving a benefit to the player when executed, storage means for storing corresponding game information as history information when a specific condition is satisfied, and execution effect means A gaming machine L1 characterized by further comprising: a deciding means for deciding, based on the history information, whether or not to execute a particular effect.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine that executes a variable effect for a predetermined period of time to suggest to the player whether or not a win has been won. Then, as a fluctuating effect executed for a predetermined period, there is a gaming machine that executes an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed based on the operation result of the operation means that can be operated by the player. (For example, JP 2012-249877 A).

In such a conventional type gaming machine, the effect mode is changed based on the operation content of the player on the operation means, so that the player can enthusiastically participate in the game. However, if the operation effect is frequently executed for the player who does not enthusiastically operate the operation means, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is lowered.

According to the gaming machine L1, since the execution of the specific effect is determined based on the history information, the execution frequency of the specific effect can be changed according to the progress of the game, etc., and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine L1, there is a production selection table storage unit in which a plurality of production selection tables set so that the selection rates of the specific productions are different are set, and the determination unit is the production selection corresponding to the history information. A gaming machine L2 characterized by determining a table.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1, the selection rate of the specific effect can be switched by selecting the corresponding effect selection table, so that the selection rate of the specific effect can be changed with easy control. The effect is that you can.

The gaming machine L1 or L2 has operation means operated by a player, and operation determination means capable of determining that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. When the predetermined operation is determined by the operation determining means, an operation effect for changing the effect mode is set, and the specific condition is at least that the operation determining means determines the predetermined operation. A gaming machine L3, which is set under the condition of.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1 or L2, by operating the operation means in the operation effect, not only the effect mode is changed, but also the specific condition is easily established, so the history information Can be varied, and the effect of executing the specific effect can be influenced.

In any of the gaming machines L1 to L3, at least a storage means capable of storing the history information, a setting means capable of setting a storage value with a predetermined value as an upper limit based on a storage result by the storage means, and the setting means. Selection means for selecting a storage privilege system corresponding to the stored value to be set from a plurality of storage privilege systems, and storage privilege granting means for providing a storage privilege corresponding to the storage privilege system selected by the selection device. And the accumulated privilege granting unit grants a new accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated value privilege selected by the selecting unit, when the new accumulated value is set by the setting unit. The selection means is for selecting one accumulation privilege system from a plurality of accumulation privilege systems based on the history information stored in the storage device. F4.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the accumulated privilege system is selected based on the accumulated history information, and the accumulated privilege corresponding to the accumulated privilege system is given. As a result, both the setting of the frequency with which the specific effect is executed and the provision of the accumulated privilege are executed based on the history information. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine L4, the accumulated privilege given by the accumulated privilege giving means is different for each of the accumulated privilege systems selected by the selecting means.

According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L4, it is possible to change the accumulated privilege granted by the accumulated privilege system, so that various kinds of accumulated privilege can be enjoyed while changing the operation content of the operation means. Can be provided to the player. Furthermore, by changing the operation content of the operation means, it is possible to change the effect frequency as well, so that there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with new enjoyment for the effect to be executed.

In the gaming machine L5, the history information stored in the storage means is provided with history information erasing means capable of erasing the history information stored in the storage means up to a state in which the different accumulation privilege system can be selected by the selection means. A gaming machine L6.

According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L5, the history information can be erased to a state where different accumulation privilege systems can be selected. It is possible to easily select the accumulation privilege system. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the motivation to acquire another accumulated privilege.

In addition, since the history information erasing unit partially erases the history information, the accumulated value set by the setting unit is also changed (decreased), so that the accumulated value has a predetermined upper limit. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the situation where the value is reached and the effect of the production is deteriorated.

Any one of the gaming machines L4 to L6, having a guiding means for guiding a game content for selecting a specific accumulated privilege system by the selecting means, a gaming machine L7.

According to the gaming machine L7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines L4 to L6, a game is played based on the game content guided by the guide means, whereby a specific accumulated privilege system is selected. Therefore, various accumulated benefits can be given to the player, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine L7, the guiding means guides the game content for selecting a specific accumulated privilege system by changing the rendering mode of the operation rendering.

According to the gaming machine L8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L7, the effect mode of the operation effect is changed by the guide means, so that a different accumulation privilege system is selected only by operating the operation means in accordance with the effect mode of the operation effect. Will be done. Therefore, various benefits can be given to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine L8, the guide means, as the effect mode of the operation effect, either a notification effect mode in which the operation means is informed that the predetermined operation is to be performed or a non-notification effect mode in which the operation means is not informed. A gaming machine L9, characterized by being used to guide the contents of the game.

According to the gaming machine L9, as the operation effect, it is possible to execute an effect mode in which a predetermined operation is easily performed on the operation means and an effect mode in which a predetermined operation is difficult to be performed. Therefore, the operation means is operated according to the effect mode of the operation effect. Only by operating, a different accumulation privilege system will be selected. Therefore, various benefits can be given to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines L4 to L9, the game player has a system selecting means capable of selecting the specific accumulated privilege system corresponding to the game content guided by the guide means from the plurality of accumulated privilege systems. A gaming machine L10 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine L10, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines L4 to L9, it is possible to notify the player of the game content so that the player can select the accumulating privilege system desired, so that the effect is further enhanced. The effect is that you can.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C8, D1 to D6 and E1 to E8, F1 to F16, G1 to G10, H1 to H11, J1 to J11, K1 to K14, L1 to L10, The gaming machine K1 wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then fixedly displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It becomes a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the final identification information is specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C8, D1 to D6 and E1 to E8, F1 to F16, G1 to G10, H1 to H11, J1 to J11, K1 to K14, L1 to L10, The gaming machine K2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift sphere but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C8, D1 to D6 and E1 to E8, F1 to F16, G1 to G10, H1 to H11, J1 to J11, K1 to K14, L1 to L10, A gaming machine K3, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused game machine is "provided with a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Other>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a production (battle production) in which the player's character and an enemy character compete against each other is executed, and the result of whether or not a hit is won is notified by the value of each physical strength point at the end of the production. There is. In this conventional type gaming machine, since the winning result of the winning can be suggested by the effect, it is possible to make the player interested in the effect to be executed. As a result, the interest was improved (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-9075).
However, there is a demand for further interest.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the game machine of the technical idea 1 executes a variable effect for changing the effect value based on the judgment means for executing the judgment based on the effect information and the judgment result by the judgment means. Production execution means, first production value determination means for determining a first production value for varying the production value when the variable production is executed by the production execution means, and first production value determination thereof A second effect value determining means for determining a second effect value different from the first effect value capable of varying the effect value when the first effect value is determined by means. Is.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, in which the production is set by a production state setting means capable of setting a specific production state in which the variable production is continuously executed, and the production state setting means. When a production state is set, a production value updating unit that continuously variably updates the production value, and a first production value that can store the first production value determined by the first production value determining unit. The production value update means variably updates the production value based on the first production value stored in the first production value storage means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, and a production mode setting means for setting a production mode based on a variable amount of the production value which is variably updated by the production value updating means, and The production mode display means for displaying the production mode set by the production mode setting means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, in which the second effect value determined by the second effect value determining means is selected as a selectable range. Selection range storage means having one range or a second range different from the first range, and a determination for determining whether the first effect value determined by the first effect value determination means is a predetermined value or more Value determining means, wherein the second effect value determining means sets one selection range among the plurality of selection ranges stored in the selection range storing means based on the determination result of the determination value determining means. This is to select and determine the second effect value.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 4, wherein the selection range storage means stores a range in which the first effect value can be increased or decreased as the second effect value. It has a selection range and a second selection range in which a range in which the first effect value can be reduced is stored, and the second effect value determination means determines that the determination result of the determined value determination means is the When it is determined that the first effect value is less than the predetermined value, the second selection range is selected and the second effect value is set.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the determination means for performing the determination based on the performance information, and the variable performance executing means for executing the variable performance for varying the performance value based on the determination result by the determination means. A first effect value determining unit that determines a first effect value for varying the effect value when the variable effect executing unit executes the variable effect, and the first effect value determining unit determines the first effect value determining unit. When a first effect value is determined, a second effect value determination means for determining a second effect value different from the first effect value capable of varying the effect value is provided.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the specific effect state is set by the effect state setting means capable of setting the specific effect state in which the variable effect is continuously executed, and the effect state setting means sets the effect value continuously. The production value update means for variably updating, and the first production value storage means capable of storing the first production value determined by the first production value determination means, the production value updating means, The effect value is variably updated based on the first effect value stored in the first effect value storage means.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a production mode setting unit that sets a production mode based on the variable amount of the production value that is variably updated by the production value updating unit, and a production mode display unit that displays the production mode set by the production mode setting unit. And have.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effect is exhibited. That is, a selection range storage means having a first range or a second range different from the first range as a selection range in which the second effect value determined by the second effect value determination means can be selected, Determination value determining means for determining whether or not the first effect value determined by the first effect value determining means is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, and the second effect value determining means includes the determination value determining means. Based on the determination result of No. 1, one of the plurality of selection ranges stored in the selection range storage unit is selected to determine the second effect value.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the selection range storage means stores, as the second effect value, a first selection range in which a range in which the first effect value can be increased and decreased and a range in which the first effect value can be decreased are stored. And the second effect value determination means determines that the determination result of the determination value determination means determines that the first effect value is less than a predetermined value. The second selection range is selected to set the second effect value.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
S305 First discriminating means
S352 Second discriminating means
S353 probability setting means
S1104 privilege game execution means
S1212 game state setting means
S3806 effect execution means

Claims (1)

First discriminating means capable of executing the first discrimination when a predetermined discrimination condition is satisfied;
A privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game when the result of the first determination by the first determining means is a predetermined first determination result,
The high-probability state in which the result of the first determination by the first determination means tends to be the predetermined first determination result, and the result of the first determination by the first determination means is higher than the predetermined high-probability state. Probability setting means capable of setting a low probability state in which the first determination result is unlikely,
A game state setting means capable of setting a first game state in which the predetermined determination condition is easily established and a second game state in which the predetermined determination condition is less likely to be established than the first game state,
In a gaming machine having an effect producing means capable of executing an informing effect for informing that the first gaming state is set by the game state setting means,
A second discriminating means capable of executing the second discrimination when a predetermined second discrimination condition is satisfied;
The probability setting means can set the low probability state when the result of the second determination by the second determining means is a predetermined second determination result,
The gaming machine is
When the result of the first determination is the specific first determination result which is a part of the predetermined first determination result, the bonus game is finished more than when it is the other predetermined first determination result. Later, the first determination is easily performed in the high probability state,
It is possible to make the length of the high probability state set after the end of the privilege game executed in the case of the specific first determination result based on the determination result of the second determination means,
The game state setting means can set the second game state when a first condition and a second condition different from the first condition are satisfied in a state where the first game state is set. And
The first condition can be satisfied when the low probability state is set,
The second condition can be established based on the first determination being executed in the state where the first game state is set,
The effect execution means is capable of executing the notification effect in an effect mode according to remaining information until the second condition is satisfied in a state where the first condition is satisfied,
A game machine characterized in that the length of a period from the satisfaction of the first condition to the satisfaction of the second condition can be determined at least according to the timing of the satisfaction of the first condition .